USSR STATE COMMITTEE FOR
SUPERVISION OVER SAFE WORK PRACTICES
IN THE NUCLEAR POWER INDUSTRY
(USSR GOSATOMENERGONADZOR)

RULES AND REGULATIONS IN THE NUCLEAR POWER INDUSTRY

Approved by

The USSR State Committee for Atomic Energy Use

Approved by

The USSR State Committee for Supervision over Safe Work Practices in the Nuclear Power Industry (USSR Gosatomenergonadzor)

RULES OF EQUIPMENT AND
PIPELINES STRENGTH CALCULATION OF
NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS

PNAE G-7-002-86

Mandatory for all ministries, administrations, organizations and enterprises designing, constructing, manufacturing and operating nuclear power plants, heating plants, experimental and research nuclear reactors and installations controlled by the USSR Gosatomenergonadzor

Effective from July 1, 1987 with amendments

MOSCOW ENERGOATOMIZDAT 1989

The regulations contain the main part and recommended appendices. The main (mandatory) part contains: calculation for selection of basic dimensions; calculation of static strength, resistance, cyclic strength, brittle fracture resistance, long-term static strength, long-term cyclic strength, progressive form change, seismic impacts, vibration strength; methods for determining mechanical properties and tests to determine the strength characteristics.

CONTENTS

1. General

1.1. Scope of the Regulations

1.2. Principles Underlying the Regulations

2. Basic Definitions

3. Permissible Stresses and Strength and Stability Conditions

4. Calculation for Selection of Basic Dimensions

4.1. General

4.2. Determination of Wall Thickness of the Components of Equipment and Pipelines

4.3. Strength Reduction Coefficients and Strengthening of Holes

4.4. Flanges, Pressure Rings, and Fasteners

5. Checking Calculation

5.1. General

5.2. Classification of Stresses

5.3. Stress Calculation Procedure

5.4. Calculation for Static Strength

5.5. Calculation for Stability

5.6. Calculation for Cyclic Strength

5.7. Calculation for Long-Term Cyclic Strength

5.8. Calculation for Resistance to Brittle Fracture

Appendix 1 Physical and Mechanical Properties of Structural Materials

Appendix 2 Methods for Determining Mechanical Properties of Structural Materials

1. Additional Concepts and Definitions

2. Tension Test Methods

3. Creep Test Methods

4. Long-Term Strength Test Methods

5. Method for Determining Critical Brittle Temperature

6. Procedure for Determining Critical Brittle Temperature Shift due to Thermal Ageing

7. Procedure for Determining Critical Brittle Temperature Shift due to Fatigue Damage Accumulation

8. Procedure for Determining Critical Brittle Temperature Shift due to Effects of Exposure and Radiation Embrittlement Coefficient

9. Fatigue Test Methods

10. Methods for Process Tests of Metals

11. Welded Joints. Methods for Determining Mechanical Properties

Appendix 3 Unified Methods for Design and Experimental Determination of Stresses, Deformations, Displacements, and Forces

1. Basic Provisions

2. Calculation of Stresses, Displacements and Forces in Axisymmetric Structures of Thin-Walled Shells, Plates and Rings under Axisymmetric Loading

3. Calculation of Stresses and Displacements in Axisymmetric Thick-Walled Components of Structures

4. Calculation of Local Stresses in Components of Structures

5. Experimental Determination of Stress and Displacement Deformations

Appendix 4 Calculation of Components of Structures for Progressive Form Change

1. General

2. Definitions. Rated Stresses

3. Limit Stresses

4. Additional Conventional Symbols

5. Sequence of Calculation for Progressive Form Change in the Absence of Irradiation Growth

6. Example of Calculation of Cylindrical Shell

7. Adaptability Diagrams for Some Standard Design Models

8. Method for Determining the Value of Irreversible Form Change under Neutron Exposure Conditions

9. Example of Calculating Upper and Lower Estimations of Limit Cycle Parameters

Appendix 5 Calculation of Standard Assemblies of Parts and Structures

1. Basic Provisions

2. Pipelines

3. Detachable Connections of Vessels

Appendix 6 Characteristics of Long-Term Strength, Ductility and Creep of Structural Materials

1. Basic Concepts and Symbols

2. General

3. Extrapolation Method for Long-Term Strength

4. Extrapolation Method for Conditional Limits of Creep

5. Extrapolation Method for Conditional Limits of Stress Rupture Ductility

Appendix 7 Calculation for Long-Term Cyclic Strength

Appendix 8 Design and Experimental Methods for Assessment of Vibration Strength of Standard Components of Structures

1. General

2. Calculation of Natural Oscillation Frequency of Bar Systems

3. Calculation of Natural Oscillation Frequency of Isotropic Rectangular Plates

4. Calculation of Natural Oscillation Frequency of Shallow Rectangular Shell

5. Experimental Methods for Vibration Research

6. Recommended Methods for Assessment of Vibration Strength of Components of Structures

Appendix 9 Calculation for Seismic Impacts

1. Generalized Response Spectra

2. Unified Methods for Calculating Equipment and Pipelines for Strength from Seismic Impacts

3. Procedures for Calculating Pipelines for Seismic Impacts

Appendix 10

Selection of Basic Sizes of Flanges, Pressure Rings, and Fasteners

1. Conventional Symbols

2. Selection of Sealing

3. Determination of Forces in Pins

4. Determination of Sizes of Flange Connections

5. Moments of Deflection

6. Flange Face Height

Appendix 11 Recommendations for Determining the Process Increase to the Elbow Wall Thickness

Appendix 12 Simplified Cyclic Strength Calculation

1. Basic Provisions

2. Determination of Change of Temperatures, Stresses, and Number of Operating Cycles

3. Verification of Cyclic Strength

Basic Conventional Symbols

Da – nominal outer diameter of cylindrical part of a body, head or pipeline, mm

D – nominal inner diameter of cylindrical part of a body, lid, head or pipeline, mm

Dm – mean diameter of cylindrical part of a body, lid, head or pipeline, mm

DR – design diameter of round flat head or lid, mm

Dn – outer diameter of a cover plate, mm

Rs – radius of elbow axis, mm

R – inner radius of convex head, mm

d – hole diameter, mm

dR – design hole diameter, mm

d0 – maximum permissible diameter of non-strengthened hole, mm

dac – outer diameter of a nozzle, mm

d01, d02 – major and minor axis of oval hole, mm

s – nominal wall thickness, mm

sR – design wall thickness, mm

s0 – minimum design wall thickness, mm

sf – actual wall thickness, mm

sc – nozzle wall thickness, mm

sn – cover plate thickness, mm

c – total increase in wall thickness, mm

c11 – increase in wall thickness equal to negative allowance, mm

c12 – increase in wall thickness compensating for possible thinning of the semi-finished product during manufacturing, mm

c2 – increase in wall thickness considering wall thinning due to all types of corrosion during service life of a product, mm

H – height of convex part of a head to the inner surface, mm

Hm – height of convex part of a head to the middle surface, mm

As – sectional area of a component of structure, mm

L – design length of shell, mm

Lkr – critical length of shell, mm

φ – design strength reduction coefficient

φd – coefficient of strength reduction of shells or heads with a non-strengthened hole

φc – coefficient of strength reduction of shells or heads with a strengthened hole

φw – coefficient of strength reduction of a weld seam

φ0 – minimum permissible strength reduction coefficient

p – design pressure, MPa (kgf/mm2)

pa – external pressure, MPa (kgf/mm2)

pkr – critical pressure, MPa (kgf/mm2)

F – compressive force, N (kgf)

[pa] – permissible external pressure, MPa (kgf/mm2)

[F] – permissible compressive force, N (kgf)

T – design temperature, K (°C)

Tt – temperature above which the parameters of long-term strength, ductility, and creep shall be taken into account, K (°C)

Tk – critical brittle temperature, K (°C)

Tk0 – material critical brittle temperature in the initial state, K (°C)

Th – hydraulic (pneumatic) test temperature, K (°C)

∆TT – critical brittle temperature shift due to temperature ageing, K (°C)

∆TN – critical brittle temperature shift due to cyclic damaging, K (°C)

∆TF – critical brittle temperature shift due to neutron exposure, K (°C)

σ - stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σm – general membrane stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σmL – local membrane stresses, MPa (kgf/mm)

σb – general bending stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σbL – local bending stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σT – general temperature stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σTL – local temperature stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σc – compensation stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σcm – tension or compression compensation stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σcb – bending compensation stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

τcs – torsional compensation stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σmw – mean tension stresses over the cross-section of a bolt or pin, MPa (kgf/mm2)

τsw – torsional stresses in bolts or pins, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σ1, σ2, σ3 – main stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σkr – critical compression stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σc – compression stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

(σ)1, (σ)2, (σ)3w, (σ)4w, (σs)1, (σs)2, (σs)3w, (σs)4w – groups of reduction of stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

(σ)RV – range of reduced stresses in equipment components, MPa (kgf/mm2)

(σ)RK – range of reduced stresses in pipeline components, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σi, σj, σk – stresses at main sites i, j, k, MPa (kgf/mm2)

(σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik, (σ) – reduced stresses without concentration, MPa (kgf/mm2)

L)ij, (σL)jk, (σL)ik, (σL)

– local reduced stresses calculated with due regard to the theoretical stress concentration coefficient, MPa (kgf/mm2)

F)ij, (σF)jk, (σF)ik, (σF)

– local conditional elastic reduced stresses calculated with due regard to the conditional elastic stress concentration coefficient, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σa – stress amplitude without concentration, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σaF – local stress amplitude with due regard to concentration, MPa (kgf/mm2)

a) – reduced stress amplitude without concentration, MPa (kgf/mm2)

aF) – amplitude of conditional elastic reduced stresses with due regard to the concentration coefficient of conditional elastic stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

aF)V – amplitude of reduced stresses in equipment components, MPa (kgf/mm2);

aF)K – amplitude of reduced stresses in pipeline components, MPa (kgf/mm2)

aF)W – amplitude of reduced stresses in bolts or pins, MPa (kgf/mm2)

aL) – amplitude of reduced stresses with due regard to the theoretical concentration coefficient, MPa (kgf/mm2)

F)max – maximum reduced conditional elastic stress of a cycle with due regard to the concentration coefficient of conditional elastic stresses, MPa (kgf/mm2)

a> – vibration stress amplitude, MPa (kgf/mm2)

[σ] – nominal permissible stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

[σ]Th – nominal permissible stress at hydrotest temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

c] – permissible compression stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RTm – minimum value of ultimate resistance at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RTp0.2 – minimum value of yield limit at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RThp0.2  – minimum value of yield limit at hydrotest temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RT-1 – endurance limit with symmetric axial tension-compression cycle at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

t – time, h

RTmt – minimum limit of long-term durability over time t at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RTct – creep limit at design temperature at which deformation with due regard to the creep reaches a predetermined value over time t, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RTpe – proportionality limit at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

AT5 – relative elongation of a fivefold sample at static fracture under tension at design temperature, %

ZT – relative reduction of a sample cross-section at static fracture under tension at design temperature, %

αT – coefficient of linear expansion at design temperature, 1/K (1/°C)

ET – modulus of elasticity at design temperature, MPa (kgf/mm2)

μ – Poisson ratio

N – number of load cycles of a component of structure in operation

N0 – number of load cycles before cracking in structure

f0 – load rate, Hz

f – rate of high-frequency stress cycles, Hz

r – stress cycle asymmetry coefficient

v – deformation curve work-hardening exponent

Kσ – theoretical stress concentration coefficient

K(σ) – theoretical reduced stress concentration coefficient

Kef – effective concentration coefficient of conditional elastic stresses

a – accumulated fatigue damage

e – deformation, %

Fn –  transfer of neutrons with energy of more than 0.5 MeV, n/m2

AF – radiation embrittlement coefficient, K (°C)

KI – stress intensity coefficient, MPa · m1/2 (kgf/mm3/2)

KIc – critical stress intensity coefficient, MPa · m1/2 (kgf/mm3/2)

n0.2 – yield limit safety coefficient

nm – ultimate resistance safety coefficient

nmt – safety coefficient for long-term strength limit

nσ – safety coefficient for conditional local stresses in calculations for cyclic strength

nN – safety coefficient for number of cycles in calculations for cyclic strength

SNR – State Nuclear Regulations

NPI – Nuclear Power Installation

NO – Normal Operation

AO – Abnormal Operation

NPI Rules – "Rules of design and safe operation of equipment and pipelines of nuclear power installations"

1. GENERAL

1.1. SCOPE OF THE REGULATIONS

1.1.1. These "Rules of equipment and pipelines strength calculation of nuclear power plants" (hereinafter referred to as the Rules) shall be applied to assess the strength of equipment and pipelines of nuclear power plants (NPP), nuclear heat generation plants (NHGP), nuclear heating plants (NHP), industrial heating nuclear power plants (IHNPP) and installations with research or development reactors with a coolant temperature of not exceeding 873 K (600 °C).

1.1.2. The Rules apply to equipment and pipelines the design, manufacture, installation and operation of which are carried out in full accordance with the NPI Rules.

1.1.3. The company or organization which performed a relevant calculation shall be responsible for the correct application of these regulations.

1.2. PRINCIPLES UNDERLYING THE REGULATIONS

1.2.1. Calculation methods adopted in the Regulations are based on the principles of assessment for the following limiting states:

1) short-term fracture (ductile and brittle);

2) creep fracture under static load;

3) plastic deformation across the entire part cross-section;

4) accumulation of the maximum permissible creep deformation;

5) cyclic accumulation of plastic deformations leading to unacceptable change of dimensions or quasistatic fracture;

6) occurrence of macrocracks under cyclic loads;

7) buckling failure.

At temperatures which do not cause creep of the material of structure, the calculation for the specified limiting states is carried out using short-term characteristics of time independent strength, ductility, and deformation resistance of the material. An exception is the consideration of deformation ageing and exposure when calculating the resistance to brittle fracture and to occurrence of macrocracks under cyclic load. If equipment and pipelines are operated at temperatures which cause creep of the material, the calculation is carried out according to the specified limiting states using the characteristics of short-term and long-term strength, short-term and long-term ductility, and creep.

1.2.2. During the design, strength of equipment and pipelines is calculated in two stages:

1) calculation for selection of basic dimensions;

2) checking calculation.

When assessing the strength of equipment and pipelines, both the requirements of calculation for selection of basic dimensions and the requirements of checking calculation shall be fully satisfied.

1.2.3. When performing calculations for selection of basic dimensions, the (internal and external) pressure applied to equipment and pipelines is taken into account, and for bolts and pins the tightening force is taken into account.

1.2.4. The main characteristics of the materials used in determining the values of permissible stresses are assumed to be temporary resistance, yield limit, rupture strength, and creep limit (with limited deformation).

Permissible stresses are set according to the specified characteristics by introducing appropriate safety coefficients.

1.2.5. The basis of the formulas used in calculation for selection of basic dimensions is the method of limit loads corresponding to the following limit states: ductile fracture, plastic deformation spread over the entire cross-section of equipment or pipeline, loss of stability, and achievement of limit deformation.

1.2.6. After calculation for selection of basic dimensions, a checking calculation is carried out, including the necessary sections from the following list:

1) calculation for static strength;

2) calculation for stability;

3) calculation for cyclic and long-term cyclic strength;

4) calculation for resistance to brittle fracture;

5) calculation for long-term static strength;

6) calculation for progressive form change;

7) calculation for seismic impacts;

8) calculation for vibration strength.

Checking calculation is based on the assessment of the strength according to the permissible stresses, deformations, and stress intensity coefficients.

1.2.7. During checking calculation all acting loads (including temperature impacts) are taken into account and all modes of operation are considered.

1.2.8. Checking calculation for static strength is carried out for determination of stresses at all values of loads and temperatures in all design specified installation operation modes and for comparison of the obtained values with those permissible determined by the limit states indicated in subitems 1) and 3) of item 1.2.1.

1.2.9. Checking calculation for stability consists in determining permissible loads or permissible operation life exceeding of which entails possibility of loss of stability during loading by external pressure and compressive loads [see 7), item 1.2.1].

1.2.10. Checking calculation for strength at cyclic and long-term cyclic loading is carried out based on the analysis of general and local stress to exclude the occurrence of cracks [see 6), item 1.2.1].

Permissible stress amplitudes are determined based on the characteristics of cyclic or long-term cyclic strength with introduction of safety coefficients in durability and stresses.

As a result of calculation for strength under cyclic or long-term cyclic loading, the permissible number of repetitions of operation modes for specified repeated operational thermal and mechanical loads, temperatures, and operation life, or permissible thermal and mechanical loads for a specified number of repetitions of operation modes and operation life are determined.

1.2.11. Checking calculation for resistance to brittle fracture is carried out based on comparison of stress intensity coefficient with its critical value in order to exclude the possibility of brittle fracture [see 1), item 1.2.1].

1.2.12. Long-term static strength is calculated on the basis of a comparison of the effective stresses in all modes allowed to prevent the fracture of equipment or pipelines during long-term static loading [see 2) and 4), item 1.2.1].

Permissible stresses are determined on the basis of the characteristics of resistance to long-term static fracture, depending on the temperature and duration of loading, with the introduction of stress safety coefficients.

As a result of calculation, the permissible loads for specified modes and operation life or permissible operation life for specified operation modes are determined.

1.2.13. Checking calculation for progressive form change is carried out based on stress condition analysis in order to exclude unacceptable residual changes in shape and size [see 5), item 1.2.1].

Permissible limit changes in shape and size as a result of process of accumulation of irreversible plastic deformations are specified by the design (engineering) organization in each particular case with due regard to intended use and operation conditions of equipment and pipelines.

As a result of calculation, the permissible loads for specified modes and operation life or permissible operation life for specified operation modes are determined.

1.2.14. Checking calculation of equipment and pipelines for seismic impacts is carried out with due regard to combined action of operational and seismic loads.

Strength of equipment and pipelines is assessed by permissible stresses, by permissible displacements, by the criteria of cyclic strength and stability (the latter is only for equipment).

1.2.15. Reduced stresses to be compared with the permissible are determined in accordance with the maximum shear stress theory with the exception of calculation of resistance to brittle fracture when the reduced stresses are determined in accordance with the maximum normal stress theory.

1.2.16. Calculation of stresses, without taking into account concentration, is carried out in the assumption of a linearly elastic behavior of the material, unless otherwise indicated. In assessing the cyclic strength beyond the elastic limit, a stress called conditional elastic stress is used. This stress is equal to the product of the elastic-plastic deformation at the point under consideration and the modulus of elasticity.

1.2.17. When performing calculations for selection of basic dimensions, the increase of ultimate strength and yield limit under irradiation is not taken into account. Decrease in characteristics of ductility and resistance to brittle, fatigue, long-term static fracture and creep due to the effect of exposure are taken into account when carrying out appropriate calculations using these characteristics.

1.2.18. If necessary, the checking calculation shall take into account the influence of working media on the change in strength characteristics based on representative experimental data.

2. BASIC DEFINITIONS

2.1. Design pressure is the maximum overpressure in the equipment or pipeline used in the calculation for selection of basic dimensions at which the operation of this equipment or pipeline is allowed under the NO.

For safety bodies of equipment and pipelines and for containments, the design pressure is understood as the maximum overpressure which occurs in these bodies or containments in case of depressurization of the protected equipment or pipelines.

In case the component of structure is simultaneously loaded with internal and external pressures, the difference in these pressures, at which the design wall thickness is maximal, is assumed as the design pressure.

2.2. Design temperature is the temperature of the equipment or pipeline wall equal to the maximum arithmetic mean value of temperature on its outer and inner surfaces in the same cross-section under the NO (for the parts of nuclear reactor vessels, the design temperature is determined with due regard to the internal heat release as the arithmetic mean value of temperature distribution over the thickness of the vessel wall).

2.3. Hydraulic or pneumatic testing is test loading of equipment or pipelines with internal or external pressure in order to verify their integrity after manufacture, installation, certain lifecycle or repair.

The pressure value of the hydraulic or pneumatic testing is determined in accordance with the NPI Rules.

2.4. Tightening of pins is loading of components of equipment or pipelines caused by tightening of pins or bolts.

2.5. Start-up is an operating mode, in the process of which external loads and temperatures vary from initial values to values corresponding to the steady-state mode. During start-up, the temperature and external loads may exceed the values corresponding to the steady-state mode.

2.6. Steady-state mode is an operating mode in which external loads and temperature remain constant within ±5 % of nominal values.

2.7. Operation of the emergency protection system is an operating mode in which, due to the operation of the emergency protection system for reasons not related to AO and occurrence of the emergencies, there is a change in temperatures and external loads (towards both increasing and decreasing) from their values in the steady-state mode, start-up, or shutdown, to the corresponding intermediate values (in the particular case to atmospheric pressure and temperature).

2.8. Reactor power change is an operating mode in which a transition occurs from one steady-state mode of reactor operation to another (with the exemption of the start-up and shutdown modes).

2.9. Shutdown is an operating mode in which the temperature and external loads change from the values of parameters of any operating mode to the initial values of parameters during the start-up mode.

2.10. See the definition of the NO mode in Appendix 1 to the NPI Rules.

2.11. See the definition of the AO mode in Appendix 1 to the NPI Rules.

2.12. See the definition of the emergency situation in Appendix 1 to the NPI Rules.

2.13. Cycle of stress change is a change in stress from the initial value with the transition through the maximum and minimum algebraic values to the initial one.

2.14. A half-cycle of stress change is a change in stress from the maximum (minimum) value to the minimum (maximum) value in the cycle under consideration.

2.15. Stress range is the difference between the maximum and minimum stresses in the process of one cycle of stress change.

2.16. Maximum (minimum) cycle stress is the maximum (minimum) algebraic value of stresses for one cycle of their change.

2.17. Life cycle is the total time of steady-state and transient operating modes, including AO and emergencies.

2.18. σm - general membrane stresses caused by mechanical loads normal to the cross-section in question distributed over the cross-section and equal to the mean value of the stress in this cross-section.

2.19. σmL – local membrane stresses caused by mechanical loads. Membrane stresses are classified as local if the dimensions of the area within which the stresses exceed 1.1 [σ] do not exceed , and this area is located no closer than  to another area where the stresses exceed [σ].

2.20. σb – general bending stresses caused by action of pressure and mechanical loads varying from the maximum positive value to the minimum negative value over the entire cross-section and leading to bending of the vessel body or whole pipeline.

2.21. σbL – local bending stress caused by edge forces and momentum of mechanical loads.

2.22. σT – general temperature stresses caused by non-equilibrium distribution of temperature within the component volume or due to the difference in the material linear expansion coefficients, in the limiting case leading to unacceptable residual changes in shape and size of the structure.

2.23. σTL – local temperature stresses caused by non-equilibrium distribution of temperature within the component volume or due to the difference in the material linear expansion coefficients, which can not cause unacceptable residual changes in shape and size of the structure.

2.24. σc – compensation stresses caused by congestion of free expansion of pipelines or tubes. These stresses include stresses of tension or compression σcm, bending σcb, torsion τcs.

2.25. σmw – mean tension stresses over the cross-section of a bolt or pin caused by mechanical loads (with or without due regard to tightening).

2.26. τsw – torsional stresses in bolts and pins.

2.27. (σ)1 – group of reduced stresses, determined by the components of general membrane stresses.

2.28. (σ)2 – group of reduced stresses, determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane and general bending stresses.

2.29. (σ)3w – group of reduced stresses determined as a sum of mean tension stresses over the cross-section of a bolt or pin caused by mechanical loads, including tightening force, and by thermal impacts.

2.30. (σ)4w – group of reduced stresses from mechanical and thermal impacts, including tightening force determined by the components of tension, bending and torsional stresses in bolts and pins.

2.31. (σs)1 – group of reduced stresses from mechanical loads and seismic impacts, determined by the components of the general membrane stresses.

2.32. (σs)2 – group of reduced stresses from mechanical loads and seismic impacts, determined by the components of membrane and general bending stresses.

2.33. (σs)mw – group of reduced stresses, determined by sums of mean tension stresses over the cross-section of a bolt or pin caused by mechanical loads and seismic impacts.

2.34. (σs)4w – group of reduced stresses from mechanical loads, thermal and seismic impacts determined by the components of tension, bending and torsional stresses in bolts or pins.

2.35. (σ)RV – the maximum range of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general temperature stresses and compensation stresses in the equipment.

2.36. (σ)RK – the maximum range of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general temperature stresses and compensation stresses in the pipelines.

2.37. (σaF)V – amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general and local temperature stresses and compensation stresses with due regard to stress concentration in the equipment.

2.38. (σaF)K – amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general and local temperature stresses and compensation stresses with due regard to stress concentration in the pipelines.

2.39. (σaF)W – amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of mean stresses over the cross-section of a bolt or pin caused by mechanical and thermal impacts, bending stresses, torsional and temperature stresses with due regard to stress concentration.

3. PERMISSIBLE STRESSES AND STRENGTH AND STABILITY CONDITIONS

3.1. Nominal permissible stresses are determined based on characteristics of material at the design temperature.

3.2. Nominal permissible stresses for components with design temperature equal to or lower than Tt are calculated by the yield limit and temporary resistance.

For components with design temperature above the temperature Tt, the nominal permissible stresses are calculated by the yield limit, temporary resistance and long-term strength.

3.3. Temperature Tt is:

1) for aluminum and titanium alloys 293 K (20 °C);

2) for zirconium alloys 523 K (250 °C);

3) for carbon, alloyed, silicon-manganese and high-chromium steels 623 K (350 °C);

4) for corrosion-resistant steels of austenitic class, heat-resistant chrome-molybdenum-vanadium steels and iron-nickel alloys 723 K (450 °C).

3.4. Nominal permissible stress for the components of equipment and pipelines loaded with pressure is assumed to be the minimum of the following values:

[σ] = min{RmT/nm; RTp0.2/n0.2; RTmt/nmt}.

For components of equipment and pipelines loaded with internal pressure,

nm = 2.6; n0.2 = 1.5; nmt = 1.5.

For components of equipment and pipelines loaded with external pressure exceeding the internal pressure,

nm = 2.6; n0.2 = 2; nmt = 2.

Final check for stability and adjustment (if necessary) of the wall thicknesses, specified as per this section, loaded with external pressure exceeding internal pressure shall be carried out in accordance with Section 5.5.

3.5. Nominal permissible stress in bolts or pins caused by pressure and tightening forces is determined as

[σ]w = RTp0.2/n0.2,

where n0.2 = 2.

Additionally, in bolts and pins the temperature of which exceeds temperature Tt as per Section 3.2, the nominal permissible stresses are set from pressure as follows

[σ]wt = RTmt/nTmt,

where nmt = 3.

3.6. For bodies of safety shells and containments, nominal permissible stresses are as follows

[σ]c = min{RmT/nm; RTp0.2/n0.2},

where nm = 1.85; n0.2 = 1.07.

3.7. When determining nominal permissible stresses, the values of short- and long-term mechanical characteristics are assumed in accordance with state or industry standards (GOST or OST) or technical specifications (TU). In the absence of the necessary data in these documents, one should be guided by the data given in Table P1.1 or P1.4.

3.8. At temperatures higher than Tt, for a given limitation of the creep deformation, the components are calculated by creep limit RTct. In the absence of information on creep limits in GOST, OST, or TU, their determination by the isochronic curves given for a number of materials in Appendix 6 is allowed.

Safety coefficient of creep limit RTct is assumed to be equal to one.

3.9. At temperatures above Tt in those cases when the operation of the structure includes two or more loading modes that differ in temperature or load, the main dimensions shall satisfy the strength condition for accumulated long-term static damage

where ti is the duration of the i-th loading mode operation;

[t]i is the permissible loading time corresponding to the limit of long-term strength RTmt = nmtσi (values of RTmt may be accepted as per Table 4 of Appendix 1); σi is the stress of the i-th mode.

3.10. For steel castings the required data for which are not available in state or industry standards, in technical specifications or in Table 1 of Appendix 1, yield limit and ultimate resistance values are assumed to be equal to: 85% of the value given in Table 1 for the same rolled or forged steel grade if the castings are subjected to 100% ultrasonic or radiographic control; 75% of the above values for other castings.

3.11. Upon contact of components of structures with reactor-grade sodium, calculations use design values of mechanical characteristics, determined by multiplying the values of RmT, RTp0.2, RTmt, RTct by the reduction coefficient ηt, depending on the type of material, temperature and duration of operation.

When performing a calculation for selection of basic dimensions and carrying out a checking calculation for pearlite steels, the reduction coefficient is determined by the formula

ηt = 1 - 0.15hc/sR,

where hc is the thickness of surface layer of steel, decarbonized by 30%.

The value of hc is determined according to the specifications of the product. For steels grades 12Kh2M, 12Kh2M1FB, it is allowed to determine hc in the order indicated below.

The upper graph of Fig. 3.1 or 3.2 determines the point corresponding to the specified design temperature T and operation time t, the vertical from this point at the intersection with the curve of the lower graph determines the point and the corresponding value of hc on the vertical axis of this graph horizontally from the resulting point. Another way is to calculate x according to formulas shown in Fig. 3.1 or 3.2 and to define the values of hc according to x, using only the lower graph.

Fig. 3.1. Diagram of 12Kh2M steel decarburization in liquid sodium, x = 7000/T = lgt (T in K)

Fig. 3.2. Diagram of 12Kh2M1FB steel decarburization in liquid sodium,
x = 8650/T = lgt (T in K)

When performing a calculation for selection of basic dimensions and checking calculation of parts with a wall thickness of more than 1 mm and time of operation of not more than 2 · 105 h, the following is assumed:

for corrosion-resistant austenitic steels with a nickel content of up to 15% at T ≤ 823 K (550 °C) ηt = 1 and at 823 K (550 °C) < T ≤ 973 K (700 °C) ηt = 0.9;

for iron-nickel alloys at T ≤ 873 K (600 °C) ηt = 0.9 and at 873 K (600 °C) < T ≤ 973 K (700 °C) ηt = 0.8.

4. CALCULATION FOR SELECTION OF BASIC DIMENSIONS

4.1. GENERAL

4.1.1. When performing a calculation for selection of basic dimensions, the design loads are the design pressure and tightening forces for bolts and pins. When calculating the flanges, pressure rings, and their fasteners, the hydrotest pressure is  taken into account.

4.1.2. When determining the design wall thickness, the thickness of the anti-corrosion deposited or clad protective layer is not taken into account.

4.1.3. The total increase in the design thickness of the component of structure is defined as

c = c1 + c2, where c1 = c11 + c12.

4.1.4. The increase c2 takes into account the corrosive influence of working medium on the material of the components of structure under operation conditions. The values of this increase are determined by Table 4.1.

In cases not listed in Table 4.1, the value of increase c2 is set by the design (engineering) organization, with due regard to the corrosion rate and operation time.

In case of bilateral contact with a corrosive medium, the increase of c2 is assumed as total.

4.1.5. The increase of c11 is determined according to the design documentation and is assumed to be equal to the negative tolerance for the wall thickness.

4.1.6. The increase of c12 is a process one, designed to compensate for the possible thinning of the semi-finished product during manufacture. The value of this increase is set by the design (engineering) organization in agreement with the manufacturer and shall be indicated in the detailed design. The increase of c12 when calculating elbows is allowed to be determined according to Appendix 11.

4.1.7. If necessary, perform the calculation of the finished product using the actual wall thickness of sfc2.

Wall thickness (sfc2) for cylindrical and conical components of structures is assumed to be equal to the mean value of four wall thickness measurements at the ends of two mutually perpendicular diameters in one section at a number of checked sections of at least one for every 2 m of length. For round flat heads and lids, measurements are carried out in the center and at four points along the circumference in two mutually perpendicular directions, and the mean value is assumed to be equal to sfc2.

For elliptical and hemispherical components of structures, measurements are performed in the center and at four points along the ends of two largest mutually perpendicular diameters, and the mean value is assumed to be equal to sf.


 

Table 4.1. Value of increase c2

Material and its welded joints

Operating conditions of material in steady-state mode

Increase c2, mm, for 30 years of operation

Corrosion-resistant alloys of austenitic class

Water and steam-water mixture, saturated steam up to 623 K (350 °C)

0.1

Pearlite steels

Water, 313 to 433 K (40 to 160 °°C)

0.3

Water, 433 to 543 K (160 to 270 °C)

1.2

Water, up to 623 K (350 °C), pH = 8 ÷ 10

1.0

Saturated steam up to 573 K (300 °C)

1.0

Superheated steam

0.5

High chrome steels

Water and saturated steam up to 558 K (285 °C)

0.1

Zirconium alloys

Water and steam-water mixture up to 558 K (285 °C), reactor medium (mixture of helium with nitrogen, up to 1% moisture by weight)

0.1

If the component has local thinning that occurs during manufacture (stamping of heads, pipe bending, etc.) or due to corrosion, then the actual wall thickness is set depending on the location and size of the thinned section.

4.1.8. For components not listed in Section 4, or if the limit of applicability of the above formulas is violated, the selection of basic dimensions is carried out according to the methods which shall be agreed with the organization determined by the USSR Gosatomenergonadzor on case by case basis.

4.2. DETERMINATION OF WALL THICKNESS OF THE COMPONENTS OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPELINES

4.2.1. Cylindrical, conical shells of vessels and convex heads operating under internal or external pressure.

4.2.1.1. The design wall thickness is determined by the formula

Values of coefficients m1, m2, m3 and limits of applicability of the formulas are given in Table 4.2.


 

Table 4.2. Values of coefficients m1, m2, m3 and limits of applicability of formulas

Value

Cylindrical shell
(Fig. 4.1)

Conical shell
(Fig. 4.2)

Elliptical or torospheric head (Fig. 4.3)

Hemispherical head
(Fig. 4.4)

m1

2

2

4

4

m2

1

cos α

1

1

m3

1

1

D/(2H)

1

Limits of applicability

 α ≤ 45°;

Fig. 4.1. Cylindrical shell

Fig. 4.2. Conical shell

Fig. 4.3. Elliptical or torospheric head

Fig. 4.4. Hemispherical head

4.2.1.2. The assumed nominal wall thickness shall satisfy the condition

ssR + c.

4.2.1.3. Permissible pressure during design and after manufacture of vessels is determined by the formulas:

during design

after manufacture

4.2.2. Cylindrical headers, nozzles, pipes, and elbows.

4.2.2.1. The design wall thickness of a cylindrical header, nozzle, and pipe is determined by the formula

This formula applies to (s - c)/Da ≤ 0.25.

4.2.2.2. The assumed nominal wall thickness of a cylindrical manifold, nozzle, and pipe shall satisfy the condition of item 4.2.1.2.

4.2.2.3. For internal pressure elbows with an ratio of Rs/Da ≥ 1 (Fig. 4.5), the design wall thickness is determined by the formulas:

for the outside of the elbow

for the inside of the elbow

for the middle part of the elbow (in section AA ± 15 ° from the neutral line of the elbow)

where K1, K2, K3 are toroidal coefficients; Y1, Y2, Y3 are shape coefficients.

4.2.2.4. Nominal elbow wall thickness

s ≥ max{sR1, sR2, sR3} + c.

Fig. 4.5. Elbow

4.2.2.5. Toroidal coefficients are calculated by formulas

K1 = (4Rs + Da)/(4Rs + 2Da); K2 = (4Rs - Da)/(4Rs 2Da); K3 = 1.

4.2.2.6. For elbows, the design wall temperature which does not exceed 623 K (350 °C) for carbon and silicon-manganese steels, 673 K (400 °C) for chromium-molybdenum-vanadium steels, 723 K (450 °C) for corrosion-resistant steels of austenitic class, the shape coefficients are determined by the formulas

Y2 = Y1;

For elbows of the same steel, but at a wall temperature of at least 673 K (400 °C), 723 K (450 °C) and 798 K (525 °C), respectively, the shape coefficient is determined by the formulas

Y2 = Y1;

where a is out-of-roundness of the cross section of the elbow, determined according to the Codes,%;  

For elbows, the design temperature of which is between the above values, the coefficients Y1, Y2, Y3 are determined by linear interpolation depending on the temperature value. In this case, the coefficient values corresponding to the specified boundary temperatures are assumed as reference.

If the obtained values of coefficients Y1, Y2, Y3 are less than one, they should be assumed to be equal to one.

If b < 0.03, values of the coefficients Y1, Y2, Y3 are assumed to be equal to the value obtained when b = 0.03. If the calculated value is q > 1, then it is assumed that q = 1.

4.2.2.7. It is allowed to round value of sR + c down to a value not exceeding 3% of the nominal wall thickness.

4.2.2.8. At the ends of pipes being bored for butt welding, the wall may be thinned by 10% of the design thickness, provided that the total length of the bored section will not exceed the smaller of the values of 5sR or 0.5Da.

4.2.2.9. Permissible pressure for a cylindrical header, nozzle, pipe, and elbow is determined by the formulas:

 

during design

after manufacture

Coefficient K is assumed to be: for cylindrical header, nozzle and pipe K = 1; for elbow K = max{K1Y1; K2Y2; K3Y3}.

4.2.3. Round flat heads and lids.

4.2.3.1. The design thickness of the round flat heads and lids (Table 4.3), operating under internal and external pressures, is determined by the formula

This formula is applicable provided that

(s1 - c)/DR ≤ 0.2.

4.2.3.2. The nominal thickness of round flat heads and lids operating under internal and external pressures shall satisfy the condition

s1s1R + c.

4.2.3.3. In all cases of attaching a flat round head to the shell, the head thickness shall be equal to or greater than the thickness of the shell, calculated according to the formula in item 4.2.1.2.


 

Table 4.3. Values of design diameter DR and coefficient K0 depending on the connection

Type

Connection

Design diameter

K0

1

DR = D

0.53

2

DR = D - r

0.44

0.47

3

DR = D

0.47

4

DR = D4

0.6

5

DR = D2

0.45

4.2.3.4. Values of coefficient K4 in the formula in item 4.2.3.1 are determined depending on the design of heads and lids according to the formula

K4 = K0x,

where coefficient K0 is assumed in accordance with Table 4.3.

The coefficient of x, taking into account the rigidity of the connection of a flat head with a cylindrical shell, is determined by the formula

(if when calculating the value of x < 0.76, then it is assumed that x = 0.76), where [σ]1, [σ]2 are nominal permissible stresses for the materials of the head and cylindrical shell, respectively.

For lids it is assumed that x = 1.0.

Bending radius r specified in Table 4.3 is assumed in accordance with the design documentation.

4.2.3.5. Thickness s2 for types of joints 3 and 5 (Table 4.3) shall satisfy the condition

For joint type 4 (Table 4.3)

s2 ≥ 0.75s1.

4.2.3.6. Permissible pressure during design and after manufacture of round heads and lids operating under internal and external pressures is determined by the formulas:

during design

after manufacture

4.3. STRENGTH REDUCTION COEFFICIENTS AND STRENGTHENING OF HOLES

4.3.1. Strength reduction by a single hole.

4.3.1.1. A single hole is a hole the edge of which is distant from the edge of the nearest hole along the middle surface for a distance more than

If the outer diameter is nominal, then the mean diameter is

Dm = 2Bk + s,

where Bk is the distance from the point of intersection of longitudinal axis of the hole or nozzle with the shell axis to the conditional point of intersection of longitudinal axis of the hole with the inner forming part (see e.g. Fig. 4.2). If the internal diameter is nominal, then

Dm = D + s.

4.3.1.2. A non-strengthened hole is a hole that has no strengthening in the form of a nozzle with a wall thickness exceeding that required by calculation for the design pressure; welded cover plate; local thickening of the shell around the hole or flanged collar (upset neck), as well as a hole in which pipes are beaded.

4.3.1.3. The reduction coefficient of strength of a cylindrical, conical and spherical shell, or a convex head weakened by non-strengthened single hole, is determined by the formula

If the calculated value of φd is > 1, then it is assumed that φd = 1.

For flat heads and lids

Diameter of holes d in the calculations is assumed as:

1) for round holes for beading pipes, for welding nozzles to the shell surface and for holes closed by a lid, – equal to the diameter of holes in shells:

2) for non-circular holes with an aspect ratio along symmetry axes of not more than 2:1 – equal to the largest clear size in the longitudinal direction for holes in cylindrical and conical shells, and equal to the largest clear size in each direction for spherical shells and convex heads;

3) for round holes with a penetrating nozzle connected to the shell by a weld with full weld penetration of the shell wall – equal to the internal diameter of the nozzle;

Fig. 4.6. Diagram for determining the nominal hole diameter for a stepped hole

Fig. 4.7. Diagram for determining the nominal hole diameter in a T-joint with a flanged collar

4) for holes with different diameters on the wall thickness – equal to the nominal diameter determined by the formula

d = (d1s1 + d2s2 + d3s3)/s,

where d1, d2, d3, s1, s2, s3, s are shown in Fig. 4.6;

5) for T-joints with a flanged collar (upset neck) – equal to the nominal diameter determined by the formula

d = d1 + 0.5r,

where d1, r are dimensions shown in Fig. 4.7.

Value of diameter DR is assumed depending on the design of heads and lids in accordance with Table 4.3.

4.3.1.4. The largest permissible diameter of a non-strengthened single hole in shells is determined by the formula

where

Values of coefficients m1, m2, m3 for shells and heads are given in Table 4.2.

4.3.1.5. If hole diameter d exceeds permissible diameter d0 defined by the formula in item 4.3.1.4, then this hole shall be strengthened with the help of thickened nozzles, welded cover plates, local thickening of shell around the hole, or by combining the said methods. At the same time, the cross-sectional area of the strengthening components is equal to the sum of the cross-sectional areas of nozzles and cover plates used for strengthening, as well as of deposited metal for welding, i.e.

ΣА = Ac + An + Aw,

where Ac, An, Aw are the cross-sectional areas of the strengthening nozzle, welded cover plate and welded joints, respectively.

4.3.1.6. The cross-sectional area of strengthening components shall satisfy the condition

ΣA ≥ (d - d0)s0.

If, however, the use of the above methods is not enough to strengthen the hole, or their use is irrational for constructive reasons, the shell wall thickness shall be increased, which will lead to corresponding changes in φ0 and d0 and to reduction of area ΣA required for strengthening.

Thickening of shell around the hole (welding the saddle into the cylindrical shell) shall be considered when determining the strengthening area as a cover plate.

4.3.1.7. The reduction coefficient of wall strength of a cylindrical, conical and spherical shell or a convex head, weakened by single strengthened hole, determined by the formula

where φd is the coefficient defined by the formula in item 4.3.1.3.

4.3.1.8. If it is necessary to strengthen a single hole to achieve a predetermined value of the strength reduction coefficient φ, the area of strengthening components of the cross section can be determined without calculating the permissible diameter of the hole according to the condition

where φd is the coefficient defined by the formula in item 4.3.1.3.

4.3.1.9. If the strengthening component is made of a material with a smaller value [σ] than that of the shell material, then the calculated area of this strengthening component shall be multiplied by the ratio of the nominal permissible stresses for the shell materials and strengthening component.

A higher value of [σ] for the material of strengthening component compared to [σ] for the shell material is not taken into account in the calculation.

4.3.1.10. The cross-sectional area of a strengthening nozzle (Fig. 4.8) is determined by:

Fig. 4.8. Diagram of strengthening cross-sections

Fig. 4.9. Diagram of welded cover plate seams

for the area located outside the shell (head),

Ac = 2hc(sc - s0c - cc);

for the area located inside the shell (head),

Ac = 2hc(sc - cc).

In the latter case, the increase in corrosion is taken into account on the outer and inner surfaces of the nozzle.

Diagram of strengthening cross-sections and welds of a welded cover plate are shown in Fig. 4.8 and 4.9.

4.3.1.11. The height of strengthening area of the nozzle is assumed according to Fig. 4.8, but not more than

4.3.1.12. Nominal thicknesses of the walls of shell and nozzle s and sc are determined respectively by items 4.2.1 and 4.2.2. Minimum design wall thickness of shell and nozzle s0 and s0c are determined by the same formulas when φd = 1 and c = 0.

Nominal wall thickness of the nozzle shall not exceed the nominal wall thickness of the shell.

4.3.1.13. The cross-sectional area of strengthening welded cover plate is determined by the formula

An = 2bnsn.

Width of cover plate bn is assumed according to Fig. 4.9, but not more than

Thickness of cover plate sn is recommended to be assumed as no more s. If sn > s, it is recommended to install the cover plate outside sn1 and inside sn2 the vessel. Along with this sn1 + sn2 > 2s is not allowed.

4.3.1.14. Dimensions of welds of the cover plate shall meet the condition

Dimensions of welds of the nozzles shall meet the conditions

 ∆min ≥ sc.

The area of strengthening cross-section of a single weld is determined by the formula

Aw = l1l2.

4.3.1.15. The calculation methods given in item 4.3.1 are applicable for determining the sizes of the strengthening components of cylindrical and conical shells, convex and flat heads with round and oval holes.

The limits of applicability of the calculation formulas are limited by the ratios of sizes given in Table 4.4.

In Table 4.4, DK is the internal diameter of a conical shell in cross-section penetrating the hole.

Design hole diameter dR is determined by the formulas:

for a round hole or nozzle in the cross-section of shell

dR = d;

for conical shells in the longitudinal section of shell

dR = d/cos2 α;

for hillside nozzles of cylindrical shells and for all nozzles in hemispherical heads

dR = d/cos2 γ,

where γ is the angle between the axis of a nozzle and the normal line to the surface of shell or head;

Table 4.4. Limits of applicability of calculation formulas

Parameters

In cylindrical shells

In conical shells (adapters and heads)

In elliptical and hemispherical heads

Diameter ratio

Ratio of shell or head wall thickness to diameter

Fig. 4.10. Hillside nozzle:

a – in the longitudinal section of a shell; b – in the cross-section of a shell

for a hillside nozzle hole when the major axis of the oval hole makes angle ω with the surface generator of the shell (Fig. 4.10),

dR = d/(1 + tg2 γ cos2 ω);

for a displaced nozzle hole on the elliptical head (Fig. 4.11)

where the design internal diameter of the elliptical head is determined by the formula

4.3.1.16. The given method of determining the area of strengthening sections is applicable under the conditions:

1) angle γ between the axis of a nozzle and the normal line to the shell surface is within 15° (Fig. 4.10);

2) for displaced nozzles on elliptical and hemispherical heads, the angle γ shall not exceed 45° (Fig. 4.11);

Fig. 4.11. Displaced nozzle on elliptical head

Fig. 4.12. Longitudinal row of holes with the same pitch

3) the distance from the head edge to the nozzle axis measured by the projection shall be at least 0.1D + d/2.

4.3.2. Decrease in strength with attenuation of a row of holes.

4.3.2.1. The diameters and pitches of holes used in the formulas of this Section are determined from the median surfaces of barrel sheets.

4.3.2.2. The row of holes shall mean the holes, the distance between the edges of which does not exceed the values

4.3.2.3. The coefficient of strength reduction in the longitudinal row of holes with the same pitch (Fig. 4.12) in cylindrical and conical shells, or in the number of any direction in elliptical and spherical shells is determined by the formula

φd = (ld)/l.

4.3.2.4. The coefficient of strength reduction with a circumferential (transverse) row of holes with the same pitch (Fig. 4.13) in cylindrical and conical shells is determined by the formula

φd = (l1d)/l1.

4.3.2.5. When staggered arrangement of holes (Fig. 4.14)

in cylindrical and conical shells, determine three/values of the coefficient of strength reduction by the formulas:

in longitudinal direction

φd = (2ad)/(2a);

in circumferential (transverse) direction

φd = (2bd)/b;

Fig. 4.13. Transverse row of holes with the same pitch

ось оболочки

shell axis


 

cantwise

The smaller of the values obtained are assumed as a design strength reduction coefficient according to the formulas of this item.

4.3.2.6. For the in-line arrangement of holes (Fig. 4.15), the value of the strength reduction coefficient is assumed as the smallest of the values obtained for longitudinal and transverse rows of holes.

4.3.2.7. When unequal pitches between the holes (Fig. 4.16) or (and) unequal diameters of the holes, the strength reduction coefficient φd is assumed to be the smallest value of the strength reduction coefficients for each pair of adjacent holes. Diameter of the hole is assumed to be equal to the arithmetic mean value of diameters of adjacent holes in a row.

4.3.2.8. For flat heads and lids with multiple holes, the minimum value of the strength reduction coefficient shall be determined by the formula

The maximum sum of chord lengths of holes Σdi in the most weakened diametrical section of a flat head or lid is determined in accordance with Fig. 4.17 according to the formula

Σdi = max{(d1 + d3); (b2 + b3)}.

4.3.2.9. If several single holes are located in the same direction with a row of holes, the smallest value of strength reduction coefficient is assumed from the values for a single hole and for a row of holes.

 

Fig. 4.14. Staggered arrangement of holes

Fig. 4.15. In-line arrangement of holes

Fig. 4.16. Row of holes with unequal holes and pitches

4.3.2.10. If the axis of a row of holes does not intersect the center of a single hole, and the angle between the axis of a row and a straight line connecting the center of this hole to the center of the next one does not exceed 15°; then when determining the strength reduction coefficient, this hole is attributed to the row.

Fig. 4.17. Head or lid with unequal holes and pitches

4.3.2.11. If the axis of a row passes through a non-circular hole, the diameter of this hole is assumed to be the largest size, determined by the axis of a row or a straight line passing through the center of the non-circular hole with a deviation from the row by an angle of up to 15°.

4.3.2.12. If each of the holes forming a row has different strengthening components, the strength reduction coefficient of such a row is determined as the minimum value for each pair of adjacent holes by the formula

where φd is determined by the formulas of items 4.3.2.3 - 4.3.2.5.

4.3.2.13. If it is necessary to strengthen the holes in a row to a predetermined value of the strength reduction coefficient φ, the cross-sectional area of the strengthening components is determined according to the condition

where φd is determined by the formulas of items 4.3.2.3 - 4.3.2.5.

4.3.2.14. The cross-sectional area of strengthening nozzles for the shell, weakened by a row of holes with various-sized nozzles, is assumed as follows:

for the area located outside the shell (head),

Ac = hc1(sc1s0c1cc1) + hc2(sc2s0c2cc2);

for the area located inside the shell (head),

Ac = hc1(sc1cc1) + hc2(sc2cc2),

where indices 1 and 2 refer to two adjacent holes.

4.3.2.15. If the row consists of only two holes, the strength coefficient is determined by the formula

where φdmin is the strength reduction coefficient for a row of holes, determined by the formulas in items 4.3.2.2 - 4.3.2.5, 4.3.2.7.

The value of y is determined by the formula

4.3.2.16. When an arbitrary shape of strengthening components or nozzles, selected dimensions shall satisfy the condition

where Api is the projection of an area under pressure p limited along the axis and circumference of shell by value , and along the axis of the nozzle by value hc assumed according to item 4.3.1.11 (Fig. 4.18); Aσi is the cross-sectional area of the metal of the most loaded part limited by values b and hc (Fig. 4.18).

4.3.3. Strength reduction coefficient of welded joints.

4.3.3.1. Strength reduction coefficient of butt, corner, and T-shaped welded joints φw is selected depending on the amount of flaw-detective control in accordance with Table 4.5.

For products from chromium-molybdenum-vanadium and high-chromium steels up to a temperature of 783 K (510 °C), φw is assumed according to Table 4.5, and at a temperature of 803 K (530 °C) or more φw = 0.7 irrespective of the scope of control. At design temperatures 783 K (510 °C) to 803 K (530 °C), the value of φw is determined by linear interpolation.

Table 4.5. Values of strength reduction coefficients of welded joints

Scope of radiographic or ultrasound testing, %

Maximum value of strength reduction coefficient φw

100

1.0

50

0.9

25

0.85

at least 10

0.8

Fig. 4.18. Diagram of design areas of strengthening components

If the welded joint of pipes made of chrome-molybdenum-vanadium rolled, forged and drilled, or centrifugally cast steels with a machined inner surface is loaded with bending loads and operates at temperatures up to 783 K (510 °C), then irrespective of the scope of control, for rolled pipes φw1 shall be assumed as 0.9 and for machined centrifugally cast pipes φw2 = 1. At a temperature of 803 K (530 °C) or more, φw1 = 0.6 and φw2 = 0.7, respectively. Within the range of temperatures from 783 K (510 °C) to 803 K (530 °C), linear interpolation is allowed to determine φw1 or φw2.

4.3.3.2. The strength reduction coefficient of annular welded joints of cylindrical and conical shells loaded with pressure is assumed to be equal to one.

4.3.3.3. If the distance from the edge of any hole to the axis of a weld in the direction perpendicular to the design direction is as follows,

the design strength reduction coefficient is determined as a product of the strength reduction coefficient of a welded joint and the strength reduction coefficient of a hole

φ = φdφw or φ = φcφw.

In case the distance between the axis of the weld and the edge of the nearest hole is

the design strength reduction coefficient is assumed as the minimum value of φd, φc or φw. For seamless parts φ = φd or φ = φw. For welded parts without holes φ = φw.

4.4. FLANGES, PRESSURE RINGS, AND FASTENERS

The recommended method for calculation for selection of basic dimensions of flanges, pressure rings, and fasteners is given in Appendix 10.

5. CHECKING CALCULATION

5.1. GENERAL

5.1.1. Checking calculation is carried out after performing the calculation for selection of basic dimensions of the calculated components according to their nominal dimensions.

5.1.2. Checking calculation is carried out with due regard to all design loads and all design modes of operation. A group of modes can be included in one design mode if external loads and temperatures of these modes do not differ by more than 5% from the accepted design values.

5.1.3. The main design loads are:

internal or external pressure;

weight of a product and its content

additional loads (weight of attached products, pipeline insulation, etc.);

forces from the reaction of supports and pipelines;

thermal impacts;

vibration loads;

seismic loads.

5.1.4. The main design modes of operation are:

tightening of bolts and pins;

start-up;

steady-state mode;

operation of the emergency protection system;

reactor power change;

shutdown;

hydraulic or pneumatic test;

abnormal operation;

emergency.

5.1.5. The checking calculation uses physical and mechanical properties of the base metal and welds specified in the state or industry standards or specifications. In the absence of the necessary data in these documents, it is allowed to use the data given in Tables P1.1 - P1.4 of Appendix 1 and Appendix 6.

5.1.6. The regulations do not regulate the methods used to determine design loads, internal forces, displacements, stresses and deformations of the calculated components. The selected method shall take into account all design loads for all design cases and provide an opportunity to determine all necessary calculation groups of stress categories.

Responsibility for the selection of a method lies with the organization which performed the appropriate calculation or experiment. Recommended methods for calculating some typical assemblies and parts are given in Appendix 5.

5.1.7. During the checking calculation, all stresses in the structure are divided into categories. Stresses belonging to different categories are grouped into groups of stress categories, which are compared with permissible stresses.

5.1.8. During the checking calculation of the deposited or clad walls, the stresses in the wall and deposit welding are considered with due regard to temperature stresses caused by the difference in the coefficients of linear expansion of the base metal and deposit welding.

5.2. CLASSIFICATION OF STRESSES

5.2.1. The following main categories of stresses are used for checking calculation:

σm – general membrane stresses;

σmL – local membrane stresses;

σb – general bending stresses;

σbL – local bending stresses;

σT – general temperature stresses;

σTL – local temperature stresses;

σc – compensation stresses ;

σ mw – mean tension stresses over bolt or pin section caused by mechanical loads.

Additional stress categories used in performing calculations included in the checking calculation are specified directly in the relevant subsections.

For convenience of the calculations, below there are examples of the separation of stresses by categories.

5.2.2. An example of stresses belonging to the category of general membrane stresses is the mean tension (or compression) stresses across the wall thickness of a cylindrical or spherical shell, caused by the action of internal or external pressure.

5.2.3. Examples of stresses classified as local membrane stresses are:

1) membrane stresses from mechanical loads in the areas of connection of shells and flanges;

2) membrane stresses from mechanical loads in the areas of connection of branch pipes and supports to vessels.

5.2.4. Examples of stresses classified as general bending stresses are:

1) bending stresses caused by external forces and moments acting on the vessel or pipeline as a whole;

2) bending stresses caused by pressure acting on flat lids;

3) bending stresses in pressure rings and flanges of detachable joints caused by tightening of bolts and pins.

5.2.5. Examples of stresses classified as local bending stresses are:

1) bending stresses caused by pressure in the areas of connection of various components (flange and cylindrical shell of body, connection of body shell and head, etc.);

2) bending stresses in pipelines in the area of flange connection caused by tightening of bolts and pins.

5.2.6. Examples of stresses classified as general temperature stresses are:

1) stresses caused by axial temperature differences in cylindrical shell;

2) linear part of stresses in components in the connection areas (flange and cylindrical part of vessel; branch pipe and vessel body; pipeline and flange; tube plate and attached tubes, etc.);

3) stresses caused by temperature differences across the thickness of flat heads and lids;

4) stresses in butt joints of cylindrical shells made of dissimilar materials.

5.2.7. Examples of stresses classified as local temperature stresses are:

1) stresses in the central part of long cylindrical or spherical shells caused by temperature differences across the wall thickness, with the exemption of the linear component of stresses specified in 2) of item 5.2.6;

2) stresses in small areas of overheating (or cooling) in the wall of a vessel or pipeline;

3) stresses in anti-corrosion coating and other bimetallic components caused by the difference in coefficients of linear expansion of materials.

5.2.8. Examples of stresses classified as compensation stresses are:

1) tension (or compression) stresses caused by constraining free expansion of a pipeline;

2) torsional and bending stresses in pipelines caused by homing action of a pipe.

5.2.9. Examples of stresses classified as local stresses in concentration areas are stresses in the areas of holes, fillets, threads, etc. caused by thermal and mechanical forces, determined with due regard to the stress concentration coefficient.

5.2.10. Checking calculation determines the stresses of each calculation group of the stress category, according to which the reduced stresses are determined, compared with the corresponding permissible stresses.

5.2.11. Based on the analysis of the existing loads and temperature fields, the most stressed areas of vessels and pipelines shall be selected, and for different design cases these areas may be different.

5.2.12. Groups of categories of stresses and their designations in relation to various types of structures used in the calculations for static and cyclic strength are given in Table 5.1, and for calculated zones – in Table 5.2.

5.2.13. The most typical examples of groups of categories of stress in structures are given in Table 5.1.

5.3. STRESS CALCULATION PROCEDURE

5.3.1. Based on the analysis of operating conditions of components of structure, a typical physically possible sequence of operating operation and loading modes is established, including test conditions and abnormal operation. Operation and loading modes carried out between start-up and outage, for example, operation of emergency protection, shall be located between the specified modes.

5.3.2. For the most loaded areas of the components of structure, the elastic calculation determines the values of six components of stresses without taking into account concentration for the adopted coordinate system (Cartesian, cylindrical or spherical) and the adopted sequence of operation and loading modes in time.

The values of main stresses are determined according to the six components of stress state. The largest main stress is assigned an index i, and two others – indices j, ki > σj > σk), thus fixing the main sites.

5.3.3. On the selected fixed main sites for the entire adopted sequence of operation and loading modes in time, the dependences of the change in main stresses are determined σi, σj, σk.

5.3.4. The values of reduced stresses (σ) are determined for the moments of time t1, t2, ..., tl, ..., tm, where the increase (decrease) in the absolute value of any component of the main stresses is replaced by their decrease (increase) according to the formulas

 (5.1)

Table 5.1. Examples of groups of construction stress categories

Construction type

Design group of stress categories

Designation of calculation group of stress categories

Designations of components of stress categories included in this calculation group

Bodies of reactors, steam generators and vessels

Reduced general membrane stresses

(σ)1

σm

Reduced stresses determined by the  sums of the components of general or local membrane and general bending stresses

(σ)2

m or σmL] + σb

Range of reduced stresses determined by sums of components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending and general temperature and compensation stresses

(σ)RV

m or σmL] + σb + σbL + σT + [σcm or σcmL] + σcb + τcs

Amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general and local temperature and compensation stresses with due regard to stress concentration

aF)V

m or σmL] + σb + σbL + σT + σTLcm or σcmL] + σcb + τcs with due regard to stress concentration

Pipelines

Reduced general membrane stresses

(σ)1

σm

Reduced stresses determined by the  sums of the components of general or local membrane and general bending stresses

(σ)2

m or σmL] + σb

Range of the reduced stresses determined by the  sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stress, general temperature related stresses, and compensation stresses of membrane, torsion and bending

(σ)RK

m or σmL] + σb + σbL + σT + [σcm or σcmL] + τcs + σcb

Amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general and local temperature stresses, compensation stresses of membrane, torsion and bending with due regard to stress concentration

aF)K

m or σmL] + σb + σbL + σT + σTLcm or σcmL] + τcs + σcb with due regard to stress concentration

Compensating devices (toroidal, bellows, etc.)

Reduced general membrane stresses

(σ)1

σm

Amplitude of reduced stresses determined by the sums of the components of general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general and local temperature stresses with due regard to stress concentration

aF)V

m or σmL] + σb + σbL + σT + σTL with due regard to stress concentration

Bolts and pins

Mean tension stresses over bolt or pin section caused by mechanical loads

(σ)1

σmw

Mean tension stresses over bolt or pin section caused by mechanical loads and temperature impacts

 

(σ)3w

σmw + σT

Reduced stresses determined by sums of components of mean tension stresses over bolt or pin section and general bending stresses caused by mechanical loads and temperature impacts, as well as torsional stresses

(σ)4w

σmw + σT + σbw + τsw

Amplitude of reduced stresses determined by sums of components of mean tension stresses over bolt or pin section and general bending stresses caused by mechanical loads and temperature impacts, torsional stresses and general and local temperature stresses taking into account stress concentration in thread

aF)w

σmw + σbw + σT + σTL + τsw with due regard to stress concentration

Table 5.2. Examples of groups of categories in calculated areas of structures

Calculated area

Type of loading

Category of determined stresses

Design group of stress categories

Cylindrical portion (smooth portion)

Internal pressure

General membrane

(σ)1

Internal pressure, temperature difference along the length

General membrane + general temperature

(σ)RV

Internal pressure, temperature difference along the length, temperature difference through the wall thickness

General membrane + general temperature + local temperature

aF)V

Area of flange connection with vessel cylindrical portion

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature field in flange, temperature field in vessel cylindrical portion

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Flat lid of vessel with holes

Internal pressure

General bending

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature field

General bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

General bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

 

 

aF)V

Area of connection of flanges with elliptical or torospheric lids or heads

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature field in the flange, temperature field in the lid (head), tightening of pins

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Elliptical or torospheric lids or heads with holes

Internal pressure

General membrane

(σ)1

General membrane + general bending

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature field

General membrane + general bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

General membrane + general bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Area of connection of vessel cylindrical portion with head

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields in vessel cylindrical portion and head

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Welding area of branch pipes, nozzles or pipes to the vessel (in the body)

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields in the body and in the welded component, the forces from the pipeline (mechanical and from homing action)

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + compensation stresses

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + compensation stresses + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Branch pipe area

Internal pressure

General membrane

(σ)1

Internal pressure, temperature fields in the body and in the welded component, the forces from the pipeline (mechanical and from homing action)

General or local membrane + general bending

(σ)2

General or local membrane + general bending + local bending + general temperature + compensation stresses

(σ)RV

General and local membrane + general bending + local bending + general temperature + compensation stresses + local temperature and local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Pressure ring

Pin tightening, internal pressure

General bending

(σ)2

Pin tightening, internal pressure, temperature fields in pressure ring and vessel

General bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

General bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Pipelines

Internal pressure

General membrane

(σ)1

Internal pressure, weight of pipeline

General or local membrane + general bending

(σ)2

Internal pressure; weight of pipeline, compensation forces

General or local membrane + general bending + compensation stresses + local bending + general temperature stresses

(σ)RK

General or local membrane + general bending + compensation stresses + local bending + general temperature stresses with due regard to local stresses in the concentration area

aF)K

Tube boards

Internal pressure

General bending

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields

General bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

General bending + general temperature + local temperature with due regard to local stresses in the concentration areas

aF)V

Area of welding of tube plates to vessel body

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields in the tube plate and vessel body

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature with due regard to local stresses in the concentration areas

aF)V

Headers

Internal pressure

General or local membrane

(σ)1 or (σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields

General or local membrane + general or local flexural + general temperature

(σ)RV

General or local membrane + general or local bending + general temperature + local temperature with due regard to local stresses in the concentration areas

aF)V

Area of connection of nozzles or pipes with a header

Internal pressure

Local membrane

(σ)2

Internal pressure, temperature fields in the body and welded component

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature

(σ)RV

Local membrane + local bending + general temperature + local temperature + local stresses in concentration areas

aF)V

Annular seal (compensator)

Internal pressure

General membrane

(σ)1

Internal pressure, movement of lid or head and body, temperature fields in the compensator

General or local membrane + general temperature + local bending + local stresses in the concentration areas

aF)V

Under elastic loading for initial t1 and final tm moments of time σi = σj = σk = 0 or equal to a constant stress, such as weight stress.

5.3.5. Determination of stresses by analytical methods, for example, according to the theory of shells, is carried out in the sequence specified in items 5.3.1 - 5.3.4; determination of stresses by numerical methods in the elastic area in the following order:

1) dependence of local stresses is determined for the accepted sequence of operation modes and loading;

2) nominal stresses from mechanical and thermal loads are distinguished;

3) reduced stresses are determined.

5.3.6. The (σ)RV or (σ)RK stress range is determined by a checking calculation for static strength according to the graphs of changes in reduced stress (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik for the whole process of stress change, and is selected as the largest of the following values:

 (5.2)

where (σ)ij,max, (σ)jk,max, (σ)ik,max are algebraically maximal, and (σ)ij,min, (σ)jk,min, (σ)ik,min are algebraically minimal stresses for the whole process of change of the corresponding reduced stresses.

In all cases of elastic loading, the stress values

 (5.3)

5.3.7. The general process of change in time of reduced stresses (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik is a series of consecutive half cycles. Within each half-cycle, the reduced stress varies monotonously. The moments of time defining the ends of half cycles are denoted by 0, 1, 2, ..., l, ..., m.

The main stresses σi, σj, σk, in the general case distributed non-uniformly over the cross-sectional area (wall thickness) of the component of structure As, are divided into membrane σm and additional component, assumed as bending σb, and are determined at specified moments using the formulas

 (5.4)

 (5.5)

Reduced local stresses (σL)ij, (σL)jk, (σL)ik at the end of the lth half-cycle are determined by the formulas

 (5.6)

where K(σ)ij,l, K(σ)jk,l, K(σ)ik,l are concentration coefficients of reduced stresses for stresses (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik in a half-cycle from l - 1 to l.

Coefficient K(σ)ij,l is calculated, for example, by the formula

 (5.7)

Here Kσ,mi, Kσ,bi, Kσ,mj, Kσ,bj are theoretical coefficients of concentration of membrane components σmi, σmj and bending components σbi, σbj are, respectively, determined experimentally, by handbooks, or with Appendix 3; μσ is a coefficient depending on the constraint of deformation corresponding to main stress σj in the direction of σi and stress σi in the direction of σj. With full constraint μσ = 0.3, and in its absence μσ = 0. If the degree of constraint cannot be determined, then the calculation is performed when μσ = 0 and μσ = 0.3. In this case, the concentration coefficient is assumed as the largest of the two values obtained.

Fig. 5.1. Graph of change of local reduced stress

To simplify the calculation, it is allowed to assume Kσ,bi = Kσ,mi; Kσ,bj = Kσ,mj and σmi = σi; σmj = σj; σbi = σbj = 0.

5.3.8. Change in any local conditional elastic reduced stress (σF)l is determined using the graph of change of corresponding reduced stress (σL)l. An example of the graph is shown in Fig. 5.1.

If before a moment in time l the stress (σL) was in the elastic area (l = 2 in Fig. 5.1), then (σF)l = (σL)l, and if at the moment of time l the stress (σL)l is in the elastic plastic area and at this moment acquires the highest absolute value among all the preceding positive and negative stresses (σL), then (σF)l is determined by the formula

 (5.8)

where in this case (σL)h = (σF)h = 0, and x = 1.

In this case, the moment in time is indicated by lb (lb = 4 and lb = 10), and  work-hardening exponent v and proportional limit RTpe are determined by the formula

 (5.9)

 (5.10)

Work-hardening exponent v is allowed to be selected as per Table 5.3 depending on the value of RTp0.2/RTm and ZT.

Table 5.3. Value of work-hardening exponent v

RTp0.2/RTm

ZT, %

10

20

30 - 60

0.3

0.29

0.27

0.25

0.5

0.21

0.17

0.19

0.7

0.11

0.11

0.13

0.9

0.05

0.06

0.07

0.95

0.02

0.03

0.04

1.0

0.00

0.00

0.00

When intermediate values of RTp0.2/RTm, the values of v are determined by linear interpolation.

If a weld is located in the are under consideration, then RTpe and v values are assumed for the weld metal if they are smaller than for the base metal.

At temperatures above the Tt, the value of RTpe is determined by the isochronous strain curve during the loading of the component of structure during the considered half-cycle.

The duration of a half-cycle is equal to the time of stress change from the minimum (maximum) to the maximum (minimum) value. When calculating the stresses during the start-up process, reach of standard conditions after any transient and operation in the steady-state mode until the next transient at temperatures above Mt, it is necessary to take into account the mean operating time in the steady-state mode between the corresponding transients.

At temperatures above Tt, the work-hardening exponent is determined by the formula

where RTp0.2t; σT is a yield limit and stress corresponding to elastic plastic deformation eT, assumed as per isochronic strain curve for the duration and temperature of a half-cycle; eT0.2t is deformation corresponding to the yield limit RTp0.2t; eT is deformation corresponding to σT (at least 2 %).

If before a moment of time l the formula (5.8) was used at least once, then to determine the stress (σF)l a half-cycle l, h is considered, where lbhl.

When increasing (decreasing) stress (σL) from a moment of time l - 1 to l, index h is assigned to the lowest (highest) stress value (σL). In this case, the stress values from (σL)h to (σL)l-1 shall not exceed (or be less than) the values of (σL)l.

If |(σL)l - (σL)h| ≤ 2RTpe (l = 7 in Fig. 5.1), then (σF)l is determined by the formula

(σF)l = (σL)l – (σL)h + (σF)h. (5.11)

If |(σL)l - (σL)h| ≤ 2RTpe (l = 5 and l = 8), then (σF)l is determined by the formula (5.8), in which the coefficient x is assumed to be equal to 2.

When the temperature is variable during a half-cycle, the values of RTpe, v are calculated for the maximum and minimum half-cycle temperatures according to the corresponding values of RTp0.2, RTm, ZT, ET. The value of RTpe is assumed to be equal to the half-sum of the corresponding values at the maximum and minimum half-cycle temperatures, and the indicator v is taken to be equal to the minimum of its values in the half-cycle temperature range. It is allowed to use values of RTpe, v at the maximum half-cycle temperature.

Work-hardening exponent v, when it is determined according to Table 5.3, is assumed to be equal to its minimum value in the half-cycle temperature range.

It is allowed to assume RTpe to be equal to RTp0.2, and work-hardening exponent v = 0. In this case, the value of RTp0.2 is equal to the half-sum of the yield limits at the maximum and minimum half-cycle temperatures, or to the yield limit at the maximum half-cycle temperature.

Calculation by the formula (5.8) is allowed to be applied under the following conditions:

 (5.12)

 (5.13)

Fig. 5.2. Graph of change of local conditional elastic reduced stress (σF) for two identical adjacent stress units (σL):

* – half-cycles between the highest values of (σL)lb; ** – other half-cycles

блок нагружения

loading unit

If when calculating (σF)l and determining the graph of its change, the formula (5.8) was used at least once, then two identical stress change units shall be considered successively (σL) (see an example in Fig. 5.2). In this case, the number of half-cycles (cycles) of each type between absolutely highest values of (σL)lb is assumed to be equal to the expected, when operating, number of load units minus 1, the number of the rest is 1.

5.3.9. Local conditional elastic reduced stress (σF) using an effective concentration coefficient Kef is determined by the formula

 (5.14)

or

F)l = Kef[(σ)l – (σ)h] + (σF)h. (5.15)

5.3.10. Effective local reduced stress concentration coefficient Kef is determined by fatigue tests.

Geometry, surface condition, nominal stresses and gradients of local stresses in the concentration area of the tested component, model or sample; their material and heat treatment; loading conditions (temperature, medium) shall correspond to the full-size component of structure.

Stresses without taking into account the concentration when determining Kef shall not exceed the limits established for the corresponding categories of stresses in the calculation of static strength.

Use of Kef, when calculating local reduced stresses, shall be coordinated with the method of processing experimental data in its determination.

When (σaL) ≤ RTp0.2, the effective stress concentration coefficient is determined by the formula

Kef = 1 + q(Kσ - 1), (5.16)

where q is the coefficient of material sensitivity to stress concentration (q ≤ 1).

If (σaL) = Kσa) ≥ RT-1, then coefficient q is calculated by the formula

 (5.17)

and if Kσa) < RT-1, then q is assumed to be equal to q0, where q0 is the coefficient of material sensitivity to stress concentration determined with the amplitude of local stresses equal to the endurance limit RT-1 and selectable according to Table. 5.4.

Table 5.4. Values of coefficient of material sensitivity q0

RTp0.2/RTm

q0

Stress concentration area in components of structures

0.4 - 0.8

1.0

Vessel support devices, holes for pins for attaching lids to vessel bodies, holes of lids and heads with a rounding radius of more than 40 mm

0.4

0.9

Tube plates, curvatures, transition from pipelines to flanges with a rounding radius from 10 to 40 mm

0.6

0.95

0.8

1.0

0.4

0.7

Roundings at the tops of slots and supporting clamps with a rounding radius from 4 to 10 mm

0.6

0.8

0.8

0.9

0.4

0.3

Metric thread of pins, bolts, nuts with a rounding radius of less than 1 mm

0.6

0.6

0.8

0.8

Note. When intermediate value of RTp0.2/RTm, the value of q0 is determined by linear interpolation.

5.3.11. When calculating reduced local conditional elastic stresses from mechanical and thermal loads in welded joints with incomplete penetration performed with austenitic electrodes and used to connect components of anti-corrosion jackets, the effective axial stress concentration coefficient of any category shall be determined depending on amplitude of bending σab and uniformly distributed σam components of stresses without taking into account concentration, by the formulas

at 2 · 10-3 ≤ (σam + σab)/ЕM ≤ 4 · 10-3;

0.2 ≤ σam/(σam + σab) ≤ 1 and

Kef = 3.5 at (σam + σab)/ЕT ≤ 2 · 10-3; σam/(σab + σam) ≤ 0.2

or at σam = 0 irrespective of σab.

For annular membrane stresses, the concentration effect is ignored. Height of the weld shall be no less than thickness of the thinnest of parts to be joined at the weld. In case of occurrence of plastic cyclic deformations in incomplete-penetration welded joints, the values of conditional elastic stresses without taking into account concentration in the welded joint cross-section shall be determined from elastic plastic calculation.

5.3.12. Local conditional elastic stress (σF) in the thread of the threaded connection is determined in accordance with item 5.3.8. Stresses (σL) are calculated with due regard to the coefficient Kσ, determined for metric thread, by the formula

 (5.18)

where KS is a coefficient depending on the type of nut; Sz is a thread pitch; R is a bending radius at the base of a coil.

For standard compression nut, ratio KS = 1, and for tension-compression nut with a length of the stretched zone equal to the diameter of threaded part, KS = 0.75.

Coefficient KS for intermediate lengths of stretched zone of the tension-compression nut is set by linear interpolation.

When an increase in the height of compression nut from 0.8 of the diameter of threaded part to 1.25 and higher, the KS decreases from 1 to 0.9.

When calculating the threaded part of a pin screwed into the body flange, the effect on Kσ of the differences in mechanical properties of the material of the pin and flange is taken into account. Moreover, with the length of the screwed part of the pin equal to its diameter and more, coefficient KS = 0.75.

In case of differences in the stress limit of the materials of pin RTmw and flange RTmf, the concentration coefficient is determined by the formula

 (5.19)

where the value of coefficient Kw is determined according to Table 5.5.

Table 5.5 Value of coefficient Kw

RTmf/RTmw

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Kw

0.7

0.8

0.87

0.95

0.95

1.0

Local stress (σF) in the thread may be determined using the effective concentration coefficient Kef by the formula (5.14) or (5.15). If stress (σL) does not go beyond the elastic limits, then the coefficient Kef is determined by the formula (5.16). If stress (σL) goes beyond the elastic limits, then for a threaded connection with a metric thread made of steel with ZT ≥ 30 % with a controlled thread profile with a bending radius at the base of a coil R, it is allowed to assume Kef = Kσ.

For controlled metric threads with a hollow without bending made of steels with ZT ≥ 30 %, the value of Kef = 1.2Kσ, where Kσ is a stress concentration coefficient in thread with pitch and bending radius R = 0.11Sz.

5.3.13. When calculating toroidal sealing compensators (TSC), the permissible number of cycles for given local conditional elastic stresses is assumed as the minimum of two values determined:

in the place of compensator connection to massive parts (lid, body);

in the shell of compensator between the connection points.

Local meridional stress at the attachment point is determined (at 2Ro/s) ≥ 5, where Ro is a local outer curvature radius of the shell cross section; s is a wall thickness) by multiplying the thermal and mechanical force meridional stress on the outer surface calculated without taking into account the concentration, as in a thin-walled shell, by the effective concentration coefficient Kef.

For shells of austenitic steels with a wall thickness s ≤ 6 mm, concentration coefficient is determined by the formula Kef = 1.45 - 0.013R, where R is a fillet radius at the attachment point, mm.

For non-smooth fillet (ledge up to 2 mm at R ≥ 15 mm), the value of R is assumed to be equal to zero. When determining hoop stresses, the concentration is not taken into account.

In the area between the connection points of a compensator if

2Ro/(s + ∆s1 + ∆s2) ≥ 3.5,

where ∆s1 and ∆s2 is the height of the butt weld reinforcement on concave and convex TSC surfaces, respectively, the bending meridional stress is determined by multiplying the bending meridional stress, calculated as in a thin-walled shell, by the correction coefficients

(concave surface) and

(convex surface), where Rl - local inner curvature radius of the shell cross section.

5.3.14. When determining local reduced stresses, it is allowed to present a typical timing sequence of operation modes of operation and loading as separate blocks, with due regard to the memory of the loading history during the transition from one block to another.

5.3.15. The stress cycles are formed so that each time the largest possible amplitude of local reduced stress was obtained on three graphs of stress changes (σF)ij, (σF)jk, (σF)ik for the selected timing sequence of operating modes of operation and loading from the remaining areas.

According to the three graphs of local reduced stresses, the conditional elastic stress (σ*F)max, largest in absolute value, is set for the whole process of stress changing.


 

5.4. CALCULATION FOR STATIC STRENGTH

5.4.1. When calculating the static strength, the fulfillment of the strength conditions for the design loads specified in item 5.1.3, except for seismic and vibration loads, and for all operating modes specified in item 5.1.4 is checked.

5.4.2. Stresses determined in calculation for static strength of equipment and pipeline components shall not exceed values indicated in Table 5.6. Values of [σ], [σ]c and [σ]w are determined in accordance with the instructions in Section 3.

5.4.3. Mean bearing stresses shall not exceed 1.57RTp0.2. If the distance from the edge of the area of load application to the free edge exceeds the size of the area on which the load acts, the permissible stresses can be increased by 25%.

5.4.4. Mean tangent stresses caused by mechanical loads shall not exceed 0.5[σ] (0.25RTp0.2 in threads).

5.4.5. Mean tangent stresses caused by mechanical loads and temperature impacts shall not exceed 0.65[σ] (0.32RTp0.2 in threads).

5.4.6. General membrane tension during hydraulic (pneumatic) tests of pipelines must not exceed 1.35[σ]Th, whereas the reduced stresses determined as a sum of the components of general and local membrane stresses and general bending stresses – 1.7[σ]Th. Stresses σmw in bolts and pins shall not exceed 0.7RThp0.2.

5.4.7. When assessing static strength over stress ranges (σ)RV or (σ)RK (see Table 5.6), the maximum and minimum absolute values of the reduced stresses included in the definition of this category shall not exceed RTm.

5.4.8. Meeting the requirements of Table 5.6 and item 5.4.7 in terms of stress range is not necessary in those cases when the distortion of the structure form, which is possible during operation and which is associated with non-fulfillment of the above requirements, can not affect the normal operation of the calculated assembly (no violation of tightness of various joints, no jamming of movable devices, no unacceptable distortion of the flow areas that determine the coolant flow rate, no unacceptable deformations of mating parts, etc.).

Necessity to meet the requirements as per categories (σ)RV and (σ)RK shall be established by the design (engineering) organization.

5.5. CALCULATION FOR STABILITY

5.5.1. Cylindrical shells under external pressure.

5.5.1.1. The calculation is carried out for smooth cylindrical shells under the comprehensive or lateral external pressure. When lateral pressure, there is no pressure on the side surfaces of the shell.

5.5.1.2. Cylindrical shells are considered to be smooth if their effective length has no strengthened holes with a diameter exceeding d0 (see item 4.3.1.4), ring and spiral stiffeners or other strengthening. Longitudinal or spiral stiffeners with an angle of up to 30° to the generatrix are not considered as strengthening from the external pressure effect.

5.5.1.3. A smooth cylindrical shell at the effective length is considered.

If the cylindrical shell at the sides is closed by welded convex heads, the length of cylindrical shell, increased by the length of flanged cylindrical section and by Hm/3 of each head, is assumed as the effective length.

Table 5.6. Calculation group of stress categories

Construction type

Design case (mode)

(σ)1

(σ)2

(σ)3w

(σ)4w

(σ)RV

(σ)RK

Components of reactor vessels, steam generators, tanks

NO

[σ]

1.3[σ]

-

-

(2.5 - RTp0.2/RTm)RTp0.2, but no more than 2RTp0.2

-

AO

1.2[σ]

1.6[σ]

-

-

-

-

NPP

1.4[σ]

1.8[σ]

-

-

-

-

Pipelines

NO

[σ]

1.3[σ]

-

-

-

(2.5 - RTp0.2/RTm)RTp0.2, but no more than 2RTp0.2

AO

1.2[σ]

1.6[σ]

-

-

-

Compensation devices

NO

[σ]

-

-

-

-

-

AO

1.2[σ]

-

-

-

-

-

Bolts and pins

NO

[σ]w

-

1.3[σ]w

1.7[σ]w

-

-

AO

1.2[σ]w

-

1.6[σ]w

2.0[σ]w

-

-

NPP*

1.4[σ]w

-

1.8[σ]w

2.4[σ]w

-

-

Guard tanka and containments

Depressurization of protected equipment or pipelines

[σ]c

1.3[σ]c

-

-

-

-

* Considered only for reactor vessels.

For cylindrical shell closed by flange joints or flat heads, the length of the shell between flanges or between flat heads is assumed as the effective length.

5.5.1.4. Formulas are applied under the following conditions:

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.1; Dm/L ≤ 3; a ≤ 2 %,

where a = 200(DamaxDamin)/(Damax + Damin); Damax, Damin are maximum and minimum outer diameters measured in a single cross section of cylindrical shell.

5.5.1.5. Critical length


 

5.5.1.6. Critical stress

 for LLkr;

 for Dm/3 < L < Lkr.

5.5.1.7. Critical pressure

5.5.1.8. Permissible external pressure

[pa] = 0.5xpkr,

where correction coefficient

 where

5.5.1.9. Stability of the cylindrical shell is ensured under the following condition

pa ≤ [pa].

5.5.2. The cylindrical shell is under the axial force.

5.5.2.1. The formulas are applicable for the calculation of smooth cylindrical shells without longitudinal stiffeners.

Spiral stiffeners at an angle of more than 60° to the generatrix are not considered as strengthening from the axial force effect.

5.5.2.2. The effective length of shell is assumed according to item 5.5.13.

5.5.2.3. Formulas are applied under the following conditions:

0.05 ≤ (sc)/Dm ≤ 0.2.

5.5.2.4. .Design axial compression stress

 

5.5.2.5. To determine the value of the permissible stress, two values of the critical stress are found:

stress of the first kind – according to the condition of the general loss of stability of the cylindrical component as a long rod;

stress of the second kind – according to the condition of the local loss of stability of a cylindrical thin-walled shell.

5.5.2.6. Critical stress of the first kind

where η = 1 if both ends of the cylindrical shell are hinged; η = 0.5 if both ends of the shell are fully-fixed; η = 0.7 if one end of the shell is hinged, and the other is fully-fixed.

5.5.2.7. Critical stress of the second kind

σkr2 = 1.2ET(s - c)/Dm.

5.5.2.8. Permissible axial compression stress

c] = min{[σc]1; [σc]2},

where [σc]1 = 0.5x1σkr1; [σc]2 = 0.5x2σkr2,

correction coefficients

x1 = min{0.7; λ1/(1 + λ1)}, λ1 = RTp0.2kr1;

x2 = min{0.25; λ2/(1 + λ2)}, λ2 = RTp0.2kr2.

5.5.2.9. Stability of the cylindrical shell is ensured under the following condition

σc ≤ [σc].

5.5.3. The cylindrical shell under the joint action of external pressure and axial force.

5.5.3.1. The formulas are applicable for smooth cylindrical shells without ring, spiral, or longitudinal stiffeners and other types of strengthening (corrugations, etc.).

5.5.3.2. For the case in question, the conditions given in items 5.5.1.1, 5.5.1.3, 5.5.1.4 shall be performed.

5.5.3.3. Stability of the cylindrical shell is ensured under the following condition

where the permissible external pressure is determined according to item 5.5.1, and the design axial compression stress σc and permissible axial compression stress [σc] are determined according to item 5.5.2.

5.5.4. Convex heads under external pressure.

5.5.4.1. The formulas are designed to calculate the convex heads of hemispherical and elliptical shapes, that are under pressure evenly distributed over the outer surface.

The use of the formulas for convex heads of spherical shape is allowed. In spherical (dish-shaped) heads, the surface has the shape of a sphere segment.

5.5.4.2. Formulas are applied under the following conditions:

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.1; Hm/Dm ≥ 0.2.

5.5.4.3. Critical stress

5.5.4.4. Critical pressure

5.5.4.5. Permissible external pressure

[pa] = 0.5xpkr,

where correction coefficient

x = min{0.15; λ/(1 + λ)}, where λ = RTp0.2kr.

5.5.4.6. Stability of the convex head is ensured if the condition of item 5.5.1.9 is followed.

5.5.5. Conical adapters under external pressure.

5.5.5.1. The formulas are applicable for calculating the external pressure of smooth conical adapters with angle of taper α satisfying the conditions of

0.005 ≤ (sc)/D0m ≤ 0.1; 10 ≤ α ≤ 60°;

0.005 ≤ (sc)/Dm ≤ 0.1,

where D0m and Dm are mean diameters of the bases of a conical adapter (D0m < Dm), mm.

5.5.5.2. At α <10°, a conical adapter can be considered as a cylindrical shell which length is equal to the cone height, and the mean diameter is equal to the larger base diameter. The wall thickness of the cylindrical shell is equal to the wall thickness of the conical adapter.

5.5.5.3. Critical stress

where Cx is determined according to the graph of Fig. 5.3 depending on the value of x = D0m/Dm or by the formula

 at 0 < x < 0.8,

where a1 = 1.098; a2 = -0.823; a3 = 16.250; a4 = 6.936; a5 = -6.603.

Fig. 5.3 Graphs for determination of coefficient Cx

At the boundaries of a gap

C0 = 17; C0.8 = 38.

5.5.5.4. Critical pressure

5.5.5.5. Permissible external pressure

[pa] = 0.5xpkr,

where correction coefficient

x = min{0.7; λ/(1 + λ)}, where λ = RTp0.2kr.

5.5.5.6. Stability of the conical adapter is ensured if the condition of item 5.5.1.9.

5.5.6. The conical adapters are under the axial force.

5.5.6.1. The formulas are applicable to calculate the smooth conical adapters under the axial force satisfying the conditions

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/D0m ≤ 0.1; 10 ≤ α ≤ 60°;

0.005 ≤ (sc)/Dm ≤ 0.1.

5.5.6.2. At α <10°, a conical adapter can be considered as a cylindrical shell which length is equal to the cone height, and the mean diameter is equal to the larger base diameter.

The wall thickness of the cylindrical shell is assumed to be equal to the wall thickness of the conical adapter.

5.5.6.3. Design axial compression stress

5.5.6.4. Critical stress

5.5.6.5. Permissible compression stress

[σc] = 0.5xσkr,

where correction coefficient

x = min{0.25; λ/(1 + λ)}, where λ = RTp0.2kr.

5.5.6.6. Stability of the conical adapter is ensured if the condition of item 5.5.2.9.

5.5.7. The conical adapters under the joint action of external pressure and axial force.

Stability of the conical adapter is ensured if the condition of item 5.5.3.3 is followed where the permissible pressure [pa] is determined according to item 5.5.5, and the design axial compression stress σc and permissible compression stress [σc] are determined according to item 5.5.6.

5.5.8. Calculation for stability under creep conditions.

5.5.8.1. Calculation for stability under creep conditions involves determining the permissible operating lifetime when the given external pressure and compression loads effect on the calculated structural component, or determining the permissible loads for the specified operating lifetime of equipment.

In the calculations, the steady-state creep function, which has the following form, is used

where e is deformation; σ is rated stress determined according to items 5.5.8.2 - 5.5.8.5, MPa (kgf/mm2); B is creep coefficient, (1/MPa)n · s-1 [(mm2/kgf)n · h-1]; n is creep parameter; t is time, s (h).

Values of B and n are determined by creep curves on the basis of the dependence between e and σ given in this item.

The calculation may be used if σkr < Rp0.2.

5.5.8.2. The formulas are applicable to calculate smooth long cylindrical components under the external pressure when satisfying the following condition:

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.2.

Design operating lifetime

B, n - see in item 5.5.8.1.

Critical stress

Correction coefficient x is determined by the formula in item 5.5.1.8.

Rated stress

5.5.8.3. The formulas are applicable to calculate full and truncated conical shells with an angle of taper that satisfy the conditions

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.1; 10 ≤ α ≤ 60°.

Design operating lifetime


 

Rated stress

Critical stress

where Cx is determined according to graph in Fig. 5.3 depending on x = D0m/Dm; D0m, Dm are mean diameters of smaller and larger bases of the conical shell, respectively, mm.

Correction coefficient x is determined by the formula in item 5.5.5.5; α is an angle of taper equal to half the angle of cone at the apex, degr.

5.5.8.4. The formulas are applicable to calculate spherical, elliptical, and torospheric shells which satisfy the condition

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.1.

Fig. 5.4. Graph to determine An3

Design operating lifetime

Rated stress

 - for spherical shells;

 - for elliptic and torospheric shells.


 

Critical stress

σkr = 1.2ЕT(s - c)/Dm – for spherical shells;

σkr = 0.6ETb2(s - c)/b12 – for elliptic and torospheric shells;

b1, b2 are major and minor semi-axes of elliptical or torospheric shells, respectively, mm.

5.5.8.5. The formulas are applicable to calculate smooth cylindrical shells loaded with axial compression and satisfying the condition

0.005 ≤ (s - c)/Dm ≤ 0.2.

Design axial stress

Design operating lifetime is determined as the smallest of two values:

and

where x1 – see item 5.5.2.8; σkr1 – see item 5.5.2.6;    B, n – see item 5.5.8.1; x2 – see item 5.5.2.8; σkr2 – see item 5.5.2.7; An3 is determined according to graph in Fig. 5.4 depending on n.

5.5.8.6. The stability of components of structures will be ensured when the condition t ≤ [t] is followed.

5.6. CALCULATION FOR CYCLIC STRENGTH

5.6.1. The method of calculating the cyclic strength is applicable below the temperature Tt (see Section 3.2 Regulations) for parts made of zirconium alloys from 1 to 2.5% niobium, carbon and alloyed steels, corrosion-resistant steels of austenitic class, heat-resistant chrome-molybdenum-vanadium steels and iron-nickel alloys.

5.6.2. Determination of the permissible number of cycles by given stress amplitudes or permissible stress amplitudes for a given number of cycles is carried out:

1) according to design fatigue curves, which characterize, within the limits of their application, the dependence between the permissible amplitudes of conditional stresses and the permissible numbers of cycles, or

2) according to the formulas binding the permissible amplitudes of conditional stresses and the permissible numbers of cycles, in cases of a refined calculation of permissible numbers of the cycles or amplitudes of stresses, or when the design curves cannot be applied.

5.6.3. Amplitude of the operating stress shall not exceed the permissible amplitude of stress [σaF], obtained for a given number of cycles N. If the stress amplitude is set, then the operating number of cycles N shall not exceed the permissible number of cycles [N0].

If the loading process consists of a series of cycles characterized by stress amplitudes (σaF)i and corresponding cycle numbers Ni, then the strength condition for accumulated fatigue damage shall be met.

5.6.4. For carbon and alloyed steels in the temperature range from 293 to 623 K (from 20 to 350 °C) with values of RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7; RTm ≥ 450 MPa; ZT ≥ 32 % and ET = 195 GPa design fatigue curve is shown in Fig. 5.5.

For austenitic steels in the temperature range from 293 to 723 K (from 20 to 450 °C) with values of RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7; RTm ≥ 350 MPa; ZT ≥ 45 % and ET = 173 GPa design fatigue curve is shown in Fig. 5.6.

For carbon and alloyed steels in the temperature range from 293 to 623 K (from 20 to 350 °C), values of 0.7 < RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.8; RTm ≥ 500 MPa; ZT ≥ 45 % and ET = 190 GPa design fatigue curves are shown in Fig. 5.7, and for steels in the temperature range from 293 to 623 K (from 20 to 350 °C) at values of 0.8 < RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.9; RTm ≥ 500 MPa; ZT ≥ 45 % and ET = 190 GPa design fatigue curves are shown in Fig. 5.8.

Curves in Fig. 5.7 and 5.8 are constructed for different values of the concentration coefficient of reduced stresses K(σ).

Design curves in Fig. 5.5 - 5.8 are obtained with due regard to the maximum safety coefficients. These curves are allowed to be used when the stress cycle asymmetry coefficients are r ≤ 0.

5.6.5. The permissible amplitude of conditional elastic stress for given temperatures below those set in item 5.6.4 can be determined by multiplying the values of [σaF] according to design curves in Fig. 5.5 - 5.8 by the ratio of the modulus of elasticity at a given temperature to the modulus of elasticity at the maximum temperature of application of the corresponding design curve.

5.6.6. The permissible amplitude of conditional elastic stress or the permissible number of cycles for steels with the ratio of RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7 at [N0] ≤ 1012 is determined by the formulas

 (5.20)

where nσ, nN are the safety coefficients for stresses and number of cycles; m, me are material characteristics; r is a stress cycle asymmetry coefficient; RTc is a strength characteristic assumed to be equal to

RTc = RTm(1 + 1.4 · 10-2ZT);

eTc is a plasticity characteristic depending on the value of ZTc is determined by the formula

 (5.21)

or at (σ*F)max < RTp0.2 – by the formula

 (5.22)

When using data of state standards, specifications for the material or data of Appendix 1 Strength Calculation Regulations, which provide guaranteed mechanical characteristics, when ZT ≤ 50 %, it shall be assumed ZTc = ZT. When ZT > 50 %, it shall be assumed ZTc = 50 %.

Fig. 5.5. Design fatigue curve of carbon and alloyed steels with RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7 to T = 623 K (350 °C)

МПа

MPa

 

Fig. 5.6. Design fatigue curve of austenitic steels to M = 723 K (450 °C)

If the plasticity characteristic eTc is determined according to the value of ZT formulated in a static tensile test, the following formulas are used

 (5.23)

and eTc = 0.005ZT at (σ*F)maxRTp0.2. (5.24)

Fig. 5.7. Design fatigue curves of carbon and alloyed steels with 0.7 < RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.8 to
T = 623 K (350 °C)

Fig. 5.8. Design fatigue curve of carbon and alloyed steels with 0.8 < RpT0.2/RTm ≤ 0.9 to
T = 623 K (350 °C)

Characteristics ET, ZT, RTm are assumed to be equal to the minimum values in the range of working temperatures with due regard to aging. Safety coefficient for stresses nσ = 2, and for number of cycles nN = 10.

When calculating components which carry only thermal loads (e.g. heat shields and similar parts) or both thermal and mechanical loads while deformation is limited by other elastic bearing components (e.g. anti-corrosion body jacket), and fracture of which shall not lead to coolant exit beyond the bearing components, safety coefficients for stresses nσ and cycle number nN are assumed to be equal to 1.5 and 3 correspondingly.

In the calculation of welded joints with incomplete penetration made by austenitic electrodes and used in the above parts, with due regard to the effective concentration coefficient according to item 5.3.10, safety coefficients are assumed to be equal to nσ = 1.25 and nN = 2.1.

Exponents m and me and endurance limit RT-1 are assumed according to Table 5.7.

If the permissible number of cycles [N0] ≤ 106, then definition [σaF] is allowed by the formulas

 (5.25)

Of two values of [N0] or [σaF], determined by the formulas (5.20) or (5.25), the smallest is selected.


 

Table 5.7. Exponent values of m and me and endurance limit values RT-1

Designation

RTm ≤ 700 MPa

700 < RTm ≤ 1200 MPa

RT-1 (at symmetrical cycle)

0.4RTm

(0.54 - 2 · 10-4RTm)RTm

m

0.5

0.36 + 2 · 10-4RTm

me

5.6.7. The permissible stress amplitude or the permissible number of cycles for pearlite steel with values of [N0] ≤ 1012 and RpT0.2/RTm > 0.7 are determined by the formulas (5.20) or (5.25) and by the formula

 (5.26)

where the safety coefficient for the number of cycles nN = 10; BT, m1 are material characteristics. For steels at values of RpT0.2/RTm ≥ 0.7, the value of BT is determined by the formula

 (5.27)

and the exponentm1 is determined by the formula

 (5.28)

eTm is a plasticity characteristic characterized by the value of uniform relative contraction ZmT is determined by the formula

 (5.29)

Kσ – theoretical reduced stress concentration coefficient.

Characteristics of mechanical properties ET, ZTm, RTc are assumed to be equal to the minimum values in the considered range of temperatures with due regard to aging.

For parts calculated by the formulas (5.20) or (5.25) with reserve coefficient nσ = 1.5 and nN = 3, safety coefficient according to the number of cycles when calculating by the formula (5.26) is assumed to be equal to 3.

The value of uniform contraction of the cross section (contraction at a stress equal to the strength limit) is determined experimentally in accordance with the tensile test method or by the formula

 (5.30)

Of three values of [σaF ] or [N0] generally determined by the formulas (5.20) or (5.25) and (5.26), the smallest is selected.

At a number of cycles [N] = 106, is it allowed to use the following formula instead of the formula (5.26) in order to determine the permissible stress amplitude

5.6.8. The stress cycle asymmetry coefficient at

F)max < Rp0.2(Tmin) and 2(σaF) < [Rp0.2(Tmin) + Rp0.2(Tmax)]

is calculated by the formula

 (5.31)

If the cycle asymmetry coefficient r < -1 or r > 1, then in the calculation it is assumed r = -1.

At  and  the cycle asymmetry coefficient is determined by the formula (5.31), where (σF)max is replaced by the maximum stress from the elastic plastic calculation. It is allowed to use the formula

 (5.32)

In case of simultaneous fulfillment of conditions

 and

asymmetry coefficient r = -1.

At  the asymmetry coefficient is determined by the formula

 (5.33)

If according to the formulas (5.31) - (5.33) the cycle asymmetry coefficient r will be between -1 to -1.2, then when calculating the amplitude of stresses by the formula (5.26) it is assumed r = -1.

5.6.9. Calculation by the formula (5.26) is not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

1) the asymmetry coefficient r < -1.2 or r > 1;

2) stresses are caused only by the action of a bending moment or by thermal loads at compression or zero stresses mean in section.

5.6.10. Residual stress is taken into account if it is tensile and, in the zone under consideration, the amplitude of the local conditional elastic stress from mechanical and thermal loads does not exceed the yield limit at a temperature of 293 K (20 °C) at any type of loading cycle. It is allowed to assume the residual stress equal to the yield limit at a temperature of 203 K (20 °C). When determining the permissible stress amplitude by the formula (5.26), the residual stress is not taken into account.

5.6.11. Residual stress is taken into account when determining the value of the stress cycle asymmetry coefficient by algebraically summing it with the stress from operating mechanical and thermal loads only in the case of calculation by the design fatigue curves in Fig. 5.5 - 5.8 (in Fig. 5.7, 5.8 only by surface curves) and by the formulas (5.20) and (5.25).

When determining the asymmetry coefficient in the calculation of non-heat-treated incomplete-penetration welded joints, the stress (σF)max is assumed to be equal to the yield limit at the minimum temperature of a cycle.

5.6.12. Permissible stress amplitude for welded joint [σaF]s, with the exemption of incomplete-penetration welded joint (item 5.3.11), is determined by the formula

aF]s = φsaF],

where [σaF] is an amplitude of permissible conditional elastic stresses, determined by the design fatigue curve or by the corresponding formula for the base material at a given number of cycles; φs is a coefficient depending on the type of welding of welded materials and the heat treatment after welding (φs ≤ 1).

Values of φs for a number of welded joints are given in Table 5.8. Coefficient φs is used in conjunction with the design fatigue curve of the base material, in relation to which φs is determined.

For other welding methods, welding and welded materials that are not listed in Table 5.8, the value of φs is determined experimentally.

In the absence of data on the value of φs data of Table 5.9 may be used.

5.6.13. When calculating bodies with anti-corrosion deposit welding, the assessment of cyclic strength is carried out separately for the base metal and the deposit welding metal by the curves and calculation formulas of this section, with due regard to coefficient φs.

Coefficient φs for the body deposit welding is used in conjunction with the design fatigue curve of the base metal of body according to item 5.6.6.

The value of φs for manual welding of austenitic steel with electrodes grades EA-395/9 and EA-400/10U can be used in calculating a heterogeneous welded joint of pearlite steels with austenitic steel for the layer welded over pearlite steel using the design fatigue curve of austenitic steel.

5.6.14. For threaded sections of pins and bolts of pearlite steel at temperatures 293 to 623 K (20 to 350 °C), design fatigue curves (Fig. 5.9, 5.10) are used, taken with due regard to safety coefficients nσ = 1.5 and nN = 5.

Design curves in Fig. 5.9 are applied at values of 650 ≤ RTm < 750 MPa; ZT ≥50 % and ET = 190 GPa.

Design curves in Fig. 5.10 are applied at values of RTm ≥ 750 MPa; ZT ≥ 40 % and ET = 190 GPa.

5.6.15. Specified calculation of threaded sections of pins and bolts is carried out in accordance with item 5.3.8 and formulas (5.20) or (5.25). In this case, the safety coefficients nσ and nN are assumed to be equal to 1.5 and 3, respectively. When using the concentration coefficients Kef, the safety coefficients nσ and nN are assumed to be equal to 1.5 and 5, respectively.

Table 5.8. Cyclic strength reduction coefficients of welded joints

Base metal

Welding technique

Welding material

Types of heat treatment after welding

φs

Steels grades 20, 22K, 20K

Manual

Electrode of UONI-13/45 grades

UONI-13/45A

Without heat treatment; tempering; normalization and tempering

1.0

Electrode of UONI-13/55 grades

Without heat treatment; tempering of up to 10 h

φs = 0.8 at (σ(aF)) > 400 MPa; φs = 1.46 - 0.26lg(σ(aF)) at 60 < (σ(aF)) ≤ 400 MPa; φs = 1.0 at (σ(aF)) ≤ 60 MPa

Tempering of more than 15 h

1.0

Automatic submerged

Welding wire of grade

Sv-08A

Sv-08GSMT

EP-458

Without heat treatment

0.9

Tempering

1.0

Electroslag

Welding wire of grade Sv-10G2

Sv-08GSMT

Normalization and tempering; quenching and tempering

1.0

Steels grades 12Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A

Manual

Electrodes grades N-3, N-6, N-10

Tempering

1.0

Automatic submerged

Welding wire grade Sv-10KhMFT; Sv-10KhMFTU

"

φs = 0.8 at (σ(aF)) > 500 MPa; φs = 1.34 - 0.24lg(σ(aF)) at 70 < (σ(aF)) ≤ 500 MPa; φs = 0.9 at (σ(aF)) ≤ 70 MPa

 

Electroslag

Welding wire of grade Sv-13Kh2MFT

Quenching and tempering

0.8

Submerged automatic strip overlay welding

Electrodes grades Sv-07Kh25N13, Sv-08Kh19N10G2B

Tempering

0.8

Manual electrode overlay welding

Electrodes grades EIO-8, EA-898/21B

Tempering

0.8

Steels grades 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh3NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A, 15Kh3NMFA-A

Manual

Electrode of N-23 grade

"

1.0

Automatic submerged

Welding wire grade Sv-08KhGNMTA

"

1.0

Electroslag

Welding wire grade Sv-16Kh2NMFTA

Quenching and tempering

1.0

Austenitic steels

Manual

Electrode of EA-395/9 grade

Without heat treatment

1.0

Electrodes grades EA-400-10U, EA-898/21B, EIO-8

Tempering

0.8

Argonarc

Welding wire of grade Sv-04Kh19N11M3

Without heat treatment, tempering

1.0

Table 5.9. Values of the cyclic strength reduction coefficient for the welded joint

Base material (steel)

φs for welded joint

after tempering

without tempering

Carbon, silicon-manganese, alloyed, RTm ≤ 380 MPa

0.75

0.75

Alloyed, 380 < RTm ≤ 520 MPa

0.70

0.65

Alloyed, 520 < RTm ≤ 700 MPa

0.60

0.50

Austenitic

0.70

0.60

Fig. 5.9. Design fatigue curves for threaded sections of pins and bolts of pearlite steels from
650 ≤ RTm < 750 MPa to T = 623 K (350 °C) at different values of asymmetry coefficient r

Fig. 5.10. Design fatigue curves for threaded sections of pins and bolts of pearlite steels from RTm ≥ 750 MPa to T = 623 K (350 °C) at different values of asymmetry coefficient r

Cycle asymmetry coefficient of local stresses is determined by the formulas (5.31) - (5.33).

5.6.16. In cases where low-frequency cyclic stresses associated with starting-up, shutdown, power change, actuation of emergency protection, or other modes, are accompanied by the imposition of high-frequency stresses, such as those caused by vibration, temperature pulsation when mixing coolant flows with different temperatures, the cyclic strength is calculated with due regard to high-frequency loading.

5.6.17. Input data on high-frequency loading is obtained by analyzing the results of measurements during the operation of a component of structure or by their calculation.

5.6.18. In the calculation of the permissible number of cycles under high-frequency loading, only fatigue curves are used, obtained by the formulas (5.20), (5.25), for steels with an ratio both like RTp0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7 and RTp0.2/RTm > 0.7.

5.6.19. The strength condition in the presence of various cyclic loads is checked by the formula

 (5.34)

where Ni is a number of cycles of the i-th type during operation time; k is a total number of cycle types; [N0]I is a permissible number of cycles of i-th type; a is a cumulative fatigue damage which limit value is [aN] = 1.

In general

 (5.35)

where a1 is damage from operational loading cycles to which high-frequency stresses are not imposed; a2 are damages from high-frequency stresses at constant operating stresses (steady-state modes); a*2 is damage of a2 type determined for loading conditions in steady-state modes resulting in the greatest damage over the entire operation time; a3 is the amount of damages from high-frequency stresses during cycles of alternating stresses in transient operating conditions a*3 and with the passage of resonant frequencies a**3 in the same cycles.

Accumulated damage a1 and a2 are determined by the formula (5.34). Amplitude and frequency values for detection of damages a2 and a3 are assumed in accordance with Section 6.3 of Appendix 8.

5.6.20. Combination of main cyclic loading with amplitude (σaF) and frequency f0 and imposed with amplitude <σa> and frequency f causes a decrease in the permissible number of cycles of the main low-frequency loading from [N0 ] to [N], determined by the formula

[N] = [N0]/χ, (5.36)

where χ is a durability reduction coefficient when applying high-frequency cycles used in determining damage a*3.

For the main loading cycle of the i-th type, the damage a*3 is determined by the formula

(a*3)i = χiNi/[N0]i. (5.37)

The coefficient χ, irrespective of the degree of stress concentration, residual stresses, cycle asymmetry, value of nominal stresses and temperature, is determined by the nomograms shown in Fig. 5.11 and 5.12, or calculated by the formula

 (5.38)

where f0 = 1/(t1 + t2) is a frequency of the main cycle of alternating stresses, determined without taking into account the period of time during which the additional stresses are applied to the constant ones (Fig. 5.13); (σa) is an amplitude of the reduced stresses of the main cycle without stress concentration; η is a coefficient depending on the material, taken according to Table 5.10.

In the absence of experimental data for preliminary assessment, the value of η is assumed to be equal to 2.

5.6.21. The calculation method for two-frequency cyclic loading is applicable when all the following conditions are met:

1) ratio of the stress amplitude <σa> to the stress amplitude (σa) is in the interval of

0 < <σa>/(σa) ≤ 0.5; (5.39)

2) the absolute value of maximum and minimum stresses under two-frequency loading does not exceed the value of (0.2 · 10-2ET + RTp0.2) at rated temperature;

3) the ratio f/f0 does not exceed 5 · 106;

4) the number of cycles with amplitude <σa> within the time t1 + t2 exceeds 10 (Fig. 5.13).

5.6.22. When calculating the cyclic strength of parts subjected to exposure, a decrease in the relative contraction is taken into account. The increase in temporary resistance due to exposure is not taken into account. Under the effect of exposure, it is allowed to apply the cyclic strength reduction coefficients given in Appendix 7.

Table 5.10. Value of coefficient η

Material type

Carbon steel, RTm ≤ 500 MPa

Austenitic steel, RTm ≤ 550 MPa

Alloyed steel, 500 < RTm ≤ 800 MPa

Alloyed steel, RTm > 800 MPa

η

1.3

1.54

1.8

1.9

Fig. 5.11. Values of χ for pearlite steels and their welded joints with RTm ≤ 500 MPa

5.6.23. If, when calculating the cyclic strength of a component of structure, the required safety coefficients are not met, then the cyclic strength is assessed on the basis of experimental fatigue curves obtained in accordance with the fatigue test method (Appendix 2) for the considering loading conditions and state of structure metal, with due regard to the corresponding safety coefficients nσ and nN or according to the results of tests of full-size components or their models, designed and manufactured in accordance with the requirements for regular structures.

The geometrical similarity of the models shall be ensured, at least in the zone of verification of the cyclic strength and in the adjacent areas, which influence the value and distribution of stresses in the tested zone. It is not recommended to use simulation of a welded joint with a reduction in full-size dimensions of components and anti-corrosion deposit welding with a change in its thickness if the purpose of the test is to check their strength.

Fig. 5.12. Values and for austenitic steels and their welded joints with RTm ≤ 550 MPa

The test mode for the nature of changes in loads and temperatures shall comply with the operating conditions.

The safety coefficients are assumed according to the value of the reduced local conditional elastic stress in the zone that determines durability, or according to the number of loading cycles, or according to the stress and number of cycles at the same time.

Safety coefficients for the conventional stress and number of cycles N ≤ 104 are determined by the formulas

nσ = 1.45 - 0.02x; (5.40)

nN = 3.5 - 0.14x, (5.41)

where x is a number of tested objects.

At the same time, the margins of nσ and nN for the moment of crack formation under cyclic loading of full-size components of structure or their models shall not be less than 1.25 and 2.1, respectively.

The conditions of low- and multi-cycle tests for stresses and number of cycles with simultaneous use of safety coefficients nσ and nN are determined using the design fatigue curve for the base metal or welded joint with the corresponding loading cycle asymmetry and temperature. To do this, determine the slope m0 of the design fatigue curve at point with [N0] = Ne, where Ne is a set number of cycles during operation. The section connecting the points with coordinates {Ne, nσaF)} and {(nσ)1/m0Ne, (σaF)} is a combination of equivalent test modes.

Fig. 5.13. Cycle form under two-frequency loading

When testing geometrically similar models, the safety coefficient for reduced local conditional elastic stress is determined by the formula

 (5.42)

where lm, lk are linear dimensions of the model and full-size structure in the tested zone.

Safety coefficient by the number of cycles when testing the model

 (5.43)

The results of tests on cyclic strength cannot serve as a ground for increasing the permissible values of the stress categories used in the calculation of static strength.

5.6.24. Appendix 12 (recommended) gives a simplified method for calculating the cyclic strength, which can be used instead of the method in Sections 5.3 and 5.6.

5.7. CALCULATION FOR LONG-TERM CYCLIC STRENGTH

5.7.1. Long-term cyclic strength is calculated in relation to the components of structure operating at temperatures that cause creep and loaded with repeated thermal or mechanical forces.

5.7.2. The recommended method for calculating the long-term cyclic strength is given in Appendix 7.

The calculation uses the characteristics of long-term strength and ductility according to Tables P6.1 and P6.3.

5.7.3. The component of structure, calculated on the long-term cyclic strength, shall satisfy:

1) the strength conditions taken when selecting the basic dimensions in the entire range of operating temperatures;

2) the strength conditions when calculating the long-term static strength.

5.7.4. The use of other methods is allowed provided that their proper computational-experimental justification for the materials used and operating conditions and operating life for the number of cycles and duration of loading.

5.8. CALCULATION FOR RESISTANCE TO BRITTLE FRACTURE

5.8.1. General.

5.8.1.1. Based on the provisions of this Section, the resistance to brittle fracture of the NPI equipment and pipelines shall be calculated at the design stage.

5.8.1.2. Provisions of this Section shall not be applied to the calculation of fastening parts.

5.8.1.3. Calculation for the resistance to brittle fracture of equipment and pipeline components is carried out for all operation modes, including normal operation (NO), abnormal operation (AO), emergencies, hydraulic (pneumatic) tests.

5.8.1.4. The main material characteristics used in the calculation are the critical stress intensity coefficient K1c, critical brittle temperature Tk and yield limit RTp0.2.

Changes in the properties of materials during operation are taken into account by introducing into the calculation of critical brittle temperature shifts due to various effects during operation.

5.8.1.5. If the wall thickness of the calculated components is less than the thickness required to determine the values of K1c in accordance with the provisions of GOST 25.506-85, it is allowed to use the critical crack opening δc or other characteristics (Kc, Jc), determined in accordance with the aforementioned GOST, when calculating the resistance to brittle fracture.

Procedures of calculation using these characteristics shall be agreed with the leading organization for development of strength calculation regulations.

5.8.1.6. Resistance to brittle failure is deemed ensured if the following condition is complied with for the selected model defect in the form of a crack in the analyzed operating mode

K1 ≤ [K1]i,

where [KI ]i is the permissible value of the stress intensity coefficient.

The index i means that the permissible values of the stress intensity coefficients are selected different depending on the design conditions:

i = 1 - for normal operation; i = 2 - for hydraulic (pneumatic) tests and abnormal operation; i = 3 - for emergency.

5.8.1.7. When determining [KI]i, the value of transfer of neutrons Fn and temperature T are assumed to be equal to their values at the point corresponding to the greatest depth of the selected design crack.

5.8.1.8. If at the time of enforcement of these regulations it is necessary to carry out calculations of equipment and pipelines in operation, manufacture or installation, or completed by the detailed design, it is allowed:

1) to use the provisions of this calculation;

2) for equipment and pipelines in operation, by agreement between the design (engineering) organization, lead material organization, enterprise owning the equipment and pipelines, to determine the parameters of defects allowed under the terms of ensuring strength, and by control to confirm the absence of equipment and pipelines defects parameters of which exceed the permissible by calculation; the calculation shall use the actual material properties, and the calculation itself (including the schematization of defects revealed during the control process) shall be carried out according to the procedures agreed with the leading organization for development of strength calculation regulations;

3) for equipment and pipelines in manufacture, installation, or completed by the detailed design, it is allowed to use procedures that differ from those described in this Section by agreement with the leading organization for development of strength calculation regulations and the USSR Gosatomenergonadzor.

5.8.1.9. It is allowed not to carry out brittle fracture resistance calculation for components of structure that are not exposed to neutron exposure (or exposed at temperatures of 250-350 °C before transfer of no more than 1022 neutrons/m2 at E ≥ 0.5 MeV) in the following cases:

1) the components of structure are made of corrosion-resistant steels of austenitic class or non-ferrous alloys;

2) materials of the components of structure (including welded joints) have a yield limit at a temperature of 20 °С less than 300 MPa (30 kgf/mm2), and the wall thickness of the component of structure is not more than 25 mm;

3) materials of the components of structure (including welded joints) have a yield limit at a temperature of 20 °С less than 600 MPa (60 kgf/mm2), and the wall thickness of the component of structure is not more than 16 mm;

4) wall thickness of the considered component of structure s, mm, satisfies the condition

at [KI]1 in MPa · m1/2 and RTp0.2 in MPa (both characteristics are assumed at the lowest operation temperature and critical brittleness temperature Tk, corresponding to the end of operation).

5.8.1.10. Thickness of an anti-corrosion coating is not included in the calculated wall thickness of the components of equipment and pipelines.

5.8.2. Stress intensity coefficient.

5.8.2.1. The stress intensity coefficient for the selected design cracks is determined analytically, numerically or experimentally according to procedures agreed with the leading organization for development of strength calculation regulations.

5.8.2.2. The stress intensity coefficient, MPa · m1/2, for cylindrical, spherical, conical, elliptical, ans flat components loaded with internal pressure and temperature effects, can be determined by the formula

where η is a coefficient taking into account the effect of stress concentration; σp is a tensile stress component, MPa; σ4 is a bending stress component, MPa; Mp = 1 + 0.12(1 - a/c); Mq = 1 - 0.64a/h; a is a crack depth, mm; c is a half length of crack, mm; h is a length of the zone within which the bending stress component retains its positive value, mm;

Q = [1 + 4.6(a/2c)1.65]1/2.

Fig. 5.14. Steels grades 12Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A:

1 - NO,  2 - AO and hydraulic (pneumatic) tests,  3 - emergency,

The formula is valid when a ≤ 0.25s and a/c ≤ 2/3, where s is a product wall thickness.

When calculating zones where there is no stress concentration, it is assumed that η = 1.

5.8.2.3. The component of (ring or axial) tension stresses is determined by the formula

where j is θ coordinate or Z; σj is a stress variation function for wall thickness; s is a wall thickness in the design section.

5.8.2.4. The value of the component of bending stress is determined by the formula

σjq = σjn – σjp,

where σjn is a value of the function of stress variation across the wall thickness at the point n.

For components without anti-corrosion deposit welding, point n is placed on the outer or inner surface of the product in the zone of maximum tension stresses. For components with anti-corrosion deposit welding, point n is selected on the outer surface of the product or on the interface between the anti-corrosion coating and base metal in the zone of tension stresses.

Fig. 5.15. Steels grades 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A:

1 - NO,  2 - AO and hydraulic (pneumatic) tests,  3 - emergency,

 

5.8.3. Permissible values of stress intensity coefficients.

5.8.3.1. Permissible values of stress intensity coefficients depend on the reduced temperature (T Tk) and design case. Dependence [KI]i on [T - Tk ] is taken as the envelope of two curves determined by the initial temperature dependence KIc. One of these curves is obtained by dividing the ordinates of the initial curve by the safety coefficient nk, and the other – by shifting the original curve along the abscissa by the value of the temperature margin ∆T.

The following values are assumed:

for normal operation (i = 1) nk = 2, ∆T = 30 °C;

when abnormal operation and hydraulic (pneumatic) tests (i = 2) nk = 1.5, ∆T = 30 °C;

for emergencies (i = 3) nk = 1, ∆T = 0 °C.

5.8.3.2. Initial temperature dependences K1c are assumed according to the data given in the relevant qualification reports for materials (base metal, welded joints), or according to the engineering solutions agreed with the USSR Gosatomenergonadzor, lead material organization, and lead organization for development of strength calculation regulations.

Fig. 5.16. Welded joints of steels grades 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A:

1 - NO,  2 - AO and hydraulic (pneumatic) tests,  3 - emergency,

5.8.3.3. Temperature dependencies [KI]i for steels of 12Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A grades and their welded joints are shown in Fig. 5.145.16.

5.8.3.4. For pearlite steels and high-chromium steels and their welded joints with a yield limit at a temperature of 20 °C, established according to the instructions of item 3.7 hereof and not exceeding 600 MPa (60 kgf/mm2), generalized curves of permissible stress intensity coefficients given in Fig. 5.17 may be used.

 

5.8.4. Critical brittle temperature.

5.8.4.1. Critical brittle temperature of a material is determined by the formula.

Tk = Tk0 + ∆TT + ∆TN + ∆TF,

where Tk0 is a critical brittle temperature of a material in the initial state; ∆TT is a shift of the critical brittle temperature due to temperature aging; ∆TN is a shift of the critical brittle temperature due to cyclic damage; ∆TF is a shift of the critical brittle temperature due to the influence of neutron exposure.

5.8.4.2. Values of Tk0, ∆TT, ∆TN, ∆TF (or coefficient of radiation embrittlement AF) are assumed according to the data given in the relevant qualification reports for materials (base metal, welded joints), or according to the engineering solutions agreed with the USSR Gosatomenergonadzor, lead material organization, and lead organization for development of strength calculation regulations.

Fig. 5.17. Generalized dependencies of permissible stress intensity coefficients:

1 - NO,  2 - AO and hydraulic (pneumatic) tests,  3 - emergency,

Procedures for determining values of Tk0, ∆TT, ∆TN, ∆TF (or AF) are given in Appendix 2.

5.8.4.3. It is allowed to use values of Tk0, ∆TT, AF, given in Table 5.11.

5.8.4.4. It is allowed to determine values of ∆TN by the formula

where Ni is a number of loading cycles at the i-th operation mode; [Ni] is a permissible number of cycles for the i-th operation mode; m is a number of modes.

 

5.8.4.5. It is allowed to determine values of ∆TF by the formula

∆TF = AF(Fn/F0)1/3,

where AF is a radiation embrittlement coefficient, °C; Fn is a neutron transfer with E ≥ 0.5 MeV, neutron/m2; F0 = 1022 neutron/m2.

The formula is valid when

1022Fn ≤ 3 · 1024 neutron/m2.

The values of AF is assumed according to the documentation data of item 5.8.4.2 and Table 5.11.

5.8.4.6. In the calculation of components of structures made of steels of 12Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A grades and their welded joints subjected to neutron exposure at Fn ≥ 1022 neutron/m2 (E ≥ 0.5 MeV) at temperatures 250 - 350 °C, it is assumed that ∆TT = 0.

Table 5.11. Values of fracture resistance characteristics

Grade of basic material

Type of welding, grade of welding material

Standard or technical specifications

Tk0, °C

TT, °C (see Note 1)

Exposure temperature, °C

AF, °C (see Note 2)

15Kh2MFA

-

TU 5.961-11060-77, Not. 6-90-3315

0

0

250

270

290

22

18

14

15Kh2MFA-A

-

TU 108.131-75, Not. 479

0

0

270

290

12

9

15Kh2NMFA

-

TU 108.765-78, Not. 4-83

0

0

290 ± 15

29

15Kh2NMFA-A

-

TU 108.765-78, Not. 4-83

-25

0

290 ± 15

23

15Kh3NMFA

 

TU 24-3-15-223-75, Not. 480,

TU 5.961-11021-79, Not. 6-90-3305

-10

0

-

-

10KhN1M

-

TU 14-1-2587-78

10

10

-

-

22К

-

TU 108-11-543-80

40

30

-

-

10GN2MFA

-

TU 108.766-78

15

10

-

-

15Kh2NMFA

EW, wire Sv-16Kh2NMFTA

TU 14-1-3633-83

20

0

-

-

Flux OF-6

-

MAW, electrodes RT-45A, RT-45AA, RT-45B

OST 108.948.01-80

0

0

-

-

15Kh2NMFA-A

AAW, wire Sv-12Kh2N2MAA (including vacuum-induction, vacuum-arc)

TU 14-1-2502-78

0

0

290 ± 15

20

Flux FTs-16A

TU 108.949-80

Wire Sv-08KhGNMTA-VI

TU 14-1-3675-83

0

0

290 ± 15

20

Flux KF-30

TU 5.965-11090-80

MAW, electrodes RT-45AA, RT-45B

OST 108.948.01-80

0

0

290 ± 15

20

15Kh3NMFA-A

AAW, wire Sv-08KhGNMTA-VI

TU 14-1-3675-83

0

0

-

-

Flux KF-30

TU 5.965-11090-80

MAW, electrodes RT-45B

-

0

0

-

-

EW, wire Sv-16Kh2NMFTA

TU 14-1-3633-83

20

0

-

 

Flux OF-6

-

15Kh2MFA

AAW (see Note 3), wire Sv-10KhMFT, Sv-10KhMFTU

GOST 2246-70

40

0

250

270

See Note 2

Fluxes AN-42, AN-42M

-

 

 

 

 

KF-30

TU 5.965-1190-80

 

 

 

 

EW (see Note 3), wire Sv-13Kh2MFT

GOST 2246-70

40

0

-

-

Flux OF-6

-

 

 

 

 

MAW (see Note 2), electrodes N-3, N-6

TU 5.965-4052-73 .....

20

0

-

-

15Kh2MFA-A

AAW (see Note 3), Sv-10KhMFTU

TU 14-1-3034-80

20

0

270

15

Flux KF-30, AN-42M

TU 5.965-11090-80

290

12

MAW (see Note 2), electrodes N-3, N-6

TU 5.965-4052-73

20

0

270

290

15

12

15Kh2NMFA

AAW (see Note 3), wire Sv-12Kh2NMFA, Sv-12Kh2NMFA-A (including vacuum-induction, vacuum-arc)

TU 14-1-2502-78

0

0

-

-

Flux FTs-16, FTs-16A

TU 108.949-80

0

0

-

-

Wire Sv-08KhGNMTA

TU 14-1-3675-83

0

0

-

-

Flux KF-30

TU 5.965-11090-80

15Kh3NMFA-A

AAW, wire Sv-08KhGNMTA-VI

TU 14-1-3675-83

0

0

-

-

Flux KF-3S

TU 5.965-11090-78

MAW, electrodes RT-5B

-

0

0

-

-

EW, wire Sv-16Kh2NMFTA

TU 14-130-168-75

20

0

-

-

Flux OF-6

-

10KhN1M

AAW, wire Sv-10NMA

GOST 2246-70

10

0

-

-

Flux AN-42, AN-42M

-

 

 

 

 

Flux KF-31

-

 

 

 

 

Wire Sv-08KhNM

GOST 2246-70

10

0

-

-

Flux KF-31

-

 

 

 

 

MAW, electrodes UONII-13/45A, UONII-13/55

-

20

20

-

-

Electrodes N-25

-

0

0

-

-

10KhN1M (VK-1A)

AAW, wire Sv-10NMA

GOST 2246-70

0

0

-

 

Flux AN-42, AN-42M

-

 

 

 

 

Flux KF-31

-

 

 

 

 

Wire Sv-08KhNM

GOST 2246-70

0

0

-

-

Flux KF-31

 

MAW, electrodes N-25

-

0

0

-

-

22К

AAW, wire Sv-06A

TU 14-1-1569-75

0

0

-

-

Fluxes AN-42, AN-42M

-

 

 

 

 

Wire Sv-08GSMT, Sv-10GSMT

GOST 2246-70

40

20

-

-

Flux AN-42

-

 

 

 

 

Wire Sv-08GS

GOST 2246-70

15

30

-

-

Flux FTs-16

TU 108.949-80

 

 

 

 

Wire Sv-08GSMT, Sv-08GS

GOST 2246-70

0

0

-

-

Flux KF-30



TU 5.965-11090-78

MAW, electrodes UONII-13/45, UONII-13/45A, UONII-13/55

-

20

20

-

-

EW, wire Sv-10G2

GOST 2246-70

40

20

-

-

Flux AN-8M

GOST 9087-81

 

 

 

 

10GN2MFA

AAW, wire Sv-10GNMA

TU 14-1-2860-79

15

10

-

-

Sv-10GN1MA

TU 14-1-2860-79

Flux AN-17M

GOST 9087-81

FTs-16

TU 108.949-80

MAW, electrodes PT-30

OST 108.948.01-80

15

10

-

-

EW, wire Sv-10GSHMFA

TU 14-1-2860-79

15

10

-

-

Flux OF-6

-

Notes: 1. The values of ∆TT are given for temperatures of up to 350 °C.

2. The values of AF are determined from ratios of AF = 800(P + 0.07Cu) at exposure temperature of 270 °C, AF = 800(Р + 0.07Cu) + 8 at exposure temperature of 250 °C, where P and Cu are content of phosphorus and copper, %.

3. AAW - submerged automatic arc welding; MAW - manual arc welding; EW - electroslag welding.

5.8.5. Calculation under normal operation.

5.8.5.1. Resistance to brittle fracture shall be considered secured if the following condition is met

KI ≤ [KI]1.

5.8.5.2. When determining KI, a surface semi-elliptical crack with a depth of a = 0.25s with ratio of a/c = 2/3 is assumed as a design defect.

5.8.5.3. Size of h is assumed to be equal to 0.5s.

5.8.5.4. With due regard to the instructions of items 5.8.5.2 and 5.8.5.3, we obtain

KI = η(0.7σp + 0.45σq)(s/103)1/2, where

σр and σq in MPa; s in mm; KI in MPa · m1/2.

5.8.5.5. Coefficient η for zones of stiffness transition (connection of flanges with a cylindrical part of a body, fillets, etc.) is determined by the formulas:

 

at 0 < s/R2 ≤ 5

η = 1 + (Kσ - 1)0.7 · 1.8/(s/R2);

at s/R2 > 5

η = 1 + (Kσ - 1)0.7 · 9/(s/R2).

At η > Kσ it is assumed that η = Kσ.

It is allowed to determine η according to the graphs in Fig. 5.18.

In formulas, R2 is a radius of concentrator curvature in the design section; Kσ is a theoretical concentration coefficient (allowed to be assumed equal to the value of Kσ when tension).

5.8.5.6. Coefficient η for the zones of holes (connection of branch pipes, nozzles, pipes) is determined by the formulas:

at s/R ≤ 0.8

η = [1 + 5(Kσ - 1)exp(-0.86s/R1)]1/2;

at s/R > 0.8

η = [1 + 2(Kσ - 1)(s/R1)]1/2,

where R1 is a hole radius.

It is allowed to determine η by the graphs in Fig. 5.19.

5.8.5.7. The calculation is required to be carried out only up to the given temperature [TTk]*, the largest value of which on the graph is [KI]1 = f[T - Tk] and it corresponds to the value of [KI]*1 determined by the formula

[KI]*1 = 0.35RTp0.2(s/103)1/2,

where RTp0.2 in MPa; s in mm, [KI]*1 in MPa · m1/2.

 

Fig. 5.18. Dependence of coefficient η on the ratio of s/R2 for the zones of transition stiffness:

a 2 ≤ s/R2 ≤ 5; b - s/R2 >5

5.8.6. Determination of the minimum permissible temperature of the structure during hydraulic (pneumatic) tests.

5.8.6.1. Hydraulic (pneumatic) tests shall be carried out in such conditions that the minimum temperature of the structure during hydraulic (pneumatic) tests Th is greater than or equal to the minimum permissible temperature of the structure [Th], determined based on the brittle fracture resistance calculation.

5.8.6.2. Temperature [Th] is determined using the condition

KIh ≤ [KI]2,

where KIh is a stress intensity coefficient in the considered sections of the structure during hydraulic (pneumatic) tests.

Fig. 5.19. Dependence of coefficient η on the ratio of s/R1 for the zones of holes:

a - s/R1 ≤ 1; b - s/R1 > 1

5.8.6.3. The values of KIh is determined in accordance with the instructions of items 5.8.2, 5.8.5.2 and 5.8.5.3.

5.8.6.4. The value of [KI]2 is assumed to be equal to the value of KIh determined according to item 5.8.6.3, and using dependence [KI]2 =f[T Tk] the value of [[Th] Tk] is found and then, knowing the value of Tk, the value of [Th] is found.

5.8.6.5. The condition of item 5.8.6.2 shall be followed during exposure under pressure in hydraulic (pneumatic) tests, in exposure for inspection of equipment and pipelines, and in heating up to the test temperature.

5.8.6.6. Full calculation to determine temperature [Th] is allowed not to produce and assume it equal to 5 °C in any of the following cases:

1) the conditions of item 5.8.1.9 are met (except for item 4);

2) for the considered component the following condition is met

at s in mm; [KI]2 in MPa · m1/2; RTp0.2 in MPa; the value of [KI]2 is determined at a given temperature (5 - Tk), where Tk corresponds to the time of the hydraulic tests, and the value of RTp0.2 is assumed at temperature of 20 °C.

5.8.7. Calculation under the AO and emergency modes.

5.8.7.1. Resistance to brittle fracture is considered secured if the following conditions are met

KI ≤ [KI]2 - for AO;

KI < [KI]2 - for emergencies.

5.8.7.2. The calculation is carried out in the following sequence:

1) for different time points of AO and emergency conditions the temperature and stress fields are determined in the design cross sections, and the distribution of neutron transfer across the wall thickness is also determined for the components subjected to neutron exposure;

2) σр, σq, h are determined in accordance with the instructions of item 5.8.2 for each of the stress fields;

3) zone h is divided into intervals which boundaries are designated by coordinates 0, x1, x2, ..., xxn; the length of one partitioning interval shall not exceed 1 mm in the areas where the stress gradient exceeds 70 MPa/mm and not exceed 2 mm in the areas where the stress gradient exceeds 30 MPa/mm;

4) within zone h the value of KI is determined assuming the crack depth equal to x1, x2, ..., xn, and the ratio of semi-axes equal to a/c = 2/3; the value of xn shall not exceed 0.25s;

5) sequence of time points t1, t2, ..., tn is selected so that the values of KI calculated for the same depth xi of two subsequent time points, differ from each other by no more than 10%;

6) at points corresponding to the end of each interval x1, x2, ..., xn, the following temperature T1, T2, ..., Tn and (for structures subject to exposure) neutron transfer F1, F2, ..., Fn values are set;

7) for temperature values found T1, T2, ..., Tn with due regard to the values of the critical brittle temperature Tk, the reduced temperatures (T1 - Tk), (T2 - Tk),..., (Tn - Tk) are determined, and according to the temperature dependence

[KI]2 = f[T - Tk] or [KI]3 = f[T - Tk]

the following values of [KI]2 or [KI]3 are set for each of the points x1, x2, ..., xn;

8) in each point x1, x2, ..., xn the values of KI determined according to item 4) and values of [KI]2 or [KI]3 determined according to item 7) are compared and the performance of condition of item 5.8.7.1 is checked;

9) the calculation shall be carried out within the given temperatures the highest value of which on the graph [KI]2 = f[T - Tk] corresponds to the value of [KI]*2 = β1RTp0.2(s/103)1/2 or on the graph [KI]3 = f[T - Tk] corresponds to the value of [KI]*3 = β1RTp0.2(s/103)1/2, where [KI]2 or [KI]3 in MPa - m1/2; RTp0.2 in MPa, s in mm, and the values of β1 and β2 are determined according to Table 5.12.

Table 5.12. Values of coefficients β1 and β2

a/s

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

β1

0.267

0.360

0.405

0.445

0.465

β2

0.40

0.54

0.61

0.67

0.70


 

5.9. CALCULATION FOR LONG-TERM STATIC STRENGTH

5.9.1. When checking calculation for long-term strength, all operating conditions that occur at temperatures higher than Tt, including abnormal operation, shall be considered. Strength conditions of components of structures are given in Table 5.13 and explained in the following items.

5.9.2. The component of structure, calculated on the long-term static strength, shall satisfy:

1) the strength conditions taken when selecting the basic dimensions in the entire range of operating temperatures;

2) conditions assumed in the calculation for static strength in the entire range of operating temperatures.

5.9.3. Reduced stresses of categories (σ)2 and (σ)RV, (σ)RK in the calculation for long-term static strength of the shell and pipelines shall meet the following conditions:

(σ)2Kt[σ] and (σ)RV, (σ)RKK't[σ],

where [σ] is a nominal permissible stress,

[σ] = RTmt/nmt;

nmt is a safety coefficient assumed in accordance with Section 3.4; Kt is a coefficient of (σ)2 stresses reduction to membrane ones, determined in zones of membrane or local membrane stresses by the formulas

Kt, = 1.25 - 0.25(σ)m/[σ] or Kt = 1.25 - 0.25(σ)mL/[σ];

K't is a coefficient of (σ)RV, (σ)RK stresses reduction to membrane ones, determined in zones of membrane or local membrane stresses by the formulas

K't = 1.75 - 0.25(σ)m/[σ] or K't = 1.75 - 0.25(σ)mL/[σ].

Limit of long-term strength RTmt when determining [σ] is selected for the total duration of loading by the stresses under consideration at the calculated temperature.

If the operation life of the shell includes two or more loading modes that differ in the reduced stress or design temperature, then the following condition for accumulated long-term static damage shall be met

where ti is loading time by the given reduced stresses during the i-th mode at temperature Ti during the whole operation life (only loading time at temperatures above T1 is considered); [t]i is permissible loading time determined by the long-term strength curve or tables of Appendix 7, corresponding to the temperature Ti and reduced stress on the i-th mode multiplied by a factor 1.5/Kt or 1.5/K't; i is a number of loading modes that differ in temperature Ti or reduced stress.


 

Table 5.13. Strength conditions of components of a structure

Construction type

Design group of stress categories

(σ)1

(σ)2

(σ)RV or (σ)RK

(σ)3w

(σ)4w

Components of reactor vessels, steam generators, tanks

-

-

Pipelines and expansion pipes

-

-

Compensating devices (toroidal, corrugated)

-

-

-

Bolts and pins

-

-

5.9.4. Stress of category (σ)3w in bolts and pins shall not exceed 1.8[σ]wt, where the rated permissible stress is [σ]wt = RTmt/nmt. Safety coefficient nmt is assumed in accordance with Section 3.5.

If the operation life includes two or more loading modes that differ in stress or design temperature, then the strength condition for accumulated long-term static damage specified in item 5.9.3 shall be met, with the difference that in this case:

ti is the loading time of a bolt or pin with stress (σ)3wi at temperature Ti for the entire life;

[t]i is permissible loading time determined by the long-term strength curve or tables of Appendix 7, corresponding to the temperature Ti and stress 1.65(σ)3wi;

i is a number of loading modes that differ in temperature Ti or stress (σ)3wi.

5.9.5. Stress of category (σ)4w in bolts and pins shall not exceed 2.7[σ]wi, where the rated permissible stress is [σ]wi = RTmt/nmt. Safety coefficient nmt is assumed in accordance with Section 3.5.

If the operation life includes two or more loading modes that differ in stress or design temperature, then the condition for accumulated long-term static damage specified in item 5.9.3 shall be met, with the difference that in this case:

ti is the loading time of a bolt or pin with stress (σ)4wi at temperature Ti for the entire life;

[t]i is permissible loading time determined by the long-term strength curve or tables of Appendix 7, corresponding to the temperature Тi and stress 1.1(σ)4wi.

Fig. 5.20. Diagram of 12Kh18N10T steel carburization in sodium (x = 6050/T – lgt)

Fig. 5.21. Diagram of 12Kh16N15M3B steel carburization in sodium (x = 6050/T – lgt)

5.9.6. The mean shear stress in keys, dowels, etc., caused by the action of shear forces from mechanical and compensation loads affecting the equipment, shall not exceed 0.5 [σ], where nominal permissible stress [σ] = RTmt/nmt. Safety coefficients nmt are assumed in accordance with Section 3.4 for keys, dowels, etc., and in accordance with Section 3.5 for bolts and pins.

5.9.7. Calculation for the long-term static strength of sodium-wetted components of the circuit of austenitic steels if components of carbon or alloyed steels are in the same circuit, is carried out according to items 5.9.1 - 5.9.3 if the depth of the carburizing zone hcc for a given time and temperature does not exceed the design wall thickness of the component.

For the circuit with reactor-grade sodium, the value of hcc is determined according to Fig. 5.20 and 5.21.

5.10. CALCULATION FOR PROGRESSIVE FORM CHANGE

5.10.1. The calculation for progressive form change is carried out in relation to the components of structure for which residual shape changes during operation are unacceptable or limited to specified limits according to the normal operation of the structure (according to the conditions of operability of movable joints, disassembly of detachable connections, stability of gaps providing hydraulic characteristics, etc.).

The recommended method for calculating the progressive form change is given in Appendix 4.

5.10.2. The calculation is carried out for normal and abnormal operation, with due regard to all the design loads specified in item 5.1.3, except for seismic and vibration ones.

5.10.3. Calculated values of displacements accumulated in a component of structure during a given service life, with due regard to the number of repetitions of operating conditions, shall not exceed the permissible ones established on the grounds of operational requirements.

5.11. CALCULATION FOR SEISMIC IMPACTS

5.11.1. General.

5.11.1.1. When performing calculations for seismic impacts, the following definitions are additionally used:

Seismic intensity of the NPI construction site is the intensity of possible seismic impacts for the construction site with the corresponding categories of repeatability over a standard period; set in accordance with seismic risk zoning maps and microzoning of the construction site; measured in magnitude degrees according to the MSK-64 scale.

Equipment or pipeline elevation is the height of the anchorage point of the equipment or pipeline relative to the lower plane of the building foundation.

Safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) is an earthquake with mean repeatability of up to 10000 years.

Operating basis earthquake (OBE) is an earthquake with mean repeatability of up to 100 years.

Accelerogram is the time dependence of the absolute acceleration of the anchorage point of the equipment or pipeline for one direction for a particular elevation.

Response spectrum is the set of absolute values of the maximum response accelerations of a linear-elastic system with one degree of freedom (oscillator) under the action given by the accelerogram determined depending on the natural frequency and damping parameter of the oscillator.

Generalized response spectrum is the spectrum obtained from the results of processing of response spectra for a set of accelerograms:

s)s – bearing stresses with due regard to seismic loads, MPa (kgf/mm2);

s)s – shear stresses with due regard to seismic loads, MPa (kgf/mm2);

k – relative damping (in fractions of critical).

5.11.1.2. The calculation is carried out for an NPI with the site seismic intensity of magnitude 5 and higher.

The need for calculations of equipment and pipelines for an NPI with the site seismic intensity of magnitude 4 is determined by the design (engineering) organization.

5.11.1.3. These rules contain the requirements for performing strength calculations at seismic effects of equipment and pipelines, subdivided into groups A, B and C in accordance with the NPI Rules.

5.11.1.4. When calculating, the equipment and pipelines are divided into two categories (I and II).

5.11.1.5. Category I includes equipment and pipelines of groups A and B.

5.11.1.6. Category II includes equipment and pipelines of group C.

5.11.1.7. Recommended methods for calculating equipment and pipelines for seismic effects are given in Appendix 9.

5.11.2. Requirements for calculation.

5.11.2.1. The source data for the calculation are as follows:

1) effects from earthquakes (OBE and SSE) in the form of accelerograms and response spectra for equipment and pipelines for three mutually perpendicular directions (vertical and two horizontal);

2) loads under the NO conditions and, if necessary, under the AO and emergency conditions.

5.11.2.2. Seismic loads on equipment and pipelines are determined with due regard to the simultaneous seismic effects in two horizontal and one vertical directions.

5.11.2.3. The following can be used to determine seismic loads:

1) three accelerograms for three mutually perpendicular directions;

2) reaction spectra corresponding to given accelerograms;

3) generalized reaction spectra.

5.11.2.4. Value of the relative damping is assumed to be equal to k = 0.02. In the presence of experimental justification the use of other values is allowed.

5.11.2.5. The strength of equipment and pipelines during seismic impacts is assessed with due regard to the requirements of item 1.2.14.

5.11.2.6. The need to take into account combined effects of seismic loads and loads of the AO and emergency conditions is established by the design engineering organization.

5.11.2.7. Equipment and pipelines of category I shall be designed on the combination of loads of NO + SSE and NO + OBE. If the OBE and SSE accelerograms, adopted for the calculation, differ only in amplitudes, it is allowed not to consider the combination of NO + OBE loads.

5.11.2.8. Equipment and pipelines of category II shall be designed on the combination of loads of NO + OBE.

5.11.2.9. The calculation is performed using the linear-spectral method (based on response spectra) or the dynamic analysis method (based on accelerograms).

If the first eigen frequency of oscillations is more than 20 Hz, the analysis can be performed with the aid of static methods with multiplication of the accelerations obtained from the response spectra by the coefficient of 1.3 for the frequency in the range of 20-33 Hz and the coefficient of 1.0 for the frequencies above 33 Hz.

5.11.2.10. The determination of stresses and deformations is allowed under the assumption of a static impact of loads on equipment and pipelines found by seismic calculations.

5.11.2.11. Stresses in the equipment and pipelines shall meet the requirements of Tables 5.14 and 5.15.

5.11.2.12. Mean bearing stresses shall not exceed the values given in Table 5.16.

5.11.2.13. Mean shear stresses shall not exceed the values given in Table 5.17.

5.11.2.14. The cyclic strength is calculated according to Section 5.61

The calculation is allowed to be carried out using the maximum amplitude of stresses determined with due regard to the effects of NO + OBE. Provided that, the number of loading cycles is assumed to be equal to 50.

This calculation may be omitted if the total damage from loads effecting the equipment and pipelines, excluding seismic effects during the NPI operation, does not exceed 0.8.


 

Table 5.14. Load combinations and permissible stresses for equipment and pipelines

Category

Load combination

Design group of stress categories

Permissible stress

I

NO + SSE

s)1

1.4[σ]

 

s)2

1.8[σ]

NO + OBE

s)1

1.2[σ]

 

s)2

1.6[σ]

II

NO + OBE

s)1

1.5[σ]

 

s)2

1.9[σ]

Note. For the NPI pipelines which have undergone strength assessment at the stages of static calculations, it is allowed not to test the strength of seismic loads for membrane stresses (σs)1.

Table 5.15. Load combinations and permissible stresses for bolts and pins

Categories

Load combination

Design group of stress categories

Permissible stress

I

NO + SSE

s)mw

1.4[σ]w

 

s)4w

2.2[σ]w

NO + OBE

s)mw

1.2[σ]w

 

s)4w

2.0[σ]w

II

NO + OBE

s)mw

1.5[σ]w

 

s)4w

2.3[σ]w

Table 5.16. Load combinations and permissible bearing stresses

Categories

Load combination

Stress category

Permissible stress

I

NO + SSE

s)s

2.7[σ]

NO + OBE

2.5[σ]

II

NO + OBE

s)s

3.0[σ]

Table 5.17. Load combinations and permissible tangential shear stresses

Category

Load combination

Stress category

Permissible stresses

in bolts and pins

in components of structures other than bolts and pins

I

NO + SSE

(τs)s

0.7[σ]w

0.7[σ]

NO + OBE

0.6[σ]w

0.6[σ]

II

NO + OBE

(τs)s

0.8[σ]w

0.8[σ]

5.11.2.15. When calculating the stability, the permissible stresses are assumed to be:

at σkr <RTp0.2c] = 0.7σkr;

at σkrRTp0.2с] = 0.7RTp0.2.

5.11.2.1.6. Assessment of pipelines for permissible stability stresses may be omitted.

5.11.2.17. Permissible movements (deflection, shift, displacement, etc.) are determined depending on the operating conditions (selection of clearance, unacceptable skews, unacceptable collisions, decompression of sealed joints, etc.).

5.11.2.18. Recommended methods for calculating the seismic effects are given in Appendix 9.

5.12. CALCULATION FOR VIBRATION STRENGTH

5.12.1. The vibration strength is calculated in relation to the components of structures subjected to vibration loading.

5.12.2. Calculation for vibration strength includes:

1) determination of spectrum of natural oscillation frequencies and check of condition of their tune-out form determined disturbance frequencies;

2) verification for the absence of vibro-impact interfaces of components of structures in order to exclude increased wear;

3) calculation for cyclic strength with due regard to vibration stresses.

5.12.3. Recommended methods of calculation and experimental assessment of vibration strength are given in Appendix 8.

5.12.4. Calculation for cyclic strength taking into account vibration loading is carried out according to the methods described in Section 5.6 hereof.



APPENDIX 1

(mandatory)

PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURAL MATERIALS

Table P1.1. Mechanical properties of steels and alloys (both significant figures are included in the limit)

Steel or alloy grade

Products

Characteristic

Temperature, K (°C)

293 (20)

323 (50)

373 (100)

423 (150)

473 (200)

523 (250)

573 (300)

623 (350)

673 (400)

723 (450)

773 (500)

823 (550)

873 (600)

St3sp5

Hot-rolled sectional shaped and sheet steel up to 20 mm thick

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

353

343

323

284

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(29)

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

235

235

206

186

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(21)

(19)

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

26

24

22

20

20

20

20

-

-

-

-

-

-

Z, %

50

49

49

48

47

47

48

-

-

-

-

-

-

Same, with a thickness of over 20 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

353

343

323

284

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(29)

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

196

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

23

21

19

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

Z, %

50

49

49

48

47

47

48

-

-

-

-

-

-

Same, with a thickness of over 100 mm

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

353

343

323

284

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(29)

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

196

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

23

21

19

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

Z, %

50

49

49

48

47

47

48

-

-

-

-

-

-

Pipes

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

343

343

323

324

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(33)

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

196

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

23

21

19

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

49

49

48

47

47

48

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter or thickness of up to 300 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

355

343

333

333

314

304

275

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(28)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

167

167

167

157

147

137

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

24

22

20

18

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

47

44

41

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter or thickness of up to 300 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

373

373

363

333

304

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(34)

(31)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

177

167

147

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(15)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

23

21

20

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

47

44

41

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 50 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

420

422

402

402

392

373

333

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(34)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

206

206

196

196

167

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(17)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

23

21

20

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

47

44

41

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

10

Cold- and warm-worked seamless pipes with an outer diameter of 5 to 250 mm, with a wall thickness of 0.3 to 20 mm, with an outer diameter of 6 to 250 mm, with a wall thickness of 1.6 to 24 mm; with an outer diameter of 6 to 160 mm, with a wall thickness of 2 to 22 mm

RTm, MPa

343

333

333

333

333

323

314

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

195

181

176

157

137

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18.5)

(18)

(16)

(14)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

24

20

18

18

19

21

23

24

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

46

40

40

40

42

44

48

-

-

-

-

-

 

Sectional hot-rolled and forged steel with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

333

333

333

333

333

323

314

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

186

186

186

177

177

157

137

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(09)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(16)

(14)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

31

28

26

22

25

245

255

28

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

50

50

46

44

44

44

46

-

-

-

-

-

15

Sectional hot-rolled steel with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

373

373

363

353

343

333

333

333

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

226

216

216

196

196

196

196

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

27

26

25

25

24

23

23

23

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

51

47

43

39

38

38

38

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

355

343

333

324

314

294

294

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

167

157

147

147

128

118

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(13)

(12)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

19

18

16

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

383

373

363

353

343

333

324

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

177

167

167

147

128

128

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(15)

(13)

(13)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

16

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

38

36

36

35

35

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 50 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

422

402

392

383

363

363

363

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(41)

(40)

(3)

(37)

(37)

(37)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

186

177

177

157

147

147

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(16)

(15)

(15)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

24

21

18

16

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

53

47

44

42

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

15L

Castings with a wall thickness of up to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

392

392

373

363

363

353

343

333

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

196

177

157

147

138

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

24

23

23

23

22

21

21

21

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

34

34

33

32

30

-

-

-

-

-

20

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

355

343

333

323

323

294

294

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(30)

(30)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

167

167

167

167

157

147

128

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(13)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

18

17

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

373

363

363

343

333

323

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(35)

(34)

(33)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

195

177

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

18

17

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

422

422

412

402

402

392

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

206

206

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

19

19

18

17

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 300 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

461

451

441

441

432

422

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

235

226

226

196

177

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(20)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

19

18

18

17

16

16

16

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Hot-rolled steel with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm; hot-worked pipes with an outer diameter of 10 to 465 mm, with a wall thickness of 2 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

402

392

392

392

373

373

363

353

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

206

206

206

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

21

20

19

18

17

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

38

38

38

38

40

42

-

-

-

-

-

 

Annealed, high-temper sheets with a thickness of 4 to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

343

343

333

333

323

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(3)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(33)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

216

216

206

206

196

176

157

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

28

27

27

25

24

24

24

24

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

43

43

42

42

42

44

46

-

-

-

-

-

 

Parent sheets with a thickness of 20 to 250 mm (transverse direction)

RTm, MPa

353

343

334

324

304

294

284

275

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(28)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

176

176

176

157

157

147

147

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

19

19

19

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

20L

Castings with a wall thickness of up to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

412

412

412

392

370

370

370

360

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(42)

(42)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(37)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

216

196

176

170

165

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(18)

(17.5)

(17)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

22

21

20

19

18

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

34

33

32

-

-

-

-

-

20K

Sheets with a thickness of 4 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

402

397

397

392

392

392

373

363

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(41)

(40.5)

(40.5)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

206

206

206

196

196

177

157

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

23

21

20

20

19

19

19

19

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

48

47

47

47

47

49

51

-

-

-

-

-

22К

Sheets with a thickness of 70 to 170 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

430

430

430

430

421

412

392

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

196

186

186

186

186

177

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

18

18

18

17

17

16

17

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

39

38

38

38

39

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 300 to 800 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

390

383

373

363

353

353

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

186

177

167

167

157

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

18

15

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

36

36

35

34

34

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 800 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

392

392

392

392

392

353

343

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(36)

(35)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

196

186

186

186

186

177

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

14

11

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

33

33

32

31

31

-

-

-

-

-

25

Forgings with a diameter of up to 500 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

350

343

333

323

323

304

294

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

167

157

147

137

128

118

108

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(11)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 500 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

373

363

363

343

333

323

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(35)

(34)

(33)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

177

167

157

137

128

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(14)

(13)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

44

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

422

422

412

402

402

402

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

196

177

167

147

137

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(15)

(14)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

19

19

19

19

19

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

44

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

461

451

441

441

441

412

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(42)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

226

206

196

167

157

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

19

19

19

19

19

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

44

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

510

500

481

481

451

441

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(51)

(49)

(49)

(46)

(45)

(445)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

255

245

226

216

196

186

167

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(23)

(22)

(20)

(19)

(17)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

-

-

-

-

-

25L

Castings with a wall thickness of up to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

422

422

400

380

370

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(41)

(39)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

226

216

196

180

175

170

150

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(20)

(18.5)

(18)

(17.5)

(15.5)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

19

18

17

17

16

16

16

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

28

26

-

-

-

-

-

30

Forgings with a diameter of 300 to 800 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

355

355

343

343

343

333

333

333

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

175

175

175

167

137

108

98

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(17)

(14)

(11)

(10)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

18

17

16

16

16

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 800 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

390

373

373

373

373

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

195

147

118

108

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(15)

(12)

(11)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

15

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

38

38

38

37

37

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of over 100 to 800 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

430

422

412

412

402

402

402

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

215

215

215

206

167

128

118

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(21)

(17)

(13)

(12)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

14

14

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

34

34

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 500 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

470

461

451

441

441

441

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

245

245

245

235

196

147

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(20)

(15)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

14

14

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

34

34

-

-

-

-

-

35

Sectional hot-rolled steel with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

530

530

520

510

510

500

500

500

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(51)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

304

294

294

294

245

196

177

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(25)

(20)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

17

13

10

7

12

17

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 500 to 800 mm, KP175*

RTm, MPa

355

355

343

343

343

333

333

333

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

175

167

167

167

167

137

108

98

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(14)

(11)

(10)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

17

13

10

7

12

17

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 300 to 800 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

390

373

373

373

373

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

195

157

128

108

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(16)

(13)

(11)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

17

15

12

9

6

10

14

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

135

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 800 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

430

422

412

412

402

402

402

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

206

206

206

206

177

437

128

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(18)

(14)

(13)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

12

9

6

5

9

13

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 500 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

451

441

441

441

441

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

226

226

226

177

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(18)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

17

15

12

9

6

10

14

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

530

530

530

530

519

510

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

265

245

225

216

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(25)

(23)

(22)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

17

15

12

9

6

10

14

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 100 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

570

559

549

540

540

540

540

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

304

294

274

255

245

225

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(23)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

13

11

9

6

8

11

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

34

34

34

34

35

-35

-

-

-

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

530

530

520

510

500

500

500

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(51)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

255

235

225

225

186

147

127

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(26)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(19)

(15)

(13)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

17

14

10

7

5

8

14

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

-

-

-

-

-

40

Forgings with a diameter of 300 to 800 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

412

412

402

402

402

392

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

196

186

177

157

57

157

147

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(15)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

15

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

34

33

33

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 100 to 500 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

451

451

441

422

422

422

412

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(46)

(46)

(45)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(42)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

226

206

196

196

177

177

167

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(23)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(18)

(17)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

15

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

34

33

33

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 800 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

510

500

491

491

491

471

461

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(47)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

255

235

216

206

196

196

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(26)

(24)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

12

11

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

29

28

28

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 300 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

549

540

530

510

510

510

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

294

255

245

235

226

226

216

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(30)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

12

11

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

29

28

28

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

569

559

549

530

530

530

510

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(52)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

312

294

275

255

245

245

235

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(24)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

15

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP295*

RTm, MPa

549

520

520

510

510

510

500

471

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(56)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(51)

(48)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

295

265

255

235

216

216

216

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(27)

(26)

(24)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

13

13

13

13

14

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

37

37

35

35

35

35

37

37

-

-

-

-

-

45

Hot-rolled sectional steel with a thickness or diameter of up to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

598

598

598

598

598

579

559

540

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(59)

(57)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

353

343

343

343

343

294

255

235

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(30)

(26)

(24)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

13

10

9

7

10

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

37

33

30

30

30

30

30

-

-

-

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of 300 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

569

569

569

569

569

549

530

510

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

304

294

274

255

245

225

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(23)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

12

12

12

12

12

12

17

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

33

33

33

33

33

35

35

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 800 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

470

470

470

470

461

441

412

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(47)

(45)

(42)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

235

235

206

177

167

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(21)

(18)

(17)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

12

10

8

6

8

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

23

23

23

23

23

23

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 800 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

530

530

530

530

510

491

481

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(49)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

265

265

226

196

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(23)

(20)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

10

8

6

5

8

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

23

22

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 800 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

570

570

570

570

549

530

510

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

304

304

304

255

226

206

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(31)

(31)

(26)

(23)

(21)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

10

8

6

5

4

7

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

23

22

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

590

590

590

590

569

549

530

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

333

333

333

333

284

245

226

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(29)

(25)

(23)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

10

8

6

5

4

7

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

23

22

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

615

615

615

615

598

579

559

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(61)

(59)

(57)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

395

395

395

333

294

275

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(34)

(30)

(28)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

10

8

6

5

4

7

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

23

22

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

20Kh

Rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

785

755

755

745

735

715

676

649

578

540

471

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(77)

(77)

(76)

(75)

(73)

(69)

(66)

(59)

(55)

(48)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

638

589

589

568

559

529

510

490

461

441

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(47)

(45)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

10

10

10

10

10

11

11

12

9

-

-

 

Z, %

40

38

38

38

38

38

40

40

42

42

46

-

-

 

Same, 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

785

755

726

726

726

726

726

687

608

540

471

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(70)

(62)

(55)

(48)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

638

589

549

540

530

530

530

520

491

461

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(60)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(50)

(47)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

8

8

8

8

9

10

10

11

12

-

-

 

Z, %

35

33

31

31

30

32

35

37

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

785

755

726

726

726

726

726

687

608

540

471

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(70)

(62)

(55)

(48)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

638

589

549

540

530

530

530

520

491

461

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(60)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(50)

(47)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

8

8

7

7

7

8

8

9

9

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

26

25

28

30

31

31

34

34

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 500 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

373

363

363

363

363

363

333

304

265

235

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(37)

(37)

(37)

(34)

(31)

(27)

(24)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

177

167

167

167

167

167

157

147

137

128

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

-

-

 

A, %

20

19

18

18

18

19

20

20

20

22

24

-

-

 

Z, %

45

42

40

40

38

41

45

48

51

51

51

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

412

402

402

402

402

402

373

333

294

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

196

196

196

196

196

196

177

167

157

147

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

-

-

 

A, %

20

18

16

16

16

18

20

20

20

20

20

-

-

 

Z, %

45

42

40

40

38

41

45

48

51

51

51

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

451

432

432

432

432

412

402

363

323

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(46)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(37)

(33)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

226

206

206

206

206

206

196

196

177

167

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(23)

(2)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

-

-

 

A, %

19

19

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

15

-

-

 

Z, %

42

39

37

37

35

39

42

44

48

48

48

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

500

491

491

491

491

491

461

412

353

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(47)

(42)

(36)

(33)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

245

235

235

235

235

235

216

206

196

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

17

16

15

15

15

18

20

20

20

20

20

-

-

 

Z, %

38

35

34

34

32

34

38

41

43

43

43

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 300 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

540

520

520

520

520

520

491

441

373

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(55)

(53)

(53)

(53)

(53)

(53)

(50)

(45)

(38)

(35)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

275

265

265

265

265

265

245

235

226

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(27)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

14

13

12

12

12

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

35

32

31

31

29

31

35

35

40

40

40

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

559

540

540

540

540

540

500

451

383

353

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(57)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(51)

(46)

(39)

(36)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

294

284

284

284

284

284

265

255

245

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(30)

(29)

(29)

(29)

(29)

(29)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

14

13

12

12

12

14

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

35

32

31

31

29

31

35

35

40

40

40

-

-

30Kh

Rods, strips with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

883

872

862

843

833

813

774

735

657

608

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(89)

(88)

(86)

(85)

(83)

(79)

(75)

(67)

(62)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

687

638

627

608

598

578

559

529

490

490

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(59)

(57)

(54)

(50)

(50)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

11

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

45

43

42

42

42

42

45

45

49

49

51

-

-

 

Same, over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

883

844

814

814

785

755

726

706

687

608

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(86)

(83)

(83)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(62)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

687

638

598

589

589

589

578

568

530

491

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(65)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(59)

(58)

(54)

(50)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

10

9

9

9

9

10

12

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

40

38

36

36

36

37

40

42

44

45

45

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

883

844

814

814

785

755

726

706

687

608

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(0)

(86)

(83)

(83)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(62)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

687

638

598

589

589

589

589

569

530

491

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(65)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(54)

(50)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

9

8

8

8

8

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

36

33

32

31

31

33

35

37

39

40

40

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness of up to 100 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

589

569

569

549

530

510

491

481

422

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(60)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(4)

(43)

(38)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

363

343

333

333

333

323

323

304

284

265

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(37)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(31)

(29)

(27)

-

-

 

A, %

17

16

16

16

16

18

19

20

20

20

20

-

-

 

Z, %

45

43

41

40

40

42

45

47

50

51

51

-

-

35Kh

Forgings with a diameter of up to 100 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

520

520

510

510

510

510

451

334

334

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(46)

(34)

(34)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

255

245

245

226

216

216

177

157

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(18)

(16)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

21

21

25

25

25

27

27

27

-

-

 

Z, %

40

38

36

33

33

35

40

44

50

53

53

-

-

 

Same, 300 to 500 and 500 to 800 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

520

520

510

510

510

510

451

334

334

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(46)

(34)

(34)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

255

245

245

226

216

216

177

157

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(18)

(16)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

559

559

549

549

549

549

481

353

358

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(56)

(56)

(56)

(56)

(49)

(36)

(36)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

304

294

284

284

255

245

245

206

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(29)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(21)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

590

590

559

559

559

559

500

373

373

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(51)

(38)

(38)

(31)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

333

333

323

304

294

294

275

265

226

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(23)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

608

608

589

589

589

589

520

392

392

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(62)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(53)

(40)

(40)

(33)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

373

363

353

343

333

314

304

265

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(27)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

628

608

608

608

608

540

402

402

333

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(55)

(41)

(41)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

432

422

412

392

392

373

353

343

294

245

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(30)

(25)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 50 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

655

647

647

628

628

628

628

559

412

412

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(64)

(64)

(64)

(64)

(57)

(42)

(42)

(35)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

481

471

461

432

432

412

392

383

323

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(44)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(39)

(33)

(28)

-

-

 

A, %

12

112

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 50 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

685

677

677

657

657

657

657

579

510

432

353

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(69)

(69)

(67)

(67)

(67)

(67)

(59)

(52)

(44)

(36)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

530

520

510

471

471

451

432

422

353

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(48)

(48)

(46)

(44)

(43)

(36)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

15

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

25

26

30

33

37

40

40

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 300 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

736

726

726

706

706

706

706

628

510

510

383

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(74)

(74)

(72)

(72)

(72)

(72)

(64)

(52)

(52)

(39)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

579

569

549

520

520

491

471

461

392

333

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(58)

(56)

(53)

(53)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(40)

(34)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

14

14

16

16

16

18

18

18

-

-

 

Z, %

40

38

36

33

30

35

40

44

50

53

53

-

-

40Kh

Rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

981

981

961

942

932

932

932

824

726

628

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(100)

(100)

(98)

(96)

(95)

(95)

(95)

(84)

(74)

(64)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

765

755

726

706

687

687

638

608

540

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(70)

(65)

(62)

(55)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

11

11

12

13

13

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

45

43

41

37

34

40

44

50

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

981

981

961

942

932

932

932

824

726

628

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(100)

(100)

(98)

(96)

(95)

(95)

(95)

(84)

(74)

(64)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

765

755

726

706

687

687

638

608

540

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(70)

(65)

(62)

(55)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

8

8

8

9

9

10

10

10

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

40

38

36

33

30

36

39

44

49

49

49

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

981

981

961

942

932

932

932

824

726

628

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(100)

(100)

(98)

(96)

(95)

(95)

(95)

(84)

(74)

(64)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

765

755

726

706

687

687

638

608

540

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(70)

(65)

(62)

(55)

(44)

-

-

 

A, %

7

7

7

8

8

8

9

9

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

35

33

32

29

26

31

34

39

43

43

43

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

736

726

726

706

697

697

697

628

540

461

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(74)

(74)

(72)

(71)

(71)

(71)

(64)

(55)

(47)

(47)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

569

569

549

530

500

500

441

421

392

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(51)

(51)

(45)

(43)

(40)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

14

14

15

16

16

17

17

17

-

-

 

Z, %

40

37

36

33

31

35

40

44

49

54

54

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter or thickness of 500 to 800 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

461

451

441

441

441

392

343

304

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(40)

(35)

(31)

(31)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

226

226

216

216

196

186

167

137

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(19)

(17)

(14)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

16

16

18

19

19

20

20

20

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Same, 300 to 800 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

520

520

510

500

500

500

451

392

334

334

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(51)

(46)

(40)

(34)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

255

245

235

235

236

216

196

157

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(20)

(16)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

13

13

14

15

15

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Same, up to 800 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

559

559

549

540

540

540

481

422

363

363

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(49)

(43)

(37)

(37)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

304

294

284

275

275

255

245

216

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(22)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 500 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

590

590

569

559

559

559

491

432

373

314

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(50)

(44)

(38)

(32)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

334

333

314

304

304

294

275

265

235

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(24)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Same, up to 500 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

608

608

589

589

589

589

520

462

343

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(62)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(53)

(47)

(35)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

373

363

353

343

333

314

304

265

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(27)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

628

608

608

608

608

540

471

412

334

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(55)

(48)

(42)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

432

422

412

392

392

392

363

343

304

245

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(35)

(31)

(25)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

655

647

647

628

628

628

628

549

491

422

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(64)

(64)

(64)

(64)

(56)

(50)

(43)

(35)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

471

451

441

432

422

402

392

334

265

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(41)

(40)

(34)

(27)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

28

27

25

23

26

30

33

37

41

41

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

685

687

677

657

647

647

647

589

510

441

363

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(6)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(60)

(52)

(45)

(37)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

530

520

500

491

471

461

441

422

373

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(45)

(43)

(38)

(30)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

45

42

40

37

34

39

45

49

55

61

61

-

-

45Kh

Forgings with a diameter of up to 100 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

559

559

540

540

540

540

481

363

363

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(49)

(37)

(37)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

294

294

284

275

265

255

245

216

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(22)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

17

17

17

19

19

20

22

22

23

21

23

-

-

 

Z, %

38

34

34

32

28

34

38

42

38

51

55

-

-

 

Same, 300 to 800 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

559

559

540

540

540

540

481

363

363

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(49)

(37)

(37)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

294

294

284

275

265

256

245

216

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(22)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 800 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

579

579

559

559

559

559

491

373

373

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(50)

(38)

(38)

(31)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

334

324

314

304

304

294

275

265

235

186

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(24)

(19)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 500 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

608

608

589

589

589

589

520

392

392

324

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(62)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(53)

(40)

(40)

(33)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

383

373

363

353

343

333

314

304

265

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(27)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 500 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

628

608

608

608

608

540

402

402

334

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(62)

(55)

(41)

(41)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

432

422

412

392

392

373

353

343

294

245

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(30)

(25)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

650

647

647

618

618

618

618

559

422

422

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(57)

(43)

(43)

(35)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

471

461

461

441

432

412

402

383

333

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(39)

(34)

(28)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

685

677

677

647

647

647

64

559

441

441

353

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(69)

(69)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(57)

(45)

(45)

(36)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

520

510

510

491

471

451

441

422

373

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(45)

(43)

(38)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

735

716

716

697

697

697

697

618

471

471

383

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(73)

(71)

(71)

(71)

(71)

(63)

(48)

(48)

(39)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

569

549

549

530

520

500

481

461

402

333

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(56)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(49)

(47)

(41)

(34)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

40

43

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

785

765

765

746

746

746

746

647

491

491

402

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(78)

(76)

(76)

(76)

(76)

(66)

(50)

(50)

(41)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

618

598

579

569

569

549

510

491

441

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(61)

(59)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(52)

(50)

(45)

(35)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

12

12

13

14

14

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

27

27

25

22

27

30

33

30

43

43

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

1030

1000

1000

981

981

981

981

844

638

638

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(105)

(102)

(102)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(86)

(65)

(65)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

804

785

755

746

746

716

667

38

579

451

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(82)

(80)

(77)

(76)

(76)

(73)

(68)

(65)

(59)

(46)

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

9

10

10

11

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

45

40

40

37

33

40

45

49

45

60

64

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

1030

1000

1000

981

981

981

981

844

638

638

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(105)

(102)

(102)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(86)

(65)

(65)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

804

785

755

746

746

716

667

638

579

451

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(82)

(80)

(77)

(76)

(76)

(73)

(68)

(65)

(59)

(46)

-

-

 

A, %

7

7

7

8

8

9

9

9

9

9

9

-

-

 

Z, %

40

36

36

33

29

36

40

44

40

53

57

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

1030

1000

1000

981

981

981

981

844

638

638

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(105)

(102)

(102)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(100)

(86)

(65)

(65)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

804

785

755

746

746

716

667

638

579

451

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(82)

(80)

(77)

(76)

(76)

(73)

(68)

(65)

(59)

(46)

-

-

 

A, %

6

6

6

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

8

-

-

 

Z, %

35

31

31

29

26

31

35

38

35

47

50

-

-

12KhM

Sheets with a thickness of 4 to 6 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

432

432

432

432

402

373

333

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

226

206

196

186

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

22

21

21

19

18

16

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, 60 to 130 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

432

432

432

432

402

373

333

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

216

206

196

147

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(15)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

17

15

15

13

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

32

33

33

31

29

29

28

28

31

31

31

-

-

15KhM

Seamless hot-rolled pipes with an outer diameter of 10 to 465 mm, with a wall thickness of 2 to 32 mm

RTm, MPa

441

441

431

431

421

421

412

392

372

343

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(35)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

226

226

226

226

226

226

216

206

196

191

186

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19.5)

(19)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

20

20

19

19

18

18

17

16

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

50

50

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

390

390

383

383

373

363

363

363

353

314

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(37)

(36)

(32)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

195

195

186

177

167

137

127

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(17)

(14)

(13)

-

-

 

A, %

23

23

23

23

23

22

22

21

21

20

18

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

55

55

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 300 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

430

430

422

422

412

402

402

402

392

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(35)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

215

215

215

215

215

206

196

186

147

147

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(15)

(15)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

20

20

19

19

18

18

17

16

-

-

 

Z, %

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

53

53

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

470

470

461

461

451

441

441

441

432

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(38)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

245

245

245

245

245

235

226

216

167

167

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(17)

(17)

-

-

 

A, %

19

19

19

19

19

18

18

17

17

16

15

-

-

 

Z, %

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

46

46

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of up to 500 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

530

530

520

520

510

500

500

500

491

422

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(51)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(43)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

275

275

275

275

275

265

255

235

196

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(24)

(20)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

569

569

559

559

540

530

530

530

510

451

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(58)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(52)

(46)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

314

314

314

314

314

304

284

275

216

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(31)

(29)

(28)

(22)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

589

589

579

579

559

549

549

549

530

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(56)

(56)

(56)

(54)

(47)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

343

343

343

343

343

323

314

294

235

235

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(32)

(30)

(24)

(24)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

615

615

608

608

589

579

579

579

559

481

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(62)

(62)

(60)

(59)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(49)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

395

395

395

395

373

353

343

275

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(28)

(28)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of up to 100 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

635

635

628

628

608

598

598

598

579

491

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(65)

(65)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(59)

(50)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

440

440

440

440

440

422

402

383

304

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(43)

(41)

(39)

(31)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

655

655

655

647

647

628

618

618

618

598

491

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(67)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(64)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(6)

(50)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

490

490

490

490

471

451

422

343

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(43)

(35)

(35)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

 

Z, %

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

35

35

-

-

20KhM

Forgings with a thickness of up to 100 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

579

579

569

569

559

559

559

559

500

461

451

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(59)

(58)

(58)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(57)

(51)

(47)

(46)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

345

345

345

333

333

333

333

333

304

284

265

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(31)

(29)

(27)

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

15

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

 

Z, %

45

44

43

42

41

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

 

Same, up to 50 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

608

608

598

598

589

589

589

589

481

471

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(49)

(48)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

395

395

383

383

383

383

343

323

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(39)

(39)

(35)

(33)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

17

16

15

14

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

43

42

41

40

40

40

40

45

45

-

-

20KhMA

Forgings and sheets with a thickness of over 150 to 300 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

576

544

520

484

452

440

392

356

323

288

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(56)

(53)

(49)

(46)

(45)

(40)

(36)

(33)

(29)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

345

339

333

323

316

304

294

294

268

248

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(34.5)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(27)

(25)

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

14

13

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

38

37

36

36

36

36

36

36

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 150 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

628

618

588

540

516

490

460

420

380

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(64)

(63)

(60)

(55)

(53)

(50)

(47)

(43)

(39)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

440

440

435

428

420

402

392

372

348

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43.5)

(43)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(33)

-

-

 

A, %

14

13

12

11

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

38

37

36

36

36

36

36

36

40

-

-

20KhML

Castings

RTm, MPa

500

490

480

475

470

460

450

440

430

425

410

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(51)

(50)

(49)

(48.5)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

400

395

390

385

380

370

360

350

340

323

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(41)

(40.5)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(33)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

13

15

15

15

15

15

15-

15

-

-

 

Z, %

27

28

30

32

35

40

52

55

55

55

55

-

-

20KhMFL

Castings

RTm, MPa

491

491

491

491

491

485

480

480

461

452

400

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(49.5)

(49)

(49)

(47)

(46)

(41)

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

314

314

314

290

280

270

270

270

270

270

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

-

-

 

 

A, %

15

18

17

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

 

Z, %

30

30

28

28

32

33

34

34

34

34

34

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

932

903

893

863

853

824

814

736

736

736

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(92)

(91)

(88)

(87)

(84)

(83)

(75)

(75)

(75)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

736

706

687

677

657

647

628

598

559

510

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(75)

(72)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

(64)

(61)

(57)

(52)

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

-

-

 

Same, over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

932

903

893

863

853

824

814

736

736

736

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(92)

(91)

(88)

(87)

(84)

(83)

(75)

(75)

(75)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

736

706

687

677

657

647

628

598

559

510

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(75)

(72)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

(64)

(61)

(57)

(52)

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

932

903

893

863

853

824

814

736

736

736

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(92)

(91)

(88)

(87)

(84)

(83)

(75)

(75)

(75)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

736

706

687

677

651

647

628

598

559

510

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(75)

(72)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

(64)

(61)

(57)

(52)

-

-

 

A, %

8

8

8

8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

-

-

 

Z, %

35

34

34

34

34

34

34

34

34

34

34

-

-

30KhMA

Pipes with an outer diameter of 25 to 710 mm, with a wall thickness of 2.5 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

589

569

559

540

530

530

530

520

510

432

402

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(44)

(41)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

392

373

343

324

324

324

314

314

294

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(35)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(30)

(30)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 100 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

618

608

598

589

559

549

540

540

530

471

422

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(55)

(54)

(48)

(43)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

373

353

323

323

323

314

314

294

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(30)

(28)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 300 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

491

482

474

467

443

435

428

428

429

374

333

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(45)

(44)

(43.5)

(43.5)

(43)

(38)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

425

415

390

365

345

323

294

275

265

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(37)

(35)

(33)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(26)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of 100 to 200 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

588

578

568

559

539

529

529

519

500

461

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(47)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

461

441

402

382

367

343

323

304

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(47)

(45)

(41)

(39)

(37)

(35)

(33)

(31)

(30)

-

-

 

A, %

15

13

13

13

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

736

716

716

687

676

667

657

647

638

559

500

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(73)

(70)

(69)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(65)

(57)

(51)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

569

559

510

461

481

412

392

392

353

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(52)

(47)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(36)

(35)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

38

37

37

37

37

37

37

37

37

37

37

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

785

775

755

746

706

697

687

687

669

598

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(77)

(76)

(72)

(71)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(61)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

617

608

568

529

480

461

441

441

412

382

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(58)

(54)

(49)

(47)

(45)

(45)

(42)

(39)

-

-

 

A, %

13

12

12

12

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

42

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

38

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

873

844

844

824

824

804

706

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(89)

(86)

(85)

(84)

(84)

(82)

(72)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

716

697

657

608

608

598

598

598

559

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(71)

(67)

(62)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(57)

(53)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

49

49

49

49

49

49

49

49

49

49

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of over 80 to 150 mm;

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

873

844

844

824

824

804

706

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(89)

(86)

(86)

(84)

(84)

(82)

(72)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

716

697

657

608

608

598

598

598

659

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(71)

(67)

(62)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(57)

(53)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

873

844

844

824

824

804

706

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(89)

(86)

(86)

(84)

(84)

(82)

(72)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

716

697

657

608

608

598

598

598

559

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(71)

(67)

(62)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(61)

(57)

(53)

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

39

-

-

35KhM

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of 300 to 800 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

451

441

441

432

422

412

392

353

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(36)

(31)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

226

226

226

216

206

196

186

177

157

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(5)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(16)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, 300 to 800 mm, KP275*

RTm, MPa

530

520

510

500

491

491

491

471

441

402

333

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(41)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

255

245

245

235

226

206

196

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(20)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

30

30

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of up to 800 mm, KP315*

RTm, MPa

570

559

549

540

530

520

510

500

471

432

363

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(48)

(44)

(37)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

304

294

294

284

275

265

245

235

226

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(24)

(23)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, up to 800 mm, KP345*

RTm, MPa

590

590

569

559

549

540

530

520

491

451

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(50)

(46)

(38)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

345

333

323

314

314

294

294

294

245

245

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(25)

(25)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, 50 to 800 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

615

608

596

589

589

569

559

549

510

471

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(52)

(48)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

373

363

353

343

333

323

294

294

245

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(30)

(30)

(25)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, 50 to 500 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

618

598

598

589

589

559

530

491

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(63)

(61)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(54)

(50)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

432

422

412

402

392

392

363

323

314

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(33)

(32)

(30)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of up to 300 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

657

647

638

628

608

598

589

579

540

500

422

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(66)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(59)

(55)

(51)

(43)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

471

461

461

441

432

412

402

363

353

304

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(37)

(36)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, up to 50 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

685

685

667

647

638

628

618

608

569

530

432

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(66)

(65)

(64)

(63)

(62)

(58)

(54)

(44)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

520

510

500

491

471

461

441

392

392

343

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(45)

(40)

(40)

(35)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

735

726

716

697

687

687

667

647

608

569

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(74)

(73)

(71)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(66)

(62)

(58)

(47)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

569

559

549

530

520

491

491

432

422

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(54)

(53)

(50)

(50)

(44)

(43)

(38)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

30

31

31

31

31

31

32

32

32

32

32

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

883

883

853

844

824

785

716

589

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(90)

(90)

(87)

(86)

(84)

(80)

(73)

(60)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

814

795

785

755

736

716

687

618

598

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(83)

(81)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(63)

(61)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

45

46

46

46

47

47

48

48

48

48

48

-

-

 

Rods and strips with a thickness or diameter of over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

883

883

853

844

824

785

716

589

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(90)

(90)

(87)

(86)

(84)

(80)

(73)

(60)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

814

795

785

755

736

716

687

618

598

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(83)

(81)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(63)

(61)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

40

41

41

41

42

42

42

42

42

42

42

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

932

912

903

883

883

853

844

824

785

716

589

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(95)

(93)

(92)

(90)

(90)

(87)

(86)

(84)

(80)

(73)

(60)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

814

795

785

755

736

716

687

618

698

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(83)

(81)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(63)

(61)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

-

-

 

Z, %

35

36

36

36

37

37

37

37

37

37

37

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 300 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

491

479

469

459

459

449

439

428

408

367

316

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(37)

(32)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

423

407

407

407

389

371

353

333

319

283

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(29)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

40

41

41

41

41

41

43

43

43

43

43

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

784

765

749

732

732

717

701

701

651

586

505

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(76)

(75)

(75)

(73)

(71)

(71)

(66)

(60)

(51)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

611

588

588

588

562

536

500

484

460

408

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(62)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(55)

(51)

(49)

(47)

(42)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

39

39

39

41

41

41

41

41

41

-

-

35KhMA

Forgings with a thickness of 100 to 300 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

618

608

598

598

579

569

559

530

489

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(54)

(49)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

422

402

402

402

392

373

353

333

314

284

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(29)

-

-

 

A, %

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

45

46

46

46

46

46

48

48

48

48

48

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

618

598

589

579

579

559

549

540

510

461

402

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(61)

(60)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(52)

(47)

(41)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

373

353

353

353

353

333

314

294

275

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(26)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

40

41

41

41

41

41

43

43

43

43

43

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of 100 to 200 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

638

618

608

598

598

579

569

559

530

481

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(54)

(49)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

471

441

441

441

432

412

392

373

343

314

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(35)

(32)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

40

41

41

41

41

41

43

43

43

43

43

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

736

706

697

687

687

667

657

647

608

549

471

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(72)

(71)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(62)

(56)

(48)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

559

530

530

530

520

491

471

441

422

383

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(57)

(54)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(43)

(39)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

38

39

39

39

39

39

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Same, up to 300 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

785

765

755

736

726

726

726

697

651

598

491

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(75)

(74)

(74)

(74)

(71)

(67)

(61)

(50)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

618

618

589

569

569

549

520

481

451

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(63)

(60)

(58)

(58)

(56)

(53)

(49)

(46)

(42)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

38

38

39

39

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

10Kh2M

Sheets with a thickness of 6 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

392

373

363

353

343

333

323

314

304

294

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

294

294

275

265

255

245

245

245

245

245

216

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(22)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

18

17

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

62

61

61

61

61

61

60

60

60

60

60

-

-

 

Same, over 50 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

343

333

333

323

323

314

314

304

294

294

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

196

196

196

177

177

167

167

167

142

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(14.5)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

18

17

16

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

52

52

50

55

-

-

 

Seamless cold-rolled pipes with a diameter of 12 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

392

392

363

353

343

333

323

314

304

294

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

226

216

216

216

216

216

206

176

142

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(21)

(18)

(14.5)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

18

17

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

 

Z, %

62

61

61

61

61

61

60

60

60

60

60

-

-

12Kh2M, 10Kh2M

Forgings with a thickness of up to 400 mm

RTm, MPa

343

343

343

323

323

314

314

304

304

294

255

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

186

186

177

177

177

177

177

177

177

142

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(14.5)

-

-

 

A, %

20

19

18

17

17

17

17

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

50

50

-

-

12MKh

Forgings with a thickness of 20 to 130 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

432

432

432

432

402

373

333

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

235

235

235

216

206

206

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

16

16

16

15

-

-

 

Z, %

32

33

33

31

29

29

28

28

31

31

31

-

-

 

Same, up to 25 mm; rods, strip with a thickness or diameter of up to 90 mm

RTm, MPa

412

412

402

402

392

383

383

373

353

314

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(36)

(32)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

235

235

235

216

206

206

196

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(20)

-

-

 

A, %

21

20

20

18

17

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

43

42

41

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Rods, strips with a thickness or diameter of over 90 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

412

412

402

402

392

383

383

373

353

314

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(36)

(32)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

216

206

196

186

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

19

18

18

16

15

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

38

37

36

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

412

412

402

402

392

383

383

373

353

314

275

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(36)

(32)

(28)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

216

206

196

186

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

17

15

14

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

35

34

33

33

32

31

31

31

31

31

31

-

-

 

Sheets with a thickness of 4 to 6 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

432

432

432

432

402

373

333

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

216

206

196

186

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

24

23

23

21

20

17

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

 

Z, %

51

52

52

50

46

46

45

45

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, 20 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

432

432

432

432

402

373

333

294

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(41)

(38)

(34)

(30)

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

235

235

226

226

216

206

196

186

177

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(18)

-

-

 

 

A, %

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

17

17

17

16

-

-

 

 

Z, %

35

36

36

34

32

32

30

30

34

34

34

-

-

30KhGSA

Forgings with a diameter of 50 to 100 mm, KP440*

RTm, MPa

635

628

608

598

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(61)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

440

440

422

402

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(45)

(43)

(41)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

16

16

15

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

43

42

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 300 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

655

647

628

618

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(66)

(64)

(63)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

471

451

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(46)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

13

13

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

39

38

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

685

677

657

647

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

540

510

500

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(55)

(52)

(51)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

13

13

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

39

38

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

735

726

706

697

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(74)

(72)

(71)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

590

559

540

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

42

39

38

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, up to 100 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

785

765

755

746

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(76)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

640

608

589

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(65)

(62)

(60)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

42

39

39

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings with a diameter of up to 100 mm, KP685*

RTm, MPa

835

824

795

785

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(84)

(81)

(80)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

685

685

657

628

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(64)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

39

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Stampings, rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of up to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

1080

1060

1020

1010

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(110)

(108)

(104)

(103)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

834

795

755

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(85)

(81)

(77)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

9

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

44

43

42

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, over 80 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

1080

1060

1020

1010

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(110)

(108)

(104)

(103)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

834

795

755

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(85)

(81)

(77)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

8

8

8

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

39

38

37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

1080

1060

1020

1010

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(110)

(108)

(104)

(103)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

834

795

755

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(85)

(81)

(77)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

7

7

7

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

34

33

33

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10KhSND

Cold-rolled, hot-rolled pipes with an outer Æ = 60 ÷ 168 mm, with a wall thickness of 6 to 11 mm

RTm, MPa

461

441

432

422

422

422

422

422

412

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(47)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(42)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

294

275

255

245

245

245

226

206

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(23)

(20)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

14

13

14

14

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

42

41

41

41

41

38

35

35

35

-

-

-

-

 

Shaped profiles with a section of 5 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

530

510

500

491

491

491

491

491

491

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

373

353

333

323

323

323

323

275

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(28)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

19

16

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

48

47

45

44

41

38

38

37

-

-

-

-

 

Rolled products, thick steel plates with a thickness of 4 to 40 mm

RTm, MPa

510

500

481

471

471

471

471

471

461

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(51)

(49)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(47)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

373

353

323

314

314

314

314

284

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(33)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(29)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

19

16

15

16

16

15

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

39

38

38

38

36

35

32

32

32

-

-

-

-

10KhN1M

Sheet with a thickness of 6 to 40 mm

RTm, MPa

540

530

520

500

49

491

461

451

441

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(47)

(46)

(45)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

432

422

412

402

392

373

363

353

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

16

16

13

13

13

13

13

14

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

45

45

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

 

Seamless hot-worked pipes with an outer Æ = 60 ÷ 168 mm, with a wall thickness of 6 to 32 mm

RTm, MPa

491

491

471

451

441

432

412

402

392

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(40)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

333

323

314

304

294

294

294

275

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

45

45

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

16GNMA

Sheets

RTm, MPa

491

491

491

491

471

471

471

461

451

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(48)

(48)

(47)

(46)

-

-

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

323

323

314

294

275

265

255

255

245

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(26)

(25)

-

-

-

-

 

 

A, %

20

20

20

18

18

17

17

16

16

-

-

-

-

 

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

-

-

10GN2MFA

Forgings, sheets with a thickness of up to 300 mm

RTm, MPa

540

520

510

510

510

491

491

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(50)

(50)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

333

323

314

304

304

304

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(31)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

16

16

16

15

15

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

54

53

53

52

51

50

-

-

-

-

-

10GN2MFAL

Castings

RTm, MPa

540

530

510

510

510

491

491

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

(50)

(50)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

333

323

314

304

304

304

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(31)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

A, %

16

16

16

16

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

Z, %

40

40

38

37

36

35

35

35

-

-

-

-

-

12Kh1MF

Hot-rolled steel with a thickness or diameter of up to 90 mm

RTm, MPa

471

461

461

451

451

441

441

432

422

392

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(40)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

255

255

255

255

255

245

235

226

206

206

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(21)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

15

14

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, over 90 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

471

461

461

451

451

441

441

432

422

392

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(40)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

255

255

255

255

255

245

235

226

206

206

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(21)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

19

18

17

16

15

14

14

14

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

471

461

461

451

451

441

441

432

422

392

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(40)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

255

255

255

255

255

245

235

226

206

206

177

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(21)

(18)

-

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

15

15

14

13

13

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness of 100 to 300 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

390

383

383

373

373

363

363

353

353

323

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(33)

(33)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

195

195

195

195

186

177

177

157

157

137

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(16)

(16)

(14)

-

-

 

A, %

23

22

22

21

21

18

18

17

17

17

17

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness of up to 800 mm, KP215*

RTm, MPa

430

422

422

412

412

402

402

392

392

353

353

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(36)

(36)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

215

215

215

215

215

206

196

196

177

177

147

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(18)

(15)

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

15

15

15

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

-

 

Same, 100 to 500 mm, KP245*

RTm, MPa

470

461

461

451

451

441

441

432

422

392

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(40)

(40)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

245

245

245

245

235

216

216

196

196

167

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(17)

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

15

15

15

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

-

 

Seamless hot-rolled pipes Æ = 57 ÷ 465 mm, with a wall thickness of 3.5 to 60 mm; cold-worked Æ = 10 ÷ 108 mm, with a thickness of 2 to 13 mm

RTm, MPa

441

432

432

422

422

412

412

392

372

343

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(35)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

275

275

275

275

265

255

245

216

214

186

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(22)

(21)

(19)

-

-

 

A, %

19

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

19

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

25Kh1MF

Hot-rolled, forged, calibrated steel with a diameter or square side of up to 90 mm

RTm, MPa

883

873

834

814

804

775

765

726

716

681

628

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(89)

(85)

(83)

(82)

(79)

(78)

(74)

(73)

(70)

(64)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

706

697

657

647

618

608

569

559

540

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(72)

(71)

(67)

(66)

(63)

(62)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

14

13

12

12

12

12

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

51

52

53

54

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, over 90 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

883

873

834

814

804

775

765

726

716

681

628

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(89)

(85)

(83)

(82)

(79)

(78)

(74)

(73)

(70)

(64)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

706

697

657

647

618

608

569

559

540

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(72)

(71)

(67)

(66)

(63)

(62)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

45

46

47

48

49

49

49

49

49

49

49

-

-

 

Same, over 150 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

883

873

834

814

804

775

765

726

716

687

628

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(89)

(85)

(83)

(82)

(79)

(78)

(74)

(73)

(70)

(64)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

736

706

697

657

647

618

608

569

559

540

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(72)

(71)

(67)

(66)

(63)

(62)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

11

10

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

40

41

42

43

44

44

44

44

44

44

44

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 200 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

589

579

549

540

540

510

510

481

471

461

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(56)

(55)

(55)

(52)

(52)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

471

461

432

432

412

402

343

343

323

323

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(44)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(33)

-

-

 

A, %

14

13

11

11

11

11

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

51

52

53

54

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 200 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

736

716

687

667

667

628

628

598

589

569

510

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(68)

(68)

(64)

(64)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(52)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

559

549

520

510

491

481

451

441

432

422

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(57)

(56)

(53)

(52)

(50)

(49)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(43)

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

51

52

53

54

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, up to 200 mm, KP640*

RTm, MPa

785

775

736

716

706

687

687

638

628

608

549

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(75)

(73)

(72)

(70)

(70)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(56)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

608

598

569

559

540

530

491

481

471

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(62)

(61)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(54)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

51

52

53

54

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

 

Same, up to 200 mm, KP670*

RTm, MPa

785

775

775

765

765

755

725

695

645

589

529

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(79)

(78)

(78)

(77)

(74)

(71)

(66)

(60)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

670

638

638

628

608

589

559

520

490

452

402

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(65)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(60)

(57)

(53)

(50)

(46)

(41)

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

14

14

14

14

14

16

16

17

17

-

-

 

Z, %

50

51

50

50

50

50

50

50

55

55

60

-

-

15Kh1M1F

Seamless hot-rolled pipes with an outer Æ = 57 ÷ 465 mm, with a wall thickness of 3.5 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

491

491

491

491

491

471

471

441

412

392

333

323

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(48)

(45)

(42)

(40)

(34)

(33)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

304

304

304

284

275

265

255

235

226

205

196

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(24)

(23)

(21)

(20)

-

 

A, %

18

17

16

15

15

14

14

14

14

14

15

15

-

 

Z, %

50

50

46

46

46

46

46

46

46

48

50

50

-

15Kh1M1FL

Castings

RTm, MPa

441

441

441

441

441

441

422

412

402

392

392

373

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(38)

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

304

304

294

284

275

255

255

235

226

177

166

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(26)

(26)

(24)

(23)

(18)

(17)

-

 

 

A, %

15

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

 

 

Z, %

30

30

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

31

-

12Kh2MFA

Sheets with a thickness of up to 180 mm, forgings with a thickness of up to 150 mm, KP395**

RTm, MPa

540

530

520

500

500

491

491

491

461

432

412

-

-

12Kh2MFA-A

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(47)

(44)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

432

422

422

412

412

402

395

395

395

395

363

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(31)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, KP490**

RTm, MPa

638

618

608

598

589

569

559

549

540

500

481

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(51)

(49)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

530

520

520

510

500

500

490

490

490

480

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(49)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

12

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

38

38

38

-

-

18Kh2MFA

Sheets, forgings with a thickness of 160 to 400 mm, KP490**

RTm, MPa

638

618

608

598

589

569

559

549

540

530

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

530

520

520

510

500

500

490

490

490

481

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(49)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

12

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

38

38

38

-

-

15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A

Sheets, forgings with a thickness of 400 to 650 mm, KP295**

RTm, MPa

441

432

422

412

402

392

392

392

373

353

333

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(34)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

383

363

353

334

324

304

295

284

265

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(37)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(27)

(26)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

13

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

54

54

53

52

51

50

47

47

47

-

-

 

Same, 161 to 400 mm, KP395**

RTm, MPa

540

530

520

500

491

481

471

461

461

432

412

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(44)

(42)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

432

422

422

422

412

402

402

395

395

395

363

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(37)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

47

47

47

-

-

25Kh2MFA

Forgings, sheets (plates), parent sheets and stamped blanks with a diameter or thickness of up to 70 mm, KP395**

RTm, MPa

540

530

520

500

491

481

471

461

461

441

441

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(45)

(45)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

432

432

422

412

402

402

395

395

395

373

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, up to 750 mm, KP490**

RTm, MPa

638

618

608

598

589

569

559

549

540

530

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

530

530

520

510

500

500

490

490

471

461

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

12

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

 

Forgings, sheets (plates), parent sheets and stamped blanks with a diameter or thickness of up to 750 mm, KP590**

RTm, MPa

736

716

706

697

677

667

647

638

618

608

598

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(72)

(71)

(69)

(68)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

628

628

618

608

598

598

590

590

549

540

540

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(64)

(64)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(56)

(55)

(55)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

25Kh2M1F

Hot-rolled and forged rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of 90 mm, fastener blanks with a diameter or thickness of up to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

785

765

765

755

745

735

725

687

677

647

608

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(78)

(77)

(76)

(75)

(74)

(70)

(69)

(66)

(62)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

667

667

651

647

647

628

618

598

578

559

539

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(64)

(63)

(61)

(59)

(57)

(55)

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

11

11

10

10

10

10

10

10

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

49

49

49

49

50

51

54

-

-

 

Hot-rolled and forged rods and strips with a diameter or thickness of over 90 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

785

765

755

736

726

697

687

677

657

647

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(75)

(74)

(71)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

667

667

667

647

638

618

608

598

589

579

579

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(68)

(68)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(59)

(59)

-

-

 

A, %

10

9

9

9

9

9

9

8

8

8

8

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

 

Same, but with a diameter or thickness of over 150 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

785

765

765

736

726

697

687

677

657

647

638

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(75)

(74)

(71)

(70)

(69)

(67)

(66)

(65)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

667

667

667

647

638

618

608

598

589

579

579

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(68)

(68)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(59)

(59)

-

-

 

A, %

9

8

8

8

8

8

8

7

7

7

7

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

 

Forgings with a thickness or diameter of 100 to 300 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

67

638

628

608

598

579

569

559

540

500

500

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(55)

(51)

(51)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

471

461

451

441

432

422

412

392

392

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

41

41

42

42

42

42

43

43

43

-

-

25Kh3MFA

Forgings, sheets (plates), parent sheets and stamped blanks with a thickness of 450 to 600 mm, KP395**

RTm, MPa

540

530

520

500

491

481

471

461

461

441

441

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(45)

(45)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

432

432

422

412

402

402

395

395

395

373

373

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12

12

12

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, 450 to 600 mm, KP490**

RTm, MPa

638

618

608

598

589

569

559

549

540

530

520

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

530

530

520

510

500

500

490

490

471

461

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

12

11

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

 

Same, 450 to 600 mm, KP590**

RTm, MPa

736

716

706

697

687

667

647

638

618

608

598

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(72)

(71)

(70)

(68)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(61)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

628

628

618

608

598

598

590

590

549

540

540

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(64)

(64)

(63)

(62)

(61)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(56)

(55)

(55)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

 

Same, 450 to 600 mm, KP685**

RTm, MPa

834

814

804

795

785

765

746

736

697

687

677

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(83)

(82)

(81)

(80)

(78)

(76)

(75)

(71)

(70)

(69)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

729

729

716

706

706

697

685

685

638

628

628

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(74)

(74)

(73)

(72)

(72)

(71)

(70)

(70)

(65)

(64)

(64)

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

10

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

45

45

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

10Kh2M1FB

Forgings with a thickness of at least 100 and not more than 400 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

343

337

328

319

310

301

292

282

273

264

255

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34.4)

(33.5)

(32.5)

(32)

(31)

(29.8)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

193

189

189

179

179

170

166

161

156

152

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.6)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(17.3)

(16.4)

(16.2)

(16)

(15)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

19

19

18

17

17

16

15

14

14

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, KP245*

RTm, MPa

392

381

363

345

328

310

292

274

267

267

252

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(37)

(35.2)

(33.5)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

242

238

233

229

225

220

215

206

196

186

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24.7)

(24)

(23.7)

(23.3)

(23)

(22.5)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(19)

-

-

 

A, %

20

19

18

17

15

15

14

13

13

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

-

-

 

Sheets with a thickness of up to 150 mm, KP195*

RTm, MPa

343

337

328

319

310

300

291

282

273

263

254

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34.4)

(33.4)

(32.6)

(32)

(30.6)

(30)

(28.7)

(28)

(27)

(26)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

195

193

188

188

179

179

170

165

161

156

152

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.6)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(17.3)

(16.8)

(16.4)

(16)

(15.5)

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

195

19

18

18

17

17

16

16

15

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

50

50

50

-

-

 

Same, KP245*

RTm, MPa

392

385

376

364

353

342

331

320

309

298

294

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(38.3)

(37)

(36)

(34.8)

(33.7)

(32.6)

(31.5)

(30.4)

(30)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

244

241

238

235

231

228

225

222

218

208

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24.9)

(24.5)

(24.2)

(24)

(23.5)

(23)

(22.9)

(22.7)

(22)

(21)

-

-

 

A, %

20

195

187

18

17

16

15

15

14

13

13

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

45

45

45

-

-

15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A

Forgings, sheets, stampings with a diameter or thickness of 400 to 650 mm, KP195**

RTm, MPa

549

539

529

519

510

500

500

491

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(51)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

441

431

421

412

402

402

402

395

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

14

14

14

13

13

13

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

54

53

52

50

48

46

45

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 160 to 400 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

608

593

588

578

568

559

549

539

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

480

470

461

451

451

451

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(46)

(46)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

54

53

52

51

51

51

50

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings, sheets, stampings with a diameter or thickness of 400 to 650 mm, KP295**

RTm, MPa

441

432

422

412

402

402

402

392

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

392

373

363

363

363

353

295

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(37)

(36)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

54

54

53

52

51

50

50

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, 160 to 400 mm, KP395**

RTm, MPa

549

549

549

530

520

510

510

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(56)

(56)

(56)

(54)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

432

412

402

395

395

395

395

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

13

13

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

49

49

48

47

46

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

15Kh3NMFA, 15Kh3NMFA-A

Sheets, forgings with a thickness of up to 450 mm

RTm, MPa

589

569

540

520

520

510

500

491

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(58)

(55)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(51)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

491

471

451

441

441

441

422

392

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(43)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

-

-

-

-

-

36Kh2N2MFA

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 200 mm, KP395*

RTm, MPa

618

618

618

598

569

569

540

510

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(63)

(63)

(63)

(61)

(58)

(58)

(55)

(52)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

395

383

363

353

343

245

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(37)

(36)

(35)

(25)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 200 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

657

657

657

638

598

598

569

540

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(67)

(67)

(65)

(61)

(61)

(58)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

490

481

451

441

432

402

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(49)

(46)

(45)

(44)

(41)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP590*

RTm, MPa

687

687

687

667

638

628

598

569

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(65)

(64)

(61)

(58)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

590

590

569

540

530

510

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(55)

(54)

(52)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP640

RTm, MPa

686

686

656

627

627

607

597

578

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(59)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

640

615

583

583

562

551

476

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(65)

(63)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(56)

(48)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP685*

RTm, MPa

785

785

785

755

736

726

687

657

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(80)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(74)

(70)

(67)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

685

685

685

657

638

628

589

540

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(65)

(64)

(60)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP785*

RTm, MPa

883

883

883

853

824

814

785

736

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(87)

(84)

(83)

(80)

(75)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

785

785

755

726

716

687

638

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(80)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(73)

(70)

(65)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

38KhN3MFA

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 200 mm, KP490*

RTm, MPa

657

657

628

608

608

589

579

559

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(67)

(64)

(62)

(62)

(60)

(59)

(57)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

471

451

451

432

422

343

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(46)

(44)

(43)

(35)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP590*

RTm, MPa

687

687

657

628

628

608

598

579

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(59)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

590

569

540

540

520

510

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(55)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP640*

RTm, MPa

687

687

657

628

628

608

598

579

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(64)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(59)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

640

640

615

583

583

562

551

476

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(65)

(63)

(59)

(59)

(57)

(56)

(48)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP685*

RTm, MPa

785

785

755

726

726

706

687

667

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(80)

(77)

(74)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(68)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

685

685

657

638

628

608

589

540

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(67)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(60)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP785*

RTm, MPa

883

883

844

824

814

785

785

746

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(86)

(84)

(83)

(80)

(80)

(76)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

785

746

726

716

697

677

638

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(80)

(76)

(74)

(73)

(71)

(69)

(65)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP880*

RTm, MPa

981

981

942

912

903

883

863

834

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(100)

(100)

(96)

(93)

(92)

(90)

(88)

(85)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

880

880

844

814

804

785

765

746

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(86)

(83)

(82)

(80)

(78)

(75)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

40

-

-

-

-

-

20Kh1M1F1BR

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 200 mm, KP670*

RTm, MPa

785

775

765

755

746

736

726

716

697

647

598

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(78)

(77)

(76)

(75)

(74)

(73)

(71)

(66)

(61)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

670

670

657

647

627

598

568

519

510

490

470

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(64)

(61)

(58)

(53)

(52)

(50)

(48)

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

13

13

13

12

12

11

11

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

51

53

55

-

-

15GS

Seamless hot-rolled pipes with an outer Æ = 10 ÷ 465 mm, with a wall thickness of 2 to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

491

471

461

451

441

422

412

412

412

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(42)

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

265

265

255

255

245

226

196

167

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(27)

(27)

(26)

(26)

(25)

(23)

(20)

(17)

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

14

14

14

13

13

15

16

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

16GS

Hot-rolled sheets with a thickness of 2 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

451

422

392

392

392

392

373

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(46)

(43)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

226

216

216

196

177

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

21

21

16

15

14

14

14

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

42

41

40

40

39

39

39

42

-

-

-

-

-

20GSL

Castings

RTm, MPa

491

471

441

441

422

422

422

422

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(43)

(43)

(43)

(43)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

275

255

235

226

196

186

186

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(28)

(26)

(24)

(23)

(20)

(19)

(19)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

A, %

18

17

17

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

-

-

-

-

-

09Г2С

Rolled products with a thickness of 4 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

432

432

432

432

432

432

432

432

432

392

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(44)

(40)

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

226

216

216

196

177

157

157

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(18)

(16)

(16)

-

-

-

 

A, %

21

20

20

18

16

16

16

16

16

16

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

42

42

41

40

40

41

42

44

44

-

-

-

08Kh13

Sheets with a thickness of 4 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

422

402

392

373

363

353

343

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(43)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(35)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

275

275

275

255

245

235

235

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(28)

(28)

(28)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(24)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

23

21

20

20

20

17

15

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

56

58

55

55

55

55

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Pipes with an outer diameter of 5 to 250 mm, with a wall thickness of 0.2 to 22 mm

RTm, MPa

373

363

353

333

323

314

314

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(32)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

245

245

226

216

216

216

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(25)

(25)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(22)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

22

20

19

18

18

15

13

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

43

43

44

43

43

40

38

-

-

-

-

-

-

20Kh13

Forgings with a diameter or thickness of up to 300 mm

RTm, MPa

647

628

608

589

569

549

530

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(66)

(64)

(62)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

422

412

392

392

363

353

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

11

10

10

9

9

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Hot-rolled steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of up to 60 mm; calibrated steel with a diameter or square side of up to 70 mm

RTm, MPa

647

628

608

589

569

549

530

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(66)

(64)

(62)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

422

412

392

392

363

353

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

16

15

15

14

14

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Hot-rolled steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of over 60 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

647

628

608

589

569

549

530

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(66)

(64)

(62)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

422

412

392

392

363

353

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

14

14

13

13

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Hot-rolled steel with a square side or thickness of over 100 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

647

628

608

589

569

549

530

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(66)

(64)

(62)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

441

422

412

392

392

363

353

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(37)

(36)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

12

12

11

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Fastener blanks, KP590*

RTm, MPa

785

755

736

716

687

667

638

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(68)

(65)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

559

549

520

520

481

471

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(57)

(56)

(53)

(53)

(49)

(48)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

16

16

15

15

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Sheets with a thickness of 4 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

510

491

481

471

441

432

412

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(50)

(49)

(48)

(45)

(44)

(42)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

373

353

343

323

323

304

294

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(33)

(31)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

21

21

20

20

19

19

-

-

-

-

-

-

20Kh12VNMF

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 200 mm, KP670*

RTm, MPa

785

775

755

736

716

697

677

647

628

588

529

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(74)

(69)

(66)

(64)

(60)

(54)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

670

657

638

618

608

589

569

520

510

481

461

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(67)

(65)

(63)

(62)

(60)

(58)

(53)

(52)

(49)

(47)

-

-

 

A, %

15

14

13

13

12

11

11

11

11

12

13

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

44

44

44

45

49

-

-

08Kh17N

Forgings with a diameter or thickness of up to 200 mm for heat treatment

RTm, MPa

441

432

422

412

402

392

373

373

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(38)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

343

333

323

314

304

304

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(31)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

12

12

12

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

 

Blanks in the form of forgings, stampings and round rods from 5 to 250 mm, square bars from 40 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

540

530

500

491

471

451

432

422

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(51)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(44)

(43)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

353

363

353

333

323

314

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(36)

(37)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

14

14

14

13

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

30Kh13

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of up to 200 mm, KP590*

RTm, MPa

785

755

736

716

687

667

647

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(77)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(68)

(66)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

579

569

559

549

540

530

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

11

11

11

11

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

42

43

44

45

46

44

43

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP685*

RTm, MPa

883

853

824

795

765

746

726

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(87)

(84)

(81)

(78)

(76)

(74)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

685

685

677

667

657

638

628

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(69)

(68)

(67)

(65)

(64)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

9

8

8

7

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, KP785*

RTm, MPa

981

942

922

883

853

824

804

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(100)

(96)

(94)

(90)

(87)

(84)

(82)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

785

775

765

746

736

716

706

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(78)

(76)

(75)

(73)

(72)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

9

9

9

8

8

7

7

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

14Kh17N2

Rolled steel, fastener blanks, forgings with a diameter or thickness of not more than 60 mm for heat treatment

RTm, MPa

1080

1060

1050

1040

1030

1010

1000

961

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(110)

(108)

(107)

(106)

(105)

(103)

(102)

(98)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

834

824

824

814

804

795

785

785

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(84)

(84)

(83)

(82)

(81)

(80)

(80)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

25

24

24

23

22

22

22

22

-

-

-

-

-

 

Same, over 60 mm, KP540*

RTm, MPa

687

687

667

657

657

638

638

608

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(70)

(68)

(67)

(67)

(65)

(65)

(62)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

530

530

520

520

510

510

510

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(52)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

40

40

40

38

36

35

34

34

-

-

-

-

-

08Kh14MF

Forgings, pipe blanks, sheets

RTm, MPa

539

519

510

491

491

491

491

431

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(52)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(44)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

333

323

314

304

294

294

284

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(30)

(30)

(29)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

19

19

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

-

-

-

 

Pipes, sheets for flaring and stamping

RTm, MPa

441

431

421

412

402

392

392

363

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(37)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

245

235

225

216

196

196

196

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(20)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

22

22

21

20

20

18

18

18

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

-

-

-

1Kh12V2MF

Pipes

RTm, MPa

491

441

422

412

402

392

392

373

373

363

343

294

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(35)

(30)

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

294

294

284

275

265

255

245

235

235

235

235

196

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(24)

(20)

-

 

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

13

13

13

-

 

 

Z, %

35

36

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

18Kh12VNBFR

Fastener blanks with a thickness or diameter of 200 mm, KP670*

RTm, MPa

785

775

755

746

726

706

687

667

628

589

549

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(79)

(77)

(76)

(74)

(72)

(70)

(68)

(64)

(60)

(56)

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

670

667

657

647

647

638

638

618

598

569

530

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(68)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(66)

(65)

(65)

(63)

(61)

(58)

(54)

-

-

 

A, %

15

15

14

13

13

12

12

12

13

13

14

-

-

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

47

47

48

50

-

-

05Kh12N2M-VI, 05Kh12N2M

Pipes

RTm, MPa

539

539

539

539

519

500

480

470

451

431

412

392

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(53)

(51)

(49)

(48)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(40)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

372

372

372

372

363

353

333

333

314

304

284

274

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(34)

(34)

(32)

(31)

(29)

(28)

-

 

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

05Kh12N2M-VD, 05Kh12N2M

Forgings, sheet

RTm, MPa

539

539

539

539

539

519

500

480

461

421

372

353

-

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(53)

(51)

(49)

(47)

(43)

(38)

(36)

-

RTp0.2, MPa

372

372

372

372

372

363

363

333

323

314

265

245

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(37)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(21)

(25)

-

 

A, %

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

12

12

15

-

 

Z, %

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

60

-

06Kh13N7D2

Hot-rolled and forged rods with a diameter of 16 to 160 mm, forged strip with a thickness of 80 mm, fastener blanks with a diameter of up to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

882

853

804

764

725

686

676

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(87)

(82)

(78)

(74)

(70)

(69)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

804

784

735

696

657

627

617

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(82)

(80)

(75)

(71)

(67)

(64)

(63)

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

60

60

60

60

60

60

59

-

-

-

-

-

-

06Kh12N3DL

Castings

RTm, MPa

637

630

618

608

589

579

559

539

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(64)

(63)

(62)

(60)

(59)

(57)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

486

481

481

471

461

451

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49.6)

(49)

(49)

(48)

(47)

(46)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

37

40

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

06Kh12N3D

Forgings KP540*

RTm, MPa

637

630

618

589

589

579

559

539

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(65)

(61)

(63)

(60)

(60)

(59)

(57)

(55)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

540

530

519

500

480

461

441

441

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(49)

(47)

(45)

(45)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

37

40

40

-

-

-

-

-

 

Forgings KP590*

RTm, MPa

686

670

657

647

638

618

588

588

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(60)

(60)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

590

575

559

549

539

519

491

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(59)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(53)

(50)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

12

12

12

12

12

12

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

30

30

30

-

-

-

-

-

 

Sheets with a thickness of 25 to 250 mm

RTm, MPa

686

670

657

647

638

618

588

588

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(70)

(68)

(67)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(60)

(60)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

539

534

529

529

519

500

491

491

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54.5)

(54)

(54)

(53)

(51)

(50)

(50)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

14

14

14

14

14

14

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

32

32

37

40

-

-

-

-

-

07Kh16N4B

Rolled steel with a diameter, square side of 30 to 180 mm, forgings with a diameter, square side of 180 to 400 mm

RTm, MPa

882

880

850

830

770

760

730

720

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(89.7)

(87)

(85)

(79)

(78)

(75)

(74)

-

-

-

-

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

735

735

720

710

700

680

670

650

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(75)

(74)

(73)

(71)

(69)

(68)

(66)

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

13

13

12

12

11

11

10

9

-

-

-

-

-

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

-

-

-

-

-

08Kh18N9 (10Kh18N9)

Sheets with a thickness of 6 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

491

451

412

392

392

373

363

353

353

343

343

323

294

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(46)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(30)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

177

167

157

147

137

137

128

128

118

108

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(14)

(13)

(13)

(12)

(11)

(11)

 

A, %

50

46

42

38

37

35

33

32

31

30

30

30

28

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

 

Forgings with a thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

540

500

451

432

432

412

402

392

373

353

323

304

255

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(51)

(46)

(44)

(44)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(33)

(31)

(26)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

177

157

147

137

128

118

118

108

98

98

98

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(10)

(10)

 

A, %

40

38

36

34

33

31

29

28

28

27

27

27

25

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

 

Forgings with a thickness of over 60 to 300 mm

RTm, MPa

491

470

451

425

400

380

380

340

323

314

304

294

280

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(46)

(43)

(41)

(39)

(37)

(35)

(33)

(32)

(31)

(3)

(29)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

177

157

147

137

128

118

118

108

98

98

98

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(10)

(10)

 

A, %

38

36

34

32

31

29

27

26

26

(25)

(25)

(25)

(24)

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

45

08Kh18N9 (10Kh18N9), 12Kh18N9

Seamless cold-rolled pipes with an outer diameter of 16 to 70 mm, with a wall thickness of 2.5 to 12 mm Sectional

RTm, MPa

491

451

412

392

392

373

363

353

353

343

343

323

294

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(46)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(30)

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

177

167

157

147

137

128

118

118

108

98

98

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(10)

 

A, %

40

38

36

33

32

30

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

 

Z, %

55

53

53

53

52

52

52

51

50

50

48

46

39

08Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N10T

Rolled steel and forgings made from it with a thickness or diameter of up to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

491

480

461

436

417

397

377

353

328

314

289

270

250

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(49)

(47)

(44.6)

(42.5)

(40.5)

(38.5)

(36)

(33.5)

(32)

(29.5)

(27.5)

(25.5)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

191

189

186

181

176

172

167

162

157

152

150

147

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.5)

(19.3)

(19)

(18.6)

(18)

(17.5)

(17)

(16.5)

(16)

(15.5)

(15.3)

(15)

 

A, %

38

37

36

33

31

28

26

25

22

20

20

20

20

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Plates, ingot forgings, parent sheets and stampings with a diameter of over 40 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

491

477

456

426

417

382

358

333

309

289

260

235

216

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48.7)

(46.5)

(43.5)

(42.5)

(39)

(36.5)

(34)

(31.5)

(29.5)

(26.5)

(24)

(22)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

193

186

181

176

167

162

157

152

144

137

132

127

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.7)

(19)

(18.5)

(18)

(17)

(16.5)

(16)

(15.5)

(14.7)

(14)

(13.5)

(13)

 

A, %

35

34

33

31

29

27

26

25

24

23

22

22

21

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Same, with a diameter of over 200 mm

RTm, MPa

491

475

446

421

392

368

343

314

289

260

235

206

181

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48.5)

(45.5)

(43)

(40)

(37.5)

(35)

(32)

(29.5)

(26.5)

(24)

(21)

(18.5)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

191

181

172

164

152

147

137

132

123

113

103

98

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.5)

(18.5)

(17.5)

(16.7)

(15.5)

(15)

(14)

(13.5)

(12.5)

(11.5)

(10.5)

(10)

 

A, %

35

34

33

31

29

27

26

25

24

23

22

22

21

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Pipes

RTm, MPa

510

471

461

441

421

421

412

412

402

382

353

333

304

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(48)

(47)

(45)

(43)

(43)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(39)

(36)

(34)

(31)

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

206

206

196

187

187

177

177

167

157

147

147

137

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(21)

(21)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(14)

 

 

A, %

35

32

30

28

27

26

26

26

25

25

24

23

22

 

 

Z, %

55

55

55

54

54

53

52

51

50

48

47

45

40

08Kh18N12T

Thick steel plates with a thickness of 4 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

510

491

432

412

392

392

392

392

373

373

363

333

323

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(50)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(34)

(33)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

177

167

167

157

157

157

147

137

128

128

118

 

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(13)

(12)

 

A, %

43

42

38

34

32

30

27

25

25

25

25

25

25

 

Z, %

55

55

55

54

54

53

53

52

52

50

50

47

44

 

Forgings, sheets, sheet and bulk stampings, forged-rolled blanks with a thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

491

471

412

392

373

373

373

353

353

353

353

323

294

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(33)

(30)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

38

37

34

30

28

26

24

23

22

22

22

22

22

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

48

48

47

47

45

45

43

40

 

Same, over 60 to 300 mm

RTm, MPa

491

471

412

392

373

373

373

353

353

353

353

323

294

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(48)

(42)

(40)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(33)

(30)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

33

32

29

26

24

23

21

20

19

19

19

19

19

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

38

38

37

37

36

36

34

32

12Kh18N9T, 12Kh18N12T

Blanks in the form of forgings and stampings for sheets and pipes, forgings

RTm, MPa

520

500

432

412

392

392

392

383

373

373

363

333

294

(kgf/mm2)

(53)

(51)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(34)

(30)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

39

38

34

31

28

26

24

23

22

22

22

22

22

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

48

48

46

46

44

44

43

40

 

Sheets with a thickness of 0.5 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

530

510

441

422

402

402

402

392

383

383

373

343

294

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(45)

(43)

(41)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(39)

(39)

(38)

(35)

(30)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

235

196

186

186

177

177

177

167

157

137

137

128

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(24)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(14)

(14)

(13)

 

A, %

38

37

33

30

27

26

24

23

22

22

22

22

22

 

Z, %

45

43

43

42

42

42

41

40

40

38

37

32

32

 

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

540

520

451

432

412

412

412

402

392

392

383

353

304

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(36)

(31)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

40

39

35

32

29

27

25

24

23

23

23

23

23

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

55

53

53

51

51

49

49

47

44

 

Same, over 60 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

540

520

451

432

412

412

412

402

392

392

383

353

304

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(36)

(31)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

39

38

34

31

29

27

24

23

22

22

22

22

22

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

44

44

43

43

41

41

39

36

 

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of over 100 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

540

520

451

432

412

412

412

402

392

392

383

353

304

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(42)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(39)

(36)

(31)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

147

137

128

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

37

36

33

30

28

25

23

22

21

21

21

21

21

 

Z, %

45

45

45

45

45

45

43

42

42

40

40

39

36

12Kh18N9TL

Castings

RTm, MPa

441

422

412

402

383

363

353

333

333

323

323

304

294

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(39)

(37)

(36)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(33)

(31)

(30)

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

196

196

177

167

167

157

147

137

128

118

118

118

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

(12)

 

 

A, %

25

24

24

22

20

18

17

16

15

15

15

15

15

 

 

Z, %

32

32

32

30

30

27

27

26

26

26

26

26

26

03Kh16N9M2

Sheets with a thickness of 40 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

550

500

460

430

420

412

400

400

390

370

355

350

300

 

(kgf/mm2)

(56)

(51)

(47)

(44)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(35.5)

(30.5)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

210

196

185

170

150

145

130

125

125

120

120

115

100

 

(kgf/mm2)

(21.5)

(20)

(19)

(17.5)

(15.5)

(15)

(13.3)

(13)

(13)

(12.2)

(12.2)

(11.7)

(10.5)

 

A, %

55

50

50

45

45

43

43

40

40

40

40

38

38

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

53

53

53

53

53

52

50

50

50

 

Forgings (made from ingots) with a thickness of 180 to 500 mm

RTm, MPa

520

500

450

425

420

410

380

350

350

340

340

330

280

 

(kgf/mm2)

(53)

(51)

(46)

(37)

(43.5)

(42)

(39)

(35.5)

(35.5)

(34.5)

(34.5)

(33.5)

(28.5)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

200

186

180

175

140

130

125

110

110

105

100

100

95

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20.5)

(19)

(18.5)

(18)

(14.5)

(13.5)

(13)

(11.5)

(11.5)

(11)

(10.5)

(10.5)

(9)

 

A, %

55

53

50

45

45

40

40

38

38

38

35

35

35

 

Z, %

55

55

55

55

50

50

50

50

50

48

47

47

47

08Kh16N11M3

Sheets with a thickness of 6 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

510

491

441

422

412

402

402

392

392

392

373

363

343

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(50)

(45)

(43)

(42)

(41)

(41)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(35)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

196

167

157

157

147

147

137

137

128

118

118

 

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(15)

(15)

(14)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(12)

 

A, %

50

43

37

35

33

32

32

32

32

32

30

30

30

 

Z, %

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

48

10Kh17N13M2T

Blanks in the form of forgings and stampings from ingots weighing not more than 15 tons, sheets and sheet stampings, forged-rolled blanks with a thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

510

491

432

412

392

392

353

353

333

333

323

304

255

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(50)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(36)

(36)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(26)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

186

186

186

177

177

177

177

147

147

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(15)

(15)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

37

36

33

29

27

25

23

22

21

21

21

21

21

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

50

48

48

47

47

45

45

43

40

 

Same, over 60 to 300 mm

RTm, MPa

510

491

432

412

392

392

353

353

333

333

323

304

255

 

(kgf/mm2)

(52)

(50)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(36)

(36)

(34)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(26)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

186

186

186

177

177

177

177

147

147

118

118

108

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(15)

(15)

(12)

(12)

(11)

 

A, %

33

32

29

26

24

22

20

20

19

19

19

19

19

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

38

38

38

38

36

36

34

32

 

Sheets with a thickness of 0.5 to 160 mm

RTm, MPa

530

510

451

432

412

412

363

363

343

343

333

314

265

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(37)

(37)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(27)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

235

226

226

226

216

216

216

216

177

177

137

137

137

 

(kgf/mm2)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(18)

(18)

(14)

(14)

(14)

 

A, %

37

36

32

29

27

25

22

22

21

21

21

21

21

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

38

38

38

38

36

36

34

32

12Kh18N12M3TL

Castings

RTm, MPa

500

480

450

425

400

380

360

340

328

316

304

292

280

 

(kgf/mm2)

(51)

(49)

(46)

(43)

(41)

(38.7)

(36.7)

(34.7)

(33.5)

(32.2)

(31)

(29.8)

(28.6)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

196

170

165

160

155

150

140

138

136

134

132

130

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(20)

(17.3)

(16.8)

(16.3)

(15.8)

(15.3)

(14.2)

(14)

(13.8)

(13.6)

(13.5)

(13)

 

A, %

30

28

27

25

23

21

19

16

15

14

14

13

12

10Kh18N12M3L

Castings

RTm, MPa

392

385

374

363

351

340

328

317

306

294

282

270

258

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(39)

(38)

(37)

(35.8)

(34.7)

(33.5)

(32.3)

(312)

(30)

(29)

(27.5)

(26)

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

196

191

182

173

164

155

146

137

127

118

114

112

108

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19.5)

(18.6)

(17.7)

(16.7)

(15.8)

(14.9)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(11.6)

(11.4)

(11)

 

 

A, %

20

20

19

18

18

17

17

16

15

15

14

14

13

 

 

Z, %

25

25

24

23

23

22

22

21

20

20

20

20

20

10Kh17N13M2T

Pipes: seamless hot-rolled with a diameter of 57 to 325 mm, with a wall thickness of 3.5 to 32 mm, cold- and warm-worked with a diameter of 5 to 250 mm, with a wall thickness of 0.2 to 22 mm

RTm, MPa

530

510

451

432

412

412

363

363

343

343

333

314

314

 

(kgf/mm2)

(54)

(52)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(42)

(37)

(37)

(35)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(32)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

333

333

333

314

314

314

314

255

255

196

196

196

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(34)

(34)

(34)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(26)

(26)

(20)

(20)

(20)

 

A, %

35

34

30

27

26

24

21

21

20

20

20

20

20

 

Z, %

50

50

50

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

41

36

08Kh16N15M3B

Pipe blank with a diameter of 80 to 180 mm

RTm, MPa

540

520

500

471

451

432

432

412

392

392

392

392

392

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(53)

(51)

(48)

(46)

(44)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

235

226

226

226

196

186

167

167

167

167

167

 

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(24)

(23)

(23)

(23)

(20)

(19)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

 

A, %

35

34

33

32

30

29

27

27

25

23

22

22

22

45Kh14N14V2M

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of up to 60 mm; calibrated steel with a diameter or square side of up to 70 mm

RTm, MPa

706

667

638

608

598

589

569

549

549

540

530

520

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(72)

(68)

(65)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

294

294

294

294

275

265

245

245

235

226

216

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

-

 

A, %

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

17

15

14

13

12

-

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

32

30

27

23

-

 

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of over 60 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

706

667

638

608

598

589

569

549

549

540

530

520

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(72)

(68)

(65)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

294

294

294

294

275

265

245

245

235

226

216

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

-

 

A, %

19

19

19

19

19

19

19

16

14

13

12

11

-

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

27

26

23

20

-

 

Same, over 100 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

706

667

638

608

598

589

569

549

549

540

530

520

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(72)

(68)

(65)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(53)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

314

294

294

294

294

275

265

245

245

235

226

216

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(27)

(25)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

-

 

A, %

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

14

13

12

11

10

-

 

Z, %

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

23

21

19

16

-

Kh18N22V2T2

Ingot forgings weighing up to 10 tons

RTm, MPa

657

638

628

608

598

589

589

569

559

549

540

530

530

 

(kgf/mm2)

(67)

(65)

(64)

(62)

(61)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(57)

(56)

(55)

(54)

(54)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

343

343

343

323

323

323

323

323

323

314

294

294

294

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(32)

(30)

(30)

(30)

 

A, %

17

16

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

12

10

 

Z, %

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

18

16

15

31Kh19N9MVBT

Fastener blanks of unlimited thickness, KP315*

RTm, MPa

589

589

569

549

530

510

491

471

441

441

412

392

392

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(42)

(40)

(40)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

315

314

314

314

314

314

314

294

284

275

275

265

196

 

(kgf/mm2)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(32)

(30)

(29)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(20)

 

A, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

28

27

26

26

25

19

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

589

589

569

549

530

510

491

471

441

441

412

392

392

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(42)

(40)

(40)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

275

275

265

265

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(27)

 

A, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

28

27

26

26

25

19

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Same, over 60 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

589

589

569

549

530

510

491

471

441

441

412

392

392

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(42)

(40)

(40)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

275

275

265

265

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(27)

 

A, %

29

29

29

29

29

29

29

27

26

25

25

24

18

 

Z, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

 

Same, over 100 to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

589

589

569

549

530

510

491

471

441

441

412

392

392

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(58)

(56)

(54)

(52)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(42)

(40)

(40)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

275

275

265

265

 

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(28)

(28)

(27)

(27)

 

A, %

27

27

27

27

27

27

27

25

24

23

23

22

17

 

Z, %

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

30

10Kh11N20T3R

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of over 60 to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

834

834

834

804

785

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(82)

(80)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

559

540

520

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(55)

(53)

 

A, %

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

8

8

8

8

8

8

 

Z, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

 

Same, over 100 to 150 mm

RTm, MPa

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

834

834

834

804

785

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(82)

(80)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

559

540

520

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(55)

(53)

 

A, %

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

4

4

4

4

 

Z, %

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

 

Fastener blanks, KP490*

RTm, MPa

834

834

834

834

834

834

834

834

785

785

785

755

736

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(80)

(80)

(80)

(77)

(75)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

490

490

490

490

471

441

441

441

441

441

441

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

14

14

13

13

13

12

12

12

 

Z, %

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

 

Rolled steel, KP490*

RTm, MPa

834

834

834

834

834

834

834

834

785

785

785

755

736

 

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(80)

(80)

(80)

(77)

(75)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

490

490

490

490

490

490

471

441

441

441

441

441

441

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

 

A, %

18

18

18

18

18

17

17

17

16

16

14

14

14

 

Z, %

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

 

Hot-rolled and forged steel with a diameter, square side, or thickness of up to 60 mm

RTm, MPa

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

834

834

834

804

785

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(85)

(85)

(85)

(82)

(80)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

559

540

520

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(57)

(55)

(53)

 

A, %

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

9

9

9

9

9

9

 

Z, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

1Kh16N36MBTYUR

Any

RTm, MPa

785

765

755

746

736

736

736

726

706

706

687

687

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(76)

(75)

(75)

(75)

(74)

(72)

(72)

(70)

(70)

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

-

 

 

A, %

20

18

17

16

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

-

 

 

Z, %

25

24

23

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

-

03Kh21N32M3B

Rods, forgings

RTm, MPa

539

539

539

539

539

491

490

441

441

441

441

392

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(50)

(50)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(40)

-

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

216

216

216

216

196

196

167

167

167

147

147

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(15)

(15)

-

 

A, %

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

-

 

Z, %

65

65

65

65

65

65

55

55

55

55

55

55

-

 

Pipes

RTm, MPa

539

539

539

539

539

491

491

441

441

441

441

392

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(55)

(50)

(50)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(40)

-

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

216

216

216

216

216

216

196

196

196

196

176

157

-

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(22)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(20)

(18)

(16)

-

 

 

A, %

28

28

28

28

28

28

28

28

28

28

28

25

-

Alloy

Fastener blanks with a thickness of up to 400 mm and from 620 to 650 mm, KP395*, rolled steel with a thickness of up to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

736

716

686

676

666

657

657

647

638

617

598

568

539

KhN35VT

(kgf/mm2)

(75)

(73)

(70)

(69)

(68)

(67)

(67)

(66)

(65)

(63)

(61)

(58)

(55)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

395

395

373

363

353

353

353

353

353

353

353

343

333

 

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(37)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(36)

(35)

(34)

 

A, %

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

14

13

12

10

 

Z, %

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

24

23

22

20

18

Alloy

Forged and hot-rolled bar with diameter of 40 to 200 mm, long products of up to 100 mm

RTm, MPa

834

814

804

785

785

765

755

746

736

736

736

706

667

KhN35VT-VD

(kgf/mm2)

(85)

(83)

(82)

(80)

(80)

(78)

(77)

(76)

(75)

(75)

(75)

(72)

(68)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

491

491

461

451

441

441

441

441

441

441

441

441

412

 

(kgf/mm2)

(50)

(50)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(42)

 

A, %

18

17

16

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

12

 

Z, %

40

38

37

35

34

32

32

32

32

32

32

32

27

Alloy

Any

RTm, MPa

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

883

KhN35VTU

 

(kgf/mm2)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

(90)

 

 

RTp0.2, MPa

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

589

579

 

 

(kgf/mm2)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(60)

(59)

 

 

A, %

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

 

 

Z, %

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

Alloy 0Kh20N46B

Seamless cold- and warm-worked pipes with an outer diameter of 13 to 32 mm, with a wall thickness of 1.5 to 3 mm

RTm, MPa

520

510

510

491

451

441

441

441

441

441

432

422

392

(kgf/mm2)

(53)

(52)

(52)

(50)

(46)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(43)

(40)

RTp0.2, MPa

196

186

186

177

167

167

167

157

157

157

157

157

147

(kgf/mm2)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(16)

(15)

A, %

26

25

24

24

24

23

23

23

23

22

21

21

21

Z, %

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Round and square rods with a thicknesses or diameter of 30 to 170 mm

RTm, MPa

540

530

530

510

471

461

461

461

461

461

451

441

412

 

(kgf/mm2)

(55)

(54)

(54)

(52)

(48)

(47)

(47)

(47)

(47)

(47)

(46)

(45)

(42)

 

RTp0.2, MPa

206

196

196

186

177

177

177

167

167

167

167

167

157

 

(kgf/mm2)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(18)

(18)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(16)

 

A, %

30

29

28

28

28

26

26

26

26

25

24

24

24

Zirconium: zirconium + 2.5% niobium

Seamless cold-rolled pipes with a thickness of up to 9 mm

RTm, MPa

392

392

373

353

343

333

323

294

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

(40)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(34)

(33)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

245

235

226

216

206

196

196

167

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(20)

(20)

(17)

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

18

17

17

16

16

15

15

15

-

-

-

-

-

Z, %

53

53

54

55

56

57

58

60

-

-

-

-

-

α, μK-1

-

5.2

5.4

5.6

5.7

5.9

5.8

6.0

-

-

-

-

-

ET, GPa

8.83

86.3

84.3

81.4

78.5

75.5

76.2

-

-

-

-

-

-

(ET, 104 kgf/mm2)

(0.90)

(0.88)

(0.86)

(0.83)

(0.80)

(0.77)

(0.74)

-

-

-

-

-

-

Zirconium + 1% niobium

Seamless cold-rolled pipes with a diameter of 9 to 13.5 mm in the transverse direction

RTm, MPa

272

262

245

227

208

190

168

145

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(27.7)

(27)

(25)

(23)

(21)

(19.4)

(17)

(14.8)

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

204

197

187

175

173

154

143

127

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(20.8)

(20)

(19)

(18)

(17)

(16)

(14.5)

(13)

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

28

28.4

29

29.5

30

31

32

33

-

-

-

-

-

Titanium VT1-0, VT1-0(M)

Sheets with a thickness of 0.3 to 10 mm, forgings, stampings, rods with a diameter of up to 100 mm, pipes

RTm, MPa

294

265

235

196

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

(27)

(24)

(20)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

216

196

167

147

118

98

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(22)

(20)

(17)

(15)

(12)

(10)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

20

24

22

23

24

24

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Z, %

45

40

35

35

40

50

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

α, μK-1

-

7.8

7.8

8.0

8.3

8.5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ET, GPa

108

104

102

98

96

93

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(ET, 104 kgf/mm2)

(1.10)

(1.06)

(1.04)

(1.00)

(0.98)

(0.95)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Aluminum alloy AMg3

Plates with a thickness of 12 to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

167

167

167

167

147

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(17)

(15)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

RTp0.2, MPa

59

59

59

59

59

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(6)

(6)

(6)

(6)

(6)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

11

11

11

11

11

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

α, μK-1

-

23.7

23.7

23.7

25.0

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ET, GPa

68.7

67.7

66.7

65.7

62.8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(ET, 104 kgf/mm2)

(0.70)

(0.69)

(0.68)

(0.67)

(0.64)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Aluminum alloy AV

Plates with a thickness of 12 to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

167

167

157

157

137

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(17)

(17)

(16)

(16)

(14)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

10

10

12

12

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

α, μK-1

-

22.1

22.1

22.1

24.1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ET, GPa

68.7

67.7

66.7

65.7

63.7

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(ET, 104 kgf/mm2)

(0.7)

(0.69)

(0.68)

(0.67)

(0.65)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Aluminum alloy AD0, AD1

Sheets with a thickness of 0.3 to 10.5 mm

RTm, MPa

59

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(6)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

20

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Plates with a thickness of 11 to 25 mm,

RTm, MPa

78

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(8)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

over 25 to 80 mm

RTm, MPa

63

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(6)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

15

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Extruded pipes with a diameter of 18 to 90 mm

RTm, MPa

59

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(6)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Aluminum alloy SAV-1

Rods with a diameter of up to 50 mm, forgings, sheets and plates with a thickness of up to 200 mm

RTm, MPa

176

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(18)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

12

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Brass alloy LO62-1

Cold-rolled sheets

RTm, MPa

390

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(40)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

Hot-rolled sheets

RTm, MPa

340

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

(kgf/mm2)

(35)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

 

A, %

20

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Brass alloy LO70-1

Pipes with a diameter of 10 to 50 mm

RTm, MPa

294

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(kgf/mm2)

(30)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A, %

40

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Note. KP490* is a strength category, digit is a value of yield limit at 20 °C; KP490** is a strength category, digit is a value of yield limit at 300 °C.

 


 

Table P1.2. Temperature coefficient of linear expansion of structural materials a, μK 1

Alloy stage group

Steel and alloy grade

Temperature, K (°C)

323 (50)

373 (100)

423 (150)

473 (200)

523 (250)

573 (300)

623 (350)

673 (400)

723 (450)

773 (500)

823 (550)

873 (600)

1

St3sp5, 10, 15, 15L, 20, 20L,- 20K, 22K, 25, 25L, 30, 35, 40, 45, 20Kh, 30Kh, 35Kh, 40Kh, 45Kh, 12KhM, 15KhM, 20KhM, 20KhMA, 20KhML, 20KhMFL, 30KhM, 30KhMA, 35KhM, 35KhMA, 10Kh2M, 12Kh2M, 12MKh, 30KhGSA, 12Kh1MF, 25Kh1MF, 15Kh1M1F, 15Kh1M1FL, 12Kh2MFA, 12Kh2MFA-A, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 18Kh2MFA, 25Kh2MFA, 25Kh2M1F, 25Kh3MFA, 10Kh2M1FB, 20Kh1M1F1BR, 38KhN3MFA, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A, 36Kh2N2MFA, 15Kh3NMFA, 15Kh3NMFA-A, 10KhSND, 10KhN1M, 15GS, 16GS, 20GSL, 09G2S, 16GNMA, 10GN2MFA, 10GN2MFAL

11.5

11.9

12.2

12.5

12.8

13.1

13.4

13.6

13.8

14.0

14.2

14.4

2

08Kh13, 20Kh13, 30Kh13, 08Kh17N, 1Kh12V2MF, 14Kh17N2, 20Kh12VNMF, 18Kh12VMBFR, 05Kh12N2M-VI, 05Kh12N2M, 05Kh12N2M-VD, 06Kh12N3D, 06Kh12N3DL, 08Kh14MF, 06Kh13N7D2, 07Kh16N4B

10.0

10.3

10.6

10.8

11.0

11.2

11.4

11.5

11.7

11.8

11.9

12.0

3

08Kh18N9, 10Kh18N9, 12Kh18N9, 08Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N9T, 12Kh18N10T, 08Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N9TL, 03Kh16N9M2, 08Kh16N11M3, 10Kh17N13M2T, 10Kh18N12M3L, 12Kh18N12M3TL, 08Kh16N15M3B, 45Kh14N14V2M, Kh18N22V2T2, 31Kh19N9MVBT, 10Kh11N20T3R, 1Kh16N36MBTYUR, KhN35VTYU, KhN35VT-VD, KhN35VT, 03Kh21N32M3B, 0Kh20N46B

16.4

16.6

16.8

17.0

17.2

17.4

17.6

17.8

18.0

18.2

18.4

18.5

Table P1.3. Modulus of elasticity of structural materials Е, GPa (Е, 104 kgf/mm2)

Alloy stage group

Steel and alloy grade

Temperature, K (°C)

293 (20)

323 (50)

373 (100)

423 (150)

473 (200)

523 (250)

573 (300)

623 (350)

673 (400)

723 (450)

773 (500)

823 (550)

873 (600)

1

St3sp5, 10, 15, 15L, 20, 20L, 25, 25L, 20K, 22K

200 (2.04)

197 (2.01)

195 (1.99)

192 (1.96)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

170 (1.73)

165 (1.68)

160 (1.63)

-

-

2

30, 35, 40, 45

210 (2.14)

207 (2.11)

205 (2.09)

200 (2.04)

195 (1.99)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

167 (1.70)

160 (1.63)

-

-

3

20Kh, 12KhM, 15KhM, 20KhM, 20KhMA, 20KhML, 20KhMFL, 10Kh2M, 12Kh2M, 12MKh, 12Kh1MF, 10Kh2M1FB, 15Kh1M1F, 15Kh1M1FL, 12Kh2MFA, 12Kh2MFA-A, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 18Kh2MFA, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A, 15Kh3NMFA, 15Kh3NMFA-A, 10KhN1M, 10KhSND, 15GS, 16GS, 09G2S, 20GSL, 16GNMA, 10GN2MFA, 10GN2MFAL, 06Kh12N3D, 06Kh12N3DL, 20Kh1M1F1BR

210 (2.14)

207 (2.11)

205 (2.09)

202 (2.06)

200 (2.04)

197 (2.01)

195 (1.99)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

170 (1.73)

165 (1.68)

4

30Kh, 35Kh, 40Kh, 45Kh, 30KhM, 30KhMA, 35KhM, 35KhMA, 30KhGSA, 25Kh1MF, 25Kh2MFA, 25Kh2M1F, 25Kh3MFA, 36Kh2N2MFA, 38KhN3MFA, 07Kh16N4B

215 (2.19)

212 (2.16)

210 (2.14)

207 (2.11)

205 (2.09)

202 (2.06)

200 (2.04)

195 (1.99)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

170 (1.73)

5

08Kh13, 20Kh13, 30Kh13, 14Kh17N2, 18Kh12VMBFR, 08Kh14MF, 20Kh12VNMF, 08Kh17N, 1Kh12V2MF, 05Kh12N2M-VI, 05Kh12N2M, 05Kh12N2M-VD

220 (2.24)

217 (2.16)

215 (2.19)

212 (2.16)

210 (2.14)

205 (2.09)

200 (2.04)

195 (1.99)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

170 (1.73)

6

08Kh18N9, 10Kh18N9, 12Kh18N9, 08Kh18N10T, 08Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N9T, 12Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N9TL, 03Kh16N9M2, 08Kh16N11M3, 08Kh16N15M3B, 06Kh13N7D2, 10Kh18N12M3L, 12Kh18N12M3TL, 10Kh17N13M2T, 31Kh19N9MVBT, 45Kh14N14V2M, 0Kh20N46B, Kh18N22V2T2, 1Kh16N36MBTYUR, KhN35VT, KhN35VT-VD, KhN35VTYU, 03Kh21N32M3B

205 (2.09)

202 (2.09)

200 (2.04)

195 (1.99)

190 (1.94)

185 (1.88)

180 (1.84)

175 (1.79)

170 (1.73)

167 (1.99)

165 (1.68)

162 (1.65)

160 (1.63)

7

10Kh11N20T3R

160 (1.63)

158 (1.61)

156 (1.59)

153 (1.56)

150 (1.53)

148 (1.51)

146 (1.49)

143 (1.46)

140 (1.43)

138 (1.41)

135 (1.38)

133 (1.36)

132 (1.35)

 


 

Table P1.4. Guaranteed values of long-term strength K, MPa (kgf/mm2)*

Steel, alloy grade

R20р0.2, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Rm20, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Temperature, K (°C)

Time, h

10

30

102

3 · 102

103

3 · 103

104

3 · 104

105

2 · 105

15KhM

≥ 235

≥ 441

773

330

322

298

278

251

208

174

146

114

96

 

(24)

(45)

(500)

(33.6)

(32.8)

(30.4)

(28.4)

(25.6)

(21.2)

(17.7)

(15.0)

(11.6)

(9.8)

12MKh

≥ 225

≥ 411

773

275

296

265

262

239

219

166

139

108

91

 

(23)

(42)

(500)

(28)

(27.5)

(27)

(26.8)

(24.4)

(22.4)

(18.0)

(14.2)

(11.0)

(9.3)

10Kh2M

≥ 245

≥ 392

723

296

282

266

251

235

219

204

180

157

149

(48TN-1)

(25)

(40)

(450)

(30)

(28.8)

(27.2)

(25.6)

(24.0)

(22.4)

(20.8)

(18.4)

(16.0)

(15.2)

 

 

 

773

255

250

227

204

174

149

126

110

94

86

 

 

 

(500)

(26)

(25.6)

(23.2)

(20.8)

(17.8)

(15.2)

(12.8)

(11.2)

(9.6)

(8.8)

 

 

 

783

255

231

209

187

161

137

116

101

86.2

79.4

 

 

 

(510)

(26.0)

(23.6)

(21.3)

(19.1)

(16.4)

(14.0)

(11.8)

(10.3)

(8.8)

(8.1)

12Kh2M

≥ 343

≥ 539

773

338

323

309

265

221

199

162

133

110

99

 

(35)

(55)

(500)

(34.5)

(33.0)

(31.5)

(27.0)

(22.5)

(20.3)

(16.5)

(13.5)

(11.3)

(10.1)

 

≥ 255

≥ 451

773

294

279

257

221

191

162

133

110

89

79

 

(26)

(46)

(500)

(30.0)

(28.5)

(26.3)

(22.5)

(19.5)

(16.5)

(13.5)

(11.3)

(9.0)

(8.0)

10Kh2M1FB

≥ 196

≥ 343

673

256

246

234

229

219

206

181

163

143

129

(48TN-2)

(20)

(35)

(400)

(26.2)

(25.1)

(23.9)

(23.4)

(22.3)

(21.0)

(18.4)

(16.7)

(14.6)

(13.1)

 

 

 

723

256

242

230

226

207

193

173

155

136

129

 

 

 

(450)

(26.2)

(24.6)

(23.5)

(23.1)

(21.1)

(19.6)

(17.7)

(15.8)

(13.9)

(13.1)

10Kh2M1FB

 

 

773

193

177

155

139

125

113

102

94

83

75.5

 

 

 

(500)

(19.6)

(18.1)

(15.8)

(14.2)

(12.7)

(11.6)

(10.4)

(9.6)

(8.5)

(7.7)

12Kh1MF

≥ 274

≥ 441

723

258

250

236

221

211

196

179

166

143

136

 

(28)

(45)

(450)

(26.3)

(25.6)

(24.1)

(22.6)

(21.5)

(20.0)

(18.3)

(16.9)

(14.6)

(13.9)

 

 

 

773

258

250

236

222

204

190

158

136

107

100

 

 

 

(500)

(26.3)

(25.6)

(24.1)

(22.6)

(20.8)

(19.3)

(16.1)

(13.9)

(11.0)

(10.2)

15Kh1M1F

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

232

220

213

201

184

173

154

144

125

118

 

(32)

(50)

(500)

(23.7)

(22.4)

(21.8)

(20.5)

(18.8)

(17.6)

(15.7)

(14.7)

(12.9)

(12.0)

12Kh18N9

≥ 196

≥ 490

673

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

 

(20)

(50)

(400)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

 

 

 

723

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

243

228

206

 

 

 

(450)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(24.8)

(23.3)

(21)

 

 

 

773

279

265

257

242

221

199

184

162

147

140

 

 

 

(500)

(28.5)

(27)

(26.3)

(24.8)

(22.5)

(20.3)

(18.8)

(16.5)

(15)

(14.3)

 

 

 

823

250

242

224

213

184

155

132

118

103

95

 

 

 

(550)

(25.5)

(24.8)

(22.9)

(21.8)

(18.8)

(15.8)

(13.5)

(12)

(10.5)

(9.8)

 

 

 

873

206

199

180

151

129

118

92

81

66

58.5

 

 

 

(600)

(21.0)

(20.3)

(18.4)

(15.4)

(13.1)

(12)

(9.4)

(8.3)

(6.8)

(6)

 

 

 

773

227

213

198

187

176

162

150

132

118

110

 

 

 

(500)

(23.2)

(21.7)

(20.2)

(19.1)

(18.0)

(16.5)

(15.3)

(13.5)

(12)

(11.2)

10Kh17N13M2T

≥ 196

≥ 510

823

191

176

162

147

132

121

110

97

88

80

 

(20)

(52)

(550)

(19.5)

(18)

(16.5)

(15)

(13.5)

(12.3)

(11.2)

(9.9)

(9.0)

(8.2)

 

 

 

873

165

152

139

124

114

100

84

73.5

62

58

 

 

 

(600)

(16.8)

(15.5)

(14.2)

(12.7)

(11.6)

(10.1)

(8.6)

(7.5)

(6.3)

(5.9)

12Kh18N10T

≥ 216

≥ 529

673

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

12Kh18N12T

(22)

(54)

(400)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

 

 

 

723

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

279

250

236

 

 

 

(450)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(25.5)

(24)

 

 

 

773

279

264

250

242

236

213

191

169

147

140

 

 

 

(500)

(28.5)

(27)

(25.5)

(24.8)

(24)

(21.8)

(19.5)

(17.3)

(15)

(14.3)

 

 

 

823

265

250

236

221

199

176

151

128

112

103

 

 

 

(550)

(27)

(25.5)

(24)

(22.5)

(20.3)

(18)

(15.4)

(13.1)

(11.4)

(10.5)

 

 

 

873

236

213

191

180

162

140

118

95

81

73

 

 

 

(600)

(24)

(21.8)

(19.5)

(18.4)

(16.5)

(14.3)

(12)

(9.8)

(8.3)

(7.4)

08Kh16N11M3

≥ 206

≥ 510

673

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

294

 

(21)

(52)

(400)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

(30)

 

 

 

723

279

279

279

279

279

265

257

235

220

213

 

 

 

(450)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(27)

(26.2)

(24)

(22.5)

(21.7)

 

 

 

773

279

279

279

257

242

227

212

183

165

147

 

 

 

(500)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(28.5)

(26.2)

(24.7)

(23.2)

(21.7)

(18.7)

(16.8)

(15.0)

 

 

 

823

250

227

206

195

185

170

160

141

124

116

 

 

 

(550)

(25.5)

(23.2)

(21)

(19.9)

(18.8)

(17.4)

(16.3)

(14.4)

(12.6)

(11.8)

 

 

 

873

196

178

160

145

124

116

101

81

80

71

 

 

 

(600)

(20.2)

(18.1)

(16.3)

(14.8)

(12.6)

(11.8)

(10.4)

(8.9)

(8.1)

(7.4)

KhN35VT

≥ 392

≥ 736

673

472

472

472

472

472

472

472

472

458

429

 

(40)

(75)

(400)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(48.2)

(46.7)

(43.8)

 

 

 

723

465

465

465

465

465

465

447

415

401

386

 

 

 

(450)

(47.5)

(47.5)

(47.5)

(47.5)

(47.5)

(47.5)

(45.6)

(42.3)

(40.9)

(39.4)

 

 

 

773

465

429

401

386

365

350

329

301

250

236

 

 

 

(500)

(47.5)

(43.8)

(40.9)

(39.4)

(37.2)

(35.8)

(33.6)

(30.7)

(25.6)

(24.1)

 

 

 

823

393

386

358

343

322

304

272

243

222

207

 

 

 

(550)

(40.2)

(39.4)

(36.5)

(35)

(32.9)

(30.7)

(27.7)

(24.8)

(22.6)

(21.2)

 

 

 

873

315

301

286

265

250

229

215

183

158

143

 

 

 

(600)

(32.1)

(30.7)

(29.2)

(27)

(25.6)

(23.4)

(21.9)

(18.6)

(16.1)

(14.6)

09Г2С

≥ 245

≥ 432

673

279-

263

243

232

212

192

170

149

128

116

 

(25)

(44.1)

(400)

(28.5)

(26.8)

(24.8)

(23.7)

(21.6)

(19.6)

(17.3)

(15.2)

(13.1)

(11.8)

 

 

 

723

214

194

174

153

133

115

95.8

80.4

65

57

 

 

 

(450)

(21.8)

(19.8)

(17.8)

(15.6)

(13.6)

(11.7)

(9.8)

(8.2)

(6.63)

(5.82)

16GNMA

≥ 323

≥ 490

673

392

392

392

382

376

354

336

304

280

256

 

(33)

(50)

(400)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(39.0)

(38.4)

(36.1)

(34.3)

(31)

(28.6)

(26.1)

 

 

 

723

350

346

342

335

325

303

271

236

194

170

 

 

 

(450)

(35.7)

(35.5)

(34.9)

(34.2)

(33.2)

(30.9)

(27.7)

(24.1)

(19.8)

(17.3)

1Kh12V2MF

≥ 392

≥ 588

773

263

242

225

204

188

173

161

146

131

125

 

(40)

(60)

(500)

(26.8)

(24.7)

(23)

(20.8)

(19.2)

(11.7)

(16.4)

(14.9)

(13.4)

(12.8)

 

 

 

823

206

188

173

158

143

129

118

107

96.8

90

 

 

 

(550)

(21)

(19.2)

(17.7)

(16.1)

(14.6)

(13.2)

(12)

(10.9)

(9.9)

(9.2)

08Kh18N9

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

271

257

250

236

214

192

179

157

143

135

(10Kh18N9)

(20)

(50)

(500)

(27.7)

(26.2)

(25.5)

(24.1)

(21.8)

(19.6)

(18.3)

(16)

(14.6)

(13.8)

 

 

 

823

242

235

218

206

178

150

128

114

99.8

92.3

 

 

 

(550)

(24.7)

(24)

(22.2)

(21)

(18.2)

(15.3)

(13.1)

(11.6)

(10.2)

(9.42)

 

 

 

873

200

193

174

146

125

114

89.3

75

63.8

57

 

 

 

(600)

(20.4)

(19.7)

(17.8)

(14.9)

(12.8)

(11.6)

(9.1)

(7.65)

(6.5)

(5.8)

08Kh18N10T

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

280.5

264.7

249.7

242.2

231.7

213

191.2

182.2

150.7

139.5

 

(20)

(50)

(500)

(28.6)

(27)

(25.5)

(24.7)

(23.6)

(21.7)

(19.5)

(18.6)

(15.4)

(14.2)

 

 

 

823

243

228

220.5

199.5

183.7

156

133.5

108

90

81

 

 

 

(550)

(24.8)

(23.2)

(22.5)

(20.3)

(18.7)

(15.9)

(13.6)

(11)

(9.2)

(8.2)

 

 

 

873

207

191.2

169.5

150.7

125.2

106.5

87.7

73.5

69.7

62.2

 

 

 

(600)

(21.1)

(19.5)

(17.3)

(15.4)

(12.8)

(10.8)

(8.9)

(7.5)

(7.1)

(6.3)

1Kh16N36MBTYUR

≥ 392

≥ 785

773

663

638

618

606

596

576

459

434

389

375

 

(40)

(80)

(500)

(67.6)

(65.1)

(63)

(61.8)

(60.8)

(58.8)

(46.9)

(44.3)

(39.8)

(38.3)

12Kh18N12M3TL

≥ 216

≥ 491

773

213

209

206

202

199

176

162

140

132

121

 

(22)

(50)

(500)

(21.8)

(21.4)

(21)

(20.6)

(20.3)

(18)

(16.5)

(14.3)

(13.5)

(12.4)

08Kh16N15M3B

≥ 245

≥ 540

823

354

337

323

309

279

-

-

-

-

-

 

(25)

(55)

(550)

(36.1)

(34.4)

(32.9)

(31.5)

(28.5)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

873

324

294

266

246

221

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

 

(600)

(33)

(30)

(27.1)

(25.1)

(22.5)

 

 

 

 

 

25Kh1MF

≥ 590

≥ 736

773

440

412

354

294

244

211

191

159

125

-

 

(60)

(75)

(500)

(44.8)

(42)

(36.1)

(30)

(24.8)

(21.5)

(19.5)

(16.2)

(12.8)

 

20KhML

≥ 245

≥ 441

773

309

301

279

261

235

217

163

137

106

90

 

(25)

(45)

(500)

(31.5)

(30.7)

(28.5)

(26.6)

(24)

(22)

(16.6)

(14)

(11)

(9.2)

20KhMFL

≥ 294

≥ 490

773

331

309

286

261

228

198

169

147

121

108

 

(30)

(50)

(500)

(33.8)

(31.5)

(29.7)

(26.6)

(23.2)

(20.2)

(17.3)

(15)

(12.3)

(11)

15Kh1M1FL

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

232

220

213

201

184

173

154

144

126

118

 

(32)

(50)

(500)

(23.7)

(22.4)

(21.8)

(20.5)

(18.8)

(17.7)

(15.7)

(14.7)

(12.9)

(12)

05Kh12N2M

≥ 372

≥ 539

723

353

343

303

294

216

196

186

186

176

167

 

(38)

(55)

(450)

(36)

(35)

(31)

(30)

(22)

(20)

(19)

(19)

(18)

(17)

 

 

 

773

255

255

216

206

176

157

127

118

108

98

 

 

 

(500)

(26)

(26)

(22)

(21)

(18)

(16)

(13)

(12)

(11)

(10)

 

 

 

823

176

176

147

137

118

108

98

88

73

69

 

 

 

(550)

(18)

(18)

(15)

(14)

(12)

(I)

(10)

(9)

(7.5)

(7)

03Kh16N9M2 and its welded joints made using electrode TsT-46

≥ 200

≥ 520

723

369

359

350

343

314

294

274

255

240

230

(20.5)

(53)

(450)

(37.6)

(36.6)

(35.7)

(35)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(24.5)

(23.5)

 

 

773

348

325

304

284

264

244

224

206

186

175

 

 

(500)

(35.5)

(33.2)

(31)

(29)

(26.9)

(24.9)

(22.9)

(21)

(19)

(17.9)

 

 

823

333

309

285

237

230

206

178

153

131

119

 

 

(550)

(34)

(31.5)

(29)

(24)

(23.5)

(21)

(18)

(15.6)

(13.4)

(12)

 

 

873

292

265

233

205

178

154

129

107

86

76

 

 

(600)

(29.8)

(27)

(23.8)

(21)

(18.1)

(15.7)

(13.1)

(11)

(8.8)

(7.8)

03Kh21N32M3B

≥ 216

≥ 539

773

441

441

441

431

431

421

421

384

384

-

(22)

(55)

(500)

(45)

(45)

(45)

(44)

(44)

(43)

(43)

(40)

(40)

 

 

 

823

372

372

372

363

343

304

255

235

216

-

 

 

(550)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(37)

(35)

(31)

(26)

(24)

(22)

 

* For the category of material strength less than that given in this table, the characteristics of heat resistance are determined in accordance with the recommendations of Appendix 6.



Table P1.5. Arrangement of grades of structural materials

Material

Steel and alloy grade

Pearlite steels:

 

carbon

St3sp5, 10, 15, 15L, 20, 20L, 20K, 22K, 25, 25L, 30, 35, 40, 45

alloyed

20Kh, 30Kh, 35Kh, 40Kh, 45Kh, 12KhM, 15KhM, 20KhM, 20KhMA, 20KhML, 20KhMFL, 30KhM, 30KhMA, 35KhM, 35KhMA, 10Kh2M, 12Kh2M, 12MKh, 30KhGSA, 10KhSND, 10KhN1M, 16GNMA, 10GN2MFA, 10GN2MFAL

alloyed chromium-molybdenum-vanadium

12Kh1MF, 25Kh1MF, 15Kh1M1F, 15KhSH1FL, 12Kh2MFA, 12Kh2MFA-A, 18Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA, 15Kh2MFA-A, 25Kh2MFA, 25Kh2M1F, 25Kh3MFA, 10Kh2M1FB, 15Kh2NMFA, 15Kh2NMFA-A, 15Kh3NMFA, 15Kh3NMFA-A, 36Kh2N2MFA, 38KhN3MFA, 20KhSH1F1BR

alloyed silicon-manganese

15GS, 16GS, 20GSL, 09G2S

High alloyed steels:

 

high-chromium

08Kh13, 20Kh13, 20Kh12VNMF, 08Kh17N, 30Kh13, 14Kh17N2, 08Kh14MF, 1Kh12V2MF, 18Kh12VMBFR, 05Kh12N2M, 05Kh12N2M-VI, 05Kh12N2M-VD, 06Kh13N7D2, 06Kh12N3DL, 06Kh12N3D, 07Kh16N4B

nickel-chromium corrosion resistant austenitic

08Kh18N9, 10Kh18N9, 12Kh18N9, 08Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N10T, 08Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N9T, 12Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N9TL, 03Kh16N9M2, 08Kh16N11M3, 10Kh17N13M2T, 08Kh16N15M3B, 12Kh18N12M3TL, 10Kh18N12M3L, 45Kh14N14V2M, Kh18N22V2T2, 31Kh19N9MVBT, 10Kh11N20T3R

Iron-nickel base alloys

03Kh2SH32M3B, KhN35VT, KhN35VT-VD, KhN35VTYU, 1Kh16N36MBTYUR, 0Kh20N46B

Alloys of non-ferrous metals:

 

zirconium

Zirconium + 2.5% of niobium, zirconium + 1% of niobium

titanium

VT1-0, VT1-0(M)

aluminum

AMg3, AV, AD0, AD1, SAV-1

brass

LO62-1, LO70-1


APPENDIX 2

(mandatory)

METHODS FOR DETERMINING MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURAL MATERIALS

1. ADDITIONAL CONCEPTS AND DEFINITIONS

  is a relative creep deformation

σ is a stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

As is an initial cross-sectional area of a sample, mm2

ed is a cycle strain amplitude

2σd is a stress range in the cycle, MPa

2ed is a stress range in the cycle

r is a load ratio

φs is a cyclic strength reduction coefficient of welded joints

ATm is a relative uniform elongation of a sample, %

ATt is a relative elongation at long-term static loading at a temperature T, K (°C), after, destruction, %

ZTm is a relative uniform contraction of the sample cross-sectional area, corresponding to RTm, %

ZTt is a relative contraction of the sample cross-sectional area during long-term static loading at a temperature T, K (°C), %

T is a test temperature, K (°C)

t is time to fracture, h

2. TENSION TEST METHODS

2.1. Static tests, processing of the results of tensile testing of products from steels and alloys, except wire, pipes, and also tape made of sheet metal with a thickness of less than 0.5 mm, are carried out according to GOST 1497-84 at a temperature of 293 K [(20 ± 1510 °C], according to GOST 9651-84 at elevated temperatures of up to 1473 K (1200 °C) and according to GOST 11150-84 at lower temperatures.

2.2. Tension test methods for materials of pipes for determining the mechanical characteristics at a temperature of 293 K (20 ± 10 °C) and types of samples are given in GOST 10006-80, at elevated temperatures are given in GOST 19040-81.

2.3. The initial design length of samples from non-ferrous alloys for tension testing at room and elevated temperatures is assumed to be equal to  (fivefold samples).

The test report and certificates for the supplied non-ferrous metals and alloys indicate the relative elongation (AT5) determined on five-fold samples.

2.4. In addition to GOST 1497-84 and GOST 9651-84, if necessary, when static tension testing of materials, the relative uniform contraction of the sample cross-sectional area ZTm is determined. Relative uniform contraction ZTm is determined by recalculation of the relative uniform elongation ATm, corresponding to the maximum load Pb on the stretch diagram (P-L or σ-e):

ZTm = ATm/(1 + ATm).

2.5. Assessment of test results at short-term static tension of materials is carried out in accordance with the requirements of standards, specifications, drawings and other technical documentation for the material.

3. CREEP TEST METHODS

3.1. Creep tests and determination of the conditional creep limit, machines and devices used to test metals for creep, shapes and sizes of samples shall meet the requirements of GOST 3248-81.

3.2. When constructing, based on the results of tests of the primary creep curves in the coordinates , a section of the curve with a constant creep rate is obtained by processing the data of the least squares test method. In this case, x = t is assumed as an independent variable, and as dependent

3.3. Creep test data is used to construct isochronous strain curves.

4. LONG-TERM STRENGTH TEST METHODS

4.1. Long-term strength tests, machines used for testing metals and alloys for long-term strength, heating devices and temperature control, sample types shall meet the requirements of GOST 10145-81.

4.2. Based on the test results, dependencies between the stress, ATt, ZTt and time to fracture expressed graphically in logarithmic coordinates are established.

When plotting curves of long-term strength, inter alia when determining the limit of long-term strength RTmt, by extrapolation, other coordinate systems can be used.

4.3. Long-term strength curves in the stress-time coordinates are plotted according to the test data. Long-term strength mean line is determined by the least square method. Stress function is selected as a dependent random variable (y = lgσ), time – as an independent (x = lgt).

4.4. A recommended method for determining the heat resistance characteristics is given in Appendix 6.

5. METHOD FOR DETERMINING CRITICAL BRITTLE TEMPERATURE

5.1. GENERAL

5.1.1. The critical brittle temperature means the temperature, assumed as the temperature limit of changes in the material fracture nature from brittle to viscous. It is determined by the energy expended on fracture, the indicator of which is the impact strength, and by the type of fracture of samples, the indicator of which is a fraction of viscous component in the fracture or a value of transverse expansion of the sample in the fracture zone.

5.1.2. To determine the critical brittle temperature, samples with a V type cut are tested for impact bending in a selected temperature range.

5.1.3. Based on the obtained test results, the dependences of impact strength, viscous component in the fracture and lateral expansion of the sample at the test temperature are plotted.

5.1.4. Given the criterion values of impact strength and viscous component in the fracture using the dependencies in item 5.1.3, determine the values of the critical brittle temperature.

The mean and minimum values of transverse expansion of the sample are given as reference at the critical brittle temperature Tc and temperature (Tc + 30) °C.

5.2. SAMPLE COLLECTION FOR THE SAMPLE PREPARATION

5.2.1. For welded joints, samples from which samples are prepared to determine the critical brittle temperature shall meet the requirements of GOST 6996-66.

5.2.2. For the base material, a sample is taken from the material that has undergone all stages of plastic deformation and heat treatment. For materials for which an annealing mode with gradual cooling is provided as a heat treatment, heat treatment may be carried out directly on the sample.

5.2.3. When collecting samples, conditions shall be provided to protect them from the effects of heating and cold-work hardening during machining, or appropriate allowances shall be provided.

5.2.4. Samples from forgings, sheets, rods, castings, fasteners and pipe products with a minimum metal thickness of more than 50 mm shall be cut so that the longitudinal axes of the produced samples are separated from any surface of the semi-finished products, from which they are cut, at least 1/4 of thickness of the semi-finished product metal in the area of sample cutting.

5.2.5. Samples from forgings, sheets, rods, castings, fasteners and pipe products with a minimum metal thickness of up to 50 mm inclusive shall be cut so that the longitudinal axes of the produced samples can be located as close as possible to the middle (central) part of the section of the semi-finished product metal (pipe walls).

5.2.6. Distance from the sample edge to the blank end shall meet the requirements of the technical specifications. If the technical specifications do not specify such requirements, the specified distance shall not be less than the thickness (diameter) of the blank for blanks with a ratio of thickness (diameter) to length less than 1/4 and not less than 1/4 of thickness (diameter) in other cases.

5.2.7. In cases not provided for in items 5.2.4 and 5.2.5, samples are cut from the zones regulated by the relevant regulatory and technical documentation, and in the absence of such indications – from the zones defined by the organization conducting the tests.

5.3. SAMPLE ORIENTATION

5.3.1. The longitudinal axes of specimens cut from forgings, stampings, sheet and long products shall be oriented parallel to their outer surface in a direction perpendicular to the main material processing direction (except for the thickness direction), which means the direction of rolling, drawing, forging, piercing, and etc.

Orientation of samples from welded joints shall meet the requirements of GOST 6996-66.

5.3.2. Longitudinal axis of the samples cut from rods, fasteners and pipes (except for those made from sheets) shall be oriented along their axes.

5.3.3. Longitudinal axis of samples cut from castings shall be oriented parallel to the outer surface.

5.3.4. Longitudinal axis of the sample cut shall be perpendicular to the surface of a product or semi-finished product.

5.3.5. In cases not provided for in items 5.3.1 - 5.3.4, orientation of the longitudinal axes of samples is indicated in the relevant regulatory and technical documentation, and in the absence of such indications is determined by the organization conducting the tests.

5.4. PROCEDURE OF IMPACT BENDING TESTS

5.4.1. Samples, equipment.

5.4.1.1. For the base metal during impact bending test, samples of 11 type are used according to GOST 9454-78, and for welded joints – samples of IX type according to GOST 6996-66.

5.4.1.2. Prepared samples shall be labeled at both ends or on the edges, excluding the edge on which the cut is made, at a distance of no more than 15 mm from the sample end. In the case of labeling by impact, the labeling shall be applied before making the cut.

5.4.1.3. The equipment for testing and test rules shall comply with GOST 9454-78.

5.4.2. Testing.

5.4.2.1. The temperature range of the test shall obligatory include the points Tc, (Tc ± 10) °C, (Tc + 20) °C, (Tc + 30) °C and (Tc + 40)°C.

5.4.2.2. If the estimated value of Tc1 is known in advance, it is allowed to carry out tests in the temperature range of (Tc1 - 10) °C < T <(Tc1 + 40) °C. If the estimated value of Tc1 is not known in advance, it is recommended to determine the impact strength value at 20 °C and, depending on the value obtained at this temperature, determine the temperature range of further tests.

5.4.2.3. At least three samples are tested at each temperature.

5.4.3. Test results processing.

5.4.3.1. For each of the test samples, determine the impact strength, viscous component in the fracture and lateral expansion.

5.4.3.2. Impact strength is determined as the ratio of the work of sample fracture to the net area – sample section in the cut area.

5.4.3.3. Values of the viscous component in the fracture is determined according to GOST 4543-71.

5.4.3.4. In cases where the determination of the viscous component according to item 5.4.3.3 is difficult (no visible boundaries of brittle and viscous fracture zones), it is allowed to use other methods for determining the viscous component (for example, measuring the area with a planimeter, fractography, etc.) and corresponding criterial values of viscous component in the fracture during material validation.

Fig. P2.1. Sample breaking pattern

(b0 is a sample width; l is a cut depth; h is a sample height)

The applied methods and criterial values of the viscous component in the fracture shall be agreed by the testing organization with the leading material organization.

5.4.3.5. Lateral expansion ∆b of the impact sample is the residual (plastic) deformation on the edge opposite to the cut and measured in the direction of the cut, as shown in Fig. P2.1, and determined by the formula.

∆b = b1 - b0 = 1 + 2.

The lateral expansion is determined on the halves of the samples destroyed after impact bending tests. Measurements of lateral expansion shall be made with an error of ± 0.01 mm.

5.4.3.6. The arithmetic mean values of impact strength and the minimum values of viscous component in the fracture and lateral expansion are determined according to the data obtained from testing three samples at each test temperature. In the graphs in the coordinates, the impact strength-temperature, the viscous component in the fracture-temperature and the lateral expansion-temperature cause the indicated values and successively connect them with straight lines. Here, values of impact strength, fibrous of fracture and lateral expansion are plotted by the points for each of the tested samples. The obtained graphs are the initial information for determining the critical brittle temperature.

5.5. DETERMINATION OF THE CRITICAL BRITTLE TEMPERATURE

5.5.1. The temperature for which the following conditions are met is assumed as the critical brittle temperature Tc.

5.5.1.1. At temperature Tc, the arithmetic mean value of the impact strength shall not be lower than the values indicated in Table P2.1, and the minimum value of the impact strength shall not be lower than 70% of the values indicated in Table P2.1.

Table P2.1. Criterial values of the impact strength at temperature Tc, °C

Yield limit at temperature of 20 °C Rр0.2, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Impact strength (KCV)I, J/cm2 (kgf · m/cm2)

Up to 304 (31) inclusive

29 (3.0)

304 (31) to 402 (41) inclusive

39 (4.0)

402 (41) to 549 (56) inclusive

49 (5.0)

549 (56) to 687 (70) inclusive

59 (6.0)

Table P2.2. Criterial values of the impact strength at temperature Tc + 30, °C

Yield limit at temperature of 20 °C Rр0.2, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Impact strength (KCV)II, J/cm2 (kgf · m/cm2)

Up to 304 (31) inclusive

44 (4.5)

304 (31) to 402 (41) inclusive

59 (6.0)

402 (41) to 549 (56) inclusive

74 (7.5)

549 (56) to 687 (70) inclusive

89 (9.0)

5.5.1.2. At temperature (Tc +30) °С, the arithmetic mean value of the impact strength shall not be lower than the values indicated in Table P2.2, the minimum value of the impact strength shall not be lower than 70% of the values indicated in Table P2.2, the minimum value of the viscous component in the fracture shall not be lower than 50%.

5.5.2. If one of the three tested samples fails to satisfy any of the conditions specified in items 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2, it is allowed to test three more samples.

In this case, when determining the compliance of the obtained results with the requirements of items 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2 use the showing of five samples, except for the sample for which unsatisfactory results were obtained in the first test.

5.5.3. If, during additional tests specified in item 5.5.2, at least one sample shows unsatisfactory indications, then the critical temperature Tc is assumed to be the nearest high temperature at which the test results meet the requirements of items 5.5.1.1. and 5.5.1.2.

5.5.4. If defects are detected (in the form of cavities, delaminations, etc.) in the sample fracture, it is allowed to exclude the results of its testing from consideration and test a new sample.

5.5.5. The procedure for processing test results is as follows.

5.5.5.1. According to the known value of the material yield limit at a temperature of 20 °C is selected according to Table P2.1 and P2.2 relevant criterial values of the impact strength (KCV)I and (KCV)II. When determining (KCV)I and (KCV)II for the fusion zone and heat-affected zone of a welded joint, the yield limit of the base metal is used.

The yield limit is determined as the mean value of the test results of three or more samples or as the maximum value if two samples were used in the tests.

5.5.5.2. On the graph of the impact strength-temperature on the y-axis (KCV axis) the value of (KCV)I is plotted. Through the obtained point, a line parallel to the x-axis is drawn to the intersection with the impact strength curve.

The highest test temperature nearest to the intersection point is assumed as the temperature T1.

5.5.5.3. On the graph of the impact strength-temperature on the y-axis the value of (KCV)II is plotted. Through the obtained point, a line parallel to the x-axis is drawn to the intersection with the impact strength curve.

The highest test temperature nearest to the intersection point is assumed as the temperature T'2.

5.5.5.4. On the graph of the viscous component in the fracture-temperature on the y-axis the value of B = 50 % is plotted. Through the obtained point, a line parallel to the x-axis is drawn to the intersection with the curve plotted based on the minimum values of the viscous component.

The highest test temperature nearest to the intersection point is assumed as the temperature T''2.

5.5.5.5. If, when the requirements of items 5.5.5.2 - 5.5.5.4 are met, the lines drawn parallel to the x-axis intersect the corresponding curves at two or more points, then the temperatures T1, T'2 and T"2 shall be determined by the right extreme points of intersection.

5.5.5.6. Greater of the temperatures T2 and T"2 is marked as T2.

5.5.5.7. If the difference between temperatures T2 and T1 is less than 30 °C, then the temperature T1 is assumed as an indicative value of the critical brittle temperature T1c.

5.5.5.8. If the condition of item 5.5.5.7 is not performed, then T1c is determined by the formula T1c = T2 - 30 °C.

5.5.5.9. Additional tests at temperatures (T1c ± 10) °C, (T1c + 20) °C, (T1c + 30) °C, (T1c + 40) °C are conducted, the impact strength curves and viscous component in the fracture are specified, and in accordance with the instructions of items 5.5.5.2 - 5.5.5.8 the value of the critical brittle temperature is finally set (if during the tests the values of KCV and B have already been determined at the temperatures indicated in this item, additional testing at these temperatures is not required).

5.5.6. Confirmation of the critical brittle temperature can be carried out in cases where its guaranteed value Tcr is specified in the regulatory technical or design documentation. When the critical brittle temperature is confirmed, tests are carried out in compliance with the requirements of this procedure in the following sequence:

1) tests are carried out at guaranteed temperature Tcr and temperature (Tcr + 30) °C;

2) compliance with the conditions of item 5.5.1.1 at a temperature Tcr and item 5.5.1.2 at a temperature (Tcr + 30) °C is checked, and conditions of items 5.5.2 - 5.5.4 apply.

If conditions 1) and 2) are met, then the critical brittle temperature is considered confirmed.

If requirements of item 5.5.1.2 are met at temperature Tcr, then it is allowed not to perform tests at temperature of (Tcr + 30) °C.

If requirements of items 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2 at temperatures Tcr and (Tcr + 30) °C are not met, then the critical brittle temperature is considered unconfirmed.

6. PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING CRITICAL BRITTLE TEMPERATURE SHIFT DUE TO THERMAL AGEING

6.1. GENERAL

6.1.1. The critical brittle temperature shift due to thermal ageing is determined by the formula

Tt = TctTc0,

where Tct is a critical brittle temperature of the material subjected to heat ageing; Tc0 is a critical brittle temperature of the material in the initial state (before ageing).

6.1.2. Definition of values of Tc0 and Tct is carried out in accordance with the instructions of Section 5 of this Appendix.

6.1.3. Sample collection, requirements for samples and their preparation and orientation in the studied semi-finished product shall meet the instructions of Section 5 of this Appendix.

6.2. PERFORMING OF TESTS AND PROCESSING OF RESULTS

6.2.1. Thermal ageing is carried out on blanks with a size of at least 60×13×13 mm.

6.2.2. Temperature of thermal ageing is set in accordance with the regulatory and technical documentation for the product or material; it shall not be less than the design temperature or exceed it by more than 100 °C.

6.2.3. In the process of holding the samples during thermal ageing, a temperature fluctuation within ± 5 °C from the nominal value of the ageing temperature is allowed.

6.2.4. Preparations of samples for impact bending tests are maintained at a given temperature for 500, 1000, 3000, 5000, 7500 and 10000 hours.

For steels that do not have an extremum of changes in Tct in the process of ageing with a holding of 5000 to 10000 hours, it is allowed not to carry out tests with a holding time of 7500 hours.

6.2.5. According to the results of impact bending tests of samples cut from blanks that were subjected to aging for various periods of time, the value of Tct is determined and, in accordance with item 6.1.1, the values of ΔTt on the bases specified in item 6.2.4 are also determined.

6.2.6. If the values of ∆Tt for all time intervals are negative, the design value of ∆Tt is assumed to be equal to zero.

6.2.7. In the case of a monotonous, saturation tending change in the dependence of Tct on the ageing time, the experimental data of ΔTt = Tct - Tc0 for different duration of ageing are approximated by the equation

Tt = ∆Ttlim[1 - exp(-pt)],

where ∆Ttlim, p are empirical constants determined using mathematical statistics methods; t is ageing time.

A design value of ΔTt means the value of ΔTtlim if the difference between ΔTtlim and a shift obtained by the formula of this item based on 10000 hours does not exceed 10 °C. Otherwise, the design value of ∆Tt for the operation duration of not more than 100000 hours shall be determined by the formula of this item. If extrapolation is necessary for a longer period, the ageing duration shall be increased. In this case, extrapolation is allowed to be carried out for a time not exceeding a tenfold maximum duration of ageing.

6.2.8. With the extreme nature of the dependence of Tct on the ageing time in the time intervals according to item 6.2.4, the approximation of the falling section of the dependence is used by the equation

Tt = ∆Ttmaxexp[-b(ttmax)] + c,

where ∆Ttmax is a critical brittle temperature shift in the field of extremum; t is an ageing time at which extremum (maximum) is observed; b, c are empirical constants determined using mathematical statistics methods.

6.2.9. If at the temperature and duration of ageing according to items 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 there is a monotonous increase in Tct, not tending to saturation, it is allowed to establish the dependence of Tct on the ageing time using the Hollomon parameter by the formula

Нр = (T + 273)(k + lgt) · 10-3,

where t is an ageing duration, h; T is an ageing temperature, °C; k is an empirical constant determined by the mathematical statistics methods.

In this case, the aging temperature shall exceed the one specified in item 6.2.2 by 50 °C, and the aging duration shall be 1000, 3000, 5000 hours.

The procedure indicated in this item is applicable provided that the same way of change of dependencies of Tct at the ageing temperatures used.


 

7. PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING CRITICAL BRITTLE TEMPERATURE SHIFT DUE TO FATIGUE DAMAGE ACCUMULATION

7.1. GENERAL

7.1.1. The critical brittle temperature shift due to fatigue damage accumulation is determined by the formula

TN = TcN - Tc0,

where TcN is a critical brittle temperature of the material subjected to cyclic loading; Tc0 is a critical brittle temperature of the material in the initial state (before cyclic loading).

7.1.2. Definition of values of TcN and Tc0 is carried out in accordance with the instructions of Section 5 of this Appendix.

7.1.3. Sample collection, requirements for their preparation and orientation in the semi-finished product shall meet the instructions of Section 5 of this Appendix.

7.1.4. The TcN is determined according to the results of impact bending tests of samples cut from the working part of the base samples.

7.2. TESTING

7.2.1. To assign the cyclic loading modes of the base samples, the fatigue curve of the material under study is used in the range of 103 ... 104 cycles, obtained at hard loading.

The design definition of fatigue curves is allowed without the introduction of safety coefficients for stresses and number of cycles using the actual strength and ductility characteristics of the material under study.

7.2.2. Base samples prepared of the material under study are subjected to cyclic loading at a temperature of (20 ± 5) °C. Before loading the base samples, the critical brittle temperature of the material under study in the initial state is determined.

7.2.3. For cyclically softening materials (with a ratio of RTp0.2/RTm > 0.7), cyclic loading of the base samples is carried out under axial tension in the soft mode with the cycle asymmetry coefficient on the load r @ 0.05 up to the accumulation of residual axial deformation (2.5 ± 0.25) %. In this case, the stress shall correspond to a value that ensures accumulation of the required residual deformation for at least 103 cycles.

It is allowed to apply the loading of base samples by bending in a soft mode with an asymmetry coefficient r @ 0.05. At the same time, in the cutting area of finished impact samples (at the cut section) located only in the zone of residual tension deformations, the deformation of the metal of the base samples shall be at the level of (2.5 ± 0.25) %. The cut on the impact sample shall be located on the side of maximum plastic deformation.

7.2.4. For cyclically stable and cyclically hardening materials (with a ratio of RTp0.2/RTm ≤ 0.7) the purpose of loading modes of the base samples is made on the basis of the low-cycle fatigue curve of the material under study at a symmetric cycle according to item 7.2.1, determining the amplitudes of the conditional elastic stresses (deformations) corresponding to the numbers of cycles 103 and 104. At the specified amplitudes of stresses (deformations), loading of the base samples is carried out until fatigue damage accumulation a is not less than 0.3.

It is allowed to load the base samples by alternating bending (r = -1), while within the sizes of the finished samples (at the cut) the amplitude of deformations shall not differ by more than 10%. The cut on the impact sample shall be located in the place of the greatest value of the amplitude of deformations.

7.2.5. The design shift of the critical brittle temperature is determined in accordance with item 7.1.1 and is assumed to be equal to the largest value obtained in the considered range of numbers of loading cycles, stresses (deformations). If it turns out that ∆TN < 0, then ∆TN = 0 shall be assumed as a design characteristic.

8. PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINING CRITICAL BRITTLE TEMPERATURE SHIFT DUE TO EFFECTS OF EXPOSURE AND RADIATION EMBRITTLEMENT COEFFICIENT

8.1. GENERAL

8.1.1. The critical brittle temperature shift due to exposure effect is determined by the formula

∆TF = TcF - Tci,

where ∆TF ≥ 0; TcF is a critical material brittle temperature after exposure; Tci is a critical material brittle temperature in the initial state (before exposure).

8.1.2. The radiation embrittlement coefficient is determined from the ratio

AF = ∆TF(Fn/F0)n,

where Fn is a neutron transfer with an energy of Е > 0.5 MeV; F0 = 1022 neutron/m2; n is a coefficient.

8.2. EXPOSURE OF SAMPLES

8.2.1. Samples can be exposed both in research and in power reactors, both in dry ampoules and in coolant flow.

8.2.2. Witness samples loaded into the body of a nuclear power reactor are placed in sealed containers bound together in a bunch.

8.2.3. When exposing samples loaded into the reactor in sealed ampoules, reliable heat removal from the sample using fillers (aluminum, helium, sodium or others) shall be ensured.

8.2.4. The temperature deviation from the point set during exposure in a steady-state mode shall not exceed ±10 °C.

8.2.5. When exposing samples in sealed ampoules, continuous temperature control shall be carried out by thermocouples attached to the samples by spot welding on their surface or pressed into the sample. The distance between thermocouples is determined by the design of the irradiation device, but shall not be more than 200 mm.

Control over the temperature change during the exposure process shall be carried out automatically with recording on the recorders. The error of indication shall be no more than ±5 °C. It is recommended to install the maximum exposure temperature fixation indicators, which shall be installed directly on the samples.

If it is impossible to install thermocouples under exposure in power reactors, it is allowed to control the maximum exposure temperature only with the help of diamond monitors or fusible thermal indicators.

8.2.6. When exposing samples in unsealed ampoules, the exposure temperature is controlled by the coolant temperature at the inlet and outlet of the nuclear core or process channel.

8.2.7. The flux density of fast neutrons with an energy of E ≥ 0.5 MeV along the height of the placement of samples intended to determine ∆TF at the selected value of neutron transfer shall not differ by more than 15%.

8.2.8. The transfer of fast neutrons affecting the samples is determined using activation indicators. The number of indicators and the distance between them in the radial and axial directions of the irradiation device is selected depending on its geometry and size, but at least three (in the center and along the edges). The error in determining the neutron transfer shall be no more than ± 15% of the measured value.

8.2.9. The exposure report shall contain the following data:

1) nomenclature and order of placement of samples in the reactor;

2) energy spectrum of neutrons at the location of the samples in the reactor;

3) records of temperature of samples during exposure, type of thermocouples and method of their fastening;

4) temperature distribution along the height of the irradiation device for the entire period of exposure;

5) type of indicators for determining neutron transfer and their distribution along the cross section and height of the irradiation device;

6) schedule of reactor operation with shutdowns for planned preventive maintenance (PPM);

7) pressure, temperature, speed and chemistry of the coolant and their change in the process of exposure of samples;

8) time of exposure of samples reduced to 100% reactor power.

8.2.10. After exposing the samples in contact with the coolant, a conclusion shall be made about their appearance, the content and distribution of hydrogen in the samples shall be analyzed, and a conclusion about the corrosion effect of the coolant on the sample material shall be made.

8.3. PERFORMING OF TESTS AND PROCESSING OF RESULTS

8.3.1. Impact bending tests for samples from materials in the initial and exposed states shall be carried out on the same equipment.

8.3.2. The number of samples for testing the material in one state (exposed or unexposed) shall correspond to the number of samples required to determine the critical brittle temperature according to Section 5 of this Appendix. In the case of a limited number of samples due to an insufficient amount of devices for exposure, it is allowed to use the test data of a smaller number of samples, but not less than 12, to make a single temperature dependence KCV.

8.3.3. If the number of exposed specimens of the same series (with one fluence) is insufficient (due to the reasons specified in item 8.3.2) to determine the critical brittle temperature in full accordance with the instructions in Section 5 of this Appendix, the processing of experimental data from tests of exposed and unexposed samples is carried out in the following way:

1. Plot a graph of impact strength dependence (KCV) on the test temperature T using the equation

where A is a mean value of KCV between upper KCVmax and lower KCVmin values of impact strength; B = (KCVmax – KCVmin)/2; T0 is a temperature corresponding to the value of A; C is an empirical constant.

Values of A, B, C and T0 are determined by processing the experimental data by the least square method.

Experimental values of impact strength are plotted on a graph for each of the tested samples.

The graphs obtained by the above equation are the initial information for determining the critical brittle temperature.

2. According to the known value of the yield limit of the material in the initial state (when determining the value of Tсi) or after exposure (when determining the value of TсF) at a temperature of 20 °C in accordance with the values given in Table P2.1, the criterial value of impact strength is selected (KCV)I. In this case, each of the values of the yield limit indicated in the table is assumed as an mean value if at least three samples were used to determine it, and as a maximum value if two samples were used to determine it.

3. On the KCV-T graph on the y-axis (KCV axis) the value of (KCV)I is plotted. Through the obtained point, a line parallel to the x-axis (temperature axis) is drawn to the intersection with the impact strength curve.

Temperature corresponding to the intersection point is indicated as T1.

4. On the KCV-T graph on the y-axis the value 1.5(KCV)I is plotted. Through the obtained point, a line parallel to the x-axis is drawn to the intersection with the impact strength curve.

Temperature corresponding to the intersection point means the temperature T2.

5. If the temperature difference T2 - T1 is less than 30 °C, then temperature T1 is assumed as a value of Tci or TcF (for the initial and exposed states, respectively).

6. If condition 5 is not met, then the value of T2 - 30 °C is assumed as Tci or TcF.

9. FATIGUE TEST METHODS

9.1. GENERAL

9.1.1. The terms and definitions used when conducting fatigue tests and processing experimental data are set in accordance with GOST 23207-78.

9.1.2. Determined fatigue resistance characteristics are used for:

1) obtaining characteristics of fatigue fracture resistance of structural materials and their welded joints used in calculations for cyclic strength according to these regulations;

2) comparison of materials and their welded joints of various chemistry, their manufacturing technology and quality;

3) justification of the selection of materials for the considered components of equipment and pipelines.

9.1.3. The main characteristics to be determined from the results of testing metals and their welded joints for cyclic strength (fatigue) in low-cycle and high-cycle areas are:

1) static and cyclic deformation diagram before deformations of at least 3% and constants of the equations of deformation curves at their power approximation;

2) fatigue curves under loading with given deformations and constants of the equations of fatigue curves at their power approximation;

3) fatigue curves under loading with given forces and constants of the equations of fatigue curves at their power approximation;

4) material endurance limit for a given number of cycles under symmetric loading;

5) coefficients of reduction of cyclic strength of the welded joint, and the metal with deposit welding φs;

6) curves of long-term cyclic strength of structural materials and their welded joints;

7) coefficient of reduction of cyclic strength of structural materials and their welded joints, with due regard to the effect of neutron exposure;

8) coefficients of reduction of cyclic strength of structural materials and their welded joints, with due regard to the effect of the corrosive environment.

9.1.4. The basic requirements for experimental equipment, for the shape and size of samples, for their preparation and surface cleanliness are set in accordance with GOST 25.502-79.

9.1.5. The shape and size of test samples are selected with due regard to the shape and size of the sections of blanks for the components of NPI equipment and pipelines, as well as the test objectives.

For rod and sheet components of equipment with a wall thickness of over 20 mm, predominantly cylindrical samples are used; and for thin-walled sheet components of equipment with a wall thickness of up to 10 mm, flat samples are used.

9.1.6. Deformation of the working part of samples of types II and IV according to GOST 25.502-79 is measured by longitudinal deformometers, and the distance from the deformometer supports to the transition part shall be at least 2 mm.

9.1.7. When testing samples of types I and III according to GOST 25.502-79, transverse deformometers are used.

Longitudinal deformation is determined by the formulas

 or

where eapc, eaec are amplitudes of plastic transverse and elastic transverse deformations, respectively; eac, eae are amplitudes of elastic plastic transverse and elastic longitudinal deformations, respectively; μp, μe is a Poisson ratio for plastic and elastic deformations, respectively. It is allowed to assume that μp = 0.5 and μe = 0.3.

9.1.8. When conducting fatigue tests at elevated temperatures, the error in maintaining and measuring the set temperature of the working part of the sample shall not exceed ±5 °C in the temperature range from 50 to 600 °C.

9.1.9. Equipment for heating samples shall provide heating of the working part of samples of types II and IV (for samples of types I and III, section with radius R) according to GOST 25.502-79 with temperature differences along the length and diameter (thickness) of not more than 5 °C per 10 mm.

9.1.10. For material tested for fatigue, the characteristics of short-term and long-term static strength and ductility at appropriate test temperatures and loading duration shall be obtained according to Section 2 of this Appendix and Appendix 6.

9.2. LOW-CYCLE FATIGUE

9.2.1. The main mode of low-cycle loading of samples is axial tension-compression with given deformation amplitudes.

Bending or torsion testing is allowed.

9.2.2. For materials prone to cyclic softening (with a ratio of yield limit to tension limit of above 0.7), along with the tests specified in item 9.2.1, tests with a given amplitude of stresses (forces) shall be carried out.

9.2.3. The characteristics of low-cycle fatigue resistance specified in item 9.1 are determined from the results of test of a series of samples, which shall be:

1) at least three – to determine the deformation diagrams;

2) not less than ten – to determine the fatigue curves for the formation of cracks with a length of over 0.5 to 2.0 mm with a symmetric cycle of deformations or stresses.

9.2.4. With the tendency of samples of type II and IV according to GOST 25.502-79 to loss stability, the length of the working part l of samples of type II is allowed to be reduced to 2d (d is a working part diameter) and of type IV to  (b is a height; h is a thickness of a working part of the flat sample).

9.2.5. Tests for low-cycle fatigue are carried out in the air:

1) with axial tension-compression (the main type of loading);

2) with amplitudes of stresses above the yield limit and corresponding deformations;

3) with a symmetric cycle on a controlled parameter (deformation or stress);

4) with a number of loading cycles of 102 to 5 · 104 (at least);

5) with a loading frequency of up to 1 Hz, which excludes self-heating of samples by more than 30 °C.

9.2.6. Testing procedure:

1) inspection and measurement of the cross-sectional sizes of the working part of the samples with an error of no more than 0.5% of the nominal size;

2) static tests to determine the mechanical properties;

3) zero half-cycle of loading the samples under tension;

4) the first sample is tested at a deformation amplitude of 1% (under loading with given deformations) and a zero half-cycle deformation of 0.6% (under loading with given loads);

5) subsequent samples, depending on the test result of the first sample, are tested at the deformation amplitudes or zero half-cycle deformations, ensuring an approximately uniform distribution (on a logarithmic scale) of the resulting durabilities in a given range of cycle numbers according to item 9.2.5;

6) during the test, recording of loads and deformations is carried out on an x-y recorder in a zero half-cycle and in cycles of 10p, 2 · 10p, 3 · 10p, 5 · 10p, where p = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.

When conducting a test to determine the durability, the number of cycles is recorded, corresponding to the moment of crack formation according to item 9.2.3.

9.2.7. According to the test results of a series of samples, a summary protocol is drawn up that includes the input data (material grade; heat treatment; type of blank; location and orientation of the sample cutting; shape, size and labeling of the sample; type of machine; test conditions) about the series of samples, data on the amplitudes of deformations, stresses, durability to crack formation, and constants of the equations of deformation diagrams.

9.2.8. The test results under loading with given deformation amplitudes of each sample of the series are represented graphically in double logarithmic coordinates:

1) lgea – lgN;

2) lgeap lgN;

3) lgeae – lgN.

The above deformation amplitudes are accepted for a stabilized cycle or a number of cycles equal to 0.5N.

9.2.9. The test results under loading with given stress amplitudes of each sample of the series are represented graphically in coordinates lgeap lgN. In this case, the amplitude of plastic deformations eap is set by calculation on the zero half-cycle deformation е0 by the formula

where Rpe is a limit of proportionality in zero half-cycle, MPa; E is a modulus of elasticity, MPa;  is a coefficient characterizing the relationship between the deformation e0 and hysteresis loop width δ1 in the first half-cycle of loading and assumed to be equal to the mean value of the set of experimental values A of a series of samples according to item 9.2.3, determined by the formula

A = δ1(e0 Rpe/E).

9.2.10. The fatigue curves according to the experimental points are plotted by the of least square method.

In cases of determining only the amplitudes of elastics plastic deformations ea (without separating them into elastic and plastic components) fatigue curves can be plotted by graphical interpolation.

9.2.11. The design characteristics are determined by the fatigue curves:

1) according to items 9.2.8 and 9.2.10 in plastic deformations

eap(4N)m = ec,

where m, ec are the constants of equations, which are recorded in the summary test report;

2) according to items 9.2.8 and 9.2.10 in elastic deformations

where mе, Rc are the constants of equations, which are recorded in the summary test report;

3) according to items 9.2.9 and 9.2.10 in plastic deformations

where m1, ecb are the constants of equations, which are recorded in the summary test report.

9.2.12. The cyclic deformation diagram is obtained according to the test data at a given deformation amplitudes for a stabilized cycle or a number of cycles equal to 0.5 of durability in the coordinates of "deformation amplitude 2ea – stress range 2σa.

9.2.13. The cyclic deformation curve hardening rate in the inelastic section is obtained by plotting a deformation curve in the double logarithmic coordinates lg(2σa) - lg(2ea) as a slope of the approximation straight line:

2σa = (2Rpe)1 - v (2Eea)v.

The summary test report records the value of the hardening rate v, obtained as an arithmetic mean for at least three samples.

The static deformation diagram is drawn similarly with the replacement of 2σa, 2ea, 2Rpe to σ0, e0, Rpe (stress and deformation of the zero half-cycle, respectively).

9.3. MULTICYCLE FATIGUE

9.3.1. The multicycle fatigue characteristics in a given range of amplitudes of stresses (deformations) and at a given asymmetry are obtained from the results of tests of a series of samples, which number shall be at least 12.

9.3.2. The shape and size of test samples are selected with due regard to the shape and size of the sections of blanks for the equipment components and test objectives.

For rod and sheet components of equipment with a wall thickness of over 20 mm, predominantly cylindrical samples are used; for thin-walled components of equipment with a wall thickness of up to 10 mm, flat samples are used.

9.3.3. The main mode of a multicycle loading of samples is axial tension-compression.

9.3.4. Tests for multicycle fatigue are carried out in the air:

1) with axial tension-compression (the main type of loading);

2) with a symmetrical loading cycle;

3) with the number of loading cycles for steels above 5 · 104 to 107;

4) with a loading frequency of up to 200 Hz, which excludes self-heating of samples by more than 30° from a given temperature.

9.3.5. When assessing the material sensitivity to the cycle asymmetry, in addition to tests with an asymmetry coefficient rσ (re) = -1, tests are carried out in the scope specified in item 9.3.1, at values rσ (re) = 0, where

rσ = σmin/σmax (re = emin/emax);

σmin(emin) is a minimum stress (deformation) of the loading cycle; σmax(emax) is a maximum stress (deformation) of the loading cycle.

9.3.6. It is allowed to carry out bending tests with rotation of samples of circular cross-section of types I and II according to GOST 25.502-79, with flat bending of samples of types III and IV in accordance with GOST 25.502-79, and during torsion of samples of circular cross-section for the corresponding type of loading of the component of structure.

9.3.7. Testing procedure:

1) inspection and measurement of the cross-sectional sizes of the working part of the sample with an error of no more than 0.5% of the nominal size;

2) the first sample is tested at a stress amplitude of (0.6 ÷ 0.65)RTm (when loading with a constant amplitude of total deformation, this amplitude shall be assumed to be equal to 0.4 %);

3) the subsequent samples (approximately 2/3 of the remaining amount), depending on the test result of the first sample, are tested with amplitudes of stresses (deformations) ensuring an approximately even distribution of the obtained durabilities N before crack formation with a length of 0.5 to 2 mm in the specified range of the number of cycles specified in item 9.3.4;

4) test results are pre-processed and a fatigue curve is obtained;

5) to determine the endurance limit based on tests of 107 cycles, at least three samples are tested at a stress amplitude assumed according to a preliminary fatigue curve. If two samples of the three tested or at least half of the tested samples are not destroyed until the specified number of cycles is reached, then this amplitude is assumed to be the endurance limit;

6) the obtained endurance limit is tested by testing one sample with an amplitude of 0.95 of the endurance limit, and the sample shall not be destroyed at a specified number of cycles;

7) the test results are finally processed and the characteristics of multicycle fatigue are determined, while the experimental point closest to the endurance limit shall be obtained with an amplitude of no more than 1.05 of the endurance limit.

9.3.8. Based on the test results, a summary protocol drawn up that includes the input data (material grade; heat treatment; type of blank; location and orientation of the sample cutting; shape, size and labeling of the sample; test conditions) about the series of samples, data on the amplitudes of stresses (deformations) and durability.

9.3.9. The test results of each sample are presented graphically in double logarithmic coordinates la – lgN.

9.3.10. The fatigue curves according to the experimental points are plotted by the of least square method.

9.3.11. According to the fatigue curve, the design characteristics are determined – the endurance limit on a given base and the exponent me of the fatigue curve:

where N0 is a given number of cycles (test base).

9.3.12. According to the test results at an asymmetric cycle according to item 9.3.5, the sensitivity coefficient of the material to the asymmetry of the stress (deformation) cycle is determined by the formula

9.4. LONG-TERM CYCLIC STRENGTH

9.4.1. Tests for long-term cyclic strength are carried out according to GOST 25.505 - 85 "Calculations and tests for strength. Methods mechanical tests of metal. Tests at low-cycle non-isothermal and thermal fatigue loading on the basis of 2 · 104 h at a temperature that causes the greatest decrease in the long-term plasticity of the material under study. Characteristics of long-term strength and ductility are determined in accordance with the requirements of Section 4 of this Appendix.

9.4.2. The main type of loading is axial tension-compression with given deformation amplitudes.

Bending tests with a given displacement are allowed.

9.4.3. The tests are carried out before the crack formation with a length of over 0.5 to 2 mm:

1) in the low-cycle area (102 - 104 cycles) with a symmetrical loading cycle (re = -1);

2) in the high-cycle area (105 - 107 cycles) with a symmetric and pulsating (rσ = 0) loading cycles.

9.4.4. The loading frequency and holding time at maximum cycle deformation are assumed such that the maximum test duration within a given series of samples on an accepted cycle base is at least 10% of the operation time of a component of structure made of the material under study.

9.4.5. The number of samples within one series shall be at least eight (by two samples at four levels of deformation amplitudes).

9.4.6. The test results are presented in the form of fatigue curves according to the endurance duration parameter. It is allowed to plot fatigue curves according to the experimental points by graphic interpolation.

9.4.7. The design characteristics of long-term cyclic strength are determined using the recommendations of Appendix 7 of the Regulations.

9.4.8. According to the test results at an asymmetric cycle according to item 9.4.3, the sensitivity coefficient of the material to the asymmetry of the loading cycle is determined using the formula in item 9.3.12.


 

9.5. CYCLIC STRENGTH OF WELDED JOINTS AND METAL WITH DEPOSIT WELDING

9.5.1. Fatigue tests of metal of various zones of welded joints and metal with deposit welding are carried out in accordance with the requirements of GOST 25.502-79, GOST 25.505-85 and items 9.1 - 9.4.

9.5.2. When testing a welded joint metal, the longitudinal axis of samples of types II, IV according to GOST 25.502-79 shall be placed parallel to the welded joint axis. It is allowed to use samples of types I and III with the location of the sample axis perpendicular to the welded joint axis.

For the preparation of samples, welded joints of the first category are used.

9.5.3. When testing metal of transition zones (fusion zone and heat-affected zone) the minimum cross-section of samples of types I, III according to GOST 25.502-79 shall be placed in the test zone of the welded joint. According to the test results, the fatigue curve is plotted, which is the lower envelope of the curves of the various zones of the welded joint.

It is allowed to obtain a fatigue curve using samples of types II and IV with the location within the measurement base of the longitudinal deformation of all zones of the welded joint.

9.5.4. Characterization of the cyclic strength of the metal with deposit welding is carried out on samples with the preservation of a deposit welding in full size. The height of the sample is assumed to be H = 4B, where B is an overlay thickness. For single-layer deposit welding, the use of samples with a smaller section of the working part is allowed. In this case, the overlay thickness shall be at least (2 ± 0.5) mm.

9.5.5. To determine the diagram of cyclic deformation of the deposited metal, a sample entirely cut out of the overlay metal is used.

9.5.6. If, when testing metal of transition zones of welded joints, cyclic fractures do not occur in the sample zone under study, then the sample zone under study is transferred to the part where the fractures occur.

9.5.7. When testing flat samples with deposit welding, the zone in which cracks occur (overlay, sub-surfacing zone, base metal) is fixed.

9.5.8. According to the results of fatigue tests of the base metal in accordance with the indicated in items 9.2 - 9.4, as well as the metal of welded joints and metal with deposit welding, the coefficient of reduction of the cyclic strength of a welded joint or metal with deposit welding φs is determined at a given durability N by the formula

φs = eas/ea,

where eas is a deformation amplitude according to the fatigue curve of the welded joint; ea is a deformation amplitude according to the fatigue curve of the base metal.

9.5.9. To determine the values of φs, the curves ea - N obtained according to items 9.5.3, 9.5.4 are used. If the obtained value is φs > 1, then it is assumed that φs = 1.

If in the interval of numbers of cycles 102 - 107 the difference of φs from φs at N = 104 is not more that by ±10 %, then the minimum value of φs, set according to the curve φs - N is assumed. In other cases, the values of φs are determined by dependency φs – σa(ea), which is used in the calculations.

9.5.10. The results of cyclic tests of the metal of welded joints and metal with deposit welding are recorded in the summary test report.

9.6. CYCLIC STRENGTH OF BASE MATERIALS, WELDED JOINTS AND METAL WITH DEPOSIT WELDING IN CORROSION MEDIA

9.6.1. When testing for cyclic strength, the following design characteristics are determined:

1) fatigue curves at low-cycle loading in the amplitudes of elastic plastic deformations in air and in a medium at a given temperature, cycle form, and loading frequency;

2) φccs) is a coefficient of corrosion reduction of the cyclic strength of the base metal (welded joint), equal to the ratio of the value of ea according to the fatigue curve obtained when testing in the medium to the value ea according to the fatigue curve obtained when testing samples of the same type in the air, with durability N;

3)  is a minimum value of the coefficient of corrosion reduction of cyclic strength φccs).

In the following, only φc and  are used.

9.6.2. The coefficients of corrosion reduction of cyclic strength are determined from the results of tests of a series of samples in air and in a corrosive medium under identical conditions of test temperature, material and dimensions of the working part of the sample.

9.6.3. When testing, samples of types I - IV according to GOST 25.502-79 are used. For axial tension-compression or torsion, the tubular sample indicated in Fig. P2.2 is used.

When loading with a pure or cantilevered bending, samples, the working part of which is shown in Fig. P2.3, P2.4, are used. The design of transition zones shall exclude destruction within them.

9.6.4. When testing samples containing the fusion zone within the working part, the measurement and control of deformation are carried out, as for a homogeneous metal.

Fig. P2.2. Sample for axial tension-compression and torsion tests:

(d - d1)/d = 0.05 ÷ 0.1; dd1 ≥ 1 mm; Rd; l = (3 ÷ 4)d. For tension-compression samples l/d is determined by sustainability requirements

9.6.5. The number of samples and the requirements for their preparation are specified in item 9.2 of this Appendix.

9.6.6. Samples are labeled at both ends in such places and in such a way as not to reduce the resistance to cyclic fracture and to ensure the labeling security after the test.

9.6.7. The sample is tested in the state corresponding to the state of the metal of the manufactured or operated product.

9.6.8. In the study of mechanisms of corrosion and fatigue destruction it is allowed to pretreat the samples:

1) autoclaving;

2) air oxidation at elevated temperatures;

3) holding at elevated temperature with or without prior plastic deformation;

4) sensitization heating of the sample blanks in the study of the welding cycle influence on the base metal in the heat-affected zone.

9.6.9. With axial tension-compression of samples, measurement and control of deformations are determined in accordance with GOST 25.502-79.

9.6.10. The deformation amplitude on the surface of the working part of the sample from a homogeneous material with a constant rectangular cross section under loading with pure (four-point) bending is determined by the formula.

ea = ∆a8s/l2p,

where ∆a is an amplitude of the movement of the middle of the working part relative to the middle supports, mm; s is a height of the cross section of the working part of the sample, mm; lp is a length of the working part of the sample (the distance between the middle supports), mm.

The scheme of loading with a pure bending is shown in Fig. P2.5.

When testing a sample of a homogeneous or non-uniform material (for example, including various zones of a welded joint), the amplitude of deformations in the working part of the sample can be determined experimentally, for example, using strain measurement.

Fig. P2.3. Working part of the sample for pure bending tests:

s ≥ 2 mm; lp ≥ 7s; 1.5 ≤ b/s ≤ 2.5

Fig. P2.4. The shape and dimensions of the working part of the sample for
cantilevered bending tests:

h, mm

b, mm

H/h

R/h

2 - 10

(2 - 10)h

1.5 - 2

≥ 5

9.6.11. Deformation of the working part of the sample is allowed to be determined by the grip displacement outside the autoclave using the calibration dependencies obtained when tested in air.

9.6.12. Testing equipment includes a circuit filled with a medium and a loading device, which can be a universal or special testing machine that maintains a given loading mode, shape and characteristics of the cycle.

9.6.13. Test equipment shall provide:

1) measurement of displacements with an error of not more than ± 3% of the specified value;

2) the error of maintaining cyclic displacements shall not exceed ±5% of the specified values;

3) the error of maintaining and measuring the set temperature shall not exceed ±5 °C in the temperature range of 20-350 °C;

Fig. P2.5. The scheme of loading a prismatic sample with pure bending

4) control and maintenance of pressure with an error of no more than ± 5% of the specified value;

5) control and maintenance of the medium by pH = 4.5 ÷ 10.5, content of Cl (up to 10 µg/kg) and O2 (up to 10 mg/kg) ions, as well as other by components introduced into the composition of the real working medium, for example, when boring or regulating the oxygen content with an error of no more than ± 10% of the specified value;

6) forced circulation of the medium (tests are allowed at natural circulation);

7) fixing the moment of a crack occurrence with a length of 0.5–2 mm or the destruction of each sample in the process of testing machine operation.

9.6.14. Tests are conducted:

1) when pulsating and symmetric deformation cycles with axial tension-compression or torsion of cylindrical and tubular samples, pure or cantilevered bending of flat samples. Only tests on a pulsating cycle are allowed;

2) with a number of loading cycles of 102 to 5 · 104;

3) in the air and in the corrosive medium at the same temperatures (at the maximum temperature of the working medium without fail). Frequency (speed) of loading in air is determined by the requirements of GOST 25.502-79;

4) in air in accordance with GOST 25.502-79;

5) in a medium with holding ∆t0 at a maximum tension deformation (∆t0 ≥ 30 c). (φc)0 and  are determined at N = 102, 103, 104, 5 · 104;

6) the following tests for cyclic strength in the medium are carried out with increasing holding of ∆tn = m∆t0, where m = 5, 10, 50, ..., and correspondingly n = 1, 2, 3, ...;

7) tests are terminated if the condition  is met and the graphs of dependencies (φc)m on lg(∆τm) at values of N = 102, 103, 104, 5 · 104 note a decrease in the rate of decrease (φc)m, that is  when increasing lg(∆tm) decreases. Dependencies (φк)m on lg(∆tm) are given in a summary test report;

8) at  is assumed

9.6.15. Before testing, measure the cross-sectional sizes of the working part of the samples with an error of no more than 0.5% of the nominal size, then the samples are degreased and washed.

9.6.16. When a break in the tests on the multispecimen machine, all samples are inspected, the sizes, number, features and places of crack formation are recorded in the protocol.

Tests are interrupted to remove damaged samples or troubleshoot. The inspection time for the purpose of detecting cracks on samples tested at a minimum amplitude of deformations is established after the fracture of samples, with higher deformations, based on the analysis of the test results presented in coordinates lgea – lgN.

9.6.17. After testing, samples are examined, the number and characteristics of the location of cracks are recorded and subject to metallographic examination. The fracture surface of the sample is examined to establish the type of fracture.

9.6.18. Test report indicates:

1) sample number (labeling);

2) material grade, its state, number of melting;

3) sample cutting orientation, type of blank;

4) number of section and cell in which the sample is placed;

5) dimensions of the cross section of the working part (only before and after testing);

6) composition of the medium and the date of its control (the frequency of control is established during the preparation of tests and is adjusted when they are conducted);

7) medium temperature, pressure;

8) maximum and minimum efforts (optional);

9) dates of the beginning of tests, control measurements and end of tests;

10) number of cycles to fracture Nf and crack detection Nc;

11) information about breaks in tests, level of loading of sample during breaks in tests, changes in mode, number of cracks and nature of fracture, local and general corrosion.

9.6.19. A summary test report is made according to the test reports of individual samples of the series.

9.6.20. The plotting of fatigue curves obtained in air and in the medium is carried out in accordance with the indications of Section 9.2 - 9.5 of this Appendix.

9.6.21. The coefficient of reduction of cyclic strength φc is assumed to be equal to the value of  determined in accordance with item 9.6.14.

9.7. EFFECT OF EXPOSURE ON CYCLIC STRENGTH OF MAIN MATERIALS, WELDED JOINTS AND METAL WITH DEPOSIT WELDING

9.7.1. Tests of exposed structural materials, their welded joints and deposited metal for cyclic strength is carried out in the low-cycle loading area (number of cycles to fracture Nf varies in the range from 102 to 5 · 104).

9.7.2. Tests are carried out to determine the reduction coefficients of the cyclic destruction resistance of materials φF, their welded joints and the deposited metal φFs as a result of neutron exposure.

9.7.3. The coefficient of reduction of resistance to low-cycle destruction φF = (φFs) is determined with a symmetric cycle of specified deformations and a temperature of 20 °C, depending on the exposure temperature, neutron transfer (E ≥ 0.5 MeV) and deformation amplitude.

9.7.4. Samples for testing can be pre-exposed or cut from a component of structure that was subjected to neutron exposure during operation.

9.7.5. Geometry of the working part of samples shall comply with GOST 25.502-79.

It is allowed to use the samples shown in Fig. P2.6 - P2.8.

9.7.6. Shapes and sizes of sample heads depend on the exposure conditions (heat removal and mounting in a weigh or ampoule) and the method of its mounting in the grips of the testing machine.

9.7.7. All samples shall be labeled at both ends, and labeling shall be maintained at all stages of exposure and subsequent testing.

Fig. P2.6. Shape and sizes of the working part of a sample for testing under conditions of axial tension-compression at Rd:

d, mm

l, m

3

6

5

10

7.5

15

10

20

9.7.8. The samples are exposed in accordance with the requirements of item 8.2 of this Appendix.

9.7.9. The test of exposed samples for low-cycle fatigue is carried out under loading with specified deformations (axial tension-compression, repeated bending or torsion) for a symmetrical cycle at a temperature of 20 °C.

9.7.10. Experimental equipment, number of samples and test procedures shall meet the requirements of GOST 25.502-79.

9.7.11. Samples in the initial state are tested according to the same procedure and on the same experimental equipment as the exposed samples.

Fig. P2.7. The shape and dimensions of the working part of the sample for
repeated bending tests:

h, mm

b, mm

H/h

R/h

2 - 10

(2 - 10)

1.5 - 2

≥ 5

9.7.12. The equipment design shall be such that the fixing of the samples in the machine grips, operations for setting it up to a given loading mode and installation of the extensometer (resistance strain gauge) on the working part of the sample can be carried out remotely using a manipulator.

Fig. P2.8. The shape and dimensions of the working part of the sample for repeated torsion tests:

d, mm

L, m

R, mm

3 - 10

3d

d

9.7.13. Extensometers and a dynamometric component of the machine shall be calibrated at least 1 a year.

9.7.14. Test data of exposed samples for low-cycle fatigue are processed in accordance with item 9.6.2.

9.7.15. Coefficient φFFs) for given exposure conditions, is determined as the ratio of the amplitudes of destructive deformations of the samples of exposed eaF and unexposed ea materials with the same number of cycles and are given in the form of φF = f(ea)[φFs = f(ea)]. When determining the value of φFs, fatigue curves are used which are the lower envelopes of the fatigue curves for different zones of the welded joint or deposit welding, including transition zones.

10. METHODS FOR PROCESS TESTS OF METALS

10.1. BENDING TEST METHOD

10.1.1. Process bending tests at normal temperature, the shape and sizes of the samples shall comply with the requirements of GOST 14019-80.

10.1.2. Results of bending tests are assessed in accordance with the requirements of standards and specifications for delivery.

10.2. PIPES. BENDING TEST METHODS

10.2.1. Bending test methods for samples in the form of pipe sections, sample sizes, place for cutting samples for testing, and assessment of results are determined in accordance with the requirements of standards and technical specifications for delivery.

10.3. PIPES. FLATTENING TEST METHOD

10.3.1. Flattening test method, sample sizes, place for cutting samples for testing, and assessment of tests are determined in accordance with the requirements of standards and specifications for delivery.

11. WELDED JOINTS. METHODS FOR DETERMINING MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

11.1. Determination of the mechanical properties of a welded joint for static tension, bending or flattening (for pipes with a wall thickness of up to s = 12 mm – for impact bending), as well as static tension tests for the weld metal, metal of various sections of the heat-affected zone and deposited metal for all types welding, place of cutting, shape and size of samples, their number, test conditions, and assessment of test results shall comply with the requirements of
GOST 6996-66.

11.2. Static bending tests of welded joints are carried out for butt welded joints:

shape and size of the sample, place of sample cutting, requirements for sample preparation, and bending test conditions are determined by GOST 6996-66; when the thickness of a metal is more than 50 mm, the sample sizes are specified by special specifications.

11.3. Flattening tests are carried out on pipe sections, the sizes of which are determined by GOST 6996-66; test conditions, assessment of test results are set according to GOST 6996-66.

11.4. Impact bending tests (for cut samples) of metal of various sections of a welded joint and deposited metal are carried out in accordance with GOST 6996-66 on samples of type IX or X, XI.

11.5. Static bending tests of metal with deposit welding.

11.5.1. To test the deposited corrosion-resistant coating for bending, control deposit weldings made when validation of new materials are used.

11.5.2. Control deposit welding is cut into two parts, one of which is used for the preparation of bending samples without heat treatment, and the second is subjected to high tempering before cutting samples according to production and process documentation for the preparation of corresponding products with overlaying an anti-corrosion coating.

11.5.3. Samples for preparation for bending of deposited anti-corrosion coating.

11.5.3.1. Samples are cut from the control deposit welding

Fig. P2.9. Types of samples:

a – type А1 and А2; b – type В1 and В2

наплавка

deposit welding

Fig. P2.10. Sample cutting scheme:

A1 – with deposit welding on the wide side with a longitudinal axis across the direction of deposit welding; A2 – the same with a longitudinal axis along the direction of deposit welding; В1 – sample with a deposit welding on the narrow side with a longitudinal axis across the direction of deposit welding; В2 – the same with a longitudinal axis along the direction of deposit welding of four types, the shape and sizes of which shall comply with
Fig. P2.9 and P2.10.

направление наплавки

deposit welding direction

11.5.3.2. For certain types of samples, the designations indicated in Fig. P2.10 are accepted.

Fig. P2.11. Scheme of testing samples of deposited metal

11.5.3.3. When preparing samples, the following conditions shall be observed:

the surface of the deposited coating is machined until the surface is leveled to ensure the coating thickness within the established tolerances;

the direction of machining shall coincide with a longitudinal axis of the sample;

the longitudinal edges of samples shall be rounded with a radius of 0.5 mm.

11.5.4. Test equipment.

Bending tests of samples of the deposited anti-corrosion coating are carried out on testing machines or presses of the appropriate capacity. In this case, the bending radius of a punch and supports, as well as the distance between the supports, shall correspond to Fig. P2.11, and the width of the punch and supports shall exceed the width of the sample.

11.5.5. Testing.

11.5.5.1. The samples are loaded smoothly with the punch movement speed of not more than 0.25 mm · s-1.

11.5.5.2. Bending tests of samples of the deposited anti-corrosion coating are carried out with a concentrated load in the middle of a span between the supports (Fig. P2.11) before the occurrence of the first crack or to a given bend angle. Metal of deposit welding, depending on the type of samples shall be located according to Fig. P2.12.


 

11.5.6. Test results assessment.

Fig. P2.12. Sample arrangement when testing

наплавка

deposit welding

основной металл

base metal

11.5.6.1. When testing for static bending, the outer surface and edges of the sample curved part are examined without the use of magnifying means.

11.5.6.2. The bend angle is measured in the unstressed state of the sample and is determined with an error of no more than 2°.

11.5.6.3. When bending tests before the occurrence of the first crack, the bending angle obtained before the occurrence of the first crack in the stressed state is determined.

11.5.6.4. Cracks arising in the process of testing on the stretched side and on the edges of the sample are not considered a rejection sign if their length does not exceed 20% of the sample width and is not more than 5 mm, except for cracks arising in the fusion zone of the anti-corrosion coating with the base metal.

When testing, the place of formation of cracks or fracture is determined:

1) along the seam;

2) along the heat-affected zone;

3) along the base metal.

11.5.6.5. Assessment of test results is carried out depending on the requirements of the relevant regulatory and technical documentation.

11.5.7. Test protocol.

The test protocol shall indicate:

1) grade and batch of base metal;

2) grade and batch of welding surfacing materials;

3) deposit welding method;

4) type and mode of heat treatment;

5) testing method;

6) type and size of sample;

7) labeling of sample;

8) punch mandrel diameter;

9) radius of supports;

10) test results.


 

APPENDIX 3

(recommended)

UNIFIED METHODS FOR DESIGN AND EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF STRESSES, DEFORMATIONS, DISPLACEMENTS AND FORCES

Reference designations

s is a thickness, mm

Rs is a mean shell radius, mm

R is a current radius of thick-walled cylinder, plate, ring, mm

R0 is a radius of the inner extreme point of the ring, the inner radius of the branch pipe, mm

Rc is a radius of the gravity center of cross section of the ring, the radius of the outer surface of two-layer thick-walled cylinder, mm

Ra is an inner radius of a thick-walled cylinder, mm

Rb is an outer radius of a thick-walled cylinder, the radius of the total surface of a two-layer thick-walled cylinder, mm

Rf is a fillet radius at the junction of the branch pipe with the body, mm

Rp is an outer radius of the plate, the radius of the outer extreme point of the ring, mm

Qi, Pi are external forces distributed over the ring in the radial and vertical direction, respectively, N/mm (kgf/mm)

M is a bending moment, N · mm (kgf · mm)

Mi is an external moment distributed over the ring, N · mm/mm (kgf · mm/mm)

Nc is an uniformly distributed force, referred to the gravity center of the cross section of the ring, N/mm (kgf/mm)

Mc is a resultant moment, referred to the gravity center of the cross section of the ring, N · mm (kgf · mm)

M0 is a concentrated bending moment, N · mm (kgf · mm)

M1 is a bending moment applied to the branch pipe in the meridional plane of the body, N · m (kgf · mm)

M2 is a bending moment applied to the branch pipe in the cross-sectional plane of the body, N · mm (kgf · mm)

Mz, Mr, Mφ, Mθ are axial, radial, meridional and ring bending moments, respectively, N · mm/mm (kgf · mm/mm)

σz, σr, σφ, φθ are axial, radial, meridional and ring stresses, respectively, Pa (kgf/mm2)

Nz, Nφ, Nθ are axial, meridional and ring forces, respectively, N/mm (kgf/mm)

H is a shear strain in the shell, acting in the plane of a parallel circle, radial force in the plate, N/mm (kgf/mm)

θ is an angle of rotation, rad

w is a radial displacement of the shell, plate deflection, mm

u is a radial displacement of the plate and ring, mm

ασ is a concentration coefficient

m is a creep indicator

z is a distance from the edge along the axis of the cylindrical shell, for plates and rings distance along the axis of ordinates, mm

l is a length of a short cylindrical shell, mm

di, d is a diameter of holes, mm

t is a pitch of holes, mm

ni is a number of holes with a diameter di

h is a height of ring, mm

F is an effective cross-sectional area of ring, mm2

Jx is a moment of inertia of the ring cross section relative to the axis passing through the gravity center of the ring cross section and perpendicular to the ring axis, mm4

F1 is a thickness ratio of abutting components

φ is an angle, rad

φs is a attenuation coefficient when stress calculation

φb is an attenuation coefficient when bending

φc is a attenuation coefficient when tension-compression

E is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity, Pa (kgf/mm2)

μ is a Poisson ratio

α is a temperature coefficient of linear expansion, 1/K (1/°C)

 - cylindrical rigidity, N · mm (kgf · mm)

 - coefficient depending on material properties

f is a dimensionless function characterizing the law of variation of the edge moment along the branch pipe generatrix

T is a temperature, K (°C)

p is a pressure per surface unit, Pa (kgf/mm2)

pa is an internal pressure per surface unit, Pa (kgf/mm2)

pb is an outer pressure per surface unit, Pa (kgf/mm2)

P is a concentrated force, N (kgf)

1. BASIC PROVISIONS

1.1. This Appendix to the Regulations contains recommended unified methods for design and experimental determination of stresses, deformations, displacements and forces.

1.2. Along with the described methods and formulas, it is allowed to use for the calculation other calculation procedures and formulas that allow to obtain results with greater accuracy.

2. CALCULATION OF STRESSES, DISPLACEMENTS AND FORCES IN AXISYMMETRIC STRUCTURES OF THIN-WALLED CLADDINGS, PLATES AND RINGS UNDER AXISYMMETRIC LOADING

2.1. RULE OF SIGNS

2.1.1. Positive directions of forces and displacements (with the accepted reference direction of the current coordinate along the meridian) for the cylindrical and spherical shells, plate and ring are shown in Fig. P3.1.

Fig. P3.1. Positive directions of forces and displacements:

a is a cylindrical shell; b is a spherical shell; c is a plate; d is a ring

The signs "±" in the formulas for stresses in the shells refer to the outer "+" and inner "-" surfaces of the shells.

The signs "±" in the formulas for stresses in the plates refer to the upper "+" and lower "-" surfaces of the plate.

2.2. COMPONENTS OF ROTATION CLADDINGS UNDER EFFECTS OF INTERNAL PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE LOADS, AND BOUNDARY FORCES

2.2.1. Cylindrical thin-walled shell with constant thickness

Table P3.1 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in cylindrical shell from uniform inner pressure and axial force, as well as from hydrostatic pressure.

Table P3.2 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in semi-infinite shell from an axisymmetric temperature field uneven along the meridian and along the thickness.

Table P3.3 and P3.4 give the formulas for finding the displacements, forces, and stresses, respectively, in semi-infinite (Table P3.3) and short (Table P3.4) shells from edge shear forces and bending moments (no axial force) and given edge displacements in short shells.

These formulas are applicable if the radial displacements are small compared to the shell thickness. When the ratio of s/Rs ≤ 0.05, error of formulas is less than 5 %; at s/Rs ≤ 0.1 it is less than 10 %. Shells can be considered as semi-infinite if their length is  Otherwise, the formulas for the short shell shall be applied.

2.2.2. Spherical thin-walled shell with a constant thickness without a hole and with a hole at the top (spherical segment).

Table P3.5 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in spherical shell without a hole and with a hole at the top from a uniform inner pressure and meridional tension force.

Table P3.6 gives the formulas for finding displacements, forces, and stresses in spherical shell with no hole at the top from an axisymmetric temperature field uneven along the meridian and along the thickness.

Table P3.7 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in spherical shell with no hole at the top from the edge shear forces and bending moments.

All formulas are applicable for small radial displacements compared to the thickness and under the following conditions for angles:

φ0, φ1 – any (Table P3.5);

φ0 – any (Table P3.6);

φ* ≤ φ0 ≤ p - φ* (Tables P3.6, P3.7)

(at φ0 < φ* = , formulas for spherical shell shall be applied).

Subject to the specified conditions and ratio of s/Rs ≤ 0.05 the error of the formulas is less than 5 %, at s/Rs ≤ 0.1 it is less than 10 %.

2.2.3. Elliptical thin-walled shell with constant thickness (semi-ellipsoid).

Table P3.8 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in elliptical shell from uniform inner pressure p and meridional tension force Nφ = pa/2.


 


Table P3.1. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in a cylindrical thin-walled shell. Load – inner pressure

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

Uniform inner pressure p and axial force

Arbitrary, z = z

 

Mzp =0; Nθp = pRφ;

Hzp = 0; Mθp = 0;

 

a, b are parameters

Hydrostatic pressure linearly varying along the meridian,

p(z) = az + b

Arbitrary, z = z

 Nzp = 0;

Mzp = 0; Nθp = Rs(az + b);

Hzp = 0; Mθp = 0;

σzp = 0;

-

 


 

Table P3.2. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in a semi-infinite cylindrical shell. Load – axisymmetric temperature field

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

The temperature is constant in thickness and in length of shell, T = T*

Arbitrary, z = z

wT = dRsT*;

 NzT = 0;

MzT = 0; NθT = 0;

HzT = 0; MθT = 0;

σzT = σθT = 0

-

The temperature is constant in thickness and linearly varies in length, T(z) = az + b

Edge, z = 0

w0T = αRsb;

 Nz0T = 0;

Mz0T = 0; Nθ0T = 0;

Hz0T = 0; Mθ0T = 0;

σz0T = σθ0T = 0

-

Arbitrary, z = z

wT = αRs(az + b);

 NzT = 0;

MzT = 0; NθT = 0;

HzT = 0; MθT = 0;

σzT = σθT = 0

-

The temperature is constant in thickness and varies in length along a square parabola, T(z) = az2 + bz + c

Edge, z = 0

 NTφ0 = 0;

Mz0T = 0;

Hz0T = 0; Mθ0T = 0;

σz0 = 0;

M* = -2DαRsa;

f1 = e-xcosx;

f2 = e-xsinx;

f3 = f1f2;

f4 = f1 + f2;

x = βz

Arbitrary, z = z

 NzT = 0;

MzT = (1-f4)M*;

HzT = -2βf2M*; MθT = μMzT;

 

Away from the edge,

wT = αRs(az2 + bz + c);

 NzT = 0;

MzT = M*; NθT = 0;

HzT = 0; MθT = μMzT;

 σθT =μσzT

 

The temperature linearly varies in thickness; the temperature mean in thickness is zero

Edge, z = 0

 Nφ0T = 0;

Mz0T = 0;

Hz0T = 0; Mθ0T = (1 – μ)M0*;

σz0T = 0;

 

The temperature difference between the outer and inner surfaces of ∆T either does not vary in length (∆T = b), either varies in length linearly (∆T = az + b)

Arbitrary, z = z

 NzT = 0;

 

HzT = -(2βf2M0* + f3H*) + H*; MθT = μMzT + (1 – μ)M*;

 

Away from the edge,

wT = 0;

 NzT = 0;

MzT = M*; NθT = 0;

HzT = H*; MθT = M*;

-

 


 

Table P3.3. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric cylindrical semi-infinite shell with a constant thickness.
Load – axisymmetric edge forces

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

Forces M0 and H0 at the edge, z = 0

Edge, z = 0

 Nz0 = 0

Mz0 = M0;

Hz0 = H0; Mθ0 = μM0;

 

f1 = e-xcosx;

f2 = e-xsinx;

f3 = f1f2;

f4 = f1 + f2;

x = βz

Arbitrary, z = z

 Nz = 0

 

Hz = 2βf2M0 + f3H0; Mθ = μMz;

 

 

Table P3.4. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric cylindrical short shell with a constant thickness.
Load – axisymmetric edge displacements and forces

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

At the edge, z = 0, known forces M0, H0 and displacements w0,

Arbitrary, z = z

 Nz = 0;

 

 Mθ = μMz;

 

y1 = cosxchx;

x = βz;

At the edge, z = 0 and z = l, given forces M0, H0, M1, H1

Edges, z = 0, z = l

b0 = y32 – y2y4;

b1 = y1y3 – y22;

y2 = y2y3 – y1y4;

y3 = y1y2 + 4y3y4;

Calculated at x = βl

Arbitrary, z = z

w, θ, Mz, Hz calculated by the formulas of this table, which substitute the specified effort M0, H0, as well as displacements w0, , calculated by the formulas of the same table

 

 

Table P3.5. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric spherical shell with constant thickness without a hole and with a hole at the top. Load – inner pressure

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

Uniform inner pressure and meridional tension force

Arbitrary, φ = φ

 

Mφp = 0;

Hφp = 0; Mθp = 0;

-

 


 

Table P3.6. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric spherical shell with constant thickness with no hole at the top.
Load – axisymmetric temperature field

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

The temperature is constant in thickness and along meridian, T = T*

Arbitrary, φ = φ

wTRsT*sin φ;

 NTφ = 0;

MTφ = 0; NTθ = 0;

HTφ = 0; MTθ = 0;

σTφ = σTθ = 0

-

The temperature is constant in thickness and varies linearly along the rotation axis, T(x) = ax + b; x = Rscos φ

Arbitrary, φ = φ

wTRssin φ(aRscos φ + b);

 NTφ = 0;

MTφ = 0; NTθ = 0;

HTφ = 0; MTθ = 0;

σTφ = σTθ = 0

-

The temperature linearly varies in thickness; the temperature mean in thickness is zero, the temperature difference between the outer and inner surfaces does not change along the meridian, ∆T = a

Edge, φ = φ0

 Nφ0T = 0;

Mφ0T = 0;

Hφ0T = 0; Mθ0T = (1 – μ)M*;

 

f1 = e-xcosx;

f2 = e-xsinx;

x = β(φ0 – φ)

Arbitrary, φ = φ

 NφT = 0;

 

 MθT = μMφT + (1 + μ)M*;

 

Away from the edge,

wT = 0;

 NφT = 0;

MφT = M*; NθT = 0;

HφT = 0; MθT = M*;

 

Table P3.7. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric spherical shell with constant thickness with no hole at the top. Load – axisymmetric edge forces

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

At the edge, φ = φ0, given forces M0, H0

Edge, φ = φ0

Mφ0 = M0;

Hφ0 = H0

Nφ = -cosφHφ;

f1 = e-xcosx;

f2 = e-xsinx;

f3 = e-xcos(x + γ);

f4 = e-xsin(x + γ);

γ = arctg(-к10);

x = β(φ0 – φ)

Arbitrary, φ = φ

The same for hemisphere, φ0 = p/2

Edge, φ = p/2

Mφ0 = M0;

Hφ0 = H0

 


 

Table P3.8. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric elliptical shell with a constant thickness.
Load – inner pressure and tension force

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

Uniform inner pressure and meridional tension force

Edge, φ = p/2

 

Mφ = Mθ = Hφ = 0;

Shell curvature radii,  R2 = a

Arbitrary

 

 

Mφ = Mθ = Hφ = 0;

ω = p/2 - φ

Pole, φ = 0

 

Mφ = Mθ = Hφ = 0;

R1 = R2 = a2/b

Table P3.9. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in an axisymmetric elliptical shell with a constant thickness.
Load – axisymmetric edge forces

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement, force and tension

Note

At the edge, φ = p/2, given forces M0 and H0

Edge, φ = p/2

Nφ = 0; Nθ = -2βa(H0 + βM0);

Mφ = M0; Mθ = μM0;

Arbitrary

f1 = e-1cosx;

R2 – see in Table P3.8;

f2 = e-xsinx;

f3 = f1f2;

f4 = f1 + f2;

R1, R2, η, ω – see in Table P3.8

 


 

Table P3.10. Formulas for displacements, forces and stresses in round solid plates with constant thickness, hinge-supported along the edge. Load – uniform pressure and axisymmetric shear and bending forces

Design diagram

Displacement, force and tension

in an arbitrary cross-section

in the center

on the edge

Mr = Mθ = M0;

u = 0;

Mr = Mθ = M0;

w = 0;

Mr = Mθ = M0;

 

 

w = 0;

σr = 0;

R < a

 u = 0;

-

 

R > a

 

-

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;

 

 u = 0;

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

 

R < a

 

-

R > a

 

 

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;


Table P3.9 gives the formulas for determining displacements, forces, and stresses in elliptical shell from the edge shear forces and bending moments.

2.3. ROUND PLATES UNDER EFFECTS OF POWER AND TEMPERATURE LOADS

Table P3.10 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in round solid plates, hinge-supported along the edge, from uniformly distributed, shear and bending loads for an arbitrary cross-section and characteristic places (edge and center).

Table P3.11 gives the formulas for determining displacements, forces, and stresses in ring plates, hinge-supported along the external circuit, from uniformly distributed, shear and bending loads for an arbitrary cross-section and on the edges.

Table P3.12 gives the formulas for finding displacements, forces, and stresses in round solid and ring plates from an axisymmetric tension load.

Table P3.13 gives the formulas for calculating displacements, forces, and stresses in round solid and ring plates from temperature loads (the temperature varies along the radius and thickness of the plate).

Formulas are applicable if the plates are thin, i.e. the ratio of thickness to outer radius does not exceed 0.2, and if the deflections are small compared with the plate thickness.

When calculating perforated plates, in the formulas for displacements of w, θ in Table P3.10, P3.11 instead of D use D1 = Dφb, for displacements of u in Table P3.12 add φc in the denominator, for stresses (Table P3.10 - P3.12) add φs in the denominator.

In the case of a uniform perforation over the entire surface of the plate (establishing of the holes is triangular or square), the attenuation coefficient is determined by the following dependencies:

a) when calculating bending displacements


φb = 1.18(td)/t;

b) when calculating tension (compression) displacements of the plate in the radial direction

φс = (td)/t;

c) when calculating stresses

φs =(td)/t.


Table P3.11. Formulas for displacements, forces and stresses in ring plates with constant thickness, hinge-supported along the external circuit. Load – uniform pressure and axisymmetric shear and bending forces

Design diagram

Displacement, force and tension

in an arbitrary cross-section

on the inner edge (R = R0)

on the outer edge (R = Ro)

 

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;

w = 0;

Mr = Mθ;

 

 

Mr = M0;

 

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;

 

Mr = 0;

 

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;

 

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;

w = 0;

Mr = 0;

σr = 0;


 

Table P3.12. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in round solid and ring plates with constant thickness.
Load – axisymmetric tension forces

Design diagram

Displacement, force and tension

in an arbitrary cross-section

in the center

on the edge

Hr = Hθ = H;

σr = σθ = H/s

-

Hr = Hθ = H;

σr = σθ = H/s

 

 

Hr = 0;

 

Hr = H;

 

 

 

Hr = H;

 

Hr = 0; σr = 0;

 


 

Table P3.13. Formulas for displacements, forces, and stresses in round solid and ring plates. Load – temperature field

Design diagram

Displacement, force and tension

in an arbitrary cross-section

in the center

on the edge

Solid round plate with radial temperature variation t(R)

Mtr = Mtθ = 0;

 

u = 0;

w = 0;

Mtr = Mtθ = 0;

u = 0;

w = 0;

Mtr = Mtθ = Ntr = 0;

Solid round plate with temperature variation in thickness under an arbitrary law

 

 w = 0;

Solid round plate with temperature variation in thickness under a linear law

σtr = σtθ = 0

σtr = σtθ = 0

σtr = σtθ = 0

Displacements and forces are calculated using the formulas for a solid round plate with temperature variation in thickness under an arbitrary law

Ring round plate with radial temperature variation t(R)

Mtr = Mtθ = 0;

σtr = Ntr/s;

Ntr = 0;

Mtr = Mtθ = 0;

σtr = 0;

σtθ = Ntθ/s

Ntr = 0;

Mtr = Mtθ = 0;

σtr = 0;

σtθ = Ntθ/s

Ring round plate with temperature variation in thickness under an arbitrary law t(z)

 

w = 0;

Ring round plate with temperature variation in thickness under a linear law

σtr = σtθ = 0

σtr = σtθ = 0

σtr = σtθ = 0

Displacements and forces are calculated using the formulas for a ring plate with variation in thickness under an arbitrary law

 


 

Table P3.14. Formulas for determining displacements and stresses in the ring from power loads

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Displacement

Stress

Note

Ring having an arbitrary shape in its cross-section and loaded with distributed loads

Passing through the gravity center

Arbitrary

The design diagram is the same

Passing through the gravity center

Arbitrary

 


 

Table P3.15. Formulas for determining displacements and stresses in the ring from temperature loads

Design diagram.

Type of loads

Coordinate

Displacement

Stress

Ring having an arbitrary shape in its cross-section and an arbitrary temperature distribution t(x, z)

Rand/R0 ≤ 1.6; h/R0 ≤ 0.6

Arbitrary point A

The design diagram is the same Rand/R0 ≤ 3; h/R0 ≤ 0.6

 


 

Table P3.16. Formulas for determining forces and stresses in the simplest composite structures due to the action of internal pressure

Design diagram

Considered cross-section

Boundary force

Stress

Note

Connection of a cylindrical shell with a spherical segment

Cylinder joint with a spherical segment

where

f2 = f1sinφ0

Spherical segment (φ = φ0):

Cylinder (x = 0):

Connection of a cylindrical shell with a semi-ellipsoid:

Cylinder joint with a semi-ellipsoid

At f1 = 1 (se = sc)

M0 = 0;

Elliptical shell:

Cylinder:

f1 = se/ss;

a = Rc

m =a/b

Joint of cylindrical shells of different thickness

Joint of cylinders

 – for both cylinders;

 – for cylinder with a thickness of s1;

 – for cylinder with a thickness of s2

f1 = se/ss;

Connection of a cylindrical shell with a plate

Joint of components

Cylinder:

Connection of a cylindrical shell with a ring

Joint of components

For

(see Section 2.4)

(NRc) and (MRc) are determined according to Section 2.4



If the holes have unequal diameter or are located unevenly, then when determining the attenuation coefficients, the most weakened plate diameter or a series of holes located near the diameter are considered. Accordingly we have

where di are diameters of holes located in the row under consideration. In this case, it is assumed that uniform attenuation is maintained in the plate.

2.4. RING PARTS UNDER EFFECTS OF POWER AND TEMPERATURE LOADS

Table P3.14 gives the formulas for displacements and stresses under the effect of power load on the ring.

Internal forces acting in the cross-section of the ring (in relation to the design scheme in Table P3.14),

where (NcRc) is a force perpendicular to the cross-section of the ring;  are radii of stress application; (McRc) is a bending moment relative to the axis x;  are coordinates of points of force application piai and Qi; bi is a force action arm Pi (for other designations see Table P3.14).

The transverse forces Q1 and the pressure p directed from the axis of the ring, and the moments from the forces causing clockwise rotation of the cross-section, are assumed as positive directions.

Table P3.15 gives the formulas for displacements and stresses with an arbitrary temperature distribution T(x, z) in the cross-section of the ring when the modulus of elasticity and the coefficient of linear expansion in the cross-section of the ring are variable: E(x, z), α(x, z).

2.5. COMPLEX STRUCTURES

Table P3.16 gives examples of composite structures, consisting of two components and loaded with uniform inner pressure. Thin-walled shells, plates and rings are considered as the components of structures.

Formulas for determining the forces and stresses are given for the junction of the components in question. In order to find the forces and stresses in an arbitrary cross-section of a component, one shall use the corresponding expressions for this component, summing up algebraically their values from loading by inner pressure and boundary forces H0 and moments M0 obtained for this composite structure, and for the spherical segment the difference (H0 - H), with due regard to the presence of thrust force, shall be assumed as H0. Formulas are given provided that the elastic moduli of the materials of the mating components of structures are the same.

3. CALCULATION OF STRESSES AND DISPLACEMENTS IN AXISYMMETRIC THICK-WALLED COMPONENTS OF STRUCTURES

3.1. The calculation of stresses and displacements in the hollow cylinder from a uniform pressure and temperature differences in the cross-sections, at a distance  from the edges, is given in Tables P3.17, P3.18.

3.2. The formulas for calculating displacements and stresses in a hollow cylinder made of a homogeneous material are given in Table P3.17.

3.3. The formulas for calculating displacements and stresses in a double-layered cylinder are given in Table P3.18. These formulas take into account the compatibility of work of the cylinder layers in the axial and radial directions (there is no slippage of layers and no possibility of the formation of gaps between the layers).

4. CALCULATION OF LOCAL STRESSES IN  COMPONENTS OF STRUCTURES

In the zone of sudden changes in geometry (holes, fillets, undercuts, etc.): there is a local increase in stress. In the case of elastic deformations, the maximum stresses σmax in this area are determined as the product of the nominal stress σnom and so-called theoretical concentration coefficient ασ:

σmax = ασσnom.

The concentration coefficients ασ given in this section are obtained by experiment or calculation. Each figure or table shows the nominal stresses in relation to which the concentration coefficients are determined.



Table P3.17. Formulas for displacements and stresses in a cylinder made of a homogeneous material

Design diagram

Radius

Displacement

Stress

Note

Pressure

Arbitrary

-

R = Ra

σr = -pa;

-

R = Rb

σr = -pb;

-

Temperature loads T = T(R)

Arbitrary

-

R = Ra

σr = 0;

-

R = Rb

σr = 0;

-

Table P3.18. Formulas for displacements and stresses in a double-layer cylinder

Design diagram

Radius

Displacement

Stress

Note

Internal pressure

Arbitrary

Layer 1

 

R = Rb

-

R = Rc

-

Arbitrary

Layer 2

 

 

R = Rb

-

R = Ra

-

Temperature loads

Arbitrary

Layer 1

R = Rb

-

R = Rc

-

Arbitrary

Layer 2

 

-

R = Rb

-

R = Ra

-



This section contains formulas and graphs for determining the coefficients ασ under elastic deformations from the effect of force loads, taken from well-known published works. They are presented for the following types of concentrators:

single holes in plates (Fig. P3.2 - P3.10);

a group of circular holes in plates (Fig. P3.11 - P3.16);

supported holes and branch pipes (Fig. P3.17 - P3.26);

junction zones of the components of structures (Fig. P3.27 - P3.33);

surface and subsurface defects (Fig. P3.34 - P3.37);

some types of welded joints (Fig. P3.38).

The figures given in the section use the following conventional symbols:

R is a radius of a fillet, hole, mm

D is a diameter of a hole, cylinder, mm

H is a thickness of a plate, shell, mm

S is a width of a plate, bridge between holes, mm

L is an intercenter distance, hole distance from plate edge, mm

P is a tension force, N (kgf)

M is a bending moment, N · m (kgf · m)

p is an inner pressure, Pa (kgf/mm2)

A, B, C are the most dangerous points

v is a Poisson ratio

β is an angle between the direction of force and the line of centers of holes, rad

γ is an angle of inclination of a fillet, rad

Fig. P3.2. Coefficients ασ and α'σ for point A of a stretched plate of finite width with a centrally located circular hole

Fig. P3.3. Coefficients ασ for point B and α'σ for points A, B and C of a stretched semi-infinite plate with a circular hole located at the edge

Fig. P3.4. Coefficients ασ for point A of a stretched plate of finite width with a non-central circular hole

Fig. P3.5. Coefficients ασnom calculated at point A), α"σnom calculated at point C) and α'σ for point A of a thin bending bar with a central circular hole

Fig. P3.6. Coefficients α'σ for points A and B of a thin bending bar with non-central circular hole on line A'A'

Fig. P3.7. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an unlimited plate with a circular hole at clean (M2 = 0) and cylindrical (M2 = vM1) bends

Fig. P3.8. Coefficients ασ at transverse bending of a plate with finite width with a central circular hole

Fig. P3.9. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an unlimited plate with an oblique hole at biaxial tension

Fig. P3.10. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an unlimited stretched plate with a rectangular hole with rounded corners

Fig. P3.11. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an infinite plate with two equal circular holes when stretched at an angle to the line of the centers of holes

Fig. P3.12. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an infinite plate with two unequal circular holes when stretched perpendicular to the line of the centers of holes

Fig. P3.13. Coefficients α'σ for point A of an infinite plate with an uneven circular holes at biaxial tension

Fig. P3.14. Coefficients ασ and α'σ for point A of an unlimited plate with an infinite row of circular holes when stretched perpendicular to the line of the centers of holes

Fig. P3.15. Coefficients ασ for point A of a stretched plate of finite width with an infinite row of circular holes

Fig. P3.16. Coefficients α'σ for stretched plate with periodically located circular holes of different diameters at D/D1 = 4:

1 – for point A; 2 – for point B; 3 – for point A1; 4 – for point B1

Fig. P3.17. Coefficients α'σ for point A of stretched plate with a supported circular hole at
D/H = 5

Fig. P3.18. Coefficients α'σ for point A of stretched plate with a reinforced hole at D1/D = 0.7 and D/H = 5

Fig. P3.19. Coefficients α'σ for point A of a stretched plate with a supported circular hole and fillets from support to plate at S/D = 4 and D/H = 5

Fig. P3.20. Coefficients ασ for point A of a stretched plate of finite width with a central circular hole supported with a thin ring

Fig. P3.21. Coefficients α'σ for stretched unlimited plate with one-sided supported holes:

a – for point A on the junction line; b – for point B on the inner surface of a hole

Fig. P3.22. Coefficients α'σ for stretched plate with two adjacent one-side supported holes (Н1 = Н, Н2 = 2Н):

1 – for point A; 2 – for point B

Fig. P3.23. Loading by inner pressure of a cylindrical vessel with a missed branch pipe
σ for point A)

Fig. P3.24. Correction coefficient K for determining α'σ = Kασ in supported holes of vessel with H/D ≥ 0.01 for ασ, found according to Fig. P3.23:

a – for H/D from 0.1 to 0.5; b – for H/D from 0.01 to 0.1

Fig. P3.25. Determination of stress concentration coefficients at points A and B of a tee connection loaded with inner pressure:

a is a tee connection diagram; b is a correction coefficient graph m

Formulas for determining concentration coefficients at points A and B

Limits of applicability of formulas

Nominal stress σnom

 where

  

 at   at  n = 1.0 at 0.05 ≤ x2 ≤ 0.4; n = 1.0 + (0.65 – 13x2)m at 0.02 ≤ x2 ≤ 0.05, where m see in Fig. P3.25, b.

where

  

 where

x1x2 ≤ 0.7

For tee connectors equal in strength, it is allowed to use the formulas

Fig. P3.26. Branch pipe loading with moments and tension force (formulas for determining ασ for each type of load are given below)

Load type

Formula for determining ασ

Nominal stress σnom

Point of maximum stresses

Limit of applicability of formula

My

A

Mz

C

P

C

Fig. P3.27. Coefficients ασ for a stretched flat stepped rod with fillets

Fig. P3.28. Coefficients ασ for a bending flat stepped bar with fillets

Fig. P3.29. Stepped flat bar with inclined fillets loaded with axial force and bending moment. Formulas for determining concentration coefficients for point A are given below

Force factor

Nominal stress σnom

Formula for determining ασ

Formula for determining K

 

P

 

M

 

 

Fig. P3.30. Coefficient ασ for point A of bending angle component (recommended to apply at Н1/Н = 1)

Fig. P3.31. Stress concentration coefficients for point А Kσ(a) and K'σ(δ) of a cylindrical vessel with a flat head:

X1 = R/H 0.05 ≤ X1 ≤ 1

X2 = D/(20H) 0.2 ≤ X2 ≤ 1

X3 = h/Н 1 ≤ X3 ≤ 4

где

where

кроме

except

при

at

 

Fig. P3.32. Coefficients ασ for point A of stretched pipe with a stepped change in wall thickness and fillets

Fig. P3.33. Coefficient ασ for loading with inner pressure the vessel with a stepped change in wall thickness and fillets

Fig. P3.34. Coefficient α'σ for stretched unlimited plate with small spherical depressions on both surfaces

Fig. P3.35. Coefficients ασ and α'σ for stretched plate and cylinder with a central spherical cavity

одиночная полость

single cavity

ряд полостей

row of cavities

 

Fig. P3.36. Concentration coefficients α'σ for point A when biaxially tension of a semi-infinite body with a spherical cavity near the surface (v = 0.25)

Fig. P3.37. Some types of surface defects in the stretched components:

a is a semi-infinite body with a hemispherical depression; b is a plate with hyperbolic depression (values of concentration coefficients ασ for points A and B are given below)

Load case

Nominal stress σnom

Value ασ

Fig. P3.37, a

σ

2.23 (v = 0.25)

Fig. P3.37, b

3.8

Fig. P3.38. Welded joints and workload application diagram:

a is a butt joint; b is a cross joint with a seam formed by the hypotenuse of a multifaceted triangle; c is a cross joint with a seam in a form of an isosceles triangle; d is a cross joint with wave-shaped seams (formulas for ασ are given below)

Type of welded joint

Nominal stress σnom

Formula for determining ασ for point A

Fig. P3.38, a

σ

Fig. P3.38, b

Fig. P3.38, c

Fig. P3.38, d

 


 

5. EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF STRESS AND DISPLACEMENT DEFORMATIONS

5.1. GENERAL

5.1.1. Conventional symbols used in this Section:

α is a scale of geometric similarity

l is a linear size, mm

β is a scale of force similarity

P is an external load force, N (kgf)

E is a modulus of elasticity of material, Pa (kgf/mm2)

δ is a scale of displacement similarity

u is a linear displacement

η is a scale of similarity of moments

M is a moment of external load, Nm (kgf · mm)

σ is a stress, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σmL is a local membrane stresses, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σbL is a local bending stresses, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σm is a general membrane stresses, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σb is a general bending stresses, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σaF is a local stress amplitude with due regard to concentration, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σnom is a nominal stresses, Pa (kgf/mm2)

p is a pressure per surface unit, Pa (kgf/mm2)

Q is an internal force in cross-section, N (kgf)

m is an internal moment in cross-section, N·m (kgf · mm)

ε is a relative deformation, RU

ε1, ε2 is a principal relative deformations, RU

γxy is a relative shear or angular deformation, RU

G is a shear modulus, Pa (kgf/mm2)

is an arithmetic mean of observations in the absence of load (zero value)

 is an observation value

is an arithmetic mean of observations

n is a number of repeated observations

n1 is a number of abnormal observations

S* is a general standard deviation

Sn is a standard deviation of instrument errors

ψ is a maximum value of deviation for a given sample size according to n observations and an accepted level of significance of 0.05. Determined according to GOST 8.207-76

D is an outer surface diameter, mm

H is a wall thickness, mm

C1 is a wall thickness tolerance, mm

φ0 is an angle between deformation axes ε1 and ε0, rad

Ri is a strain-sensitivity of an instrument

Rr is a strain-sensitivity of a resistance strain gauge

N is a number of repeated loads

N1 is a number of abnormal deformation values

ασ is a stress concentration coefficient.

Indices:

i is a sequence number of repeated observation

j is a sequence number of loading step

k is a measurement point number

k is a resistance strain gauge number

p is a real value

f – full size, outer

m – model

b – bend; v – inner

5.1.2. This Section contains recommendations for experimental determination of stresses, deformations and displacements.

5.1.3. Deformations, stresses and displacements are experimentally determined on full-size parts and components of structures or on their models. Experimental studies on models can be carried out at all stages of the design of objects. Experimental studies on full-size objects can be carried out at the manufacturing stages, during factory and start-up tests, and operation.

5.1.4. Stresses, deformations and displacements are experimentally determined using strain measurement and photoelastic method. Other experimental methods (fragile coatings, grade grids, moire fringes) are also allowed. When selecting a method, it shall be shown that its capabilities match the measurement problems and conditions.

5.2. OBJECTIVES, OBJECTS AND CONDITIONS OF CONDUCTING EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES

5.2.1. Experimental studies of stresses, deformations and displacements of parts and components of structures shall be carried out in cases when it is impossible to determine with the necessary accuracy the characteristics of the stress-deformed state of the structure. In this case, the assessment of the object strength shall be based on information obtained from the experiment.

5.2.2. Experimental studies shall provide information on the stress-deformed state of the structure, which is necessary to test the structure for strength in accordance with the standards of strength.

5.2.3. The object of experimental study may be a full-size part, a structure or a corresponding model made of full-size or another material, including polymeric one.

5.2.4. Selection of the object of study is determined by the operation conditions of the full-size part or structure. It is necessary to distinguish the following main cases of operation of full-size structures with possible combinations of existing power and temperature loads:

a) the largest deformations do not exceed the yield limit;

b) the deformation exceeds the yield limit.

5.2.5. For case a), the experimental study of the stresses of deformations and displacements can be carried out on a full-size structure or its model, made of any materials, but satisfying the similarity conditions in elastic ("elastic" model).

5.2.6. In case b) the study shall be carried out on a full-size structure or model made of the same materials as the full-size structure ("full-size" model), with loads corresponding to the operating ones, i.e. creating the same relative deformations according to distributions and values. It is allowed to use models made of other materials, but providing similarity conditions in the elastic and plastic ("elastic plastic" model).

5.2.7. Types of loads, their limiting numerical values and possible combinations for full-size structure are set by the designer based on the operating parameters, operating modes and conditions of the surveillance testing of the designed equipment, and are specified in the task for the experimental study.

5.2.8. In the study of individual parts of full-size structures or corresponding models, it is necessary to reproduce the boundary conditions, which can be determined on the grounds of a calculation or an experimental study of the entire structure. It is allowed to conduct tests at loads exceeding those determined in the calculation or from the experiment.

Boundary conditions can be reproduced by creating the corresponding efforts or displacements on the border, as well as by using additional components adjacent to the investigated part and affecting it in a given way.

5.2.9. Measurements of deformations and displacements shall be carried out in strictly established, controlled and recorded conditions under the action of force and temperature loads in accordance with the specified modes.

5.3. ELASTIC MODELS AND TERMS OF THEIR LOADING

5.3.1. Models and loads applied to them shall meet the relevant modeling conditions ensuring the possibility of transition from deformations, stresses, and displacements in the model to deformations, stresses, and displacements in full size.

5.3.2. The model shall be made in full compliance with the geometric and force similarity to full-size one. The places of application of loads in the model shall correspond to the places of their application in full size, and the values of all applied loads in the model and in full size shall be proportional with the same proportionality coefficient for all loads. Permissible deviations of the geometric dimensions and external force factors in the model and in full size shall be consistent in accordance with the requirements of the geometric and force similarity. Deviation from complete similarity, which does not lead to a change in the stress-deformed state in the studied zones, is allowed. At the same time, any deviations from the full geometrical and force similarity, inter alia the replacement of a three-dimensional model with a flat one, shall be justified on case by case basis. Both theoretical and experimental data can be used to substantiate.

5.3.3. The materials and model manufacturing technology used shall ensure that all sizes and shape features, that affect the stress state of the structure under study, are in place.

5.3.4. If the full-size structure is made of materials with different elastic moduli, then its elastic model shall be made of materials having the same ratios of elastic moduli.

5.3.5. In studies of thermoelastic stresses with the use of heating or cooling, it is necessary to make models of materials with the same ratios of products of the temperature coefficient of linear expansion and modulus of elasticity, which have the materials of corresponding parts of the full-size structure.

5.3.6. Values of the greatest loads on elastic models made of a material different from the material of full size are selected so that the deformations in the model do not exceed the limit of proportionality, and the strength conditions of the model are also provided.

In the case of a model of low-modulus materials, such as plastics, the greatest loads shall be limited to such values that when they are applied, there is no distortion of geometric shape of the model, affecting the resulting stresses and displacements.

5.3.7. In the "elastic" models with a linear dependence between loads and displacements, stress and displacement from the simultaneous action of all loads can be obtained on the grounds of the principle of superposition, i.e. corresponding addition at each considered point of results obtained from individual loads. The principle of superposition is not preserved when there is a non-linear dependence between loads and displacements, for example, when full take-up of clearances in the loading process, when presence of extensive contact zones that affect stresses in the studied areas. In this case, the study shall be performed with the simultaneous action of all loads.

5.3.8. If there are composite contacting parts in the "elastic" model, where friction forces can act and clearances and contact conditions can change, it is necessary to implement corresponding dependences in the model. In this case, the connection of parts with tension, ensuring the absence of mutual displacement of the position of the contacting surfaces, can be considered as monolithic. In contact zones, it is sufficient to correctly make resultant forces only if the stresses are determined in places remote from these zones.

5.3.9. The results of measurements of deformations and displacements obtained for linear problems (linear dependence of stresses and displacements on load under various load cases) shall be recalculated according to similarity criteria for full-size structure for the values of design loads. In the case of non-linear problems, the results obtained shall be referred to the loads of the full-size structure corresponding to those for which the measurements were carried out.

5.4. CONDITIONS FOR ELASTIC MODELING AND RECALCULATING RESULTS OF THE STUDY FOR A FULL-SIZE STRUCTURE

5.4.1. The model shall be made geometrically similar to the full size with respect to the scale of geometric similarity

α = lf/lm.

5.4.2. Values of loads applied to the model are determined by values of loads in full size with respect for the scale of force similarity

β = Pf/Pm.

5.4.3. In the general case of modeling, it is necessary that the deformation of full size and of model are the same. This shall be done if the clearances taken-up during loading lead to a change in the stress distribution in the zones in question or if large displacements are simulated. At the same time, the scales of geometric and force similarity are related by the dependence

β = α2Ef/Em,

and the scale of linear dimensions is equal to the scale of displacements

δ = uf/um.

5.4.4. In cases where the displacements in the model are sufficiently small and do not lead to a violation of the geometric similarity of the model and full size or to the nonlinear dependence of stresses on the load, the scales of geometric α and force β similarity can be assigned independently.

5.4.5. If the conditions of item 5.4.4 are met if the models have clearances and process tolerances taken-up during the loading process, then they shall be performed not on the scale of geometric similarity, but on a scale of displacements

which may be different from the scale of geometric similarity α.

5.4.6. Moments of the loads applied to the model are calculated according to the scale

η = Mf/Mm,

which is not independent and shall be determined by the formula

η = αβ.

5.4.7. Recalculation of displacements, stresses and internal force factors from model to full size is carried out according to the formulas given in Table P3.19, which correspond to the case of independence of the scales α and β and inequality of the scales α and δ, the formulas are also valid in the case of item 5.4.3.

5.5. STRAIN MEASUREMENT

5.5.1. Strain measurement is one of the main experimental methods for studying the stress and strain state of structures when studying the behavior of full-size objects during the period of commissioning and operational work, as well as studying the stress state of structures in laboratory conditions on models at the design stage.

This method is used in a wide range of deformations, temperatures and fluxes of ionizing radiation when affecting the objects of static, quasistatic and dynamic loads.

Table P3.19. Formulas for recalculating experimental data from model to full size

Type of external load

Recalculated value

Tension σ

Inner moment m

External force Q

Linear displacement u

Pressure p

Bending moment M

mf = ηmm

Focused force P

mf = αβmm

Qf = βQm

Linear displacement u

uf = δum

 

 

5.5.2. Types of resistance strain gages shall be selected subject to the goals and conditions of the experiment.

For studies, you shall use resistance strain gauges manufactured in series in domestic (or foreign) enterprises, passed calibration control and having a certificate containing their metrological characteristics. When using non-standard resistance strain gauges, the metrological characteristics of the resistance strain gauges and procedures by which they are determined shall be reported.

5.5.3. When strain measurement in conditions of elevated temperatures, self-compensated resistance strain gages and circuit compensation methods or methods of amending according to the metrological characteristics of the used resistance strain gages are used.

5.5.4. The means of protecting the resistance strain gauges from aggressive media and mechanical damage shall not affect the metrological characteristics of the resistance strain gauges and distort the stress state of the component under study.

5.5.5. All instruments used to measure deformations and temperatures, before each test or series of tests, shall undergo metrological calibration using standard instrumentation. Instruments shall be calibrated at least 2 times a year.

5.5.6. When conducting complex tests, it is advisable to automate the process of measuring and registering data, to use computers to process the results of experiments.

5.5.7. The registration of observations when an object is tested at each step of loading (mode) is repeated at least 3 times. (Practically the multiplicity of repeated observations is 3-15.)

5.5.8. The results of observations for mathematical processing are presented in the form of a sequence of numbers as a function of time (registration on digital printers or punching apparatuses) or in the form of tables (compiled by the experimenter).

5.5.9. To determine the actual value of readings of each resistance strain gauge at each step of loading , ordering of the sample of observations is carried out, namely:

calculate the mean value

check the significance of each of the n observations according to condition

and in the case of non-compliance of the inequality, recognize this observation as abnormal and exclude it from the sample under consideration;

calculate  as the arithmetic mean of significant observations of the sample

5.5.10. With a single observation, a single reading (observation) of the instrument is taken as a valid measurement result. The error of the result is estimated by the results of the calibration of strain-gauge transducers and devices (strain-gauge measurement system as a whole) or by the errors indicated in the certificate data.

5.5.11. Deformations are determined by actual observations

If it is possible to repeat the loading conditions of the object of study, the values of relative deformations are determined for each repeated loading, and then the ordering of the sample of relative deformations is performed by N repeated loading

and their significance is checked

Actual value of the deformations is determined by the formula

5.5.12. With known dependencies of deformations on loads, the actual value of deformations shall be determined by the least squares method using the alignment technique.


 

Table P3.20. Determination of the principal deformations ε1 and ε2 and their directions according to the measured relative deformations

Type of stress state and location of the resistance strain gauges

Relative deformations measured by a resistance strain gauge

Determination of ε1, ε2, ηxy and of main directions

Resistance strain gages are located in known directions of main deformations.

Linear stress state (direction ε1)

ε0

ε1 = ε0;

ε2 = -με0

Flat stress state

ε0, ε90

ε0 ≥ ε90

ε1 = ε0;

ε2 = ε90

Directions of main deformations are unknown

Flat stress state (angles between axis and axes of the resistance strain gauges 0, 45° and 90°)

ε0, ε45, ε90

γxy = 2ε45 – (ε0 + ε90)

Flat stress state (angles between axis and axes of the resistance strain gauges 0, 60° and 120°)

ε0, ε60, ε120

5.5.13. The main deformations ε1, ε2 and their directions are determined in accordance with Table P3.20 according to actual values of deformations.

5.5.14. The main stresses σ1 and σ2 are determined from the main deformations, σ1 and σ2 are determined from the main deformations ε1 and ε2 at the measurement points of the part (model) by the formulas:

for flat stress state

 

for uniaxial stress state

σ1 = Eε1.

Maximum shear stresses are determined by the formula

τxy = Gγxy.

5.5.15. Recalculation of stresses from the model to full size is carried out by the formulas given in Section 5.4.

5.5.16. The structure strength for the stresses obtained experimentally is estimated in accordance with Section 4 hereof.

5.5.17. The results of strain measurement are presented by categories and groups of stress categories, regulated by the assessment of strength of the structures under study (Table P3.21).

5.6. PHOTOELASTIC METHOD

5.6.1. The photoelastic method is used to determine the fields of deformations and stresses in parts and structures under the static force loads and temperature fields. It is used primarily in laboratory and bench tests for the study of areas with high stress gradients.

5.6.2. Studies by the photoelastic method are performed on models of transparent optically sensitive materials or with the use of coatings applied to the surface under study made of optically sensitive materials.

5.6.3. Network polymers, such as hardened epoxy resins, are commonly used as optically sensitive materials for models and coatings.

Optically sensitive material shall have sufficient transparency and optical sensitivity to deformation, optical isotropy in the undeformed state and stability of the optical and mechanical properties over time. Mechanical properties of the material for the model shall ensure that the similarity criteria of the model and the full-size sample are met, and mechanical properties of the material for the coatings shall ensure the possibility of joint deformation of coating and surface of the part under study while maintaining the linear dependence of the optical effect on deformations throughout the entire range of deformations of surface of the part under study.


 

Table P3.21. Examples of stress categories construction

Object of the study

Stress categories

Formula

Body, pipeline, branch pipe, etc.

Local membrane* σmL (at )

0.5(σkf + σkv)

Compensation of tension or compression* σcm

General bending* from bending moment My

0.5(σ1f + σ1v – σ3f – σ3v)

General bending* from bending moment Mx

0.5(σ2f + σ2v – σ4f – σ4v)

General bending* σb from bending moment

Local bending* σbL

0.5(σkf – σkv)

* Determined in cross-section A-A.

5.6.4. Elastic stresses in a three-dimensional structure from the action of static force loads are determined using a three-dimensional model investigated by the method of deformation "freezing". In this case, stresses can be determined both on the surface and inside the structure under study.

5.6.5. Elastic stresses on the outer surface of the structure under the action of several alternately applied static force loads are determined on the "elastic" model (see item 5.2.5 of this Appendix) using coatings made of optically sensitive material. It is also possible to carry out study on models using the method of deformation "freezing". In this case, the required number of models is equal to the number of separately considered loads.

5.6.6. Elastic plastic stresses and deformations on the outer surface of a structure under the action of a static force load are determined on a full-size structure or its "full-size" model (see item 5.2.6 of this Appendix) using coatings made of optically sensitive material.

5.6.7. Elastic stresses in a structure made of materials with different linear expansion coefficients are determined from the action of a uniform temperature field on a three-dimensional "frozen" model composed of components with previously "frozen" deformations corresponding to free temperature expansions taken with the opposite sign.

5.6.8. Thermoelastic stresses from the action of static and quasistatic (slowly varying in time) temperature fields are determined using a three-dimensional "frozen" model composed of components with previously "frozen" deformations corresponding to free temperature expansions taken with the opposite sign.


 

APPENDIX 4

(recommended)

CALCULATION OF COMPONENTS OF STRUCTURES FOR PROGRESSIVE FORM CHANGE

1. GENERAL

1.1. This Appendix to the Regulations contains the basic provisions and the method of calculation for progressive form change.

1.2. This material is recommended to be used when carrying out a checking calculation for progressive form change according to Section 5.10 hereof.

1.3. Along with the given methods and formulas, it is allowed to use for the calculation other methods and formulas that, inter alia, allow to obtain results with greater accuracy.

1.4. When calculating the progressive form change, changes in the shape and size of the structure resulting from both the process of accumulation of irreversible plastic deformations continuously increasing with an increase in the number of cycles, and irradiation growth, are determined.

1.5. Conditions for the occurrence of progressive form change of components of structures are determined according to the theory of adaptability of elastic plastic bodies with repeated loads and experimental data.

1.6. Calculation for progressive form change is carried out for the cases specified in Section 5.10 hereof. The rules of calculation do not apply to threaded connections, keys, dowels, etc.

1.7. The calculation is carried out for normal and abnormal operation, with due regard to all the design loads specified in item 5.1.3 hereof.

1.8. Conditions for occurrence and development of progressive form change are influenced by the mechanical loads and temperature, as well as by the nature of their change (by volume of structure and in time), geometric features of the part (sizes, fixing method, etc.), temperature and time dependence of mechanical characteristics of the material, and irradiation growth.

1.9. A necessary condition for the onset of progressive form change is the non-simultaneity of maximum stress at different points of the part. Extreme in this sense, external influences are cyclically repetitive moving mechanical loads and "moving" (quasistationary relative to the moving coordinate system) temperature fields.

Temperature fields of this type, inter alia, can occur in the walls of vessels with cyclic changes in the coolant level, with a rapid change in the coolant temperature, with a rapid change in heat generation in the pipes, inside of which there are structures with a sufficiently large heat capacity.

2. DEFINITIONS. RATED STRESSES

2.1. Here, the cycle of stress changes in all modes under normal and abnormal operation is called the working cycle; and mechanical, thermal and other loads are its parameters.

2.2. The cycle of stress changes, which corresponds to the beginning of a progressive form change, i.e. is the boundary between progressive form change and adaptability, is called the limit.

Progressive form change means the process of accumulation of one-sided plastic irreversible deformations (displacements), non-simultaneous in terms of volume of the component of structure, small in each cycle of changes in stresses and temperatures.

Adaptability of the structure means the termination of cyclic plastic deformation after a certain number of first cycles, mainly due to the formation of a favorable residual stress field.

2.3. During the first calculation stage (Section 5 hereof), conventional stresses in the working cycle σi(e) from mechanical loads and uneven heating of the structure are used (calculated under the assumption of ideal elasticity of material). The corresponding reduced stresses are calculated according to the theory of the greatest shear stresses.

2.4. Conditional elastic stresses in the limit cycle are proportional to the conditional elastic stresses of the operating cycle, i.e. ratio of the indicated stresses n is the same for all points of the structure for all modes constituting the cycle.

2.5. Conditional elastic stresses in the operating cycle are calculated separately for steady-state modes and for a number of time moments of transients. Modes and times within individual modes for which stresses σi(e) are calculated shall be selected so that at the end, in each point of the structure, it is possible to find the minimum (during the cycle) difference between limit σs (which are selected different depending on the operating modes of operating cycle in accordance with Section 3 of this Appendix) and reduced conditional elastic stresses.

2.6. Conditional elastic stresses in the operating cycle σi(e) for bodies and internal parts of reactors, steam generators and vessels are obtained by summing the general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, and general temperature stresses (including stresses due to temperature variations across the wall thickness).

2.7. Conditional elastic stresses in the operating cycle σi(e) for pipelines are obtained by summing general or local membrane stresses, general and local bending stresses, general temperature stresses (including stresses due to temperature gradients across the wall thickness), and compensation stresses (membrane, torsion and bending).

3. LIMIT STRESSES

3.1. For transients, limit stress σs is assumed to be equal to yield limit of the material RTp0.2 divided by the coefficient:

σs = RTp0.2/n0.2,

where n0.2 = 1.5; nmt =1.5.

The value of RTp0.2 is assumed in accordance with items 3.7 and 3.8 hereof at the structure point temperature which is in effect at the considered time of the transient.

3.2. For steady-state operation modes, the limit stress is assumed equal to

σs = min{RTp0.2/n0.2; RTmt/nmt},

where n0.2 = 1.5; nmt = 1.5.

The values of RTp0.2 and RTmt are assumed in accordance with items 3.7 and 3.8 hereof at the design temperature of metal in a steady-state mode, with due regard to the possible reduction of their values during neutron exposure.

4. ADDITIONAL CONVENTIONAL SYMBOLS

σs is a limit stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

σi(e) are conditional elastic stress components in the operating cycle, MPa (kgf/mm2)

n is a ratio of conditional elastic stresses in the limit cycle to the corresponding stresses of the operating cycle

σφ(e), σθ(e), σr(e) are meridional, ring and radial components of the conditional normal elastic stress in the operating cycle, MPa (kgf/mm2)

ρφ, ρθ, ρr are residual stress components, MPa (kgf/mm2)

h is a half thickness of the shell (plate), mm

z is a coordinate measured from the middle surface of the shell (plate) along the normal to this surface, mm

t is time (from the beginning of the cycle), h

∆ε is a cumulative deformation per cycle, %

l is an irreversible l length change, mm.

5. SEQUENCE OF CALCULATION FOR PROGRESSIVE FORM CHANGE IN THE ABSENCE OF IRRADIATION GROWTH

5.1. Reduced conventional elastic stresses in the operating cycle calculated in Section 3 of the this Appendix are compared with the limit stresses σs. If the reduced elastic stresses at all points of the structure do not exceed σs, then the structure works elastically in all cycles (starting from the first). In this case, the progressive form change is not calculated.

5.2. If the reduced conditional elastic stresses in the operating cycle exceed the value of σs at any time points, then the structures are calculated for progressive form change.

The calculation is performed in stages, and the transition to the next stage is determined by the results of the previous one.

5.3. At the first stage, it is checked whether the one-sided plastic deformation will stop after the first few cycles due to the formation of a favorable residual stress field in the deformation process. For this, conditional elastic stresses (or parameters) of the operating and limit cycles are compared. Calculation of the limit (according to the conditions of progressive form change) cycle is carried out by the methods of the theory of adaptability using stresses σi(e) and σs calculated in Section 2 and 3 (for axisymmetric shells and round plates see Section 5.5).

5.4. Progressive form change will not happen if the parameters of the operating cycle (mechanical loads and temperatures) do not exceed the parameters of the limit one for the progressive form change of the cycle.

5.5. For axisymmetric shells (cylindrical, spherical, toroidal, conical, etc.) and round plates experiencing axisymmetric loads and temperature fields in the operating cycle, the assessment of the conditions for the progressive from change occurrence is divided into two sub-steps:

a) check whether it is possible to stop the accumulation of one-sided plastic deformations after a limited number of first cycles due to the redistribution of stresses in each cross-section irrespective of adjacent sections (i.e. without changing the forces calculated in each cross-section of the shell under the assumption of ideal elasticity of the material).

The corresponding condition is formulated as follows: no progressive form change will happen if inequalities are fulfilled in every meridional cross-section of the shell (plate)

 (1)

в каждом кольцевом сечении оболочки (пластинки) выполняются неравенства

the following inequalities are fulfilled in each annular cross-section of shell (plate)

в каждом сечении оболочки выполняются неравенства

the following inequalities are fulfilled in each cross-section of shell

Fulfillment of the last three inequalities in (1) is checked only in cases where at some points of the shell (plate) the minimum (per cycle) values of the differences σs = |σφ(e) σθ(e)| turn out to be less than the minimum (per cycle) values of differences σs - |σφ(e)| and σs - |σθ(e)|.

Symbols  and  indicate that from all (corresponding to different points in time t during the operating cycle) values, values in brackets, the minimum (maximum) are selected which then are subject to the wall thickness integration operation;

b) if the inequalities given in Section 5.5a, are not fulfilled, then the parameters of the limit cycle can be determined (for cylindrical and spherical shells and round plates) from the adaptability diagrams (Section 7), constructed for various types of mechanical loads and temperature fields, as well as various temperature change programs and loads in time.

In the absence of a suitable adaptability diagram, the parameters of the limit cycle are determined by general methods of the theory of adaptability.

5.6. Below is a description of the general methods for calculating the conditions of adaptability.

5.6.1. Parameters of the limit cycle (limit variation ranges of mechanical loads and temperature fields) are the maximum values of the parameters (in the problem under consideration), under which the conditions of adaptability given in item 5.6.2 are met, and the minimum values of parameters under which the conditions of non-adaptability given in item 5.6.5 are met.

5.6.2. The structure will adapt to external influences if such a distribution of residual stresses that do not vary in time (satisfying the conditions of equilibrium under zero external loads) is given, at which the total (including variable conditional elastic stresses from external influences and constant residual stresses) reduced (according to the criterion of maximum shear stresses) stresses do not exceed the limit stresses σs either at one moment of time or at one of its points.

As applied to axisymmetric structures, when the directions of the main stresses σφ, σθ, σz are known and do not change during the cycle, the conditions of adaptability are formulated as follows:

the structure will adapt to external influences if such a distribution of time-independent residual stresses ρφ, ρθ, ρz (satisfying the equilibrium conditions at zero loads) is specified, which ensures the fulfillment of inequality for all points of the structure

5.6.3. If there are mechanical loads which do not change over time (weight of the structure and attached units, constant hydrostatic pressure, etc.), the latter can be directly included in the equilibrium conditions mentioned in Section 5.6.2 which shall now be performed not at zero, but at given constant loads. Accordingly, in terms of adaptability, not residual stresses will appear, but stresses balanced by constant loads. In this case, the conditional elastic stresses from the indicated loads need not be calculated.

5.6.4. In case of violation of the conditions of adaptability, an alternating plastic flow (usually of a local character) or accumulation of one-sided deformation with each cycle (progressive form change), covering the whole structure component or its part, can arise.

The alternating flow occurs if at least one point of structure cannot be given such constant stresses at which their sum with conditional elastic stresses from external influences (referring to the reduced stresses) would not exceed the stress σs at all times of the cycle. Inter alia, in case when stresses in the structure vary in proportion to one parameter, an alternating flow occurs if the magnitude of the conditional elastic stresses exceeds 2σs.

In the absence of alternating flow, progressive form change will occur if the constant stresses necessary for the total stresses at each point of the body during the cycle not to exceed σs do not satisfy the equilibrium conditions of the structure at given loads that do not vary in time (in the particular case – at zero loads if there are no permanent external forces).

5.6.5. Along with the above "static" formulations, the following "kinematic" formulations can be used to obtain upper assessments of the conditions for the occurrence of progressive form change. Progressive form change will necessarily occur if you can specify such (non-zero) distribution of increments for a cycle of irreversible deformations satisfying the conditions of compatibility of deformations, during which the work of minimum (per cycle) differences of limit stresses σs and elastic stresses from external influences (on the specified increments of irreversible deformations), calculated for the entire volume of the structural component, is nonpositive.

As applied to axisymmetric structures, when the directions of the main stresses σφ, σθ, σz are known and do not change during the cycle, the condition of existence of progressive form change is formulated as follows:

progressive form change takes place if it is possible to set such a distribution of nonzero increments of plastic deformations per cycle ∆εφ, ∆εθ, ∆εz, satisfying the compatibility and incompressibility conditions, under which the inequality is fulfilled

Here a = 1, b = 0 if two of three components of the deformation increments (∆εφ, ∆εθ, ∆εz) are non-negative; a = 0, b = 1 if two of three components of the deformation increments (∆εφ, ∆εθ, ∆εz) are negative; index i takes values of φ, θ, z; index j takes values of φ, θ, z, that do not match values of i in each sum (therefore, when calculating each sum, the index can take only one value); ∆u'i is a component of breakage of increment of displacements on the surface sμ (in directions of φ, or θ, or z);

The time-independent volume (proper weight, inertial forces Xi) or surface (distributed on sp surfaces) external loads pi are taken into account by additional additives on the right-hand side of the inequality, which determines the conditions for existence of a form change:

In this case, the conditional elastic stresses entering the left-hand side of this inequality are calculated only from external influences varying in time.

5.6.6. Calculation of the parameters of the limit cycle using items 5.6.2 and 5.6.3 is reduced to finding such a distribution of residual stresses, at which the parameters of the load or temperature will have maximum values when the relevant restrictions specified in item 5.6.2 (static calculation method) are met. Calculation of the parameters of the limit cycle using item 5.6.5 is reduced to minimization of the load (temperature) parameters according to deformation increments satisfying the restrictions specified in item 5.6.5 (kinematic calculation method).

In the general case, the specified computational problems are solved by the methods of the mathematical theory of optimal processes, and when replacing differential equations of equilibrium (or compatibility of deformations) with a system of linear algebraic equations – by methods of linear programming using appropriate standard or special computer sub-programs.

5.6.7. Approximate lower assessments of the parameters of the limit cycle (i.e., values less than or equal to the parameters of the limit cycle) are obtained by setting any distributions of residual stresses that satisfy the equilibrium conditions and calculating the maximum values of loads and temperatures at which the reduced stresses (correspond to the sum of residual and conditional elastic stresses) do not exceed σs.

For example, it can be assumed that the residual stresses at all points of the structure are proportional to thermoelastic stresses at one of the cycle moments of time (this distribution satisfies the equilibrium conditions at zero external loads) or that some components of the residual stresses (ρφ or ρθ or ρz) are proportional to the minimum per cycle differences between σs and corresponding elastic stresses (σφ(e), σθ(e), σz(e)). In the latter case, the remaining components of the residual stresses are found from the equilibrium conditions and then the corresponding lower assessment of the limit cycle parameters is calculated.

5.6.8. Approximate upper assessments for the parameters of the limit cycle can be obtained by using kinematic methods, i.e. methods based on the kinematic theorem (item 5.6.5). The advantage of these methods is a clear kinematic idea of the nature of the emerging cyclic plastic deformation, its mechanism. They are used only to determine the conditions of progressive form change, since the alternating flow is local and the corresponding limit condition is determined on the grounds of the above approximate criterion (the change in elastic stresses at the point of structure exceeds 2σs).

The basis of the approximate kinematic method lies in the assumption that the distribution of plastic deformation increments per cycle is possible (satisfying the conditions of compatibility of deformations). It is usually convenient to find such a distribution (fracture mechanism) by specifying a certain distribution of increments of residual displacements at points of the structure, and then the deformation increments can be calculated using known relations (such as the Cauchy relation). At the same time, the results of solving similar problems of limit equilibrium can sometimes be used, since the mechanisms of "instantaneous" and progressive fracture are generally of the same type, the difference is in their implementation ("instantly" under conditions of limit equilibrium and in stages during a cycle with progressive form change).

It is easiest to use approximate kinematic methods in axisymmetric problems, since the distribution of displacement increments here can often be represented as functions of one coordinate (disk, round plate, tube), sometimes using additional parameters that are determined during the solution by minimizing the desired loads. In problems of this type, it is sometimes possible with the help of an elementary method to obtain exact solutions that satisfy not only kinematic (the implementation of a certain mechanism of progressive form change), but also static (no points in which stresses exceed σs during a cycle) conditions.

For a given (accepted) fracture mechanism, the parameters of the limit cycle using the kinematic method are determined using inequalities of the type given in item 5.6.5, supplemented by members in necessary cases, with due regard to constant external loads.

The other version of the kinematic method (the so-called method of additional load) allows to apply the equilibrium conditions written in the usual form; for this, the relationship between the plastic deformation increments per cycle and the effective stresses shall first be used (stresses causing the corresponding plastic deformation shall reach the yield limit, and the deformation vector shall be perpendicular to the corresponding face of the hexagon determining the yield conditions using the maximum shear stress criterion).

5.7. At the second stage, it is recommended to calculate the kinetics of elastic plastic deformation if the termination of the progressive form change according to the data of the first stage is impossible and it is necessary to substantiate the possibility of the structure operation beyond the limits of adaptability.

At the same time, it is checked whether progressive form change or its combination with alternating plastic flow (alternating plastic flow is characterized by the fact that the plastic deformation increment per cycle is zero) will lead to abnormal operation of the structure during a given operating life. For this purpose, the calculated values of deformations are compared with the permissible values established on the grounds of operational requirements.

When calculating the deformations, it is necessary to take into account the change in mechanical characteristics of the material due to alternating plastic flow (inter alia acceleration of creep due to previous plastic deformation of the opposite sign, due to neutron exposure, structural transformations, influence of surface-active media).

In cases where verification for a progressive form change of a structure by calculation is difficult, full-size tests or tests on models are recommended.

5.8. In particular cases for structural components such as rods with a cross-section in the form of a circle or a regular polygon, thick-walled and thin-walled pipes of constant thickness with similar cross-sections, free plates with constant thickness made of the materials listed in Table P4.1 and operating at thermal cycling in steam water or in sodium at maximum temperatures not exceeding values of Tf specified in Table P4.1, the accumulated deformation per cycle does not exceed the values of Δε = 2 · 10-4% in zones where the edge effect practically does not affect the stress value.

If, for a given structural component, the deformation accumulated over an operation life is permissible, further calculations for form changing may not be carried out. This conclusion is valid under the following conditions:

Table P4.1. Values of the characteristics of form changing under thermal cycling and neutron exposure and various media

Base metal and full-strength welds

Condition

Tf, K (°C)

γp, cm2/(neutron · s)

Steam water

Sodium, Tmin = 473 K (200 °C)

Sodium, Tmin = 673 K (400 °C)

08Kh16N11M3

Austenitization

773 (500)

803 (530)

823 (550)

4.6 · 10-50

12Kh18N9

12Kh18N10T

"

773 (500)

803 (530)

823 (550)

7.6 · 10-50

08Kh16N11M3

12Kh18N9

12Kh18N10T

15% cold-work hardening + stabilization

823 (550)

853 (580)

853 (580)

KhN35VT

Austenitization + ageing

873 (600)

873 (600)

873 (600)

5.0 · 10-51

1Kh16N36MBTYUR

Austenitization + stabilization

10Kh2M 12Kh2M1FB

Normalization + tempering

793 (520)

823 (550)

833 (560)

-

15Kh2MFA

15Kh2NMFA

Quenching + tempering

793 (520)

-

-

0

a) stresses from mechanical loads are insignificant

(σ)1 ≤ 0.1[σ]; (σ)2 ≤ 0.13[σ];

b) temperature of the medium washing the structure changes all over the volume so quickly that the gradients in all cross-sections of parts of cylindrical shape (respectively, for all plate normals) are the same; temperature gradients in the axial direction (for cylindrical parts) or along the surface (for a plate) are such that the corresponding thermoelastic stresses are no more than 0.1σs;

c) there are no conditions that could lead to bending deformation, i.e. the initial shape of the parts and the temperature fields are strictly symmetrical about the longitudinal axes (or about the middle plane for the plate); there are no initial process stresses in the parts, the relaxation of which would lead to bending; there is no danger of buckling due to thinness of walls.

For the above structural components at maximum cycle temperatures exceeding the Tf values given in Table P4.1, but not more than 923 K (650 °C), as well as for rods and pipes with regular longitudinal stiffeners, undercuts or annular undercuts with geometrical parameters h1/H ≤ 0.1, ρ ≤ h1/2 with the number of stiffeners or undercuts of no more than 10 and Tmax≤ 923 K (650 °C), the upper assessment of the deformation Δε (longitudinal or transverse without bending) accumulated over one cycle can be found using an approximate empirical dependence

where T* = Tf + ∆T0(1 – 10-H/d0) - ∆Tvχ is a tolerance adjustment temperature 2 · 10-4 %/cycle; ∆T0 = 50 K (50 °C) for rods and thick-walled pipes; ∆T0 = 0 K (0 °C) for plates and thin-walled pipes (shells); H is a pipe thickness, mm; d0 is a minimum internal diameter of the pipe (for solid rods d0 = 0), mm; ∆Tv = -5 K (-5 °C); x is a number of stiffeners or undercuts; h1 is an undercut depth or stiffener height, mm; ρ is a bending radius, mm; Tmax is a maximum temperature of thermal cycling, K (°C).

In non-steady-state modes of thermal cycling, the magnitude of irreversible deformation is determined by linear summation.

6. EXAMPLE OF CALCULATION OF CYLINDRICAL CLADDING

6.1. This example illustrates the order of calculation for progressive form change. In the example, the structure characteristics and loading parameters are conventionally selected (inter alia, the simplest one is specified – linear law of temperature distribution).

6.2. Calculate the section of the long cylindrical shell (Fig. P4.1), located far from its edges. The shell is subjected to the action of the inner pressure p(t) (not varying along its length) and temperature T(t) varying under linear law along the thickness of the shell at each moment of time t:

T(t) = T0(t) + (z/h)T1(t).

Here T0(t) is a middle surface temperature; T1(t) is a temperature difference between the outer and middle surfaces of the shell.

Fig. P4.1. Section of a long cylindrical shell located far from its edges

Fig. P4.2. Changes in pressure and temperature during the operating cycle

МПа

MPa

кгс/мм2

kgf/mm2

Пуск

Start-up

Стационарный режим

Steady-state mode

Срабатывание аварийной защиты

Emergency protection actuation

Остановка

Shutdown

The purpose of the calculation is to check the admissibility of given inner pressure and temperatures of the shell in terms of progressive form change.

6.3. Shell dimensions are shown in Fig. P4.1. Changes in pressure and temperature during the operating cycle are shown in Fig. P4.2. In steady-state mode, in the processes of start-up and shutdown, temperature of the outer and inner surfaces of the shell To and Ti are assumed to be the same. Values of T0(t), T1(t) and p(t) for a number of points in time indicated in Fig. P4.2 are given in Table P4.2.

Mechanical characteristics of the shell material are given in Table P4.3. At a temperature of 293 K (20 °C), the modulus of elasticity is E = 2.0 · 105 MPa (2.0 · 104 kgf/mm2), the temperature coefficient of linear expansion is α = 17 μK-1 (17.0 · 10-6 1/°C) and Poisson ratio is μ = 0.3. The design operating life of the shell is 100000 hours.

6.4. Determine the ultimate stresses σs:

a) for steady-state operation mode in accordance with Section 3.2.

σs = min{RTp0.2/n0.2; RTmt/nmt} = min{120/1.5; 125/1.5} = 80.0 MPa (8.0 kgf/mm2);


 

Table P4.2. Loading parameters

t

t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

t6

t7

T0,

K

(°C)

573

(300)

573

(300)

873

(600)

873

(600)

856

(583)

867.5

(594.5)

794

(521)

T1,

K

(°C)

273

(0)

273

(0)

273

(0)

273

(0)

277.5

(4.50)

284.25

(11.25)

289.56

(16.56)

p,

MPa

(kgf/mm2)

0

0

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

Table P4.2 (continued)

t

t8

t9

t10

t11

t12

t13

t14

T0,

K

(°C)

765.5

(492.5)

734

(461)

709

(436)

667

(394)

639

(366)

573

(300)

573

(300)

T1,

K

(°C)

292.55

(19.55)

293

(20.00)

289.56

(16.56)

285

(12.00)

281.75

(8.75)

273

(0)

273

(0)

p,

MPa

(kgf/mm2)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

1.2

(0.12)

0

0

Table P4.3. Mechanical characteristics of the shell material

T,

K

(°C)

293

(20)

573

(300)

623

(350)

673

(400)

723

(450)

773

(500)

823

(550)

873

(600)

RTp0.2

MPa

(kgf/mm2)

210

(21)

150

(15)

150

(15)

140

(14)

140

(14)

130

(13)

120

(12)

120

(12)

R1/100000,

MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-

-

-

-

181

(18.1)

169

(16.9)

137

(13.7)

100

(10.0)

b) limit stresses for start-up, emergency protection actuation and shutdown modes found according to Section 3.1

σs = (RTp0.2/1.5)

are given depending on the temperature in Table P4.4.

6.5. Determine the conditional elastic stresses in the operating cycle. Ring stresses from inner pressure σθp at p = 1.2 MPa (0.12 kgf/mm2) (see Fig. P4.2) are equal to 60 MPa (6 kgf/mm2), axial stress from mechanical load is zero.


 

Table P4.4. Limit stresses

T, K (°C)

293 (20)

573 (300)

623 (350)

673 (400)

723 (450)

773 (500)

823 (550)

873 (600)

σs, MPa

(kgf/mm2)

140.0

(14.00)

100.0

(10.00)

100.0

(10.00)

93.3

(9.33)

93.3

(9.33)

86.7

(8.67),

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

Table P.4.5. Thermoelastic stresses

t

t4

t5

t6

t7

t8

t9

t10

t11

t12

t13

σθT = σφT, MPa

(kgf/mm2)

0

(0)

21.8

(2.18)

54.6

(5.46)

80.4

(8.04)

95.0

(9.50)

97.1

(9.71)

80.4

(8.04)

58.3

(5.83)

42.5

(4.25)

0

(0)

Thermoelastic stresses when a linear temperature distribution across the wall thickness are found using the formula

Here σθT, σφT are annular and axial thermoelastic stresses; z coordinate is measured from the middle surface of the shell along the normal to it; z = h on the outer surface of the shell and z = -h on the inner surface.

In a steady-state mode, at start-up and shutdown, thermoelastic stresses are zero [because T1(t) = 0]. Values of stresses σθT = σφT for a number of points in time of the mode of emergency protection actuation are given in Table P4.5 for points lying on the inside (z = -h) surface of the shell.

6.6. Compare the above conditional elastic stresses with limit stresses. Reduced conditional elastic stresses are calculated according to the criterion of the greatest shear stresses:

(σ)(e) = max(|σφ(e)|, |σθ(e)|, |σφ(e) - σθ(e)|),

where σθ(e) = σθT + σθT; σφ(e) = σφp + σφT = σφT.

In the moment of time t9 on the inner surface of the shell (σ)(e) = 60.0 + 97.1 = 157.1 MPa (15.71 kgf/mm2). The temperature of the points of the inner surface of the shell at this moment determined according to the data in Table P4.1 is 714 K (441 °C); the corresponding limit stress σs found from the data in Table P4.3 using linear interpolation is 93.3 MPa (9.33 kgf/mm2). Thus, the reduced stress (σ)(e) exceeds the limit one. It is not necessary to compare the reduced stresses with the limit ones at other points of the shell and at other moment of times, since the result obtained above requires a transition to the next stage of calculation: verification whether plastic deformation can stop due to the redistribution of stresses across the shell thickness.

6.7. Determine the extremal values of the difference of limit and conditional elastic stresses. To check whether the inequalities written in item 5.5a are satisfied, we calculate the values

Table P4.6. Difference of limit and conditional elastic stresses

Mode

Start-up

Steady-state

Shutdown

t

t1

t2

t3

t4

t13

t14

T, K (°C)

573 (300)

573 (300)

873 (600)

873 (600)

573 (300)

573 (300)

σs, MPa, (kgf/mm2)

100 (10)

100 (10)

80 (8)

80 (8)

100 (10)

100 (10)

σs - σφ(e), MPa (kgf/mm2)

100 (10)

100 (10)

80 (8)

80 (8)

100 (10)

100 (10)

s - σφ(e), MPa (kgf/mm2)

-100 (-10)

-100 (-10)

-80 (-8)

-80 (-8)

-100 (-10)

-100 (-10)

σs σθ(e), MPa (kgf/mm2)

100 (10)

40 (4)

20 (2)

20 (2)

40 (4)

100 (10)

s σθ(e), MPa (kgf/mm2)

-100 (-10)

-160 (-16)

-140 (-14)

-140 (-14)

-16 (-160)

-100 (-10)

The values in brackets for the steady-state mode and a number of time moments for the start-up and shutdown modes [those in which T1(t) = 0] are given in Table P4.6. According to the shell thickness, these values do not change for the specified modes. Extreme values for these modes of the considered quantities are enclosed in frames [it is easy to verify that at Т1(t) = 0 at time moments not listed in Table P4.6 extreme values are not reached].

Next, we find the difference between the limit and conditional elastic stresses for a number of moments of the mode of the emergency protection actuation (T1(t) ≠ 0). To determine the extremal values of these differences, it is sufficient to consider the moments of time t9, t8, t7, t4 and the conditional elastic and limit stresses at time t4 coincide with the corresponding values at time t3 (see Table P4.6). At time moments t10, t11 and t12, the conditional elastic stresses decrease and the limit stresses increase in comparison with t9 (see Tables P4.1, P4.3 and P4.4), therefore, the indicated moments in time are not considered. The calculation results are given in Table P4.6.

To preserve the generality of the procedure in Table P4.6 the temperature dependence of the limit stresses σs is considered. Due to the small temperature differences across the thickness in this example, this dependence has little effect on the calculation results, however, in other problems (inter alia, when parabolic laws of temperature distribution) it sometimes turns out to be significant.

The calculation of differences of limit and elastic stresses for a number of moments in time is shown in Fig. P4.3 and P4.4; bold lines indicate the corresponding minimum (maximum) values per cycle.

The values of differences of limit and conditional elastic stresses over the entire operating cycle are given in Tables P4.6 and P4.7, and the extreme values of these differences are given in Table P4.8.

6.8. Fulfillment of the conditions for the absence of progressive form change, given in Section 5.5a, is verified by numerical integration using the data in Table P4.8:

Fig. P4.3. Values of stress differences at different moments of time for σs - σφ(e) (a) and –σs - σφ(e) (b)

Fig. P4.4. Values of stress differences at different moments of time for σs σθ(e) (a) and –σs – σθ(e) (b)

As a result, we come to the conclusion that there will be no progressive form change of the shell under the specified operating conditions.

7. ADAPTABILITY DIAGRAMS FOR SOME STANDARD DESIGN MODELS

7.1. Formulas and diagrams of adaptability for cylindrical and spherical shells, thick-walled spherical vessels and round plates under repeated mechanical and thermal effects are given below. The diagrams are constructed for various types of mechanical loads (distributed, concentrated) and temperature fields (temperature varies in thickness along the generatrix), various programs for changing temperature and loads over time, as well as for different conditions for fixing the shell or plate. Provided that it is assumed that σs = const and μ = 0.3.

General symbols:

T is a temperature, K (°C);

p is a pressure, Pa (kgf/mm2);

P is a concentrated force, N (kgf);

n, m, f, q are load parameters;

tp are temperature parameters;

R is radius of the middle surface of the shell (radius of the plate), mm;

The formulas and diagrams given here can be used in cases where the loads, temperatures and geometrical characteristics of the component of structure correspond to the conditions for which the corresponding graphs and formulas are given.

To use formulas and diagrams, it is necessary to calculate the parameters of mechanical and thermal effects m, p, q, n, tp for given structure and operation conditions and compare their values with the limit values indicated on the diagram or calculated using the formula given here. The structure will adapt to the specified external influences if the parameters of the loads and the temperature that meet the specified operation conditions do not exceed the limit values.


 

Table P4.7. Differences of limit and conditional elastic stresses depending on z/h

 

z/h

-1.0

-0.8

-0.6

-0.4

-0.2

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

t9

T, K (°C)

714

(441)

718

(445)

722

(449)

726

(453)

730

(457)

734

(461)

738

(465)

742

(469)

746

(473)

750

(477)

754

(481)

σs, MPa

(kgf/mm2)

93.3

(9.33)

93.3

(9.33)

93.3

(9.33)

92.6

(9.26)

92.4

(9.24)

91.8

(9.18)

91.3

(9.13)

90.8

(9.08)

90.3

(9.03)

89.7

(8.97)

89.2

(8.92)

σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

97.1

(9.71)

77.7

(7.77)

58.3

(5.83)

38.8

(3.88)

19.4

(1.94)

0

(0)

-19.4

(-1.94)

-38.8

(-3.88)

-58.3

(-5.83)

-77.7

(-7.77)

-97.1

(-9.71)

σs - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-3.8

(-0.38)

15.6

(1.56)

35.0

(3.50)

53.8

(5.38)

73.0

(7.30)

91.8

(9.18)

110.7

(11.07)

129.6

(12.96)

148.6

(14.86)

167.4

(16.74)

186.3

(18.63)

s - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-190.4

(-19.04)

-171.0

(-17.10)

-151.6

(-15.16)

-131.4

(-13.14)

-111.8

(-11.18)

-91.8

(-9.18)

-71.9

(-7.19)

-52.0

(-5.20)

-32.0

(-3.20)

-12.0

(-1.20)

7.9

(0.79)

σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

157.1

(15.71)

137.7

(13.77)

118.3

(11.83)

98.8

(9.88)

79.4

(7.94)

60.0

(6.00)

40.6

(4.06)

21.8

(2.18)

1.7

(0.17)

-17.7

(-1.77)

-37.1

(-3.71)

σs – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-63.8

(-6.38)

-44.4

(-4.44)

-25.0

(-2.50)

-6.2

(-0.62)

13.0

(1.30)

31.8

(3.18)

50.7

(5.07)

69.6

(6.96)

88.6

(8.86)

107.6

(10.76)

126.3

(12.63)

s – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-250.4

(-25.04)

-231.0

(-23.10)

-211.6

(-21.16)

-191.4

(-19.14)

-171.8

(-17.18)

-151.8

(-15.18)

-131.9

(-13.19)

-112.0

(-11.20)

-92.0

(-9.20)

-72.0

(-7.20)

-52.1

(-5.21)

t10

T, K (°C)

746

(473)

750

(477)

754

(481)

758

(485)

762

(489)

765.5

(492.5)

769

(496)

773

(500)

777

(504)

781

(508)

785

(512)

σs, MPa

(kgf/mm2)

90.3

(9.03)

89.7

(8.97)

89.2

(8.92)

88.7

(8.87)

88.2

(8.82)

87.7

(8.77)

87.2

(8.72)

86.7

(8.67)

86.2

(8.62)

85.6

(8.56)

85.1

(8.51)

σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

95.0

(9.50)

76.0

(7.60)

57.0

(5.70)

38.0

(3.80)

19.0

(1.90)

0

(0)

-19.0

(-1.90)

-38.0

(-3.80)

-57.0

(-5.70)

-76.0

(-7.60)

-95.0

(-9.50)

σs - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-4.7

(-0.47)

13.7

(1.37)

32.2

(3.22)

50.7

(5.07)

69.2

(6.92)

87.7

(8.77)

106.2

(10.62)

124.7

(12.47)

143.2

(14.32)

161.6

(16.16)

180.1

(18.01)

s - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-185.3

(-18.53)

-165.7

(-16.57)

-146.2

(-14.62)

-126.7

(-12.67)

-107.2

(-10.72)

-87.7

(-8.77)

-68.2

(-6.82)

-48.7

(-4.87)

-29.2

(-2.92)

-9.6

(-0.96)

9.9

(0.99)

σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

155.0

(15.55)

136.0

(13.60)

117.0

(11.70)

98.0

(9.80)

79.0

(7.90)

60.0

(6.00)

41.0

(4.10)

22.0

(2.20)-

3.0

(0.30)

16.0

(1.60)

-35.0

(-3.50)

σs – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-64.7

(-6.47)

-46.3

(-4.63)

-27.8

(-2.78)

-9.3

(-0.93)

9.2

(0.92)

27.7

(2.77)

46.2

(4.62)

64.7

(6.47)

83.2

(8.32)

101.6

(10.16)

120.1

(12.01)

s – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-245.3

(-24.53)

-225.3

(-22.53)

-266.2

(-26.62)

-186.7

(-18.67)

-167.2

(-16.72)

-147.7

(-14.77)

-128.2

(-12.82)

-108.7

(10.87)

-89.2

(-8.92)

-69.6

(-6.96)

-50.1

(-5.01)

t11

T, K (°C)

777

(504)

781

(508)

784

(511)

787

(514)

791

(518)

794

(521)

797

(524)

801

(528)

804

(531)

807

(534)

811

(538)

σs, MPa

(kgf/mm2)

86.2

(8.62)

85.6

(8.56)

85.2

(8.52)

84.8

(8.48)

84.3

(8.43)

83.9

(8.39)

83.5

(8.35)

82.9

(8.29)

82.5

(8.25)

82.1

(8.21)

81.6

(8.16)

σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

80.4

(8.04)

64.3

(6.43)

48.2

(4.82)

32.2

(3.22)

16.1

(1.61)

0

(0)

-16.1

(-1.61)

-36.6

(-3.66)

-48.2

(-4.82)

-64.3

(-6.43)

-80.4

(-8.04)

σs - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

5.8

(0.58)

21.3

(2.13)

37.0

(3.70)

52.6

(5.26)

68.2

(6.82)

89.3

(8.93)

99.6

(9.96)

115.1

(11.51)

130.7

(13.07)

146.4

(14.64)

162.0

(16.20)

s - σφ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-166.6

(-16.66)

-149.9

(-14.99)

-133.4

(-13.34)

-117.0

(-11.70)

-100.4

(-10.04)

-83.9

(-8.39)

-67.4

(-6.74)

-50.7

(-5.07)

-34.3

(-3.43)

-17.8

(-1.78)

-1.2

(-0.12)

σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

140.4

(14.04)

124.3

(12.43)

108.2

(10.82)

92.2

(9.22)

76.1

(7.61)

60.0

(6.00)

43.9

(4.39)

27.8

(2.78)

11.8

(1.18)

-4.3

(-0.43)

-20.4

(-2.04)

σs – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-54.2

(-5.42)

-38.7

(-3.87)

-23.0

(-2.30)

-7.4

(-0.74)

8.2

(0.82)

23.9

(2.39)

39.6

(3.96)

55.1

(5.51)

70.7

(7.07)

86.4

(8.64)

102.0

(10.20)

s – σθ(e), MPa

(kgf/mm2)

-226.6

(-22.66)

-209.9

(-20.99)

-193.4

(-19.34)

-167.0

(-16.70)

-160.4

(-16.04)

-143.9

(-14.39)

-127.4

(-12.74)

-110.7

(-11.07)

-94.3

(-9.43)

-77.8

(-7.78)

-61.2

(-6.12)

Table P4.8. Extreme values of stress differences

z/h

-1.0

-0.8

-0.6

-0.4

-0.2

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

, MPa (kgf/mm2)

-4.7

(-0.47)

13.7

(1.37)

32.2

(3.22)

50.7

(5.07)

68.2

(6.82)

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

80.0

(8.00)

, MPa (kgf/mm2)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-80.0

(-8.00)

-67.4

(-6.74)

-48.7

(-4.87)

-29.2

(-2.92)

-9.6

(-0.96)

9.9

(0.99)

, MPa (kgf/mm2)

-64.7

(-6.47)

-46.3

(-4.63)

-27.8

(-2.78)

-9.3

(-0.93)

8.2

(0.82)

20.0

(2.00)

20.0

(2.00)

20.0

(2.00)

20.0

(2.00)

20.0

(2.00)

20.0

(2.00)

, MPa (kgf/mm2)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-100.0

(-10.00)

-89.2

(-8.92)

-69.6

(-6.96)

-50.1

(-5.01)

When using the formulas and diagrams below, the calculation of the form change conditions according to Section 5 are not carried out.

7.2. Cylindrical vessels and pipelines are loaded with constantly acting pressure and cyclically varying temperature (pressure and temperature do not change along the axis), material creep is absent. The limit values of the range of temperature stresses are determined from the following relations:

a) with a linear temperature variation along the thickness

 for

 for

b) with a parabolic constant increase or decrease in temperature along the wall thickness

 when

if  then

 when

 when

 when

For intermediate values of (σ)m/RTp0.2, linear interpolation is allowed.

7.3. Cylindrical pipe (Fig. P4.5) is exposed to temperature front (Fig. P4.6 - P4.8). The temperature front moves in any direction along the pipe axis. The temperature does not change along the pipe thickness.

Repeated flows of the temperature front shown in Fig. P4.6 lead to a decrease in pipe diameter and an increase in its length with

Fig. P4.5. The section of the cylindrical pipe away from the edges

Fig. P4.6. Temperature front leading to a reduction in pipe diameter

Repeated flows of the temperature front shown in Fig. P4.7 lead to a increase in pipe diameter and an decrease in its length with

If , repeated flows of the temperature front shown in Fig. P4.8 make the pipe behavior unstable. A change in the nature of the T(x) dependence or a change in the limit stress σs leads either to an increase or to a decrease in the pipe diameter after each flow of the temperature front.

7.4. A finite length cylindrical shell (Fig. P4.9) is loaded with inner pressure and temperature difference across the wall thickness

0p(t) ≤ p*;

where   -TTa(t) ≤ T1; -hzh.

Loading parameters tp = EαT/[(1 - μ)σs]; f = p*R/[2hσs]; - tptp(t) ≤ tp; 0 ≤ f(t) ≤ f.

Diagrams of adaptability of a finite length cylindrical shell with free edges are shown in Fig. P4.10, with simply supported edges – in Fig. P4.11, P4.12, with clamped edges – in
Fig. P4.13 - P4.15.

7.5. Cylindrical shell (Fig. P4.16) is loaded with inner pressure and temperature difference across the wall thickness; on the edge, edge bending moment M(t) and shear force Q(t) are applied:

0p(t) ≤ p*; 0 ≤ M(t) ≤ M;

0Q(t) ≤ Q;

where   -TTa(t) ≤ T; -hzh.

Fig. P4.7. Temperature front leading to a decrease in pipe diameter

Fig. P4.8. Temperature front causing unstable pipe behavior

Loading parameters:

   

Diagrams of adaptability for the edge of a cylindrical shell for different values of the parameters f and tp are shown in Fig. P4.17 - P4.20.

7.6. Long cylindrical shell (Fig. P4.21) is loaded with a force P distributed over a circular cross-section and a temperature difference across the wall thickness:

P = const;

where   -TTa(t) ≤ T; -hzh.

Loading parameters:

 

Diagrams of adaptability are shown in Fig. P4.22.

7.7. Closed spherical shell (Fig. P4.23) is loaded with inner pressure and temperature difference across the wall thickness:

Fig. P4.9. A finite length cylindrical shell:

a is a shell loaded with inner pressure; b is a shell cross-section; c is a temperature difference

Fig. P4.10. Diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with free edges

Fig. P4.11. Diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with simply supported edges:

a – general view of diagrams; b – for βL = 0.75 ÷ 2.00

0p(t) ≤ p*;

where   -TTa(t) ≤ T; -hzh.


 

Loading parameters:

Fig. P4.12. Diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with simply supported edges

Fig. P4.13. General view of diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with clamped edges

f = p*R/(4σsh); tp = αET/(1 - μ)σs.

Diagrams of adaptability for a closed spherical shell are shown in Fig. P4.24.

7.8. Supported spherical shell (Fig. P4.25) is loaded with inner pressure and temperature difference across the wall thickness:

p* = const;

where   -TTaT; -hzh.

Loading parameters:

f = p*R/(4σsh); tp = EαT/[2(1 - μ)σs].

Fig. P4.26 shows diagrams of adaptability for the supported spherical shell (2h/R = 1/20).

7.9. Clamped spherical shell (Fig. P4.27) is loaded with inner pressure and temperature difference across the wall thickness:

p* = const;

where   -TTaT; -hzh.

For parameters of loading and temperature difference see Section 7.8.

Fig. P4.14. Diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with clamped edges for βL = 0.75 ÷ 2.00

Fig. P4.15. Diagrams of adaptability for a finite length cylindrical shell with clamped edges βL = 2 ÷ 12

Fig. P4.16. Edge of the cylindrical shell:

a are loads at the shell edge; b is a shell cross-section; c is a temperature difference

Fig. P4.17. Diagrams of adaptability for the edge of a cylindrical shell at f = 0

Fig. P4.18. Diagrams of adaptability for the edge of a cylindrical shell f = 0.25

Fig. P4.19. Diagrams of adaptability for the edge of a cylindrical shell f = 0.5

Fig. P4.20. Diagrams of adaptability for the edge of a cylindrical shell f = 0.75

Fig. P4.28 shows diagrams of adaptability for a clamped spherical shell.

7.10. Thick-walled closed spherical vessel is loaded with inner pressure p* = const and temperature difference across the wall thickness:

T(t, ρ) = Tb(t) + ∆T(t)k(1 - ρ)/ρ(1 - k),

where ∆T(t) = Tb(t) - Ta(t); ∆T-∆T(t) ≤ ∆T+; ∆T = ∆T+ - ∆T-;

k = a/b; ρ = r/b;

Tb(t) is an outer surface temperature, Ta(t) is an inner surface temperature; r is a current radius; b is an outer radius; a is an inner radius.

Fig. P4.21. Long cylindrical shell:

a is a shell loaded by a force P distributed over a circular section; b is a shell cross-section; c is a temperature difference

Loading parameters:

tp = αET/[2(1 – μ)σs]; f = p*s.

Fig. P4.29 shows the diagrams of adaptability for a spherical thick-walled vessel for a number of values k.

7.11. Round freely supported plate (Fig. P4.30) loaded with uniformly distributed pressure and temperature field:

0p(t) ≤ p*;

where 0 ≤ T1(t) ≤ T1; min T0T0(t) ≤ max T0.

Loading parameters:

f = p*R2/(6σsh2); tp = αET1/[6(1 – μ)σs].

Fig. P4.22. Diagrams of adaptability for a long cylindrical shell, loaded by a force distributed across a circular cross-section and temperature difference distributed across the wall thickness:

1 is an alternating flow; 2 is a progressive form change under the condition of fluidity: max(|mx0| + 2tp/3; |nφ0| + |mx0|/2 + tp/2) = 1; 3 is a progressive form change under the condition of fluidity: max(|mx0| + 2tp/3; |nφ0| + tp/2) = 1. (Solution of the problem of progressive form change under the condition of fluidity according to the theory of maximum shear stresses lies between lines 2 and 3)

Fig. P4.23. Closed spherical shell:

a is a shell loaded with inner pressure; b is a shell cross-section; c is a temperature difference

Fig. P4.24. Diagrams of adaptability for a closed spherical shell:

1 is an alternating flow at p(t) = const; 2 is an alternating flow with arbitrary loading program; 3 is a progressive form change p(t) = const

Fig. P4.25. Supported spherical shell:

a is a shell loaded with inner pressure; b is a shell cross-section; c is a temperature field

Fig. P4.31 gives diagrams of adaptability for a round simply supported plate loaded with uniformly distributed pressure and temperature field.

7.12. Round freely supported plate (Fig. P4.32) is loaded with alternately distributed pressure and bending moment:

0p(t) ≤ p*; 0 ≤ M(t) ≤M.

Fig. P4.26. Diagrams of adaptability for the supported spherical shell (2h/R = 1/20):

1 is an upper assessment of the progressive form change condition; 2 is a lower assessment of the progressive form change condition

Fig. P4.27. Clamped spherical shell

Fig. P4.28. Diagrams of adaptability for clamped spherical shell at 2h/R = 1/20 (a) and 2h/R = 1/40 (b):

1 is an upper assessment of the progressive form change condition; 2 is a lower assessment

 

Loading parameters:

f = p*R2/(6σsh2); m = M/(σsh2).

Fig. P4.33 gives diagram of adaptability for a round simply supported plate loaded with alternately distributed pressure and bending moment.

7.13. The round plate, clamped along the edge, is loaded with uniformly distributed pressure and temperature field (Fig. P4.34). The pressure varies within the following limits: 0 ≤ p(t) ≤ p*; pressure loading parameter f = p*R2/(11.26σsh2).

Fig. P4.29. Diagrams of adaptability for a spherical thick-walled vessel with p = const:

1 is an alternating flow; 2 is a progressive form change

Fig. P4.30. Round simply supported plate loaded with uniformly distributed pressure (supports do not prevent radial displacement)

Fig. P4.31. Diagrams of adaptability for a round simply supported plate loaded with uniformly distributed pressure and temperature field:

1 is an alternating flow with an arbitrary loading program: (15/16)f + tp = 1; 2 is an alternating flow at p(t) = const, tp = 1; 3 is a progressive form change at p(t) = const, f + (5/12)tp = 1

Fig. P4.35 and P4.36 shows diagrams of adaptability for a round plate clamped along the edge for the following temperature fields:

Fig. P4.32. Round simply supported plate loaded with alternately distributed pressure and bending moment

Fig. P4.33. Diagram of adaptability for a round simply supported plate loaded with alternately distributed pressure and bending moment:

1 is an "instant" plastic destruction m = 1; 2 is an "instant" plastic destruction f = 1; 3 is a progressive form change m(1 - x) + (1/4)(5 – x2)x = 1; x2 = (1/3)(5 - 4mf)

Fig. P4.34. Round plate clamped along the edge

 0 ≤ T1(t) ≤ T1;

min T0T0(t) ≤ max T0; temperature parameter t = αET1/[2×(1 - μ)σs] (Fig. P4.35);

0T1(t) ≤ T1; temperature parameter tp = 2αET1/[3(1 - μ)σs] (Fig. P4.36).

7.14. Simply supported round plate (Fig. P4.37) is loaded with force P = const, distributed over the ring, and the temperature field.

Loading parameters:

f = Pa/(σsh2); tp = αET1s.

Fig. P4.38, P4.39 shows diagrams of adaptability for a simply supported round plate with a force distributed over the ring for the following temperature fields:

 (Fig. P4.38)

Fig. P4.35. Diagrams of adaptability for a round plate, clamped along the edge, with

1 is an alternating flow with an arbitrary loading program: 1.055f + tp = 1; 2 is an alternating flow at p* = const, tp = 1; 3 is a progressive form change at p(t) = const, -0 ≤ tp ≤ 0.75; f = 0.533x2; 3x2 – 2ln x – 5 – (8/3)tp; -0.75 ≤ tp ≤ 1.0; f = 1.066(1 – (2/3)tp)

Fig. P4.36. Diagrams of adaptability for a round plate, clamped along the edge, with

1 is an alternating flow with an arbitrary loading program: 1.055f + tp = 1; 2 is an alternating flow at p(t) = const, tp = 1; 3 is a progressive form change at p(t) = const, f = 0.535x2;
3x2 – 2ln x - 5 = -2tp

Fig. P4.37. Simply supported round plate with force distributed over the ring

 (Fig. P4.39);

Hre at arR 0 ≤ T1(t) ≤ T1;

at 0 ≤ ra T1(t) =0;

min T0T0(t) ≤ max T0; k = a/R.

7.15. Simply supported round plate with a stepwise change in thickness (Fig. P4.40) is loaded with concentrated force P* and temperature field:

P* = const; T(t) = T0(t) at 0 ≤ ra and

 at arR.

Here –T1T1(t) ≤ T1; min T0T0(t) ≤ max T0.

Fig. P4.38. Diagrams of adaptability for a simply supported round plate with a force distributed over the ring at T(t, r) = T0(t) + T1(t)(r a)/(R a):

1 is an alternating flow; 2 is a progressive form change

Fig. P4.39. diagrams of adaptability for a simply supported round plate with a force distributed over the ring at T(t, r) = T0(t) + T1(t)[(r a)/(R a)]2:

1 is an alternating flow; 2 is a progressive form change

Loading parameters:

f = p*/(2pσsh2); tp = t*/t0,

where t* = αET1/[3(1 - ks]; t0 = 1.015; k = a/R.

Alternating flow condition:

max[|φ(ρ)|, |ψ(ρ)|, φ(ρ) - ψ(ρ)|]t* = 1;

φ(ρ) = ψ(ρ) = 1 - 1.5k + 0.5k2)(b - 2)/(b + k2) at 0 ≤ ρ ≤ k;

  at k ≤ ρ ≤ 1.

Here   

Progressive form change condition:

at x(k) < 1;

 at x(k) > 1.

Fig. P4.40. Simply supported round plate with a stepwise change in thickness

Fig. P4.41. Diagrams of adaptability for a simply supported round plate with a step change in thickness, loaded with a concentrated force:

1 is an alternating flow for k = 0.25, b = 1; 2 is an alternating flow for k = 0.25, b → 0; 3 is a progressive form change for k = 0.25, b = 1; 4 is a progressive form change for k = 0.25, b → 0; 5 is a progressive form change for k = 0.25, b = 2/3

Here

Fig. P4.41 shows diagrams of adaptability for a simply supported round plate with a step change in thickness, loaded with a concentrated force.

7.16. For cylindrical pipes loaded with inner pressure (or axial force) without bending at cyclic temperature changes uniformly distributed along the pipe axis and varying in thickness, the conditions for the start of form change (tolerance of 2 · 10-4%) and deformations accumulated over the cycle can be determined in the range of operating temperatures up to 925 K (650 °C) at σRK/RTct in Fig. P4.42 depending on σm/Rp0.2. Here RTct is a creep limit at t = 2 · 105 h and accumulated plastic deformation limit 0.2 %; σRK is a range of temperature stresses; σm is a pressure stress.

8. METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE VALUE OF IRREVERSIBLE FORM CHANGE UNDER NEUTRON EXPOSURE CONDITIONS

8.1. The method applies to the parts listed in item 5.8.

8.2. When assessing the component of the value of irreversible form change from the neutron radiation, the difference in the integral doses of exposure over the part cross-section is not considered.

8.3. The irreversible cumulative change in Δl size with neutron fluence Fn shall not exceed the permissible irreversible size change of [Δl] and neutron fluence [Fn] determined approximately in the range of operating temperatures 623 - 923 K (350 - 650 °C) using the empirical formula

where T = Tmax, °С; γp is a characteristic of the material swelling under exposure by neutrons with an energy of more than 0.1 MeV (see Table P4.1); (σ)1 is the highest reduced stress from mechanical load [(σ)1 < σs], MPa (kgf/mm2); a1 = 0.024 1/MPa (0.24 mm2/kgf).

8.4. Axial form change under neutron exposure of parts with stationary axial temperature gradients is determined by linear summation.

8.5. When determining the value of irreversible form change under the conditions of joint or separate action of thermal cycling and mechanical load and neutron radiation, dimensional changes are linearly summed.


 

9. EXAMPLE OF CALCULATING UPPER AND LOWER ESTIMATIONS OF LIMIT CYCLE PARAMETERS

9.1. This example illustrates the procedure for calculating the upper and lower assessments of parameters of the limit cycle using the general methods of the theory of adaptability. The structure characteristics and loading conditions are conditionally selected for the purpose of the most distinct presentation of the calculation stages. Features of solutions under more difficult loading conditions are considered at the end of each stage.

9.2. We calculate the cylindrical shell clamped along the edges as shown in Fig. P4.43. Inter alia, calculation of the shell, which has sufficiently rigid flanges at the ends, whose temperature is equal to the temperature of the middle surface of the shell, are reduced according to this scheme. The shell length l, radius R, and thickness 2h are given. The shell is subjected to the action of the constant inner pressure p and temperature T(t) varying under linear law along the thickness of the shell at each moment of time t:

 

Here T0(t) is a middle surface temperature; T2(t) is a temperature difference between the inner and outer surface of the shell.

Purpose of the calculation is to determine the upper and lower assessments of the parameters of the limit cycle and then compare them with the specified parameters of the operating cycle in accordance with Section 5.4.

Fig. P4.42. Diagrams of equal form change of components such as pipes (rods) at thermal cycling and mechanical load after 1000 loading cycles with a duration of up to 2 · 105 h:

a are nickel-chromium steels after cold-work hardening of up to 15%; b are nickel-chromium precipitation-hardening steels; c, d, e, f are nickel-chromium steels; g, h, i, j, k are low-alloyed steels

9.3. When calculating, the properties of the shell material (modulus of elasticity E, temperature coefficient of linear expansion α, Poisson ratio μ, and limit stresses σs) are determined in accordance with Section 6.3, 3.1 and 3.2 in the same way as was done in the previous example. Numerical data are not given here, since in the calculation example below, it is assumed that the value of σs is constant, and the calculation of the upper and lower assessments is carried out in a general form without using specific numerical values. Changes in the calculation procedure when the numerical specification of variable σs are indicated at the end of each calculation stage.

Fig. P4.43. Shell design diagram

Fig. P4.44. Distribution of increments of the shell radial displacements

Conditional elastic stresses from uneven heating are determined by the formula

Here σφT, σθT are circular and axial stresses, respectively; z coordinate is measured from the middle surface of the shell along the normal to it; z axis is directed to the shell axis, -hzh.

9.4. Calculation of the upper assessment of the progressive from change conditions.

Calculation is held according to the following procedures:

a) in accordance with item 5.6.8, the distribution of increments of radial displacements per cycle Δw shown in Fig. P4.44 is set,

Δw = Δw02x/L 0 ≤ xL/2,

as well as zero increments of axial displacements per cycle Δu

Δu = 0.

In accordance with the diagram shown in Fig. P4.44, cross-sections A, B and C have gaps in increments of axial displacements per cycle Δu'φ: in cross-sections A and C Δu'φ = zw0/L; in cross-section В Δu'φ = -2zΔα = -zw0/L;

b) using the compatibility conditions of deformations, we find the increments of the circumferential and axial deformations per cycle Δεθ, Δεφ corresponding to the specified displacement increments at 0 < x < 0.5L.

For cylindrical shell

 

Substituting the values of displacement increments here, we get

 Δεφ = 0;

c) write the conditions: existence of a progressive form change in accordance with item 5.6.5.

For the given problem a = 1, b = 0, since Δε0 > 0, Δεφ = 0. Provided that ; Δεφ+ = 0, since the increments of circumferential plastic deformations are positive;

 Δu'φ- = 0 for cross-sections A and C at z > 0;

Δu'φ+ = 0,  for cross-sections A and C at z < 0;

Δu'φ+ = 0,  for cross-section B at z > 0;

 Δu'φ = 0 for cross-section B at z < 0.

With due regard to the symmetry of the distribution of plastic deformation increments and the constancy of σs, σθT and σφT values along the shell length, the condition for the existence of progressive form change, given in item 5.6.5, takes the form of

(P4.1)

Indices A and B indicate that the corresponding values refer to cross-sections A and B (see Fig. P4.44).

Let us find the minimum values of the integrands of the left-hand side of this inequality for the cycle time. Considering that

 x > 0, Δw0 > 0,

and the values of conditional elastic stresses σθ(e), σφ(e) are determined in accordance with the expressions given in Sections 9.3 and 9.2, we get:

a) at –hzh

Note that at z> 0, the minimum is reached if T2(t) = T*/2, and for z <0 - if

b) at 0 ≤ zh

it is reached if

c) at –hz ≤ 0

for

d) at 0 ≤ zh

for

e) at –h ≤ z ≤ 0

for

Substituting the obtained values into the inequality (P4.1), we obtain, after integration, the condition for the progressive form change existence in the form of

 (P4.2)

Note that in the general case, when the value of σs changes during a cycle depending on temperature (and is variable along the shell volume), and the temperature field of the shell is nonlinear and is set numerically, the calculation sequence differs from the above one in that the integration in inequality (P4.1) is carried out for the entire shell length (there is no symmetry), and the minimum values of the integrands are found numerically by comparing the corresponding values obtained for a number of moments in time.

The result obtained is the upper assessment of the limit cycle parameters: it determines the conditions of realization in the limit cycle of the field of increments of displacements shown in Fig. P4.44.

9.5. Calculation of the lower assessment of the progressive from change conditions.

In accordance with item 5.6.2, the shell adaptability is ensured if it is possible to specify time-independent stresses σθ0, σφ0, satisfying:

a) equilibrium conditions

 Nφ0 = 0; (P4.3)

   (P4.4)

(positive directions of forces are shown in Fig. P4.45);

b) the inequality of item 5.6.2, which, with due regard to item 5.6.3 with reference to this problem, has the following form:

.

Substituting into this system the values of conditional elastic stresses (Section 9.3) and taking into account the limits of temperature variation (Section 9.2), at σs = const we obtain

 (P4.5)

 (P4.6)

-σs ≤ σθ0 - σφ0 ≤ σs. (P4.7)

To obtain a lower assessment of the conditions of adaptability, one shall set the values of stresses σθ0, σφ0 so that inequalities (P4.5) - (P4.7) are fulfilled, and find the corresponding value p from conditions (P4.3) and (P4.4). To specify the stresses σθ0, σφ0 we can use the earlier introduced (when calculating the upper assessment of the conditions of progressive form change) assumptions of the distribution of plastic deformation increments (Fig. P4.44):

a) in accordance with Fig. P4.44 everywhere in the shell, there is a tension in the circumferential direction, so it can be assumed that the circumferential stresses σθ0 everywhere reach the limit (upper) values determined by inequalities (P4.5), that is

 (P4.8)

(this stress distribution is illustrated in Fig. P4.46, a);

b) symmetrical distribution of displacement increments, shown in Fig. P4.44, corresponds to the assumption of equality of bending moments at x = 0, x = L:

(Mφ0)x=0 = (Mφ0)x=L;

c) suppose that the axial stresses σφ0 are distributed over the shell thickness according to a linear law (Fig. P4.46, b, c):

σφ0 = σφ*z/h.

The values of σφ* may be different in different cross-sections of the shell. Their numerical values are not specified yet. In the course of further calculations, such σφ* values are found for which the value of p is the greatest value when conditions (P4.3) - (P4.7) are fulfilled. Note that the proposed law of stress distribution is not directly related to the distribution of displacement increments, shown in Fig. P4.44;

d) transform the constraint system (P4.3) - (P4.7) with due regard to assumptions a), b) and c). Substituting the estimated values of the stresses in the expression (P4.4), we get

  Na0 ≡ 0.

Fig. P4.45. Positive directions of forces

Fig. P4.46. Assumed distribution of stresses

Substitute the obtained values of the forces in the equilibrium equation (P4.3). After double integration, with due regard to the assumed equality of the bending moments at x = 0 and x = L, this equation takes the form of

 (P4.9)

Inequalities (P4.5) are satisfied everywhere in the shell in accordance with assumption a). To fulfill the inequalities (P4.6), (P4.7) at all points of any cross-section of the shell, it is sufficient that they are fulfilled at z = h and z = -h (since, with due regard to the assumed distributions of stresses σφ* and σθ*, the left and right sides of each of these inequalities contain linear functions of the z coordinate and, moreover, σφ0 = 0 at z = 0). In this case, conditions (P4.6) have the following form:

 (P4.10)

and conditions (P4.7) have this form:

 at z = h and z = -h.

This inequality is transformed with due regard to the relations

σφ0 = σφ* at z = h and σφ0 = -σφ* at z = -h

to the following:

 (P4.11)

e) to satisfy the inequalities (P4.10), (P4.11) in all cross-sections of the shell, it is enough that they are fulfilled where the stresses σφ* reach extreme (greatest and smallest) values. In accordance with the equation (P4.9) such values can be achieved at the edges of the shell (at x = 0 and x = L; stresses σφ* = σφA*) or at x = 0.5L, since in this cross-section

provided that

f) according to the last equation we find the pressure p:

Substituting here the values of stresses σ*φA, σ*φB, satisfying inequalities (P4.10) and (P4.11), we obtain the pressure value p, which is the lower assessment of the adaptability conditions. The best assessment obtained in this way has the form of

 (P4.12)

The greatest value of stresses σφ*, at which all inequalities (P4.10) and (P4.11) are satisfied, is equal to

 if

 if

The smallest value of stresses σφ*, at which inequalities (P4.10) and (P4.11) are satisfied, is equal to

 if

 if

Substituting these values into equation (P4.12), we find that the shell adaptability is guaranteed if

 at  (P4.13)

at  (P4.14)

These results illustrate at L2/(8Rh) = 0.6 lines 2 and 3 in Fig. P4.47; here, the upper assessment of the conditions of progressive form change (P4.2) corresponds to line 1.

Note that in the general case, when the σs values change during a cycle depending on temperature, and the temperature field of the shell is nonlinear and numerically specified, the calculation sequence differs from the one given above in that:

a) when obtaining the equation (P4.9) from the equilibrium conditions (P4.3), the integration of the circumferential forces Nθ0 is carried out numerically;

b) location of the cross-sections in which the stresses σφ* reach extreme values, as well as the values of stresses σφ* ensuring the fulfillment of constraints - inequalities, are determined by selection.

9.6. Comparison of the upper and lower assessments of the parameters of the limit cycle with the parameters of the operating cycle. Refinement of the upper and lower assessments.

After obtaining the upper and lower assessments of the parameters of the limit cycle they are compared with the parameters of the operating cycle in accordance with Section 5.4.

If the parameters of the operating cycle are higher than the upper assessment of the parameters of the limit cycle, then adaptability is impossible.

If the parameters of the operating cycle are lower than the lower assessment of the parameters of the limit cycle, then the structure will adapt to the given impacts.

If the parameters of the operating cycle are lower than the upper, but higher than the lower assessment of the parameters of the limit cycle (this is possible with a significant difference between the upper and lower assessments), then a refined calculation of the parameters of the limit cycle is performed.

Fig. P4.47. Shell adaptability diagram

Consider three examples of calculations that differ in a given pressure in the operating cycle with the same geometrical characteristics of shell [L2/(8Rh) = 0.6] and the same temperatures (αEΔT/[2(1 - μ)] = 1.5). Let for given operating conditions of the shell

a)  b)  c)

The specified values of the parameters of the operating cycle correspond to points A, B and C in Fig. P4.47. In accordance with condition (P4.2), adaptability for the case under consideration is impossible if

Hence, at pR/(2σsh) = 1.5 the adaptability is impossible.

In accordance with condition (14) of Section 9.5, adaptability is provided if pR/(2σsh) <0.9. Hence, at pR/(2σsh) = 0.5 the shell will adapt to the given impacts.

Finally, at pR/(2σsh) = 1, the obtained upper and lower assessments do not allow us to answer the question about the possibility of adaptability. Note that when calculating in Section 9.5 the revised lower assessment, the distribution of circumferential stresses was assumed as it really is in the limit cycle if there is no bending. Therefore, the lower assessment obtained above in the limit (at L ) coincided with the upper assessment, but for short shells, in the form change of which the bending plays a significant role, this lower assessment is far from the exact solution. To get the best lower assessment for short shells, we set

σθ0 = 0;

In one cross-section, only the upper or only lower sign is used.

A solution similar to that discussed in Section 9.5, then leads to the following condition of adaptability:

(it corresponds to line 4 in Fig. P4.47).

Comparison of this result with the upper assessment (2) shows that the difference between them decreases with decreasing value of L2/(8Rh) and becomes negligible for sufficiently short shells. However, at

 and

the lower assessment obtained here gives pR/(2σsh) ≤ 0.83, i.e. it turns out to be worse than the lower assessment obtained in Section 9.5.

To improve the lower assessment for shells of average length, non-zero circumferential stresses σθ0 should be specified which provide for obtaining larger bending moments Mφ0 than those obtained in Section 9.5. Let, for example,

where k is an unknown factor which is selected during the solution so as to obtain the best lower assessment 0 ≤ k ≤ 0.5. Result of the calculation similar to that discussed in Section 9.5 is shown by the line 5 in Fig. P4.47 at αET*/[2(1 - μ)] = 1.5; the appropriate condition of adaptability has the form of

Thus, at pR/(2σsh) = 1, the will be no progressive form change of the shell.


 

APPENDIX 5

(recommended)

CALCULATION OF TYPICAL ASSEMBLIES OF PARTS AND STRUCTURES

1. BASIC PROVISIONS

This Appendix contains recommended methods for determining the stresses in pipelines and detached connections of vessels.

Selection of the basic dimensions of the components of structures (wall thickness) is carried out according to the formulas of Section 3 hereof.

The calculation is performed for operation modes and for the main design loads indicated in items 5.1.3, 5.1.4 of the Regulations.

The formulas for calculating stresses given in this Appendix do not exclude the possibility of using more accurate formulas and relations for the calculation of structures.

2. PIPELINES

2.1. CONVENTION SYMBOLS

Da is an nominal outer diameter of the pipe, mm

D is an inner diameter (D = Da – 2s), mm

s is a nominal wall thickness of the pipe, mm

r is a mean radius of the cross-section [r = (Da - s)/2], mm

R is a radius of curvilinear pipe axis, mm

a is an ellipticity (out-of-roundness) of the cross-section (the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum outer diameters of the cross-section to their half-sum),%

As is a pipe cross-sectional area, mm2

W is a moment of resistance to the pipe cross-section bending, mm3

λ is a dimensionless geometric parameter (λ = Rs/r2)

p is a design inner pressure in the pipeline, MPa

Mx, My, Mz are bending and torque moments in the pipeline cross-section, N · mm

Nz is an axial force in the cross-section of the pipeline from the action of a mass load and self-compensation of temperature expansions, N

ω is a dimensionless parameter of inner pressure

E is a modulus of elasticity of the material, MPa

Kp is a coefficient of compliance of a curvilinear pipe, taking into account the effect of inner pressure (the ratio of compliances to the bending of curvilinear and rectilinear pipes of the same cross-section and made of the same material)

K*p is a coefficient of compliance of a curvilinear pipe, taking into account the effect of inner pressure and interface with rectilinear pipes

γm is a coefficient of intensification of bending transverse stresses in a curvilinear pipe.

βm is a coefficient of intensification of bending longitudinal stresses in a curvilinear pipe

σ0zMN, σ0zMN(s) are longitudinal stresses due to bending moment and axial force, MPa

σψ is a circumferential (tangential) stress in a pipe wall, MPa

σz is an axial (longitudinal) stress in a pipe wall, MPa

σr is a radial stress in a pipe wall, MPa

τ is a torsional stress, MPa

σTp, σT0, σT are temperature stresses, MPa

(σ)2, (σ)RK,( σaF)K, (σ)p are reduced stresses, MPa

[σ] is a nominal permissible stress, MPa

φw – coefficient of strength reduction of a weld seam

ασ is a tangential stress concentration coefficient

Ki(s) is a coefficient of local bending stresses in the pipe from the impact of the nozzle.

2.2. GENERAL

2.2.1. This Section covers the calculation of low-temperature and high-temperature NNP pipelines. The class of low-temperature pipelines includes pipelines made of carbon, alloyed, silicon-manganese and high-chromium steels, of austenitic steels, heat-resistant chromium-molybdenum-vanadium steels, iron-nickel alloys and zirconium alloys with a design temperature of not more than Tt. The class of high-temperature pipelines includes pipelines with a higher design temperature exceeding temperature Tt (item 3.2 hereof).

2.2.2. When determining the reduced stresses of different categories, the loads shall be considered according to item 5.1.3 hereof.

2.2.3. Internal forces in the pipeline are determined with due regard to all influencing factors, inter alia, with due regard to the friction forces arising in the sliding supports, as well as the suspension deviation from the vertical position.

2.2.4. Presence of two signs (plus, minus) in front of the additive in the formulas given means that the calculation of the reduced stresses using this formula is performed both when the plus sign is accepted and when the minus sign is accepted. To assess the strength, a larger value of the reduced stress is taken.

2.2.5. The reduced rigidity of the curvilinear segment for bending is taken into account in the calculation by introducing the coefficient of compliance for it. The latter takes into account the deformation (flattening) of the cross-section and is determined according to Section 2.5.

2.2.6. It is allowed to determine stresses in a curvilinear pipe by the procedure of Section 2.8.

2.2.7. It is allowed to determine stresses in a tee connection by the procedure of Section 2.9.

2.3. LOW-TEMPERATURE PIPELINES

2.3.1. Determination of stresses (σ)2.

2.3.1.1. For rectilinear and curvilinear pipes, the stress state components are determined by the formulas

σψ = σψp,

where

where

σr = -p/2;

The value of the strength reduction coefficient φ is assumed in accordance with item 4.3 of the Regulations.

The force Nz is considered positive if it causes pipe stretching.

2.3.1.2. For curvilinear pipes, the geometrical parameter λ of which satisfies the condition λ ≤ 1.4, in addition to determining the reduced stress (σ) 2, using the formulas in item 2.3.1.1, the reduced stress is calculated by the formula

The values of Ω and ψ are determined by Tables P5.1 and P5.2 applying a linear interpolation method.

2.3.1.3. For the tee assembly, the stress (σ) 2 is calculated for three cross-sections: A-A, B-B, C-C (Fig. P5.1). Below are the formulas for calculating the components of the stress state:

Table P5.1. Value of coefficient ψ

ψ

1.0

0.98

0.94

0.88

0.79

0.68

0.50

0.30

0.10

σψp/[σ]

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

Table P5.2. Value of coefficient Ω

Ω

18

10

6

3

2

1.7

1.0

0.65

λ

0

0.05

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.9

1.6

Fig. P5.1. Tee assembly (pipe with nozzles)

Fig. P5.2. Force factors in the cross-section of the tee assembly

for cross-sections A-A and C-C

σψ = σψp;

σz = σ0zMN ± 0.7σ0zMN(s)Ki(s) + σzp;

for cross-section B-B

σψ = σψp ± 0.7σ0zMN(s)Ki(s);

σz = σ0zMN + σzp.

Stresses τ, σψp, σzp, σr in these cross-sections are determined by the formulas of item 2.3.1.1. The longitudinal stress in the pipe is determined by the formula

Force factors Mx, My, Nz considered positive if directed as shown in Fig. P5.2. Angle Φ determines the nozzles position (Fig. P5.1).

The longitudinal stress in the nozzle is calculated by the formula

where the formula quantities refer to the cross-section of the nozzle at the point of connection with the pipe.

Coefficient of local stresses Ki(s) is determined according to Section 2.7.


 

2.3.2. Determination of stress (σ)RK.

2.3.2.1. For rectilinear and curvilinear tubes with λ ≥ 1.4, the stress state components for the outer surface are determined by the formulas

σψ = 2σzp;

σr = 0; τ = Mz/(2W).

2.3.2.2. For curvilinear pipes with λ <1.4, the stress (σ)0RK is determined by the following four formulas:

To assess the strength, the larger of the four values is taken.

Coefficients γm and βm are determined by Section 2.6. Stresses σzp and σψp are determined by the formulas in item 2.3.1.1. Coefficient B is calculated by the formula

2.3.2.3. For the tee assembly, the stresses are calculated using the formulas:

for cross-sections A-A and C-C (Fig. P5.1)

σψ = 0.5ασσψp;

σz = σ0zMN ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s) + σzp;

for cross-section B-B

σψ = σψз ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s);

σz = 1.5σ0zMN + σzp.

Radial stress is assumed as σr = 0. Values of σψp, σzp, σ0zMN, σ0zMN(s), τ are calculated by the same formulas as in item 2.3.1.3, but at φ = 1. For determining Ki(s) - see Section 2.7.

Coefficient of concentration of tangential stresses at the edge of the hole ασ is determined by the formula

ασ = 1.2[2 + 2(D/Da)2 - (D/Da)4].

2.3.2.4. In the places of conjugation of components with different wall thicknesses or with different thermal and physical characteristics, the range of common temperature stresses due to axial temperature difference (stress (σ)T0 are considered.

Stress (σ)T0 is determined by the formula

where y is a distance from the middle of the wall according to normal; T(y) is a wall temperature; α(y) is a coefficient of linear expansion of the wall material;  is a mean thickness modulus of elasticity.

Indices I and II are used to denote mating components.

The wall thickness shall be taken as maximum within the distance from the cross-section separating components I and II. Value of the coefficient f is determined by linear interpolation according to the following values of Table P5.3.

2.3.2.5. Range of the stress (σ)RK is determined by summing:

(σ)RK = (σ)0RK + (σ)T0,

where (σ)0RK is a range of reduced stress, calculated without taking into account the temperature components of the uneven temperature field in the wall.

2.3.3. Determination of stresses (σaF)K.

2.3.3.1. For rectilinear and curvilinear tubes with λ > 1.0, the stress state components (amplitude values) are determined by the formulas

σψ = σzp;

τ = Mz/(4W); σr = 0.


 

Table P5.3. Values of coefficients f

sI/sII

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

f

1.80

1.35

0.71

0.35

0.15

0

For the formula determining σzp see item 2.3.1.1.

2.3.3.2. For curvilinear pipes, the stress  is calculated by the formulas

To assess the strength, the larger of the four values is taken. The value of Me is determined by the formula

where x is a coefficient taking into account the difference between the actual shape of the cross-section distortion from the ideally elliptical. It shall be assumed that x = 2.0.

Positive direction of the bending moments is shown in Fig. P5.3.

Coefficients γm and βm are determined by Section 2.6. Stresses σzp, σψp are calculated by the formulas in item 2.3.1.1. Coefficient B is determined according to item 2.3.2.2.

2.3.3.3. For the tee assembly, determine the components of the stress state (amplitude values) by the following formulas:

for cross-sections A-A and C-C (see Fig. P5.1)

σψ = 0.35ασσψp;

σz = (1/2)[σ0zMN ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s) + σzp];

for cross-sections B-B

σψ = (1/2)(σψF ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s));

σz = (1/2)(3σ0zMN + σzp].

Fig. P5.3. Positive directions of bending moments in a cross-section of a curvilinear pipe

Torsion stress τ is determined by the formula in item 2.3.1.1, but with a decrease of 2 times. Radial stress σr = 0. Values of σψp, σzp, σ0zMN, σ0zMN(s), Ki(s), ασ are determined in the same way as required under item 2.3.2.3.

2.3.3.4. The range of the total maximum temperature stress from the temperature difference across the wall thickness [stress (σ)*T] and stress (σ)T0 from the axial temperature difference are determined. Calculation of (σ)*T is carried out by analytical or numerical procedure, and calculation of (σ)T0 – by the formula in item 2.3.2.4.

2.3.3.5. Stress (σaF)K for the loading cycle of each type is allowed to be determined by summing by the formula

where (σaF)0K is an amplitude of reduced stress, calculated without taking into account the temperature components of the uneven temperature field in the wall.

2.3.4. Strength criteria.

Strength verification for stress categories (σ)2, (σ)RK is carried out according to Section 5.4 hereof. Strength verification for stress categories (σaF)K is carried out according to Section 5.6 hereof.

2.4. HIGH-TEMPERATURE PIPELINES

2.4.1. Determination of stresses (σ)2, (σ)RK, (σaF)K.

2.4.1.1. When determining the reduced stress (σ)2, the axial stress σz is calculated with due regard to the strength reduction coefficient of the transverse weld by the formula

where the strength reduction coefficient φw is determined according to the instructions of item 4.3.3 hereof.

As for the rest, the reduced stresses (σ)2, (σaF)K are determined by the same formulas that are used in the calculation of the low-temperature pipeline (see items 2.3.1, 2.3.2, 2.3.3).

2.4.2. Determination of stress (σ)RK.

2.4.2.1. In addition to the given reduced stresses, reduced stress (σ)RK is determined to evaluate the long-term static strength with due regard to local stresses and action of all loads (pressure, mass load, compensation) it a steady-state operation mode. In this case, the components of the stress state due to the compensation of temperature expansions are allowed to be determined with due regard to the gradual decrease (relaxation) in time due to creep.

2.4.2.2. Components of the stress state for rectilinear pipes and curvilinear pipes with λ ≥ 1.0 are determined by the formulas in item 2.3.1.1.

2.4.2.3. For curvilinear pipes (at any value of λ), the stress (σ)RK is calculated by the following formulas:

where

The value of χe is determined by linear interpolation according to Table P5.4.

Table P5.4. Value of coefficient χe

Steel

Temperature, °С

360

450

500

550

600

650

700

Carbon and silicon-manganese

0.4

0.35

-

-

-

-

-

Chrome-molybdenum and chrome-molybdenum-vanadium

0.5

0.45

0.4

0.35

0.2

-

-

Austenitic

-

0.55

0.5

0.4

0.35

0.3

0.2

Fig. P5.4. Curvilinear pipe

Stresses σzp and σψp are determined by the formula in item 2.3.1.1, coefficients γm, βm – by the Section 2.6.

2.4.2.4. For the tee assembly, components of the stress state are determined by the formulas:

σψ = 1.5σψp;

σz = σ0zMN ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s) + σzp,

for cross-section B-B

σψ = σψp ± σ0zMN(s)Ki(s);

σz = 1.5σ0zMN + σzp.

Values of σzp, σψp, σ0zMN, σ0zMN(s), τ are determined in the same way as required under item 2.3.2.1. Value of Ki(s) is calculated according to Section 2.7.

2.4.3. Strength criteria.

2.4.3.1. Strength verification for stress categories (σ)2 and (σ)RK is carried out according to Section 5.4 hereof, and for category (σaF)K – according to Section 5.6 hereof.

2.5. DETERMINATION OF THE COMPLIANCE COEFFICIENT OF THE CURVILINEAR PIPE

2.5.1. The compliance coefficient of curvilinear pipe (Fig. P5.4) is calculated as the product of the compliance coefficient Kp, determined without taking into account the constraint of deformation of its ends from the influence of adjacent pipes on the coefficient ζ, taking into account this constraint of deformation, i.e.

K*p = ζKp.


 

Table P5.5. Value of coefficient ζ

λ

The angle between the end sections of the pipe, deg

0

30

60

90

R/r

R/r

R/r

R/r

2

4

6

8

2

4

6

8

2

4

6

8

2

4

6

8

0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.12

0.18

0.24

0.28

0.25

0.37

0.47

0.55

0.42

0.58

0.65

0.70

0.2

0.12

0.12

0.12

0.12

0.27

0.34

0.39

0.42

0.43

0.56

0.66

0.73

0.60

0.78

0.84

0.88

0.4

0.24

0.24

0.24

0.24

0.43

0.48

0.52

0.54

0.62

0.73

0.80

0.84

0.77

0.88

0.91

0.93

0.6

0.37

0.37

0.37

0.37

0.55

0.59

0.61

0.62

0.73

0.81

0.85

0.88

0.82

0.90

0.94

0.95

0.8

0.49

0.49

0.49

0.49

0.63

0.66

0.68

0.69

0.77

0.84

0.88

0.90

0.85

0.92

0.93

0.94

1.0

0.60

0.60

0.60

0.60

0.72

0.74

0.75

0.76

0.83

0.88

0.91

0.93

0.89

0.94

0.96

0.96

1.2

0.73

0.73

0.73

0.73

0.80

0.82

0.83

0.84

0.88

0.91

0.94

0.95

0.92

0.95

0.97

0.97

1.4

0.85

0.85

0.85

0.85

0.89

0.90

0.91

0.91

0.93

0.95

0.96

0.96

0.96

0.97

0.98

0.98

1.65

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

2.5.2. Compliance coefficient Kp is determined by the formula

Kp = 1 + 1.125/b.

The value of b is calculated by the following formulas:

a1 = 1.0100 + 1633.5λ2 + 99.00ω;

a = 1.0156 + 661.5λ2 + 63.00ω – 0.2316/a1;

a3 = 1.0278 + 204.2λ2 + 35.00ω – 0.2197/a2;

a4 = 1.0625 + 37.5λ2 + 15.00ω – 0.1914/a3;

b = 0.1250 + 1.5λ2 + 3.00ω – 0.09766/a4.

λ and ω parameters are calculated by the formulas

 

2.5.3. ζ coefficient is determined by the method of linear interpolation according to data in Table P5.5.


 

2.6. DETERMINATION OF COEFFICIENTS OF STRESS INTENSIFICATION FOR THE CURVILINEAR PINE

2.6.1. Stress intensification coefficient γm and βm are determined by the formulas

where A22 = -1/b;    

Values of Kp, a1, a2, a3, a4, b are determined by the formulas in Section 2.5.

2.7. DETERMINATION OF THE COEFFICIENT OF LOCAL BENDING STRESSES FOR THE TEE ASSEMBLY

2.7.1. At  (Fig. P5.5) coefficient of local stresses Ki(s) is calculated by the formula

Size s's is determined by Fig. P5.5.

2.7.2. When

2.7.3. If the value of Ki(s), calculated by the formula in item 2.7.1 or 2.7.2, is less than 2, it shall be assumed that Ki(s) = 2.

Fig. P5.5. Tee assembly

2.8. CALCULATION OF STRESSES IN A CURVILINEAR PIPE BY REFINED PROCEDURE

2.8.1. Circular section pipe.

2.8.1.1. Calculate the normal stresses from bending of the pipe without taking into account deformation of the cross-section:

σ0az(x) = Mx/W; σ0az(y) = My/W;

σ0z(x) = σ0az/β; σ0az(y) = σ0az(y)/β,

where β = Da/D. Hereinafter, the index a denotes the outer surface. (For the direction of moments, see Fig. P5.3.)

2.8.1.2. The stresses caused by torque, inner pressure, and axial force, are calculated:

τa = Mz/(2W); τ = τa/β;

where s is a minimum wall thickness due to process operations; φ – see item 2.3.1.1; ψ – see Fig. P5.3.

2.8.1.3. Calculate the bending stresses with due regard to deformation of the cross-section:

σazM = σ0az(x)βa1 + σ0az(y)βa2;

σzM = σ0z(x)β1 + σ0z(y)β2;

where

provided that (replace i and j with one letter v for short)

Φ1v = sin ψ cos – (1/v)cos ψ sin ± 0.15λ(1 – v2)cos ;

Φ2v = sin ψ sin + (1/v)cos ψ cos ± 0.15λ(1 – v2)sin ;

Φ3v = sin ψ cos – (1/v)cos ψ sin ± (λ/0.6)(1 – v2)cos ;

Φ4v = sin ψ sin + (1/v)cos ψ cos ± (λ/0.6)(1 – v2)sin ;

where the upper sign corresponds to the inner surface, and the lower sign – to the outer.

Values of Kp and Ai2 are determined according to items 2.5.2 and 2.6.1.

2.8.1.4. Calculate the tangential membrane stresses from the bend of the pipe:

where

provided that

2.8.1.5. Calculate the total normal stress on mutually perpendicular areas:

σaz = σazM + σzN + σzp; σaψ = σaψM +  + σaψp;

σz = σzM + σzN + σzp; σψ = σψM +  + σψp.

2.8.1.6. The reduced stresses on the inner and outer surfaces of the pipe are determined for the following sequence of values of the angle ψ: ψn = nhψ, n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 35, where is the angle change pitch hψ = 2p/36.

Radial normal stress for the inner surface σr = -p, and for the outer surface σar = 0.

2.8.2. Oval section pipe.

2.8.2.1. It is assumed that the cross-section of the pipe has an elliptical (oval) shape, with the major axis of the cross-section perpendicular to the plane of the pipe axis. The radial deviations of the contour of such a cross-section from a circle of radius r are expressed by the equation (Fig. P5.3)

where a is an out-of-roundness of cross-section (a ≤ 10 %).

2.8.2.2. Calculate the normal stresses due to the initial out-of-roundness of the cross-section for the inner and outer surfaces:

where β1e = β1 - sinψ; γ1e = γ1 - 0.3sinψ; γ3e = -γ3 - cos2ψ.

Determination of β1, γ1 for inner and outer surfaces – see item 2.8.1.3, and determination of γ3 – see item 2.8.1.4.

2.8.2.3. To take into account the stresses determined according to item 2.8.2.2, they are summed with the stresses of item 2.8.1.5, and then the reduced stresses are determined at the points specified in item 2.8.1.6.

2.8.3. Features of the calculation of stresses of various categories.

2.8.3.1. In determining the stresses of categories (σ)RK and (σaF)K for low-temperature pipelines, it is assumed that φ = 1. When calculating the reduced stresses of category (σaF)K bending stresses determined according to item 2.8.1.3 are multiplied by a coefficient of 0.7. When calculating the stresses of category (σ)RK for high-temperature pipelines, the value of the coefficient φ is assumed according to Section 4.3 hereof, bending stresses of item 2.8.1.3 are multiplied by a coefficient of 0.6, and bending stresses of item 2.8.2.2 are multiplied by a coefficient χe, where χe value is assumed according to item 2.4.2.3.

2.9. CALCULATION OF STRESSES IN A TEE CONNECTION BY REFINED PROCEDURE

2.9.1. For tee connections of low-temperature pipelines formed by the intersection of two circular cylindrical shells of constant thickness (nozzles and pipes with diameters of the middle surface dm, Dm and thicknesses ss, s) whose axes intersect at a right angle, the refined calculation of the stress state is carried out for the combined effect of inner pressure and significant loads in the end sections of the tee: axial forces, bending and torque moments (Fig. P5.6, P5.7). The procedure is applicable to compounds close to those mentioned in geometrical form, covers the range of tees from thin-walled (ss/dm, s/Dm = 0.01) to thick-walled (ss/dm, s/Dm = 0.15), from equal (Dm/dm = 1) to essentially unequal (Dm/dm >> 1), from having equal walls (ss = s) to having different ones (s = 2ssDm/dm), including "equal in strength" (ss/dm = s/Dm). The actual geometry of the weld when calculating the welded tee is not taken into account (in the margin of safety).

2.9.2. The input data for the calculation of stresses in the tee are the following values (in the agreed units of measurement, Fig. P5.6, P5.7): ss is a wall thickness of the outlet (nozzle); s is a wall thickness of the pipe (body); dm is a diameter of the middle surface of the outlet (dm = 2rm = da ss); Dm is a diameter of the middle surface of the pipe (Dm = 2Rm = Da - s); p is an inner pressure; Nz3, Mx3, My3, Mz3 are loads in the cross-section of the outlet 3-3 axial force, bending moment in the plane of the tee, bending moment from the plane of the tee, torque; Nzα, Mxα Myα, Mzα are axial force, moment in the plane of the tee, moment from the plane of the tee, and torque in cross-sections of the pipe 1-1 (α = 1) and 2-2 (α = 2).

Fig. P5.6. Positive directions of force factors

Force factors Nzi, Mxi, Mii, Mzi (i = 1, 2, 3), positive directions of which are shown in Fig. P5.6, are determined for the corresponding cross-sections (Fig. P5.7) from the calculation of the pipeline system and satisfy the equilibrium conditions:

Mx1 + Mx2 + Mx3 = 0;

My1 My2 + Mz3 = 0;

Mz1 Mx2 My3 = 0.

Self-balanced loads in the end sections of the pipe (1-1 and 2-2), appearing in the formulas of item 2.9.3 of the procedure, are calculated as follows:

Nz = (Nz1 + Nz2)/2;

Mx = (Mx1 Mx2)/2;

My = (My1 + My2)/2;

Mz = (Mz1 + Mz2)/2.

Fig. P5.7. Design cross-sections of tee connection

2.9.3. Below are the formulas and nomograms for calculating the components of the stress state σψ, σz, σr and τ (their orientation is shown in Fig. P5.6) in three cross-sections of the tee, determining its strength. For equal and similar tees (Dm/dm < 1.3), the calculation is carried out using additional formulas that take into account the peculiarities of the distribution of stresses in this class of tees. To assess the strength, the greater of the obtained values of the reduced stresses are taken.

2.9.3.1. Stress state components σψ and σz for stress group (σ)2 are determined by the following formulas:

At ratio Dm/dm < 1.3, the following stresses are additionally calculated:

Radial stresses σr are assumed as

σr = -0.5p;

shear stresses τ are determined by the formula

σψp and σzp are calculated by the formula in item 2.3.1.1 (Da = D + s); As and As3 are cross-sectional areas of the pipe and nozzle; W and W3 are corresponding moments of resistance. Local stress coefficients γψ(i) and γz(i) (i = 1, 2, ..., 8) are determined according to item 2.9.3.4, force factors in the pipe Nz, Mx, My, Mz are determined by the formulas in item 2.9.2 from mass and other mechanical loads.

2.9.3.2. Components of the stress group (σ)RK are calculated using the following formulas (from pressure, mechanical and temperature effects):

At Dm/dm < 1.3, stresses are additionally determined:

Radial stresses σr = 0; torsion stress is determined by the formula

Coefficients of local stresses γψ(i), γz(i), γψz(i) (i = 1, 2, ..., 8) are found according to item 2.9.3.4, coefficient ασ is calculated by the formula in item 2.3.2.3:

σψp is calculated by the formula in item 2.3.2.1.

Parameter

The meaning of other values is explained in item 2.9.3.1.

2.9.3.3. Components of the reduced stresses (amplitude values) are determined by the formulas (from pressure, mechanical and temperature effects)

At Dm/dm < 1.3, the following stresses are additionally calculated:

The values in the formulas have the same meaning as in item 2.9.3.2, the torsion stresses τ are reduced by 2 times, σr = 0.

2.9.3.4. Coefficients of local stresses γψ(i), γz(i), γψz(i) (i =p, 1, 4, 5, 7) are determined by the formula

γ(i)(ss/dm, s/Dm, Dm/dm) = K(i)(ssDm/sdmi(ss/dm, Dm/dm),

coefficients K(i), γiψ, γiz, γiψz, γ(j)ψ, γ(j)z and γ(j)ψz (j = 2, 3, 6, 8) are determined by the nomograms shown in Fig. P5.8 - P5.14. For equal and similar tees (ss/dms/Dm) it shall be assumed that K(i) = 1. Coefficients γ(ss/dm, Dm/dm) for "intermediate" values of ss/dm (ss1/dm1 < ss/dm < ss2 /dm2) are determined by linear interpolation by coefficients γ1 (ss1/dm1, Dm/dm) and γ2 (ss2/dm2, Dm/dm):

Fig. P5.8. Nomograms to determine the coefficients γ(p) and K(p)

Fig. P5.9. Nomograms to determine the coefficients γ(1), γ(5), K(1), K(4), K(5) and K(7)

Fig. P5.10. Nomograms to determine the coefficients γ(2) and γ(3)

Fig. P5.11. Nomograms to determine the coefficient γ(4)

Fig. P5.12. Nomograms to determine the coefficient γ(6)

The following conditions shall be met for all tees

For essentially unequal tees (Dm/dm ≥ 8), it is allowed to assume that γψб) = γz(6) = 0 at any ratios of s/Dm and ss/dm;

Fig. P5.13. Nomograms to determine the coefficient γ(7)

Fig. P5.14. Nomograms to determine the coefficient γ(8)

γψ(1) = γψ(4) = γψ(5) = vγz(1);

γψ(2) = γψ(3) = γz(2) = γz(3) = 3;

γψ(7) = γz(7) = 0, γψz(7) = 1;

γψ(8) = -γz(8) = 2, γψz(7) = 0

at s/Dm > 2ss/dm (v is a Poisson ratio).

2.10. SPECIAL CALCULATIONS OF PIPELINES

2.10.1. For the abnormal operation mode, the requirements of items 2.3.1 and 2.3.4 shall be met, provided that the maximum pressure for the considered mode is entered into the calculation, and the permissible stress is taken according to item 5.4 hereof.

2.10.2. When considering the load cases, including the action of seismic loads, the calculation of stresses is carried out according to the formulas in items 2.3.1 and 2.3.4. Permissible stresses are assumed in accordance with item 5.11 hereof.

2.10.3. A pipeline strength verification is required for stress category (σ)2 for hydrotest conditions. The calculation is performed on the combined effect of pressure and mass load. The strength condition is assumed according to item 5.4 hereof.

3. DETACHABLE CONNECTIONS OF VESSELS

3.1. CONVENTION SYMBOLS

Fob is a force required for gasket compression, N (kgf)

Fpr.p is a gasket force ensuring tightness in service conditions, N (kgf)

Fp is a hydrostatic force in operating modes, N (kgf)

Fpr is a hydrostatic force during hydrotest, N (kgf)

p is a design pressure, Pa (kgf/mm2)

ph is a hydrotest pressure, Pa (kgf/mm2)

F0w is a force of initial tightening of pins, N (kgf)

Fw is a pin force, N (kgf)

Fpr is an axial force on the gasket, N (kgf)

Qpr is a radial force on a wedge piece, N (kgf)

FT is a pin force caused by temperature differences, N (kgf)

χ is a load coefficient

λpr is a gasket compliance coefficient, mm/N (mm/kgf)

λr is a barrel jacket compliance coefficient, mm/N (mm/kgf)

λw is a pin compliance coefficient, mm/N (mm/kgf)

λb is a bush (washer) compliance coefficient, mm/N (mm/kgf)

Er is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity of the material of a jacket, Pa (kgf/mm2)

Ew is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity of the material of a pin, Pa (kgf/mm)

Epr is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity of the material of a gasket, Pa (kgf/mm2)

Fpr.h is a gasket force ensuring tightness during hydrotest, N (kgf)

λf is a pressure flange compliance coefficient, mm/N (mm/kgf)

Ef is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity of the material of a pressure flange, Pa (kgf/mm2)

Eb is a modulus of longitudinal elasticity of the material of a bush (washer), Pa (kgf/mm2)

hpr is a design height of a gasket, mm

hb is a height of a bush (washer), mm

Ab is a cross-sectional area of a bush (washer), mm2

Δl1 is a total vertical temperature expansion of the body and pin on the segment between the support clamp of the body and the bottom end of the nut, mm

Δl2 is a total vertical temperature expansion of the lid, gasket, pressure flange, bush and clamp (for the case the clamp is on the anti-corrosion jacket) on the segment between the support clamp of the body and the bottom end of the nut, mm

Dpr is a mean diameter of gasket, mm

z is a number of pins;

b1 is a design width of gasket, mm

b0 is a conditional width of gasket, mm

b is an effective width of gasket, mm

h1 is a height of a wedge piece, mm

b2 is a width of a cone of a wedge piece, mm

b'1 is a total width of grooves on a gasket or contacting surface along the width b1, mm

b'2 is a total width of grooves on a cone of a wedge piece, mm

h'1 is a total width of grooves on a cylindrical surface of a wedge piece, mm

α is an angle of a cone of a wedge piece, deg

m is a gasket coefficient

q0 is a specific pressure on the gasket during compression, Pa (kgf/mm2)

l is a free length of a pin – pin rod length between the bottom end of the nut and the upper end of the body, mm

dw is a pin rod diameter, mm

d0 is an outer diameter of a pin thread, mm

d1 is an inner diameter of a pin thread, mm

Aw is a pin rod cross-sectional area, mm2

W is a pin rod cross-section resistance moment when bending, mm3

Wk is a pin rod cross-section resistance moment when torsion, mm3

J is a pin rod cross-section inertia moment when bending, mm

Mk is a torque affecting a pin, N · mm (kgf · mm)

M1, M2 is a pin bending moments, N · mm (kgf · mm)

w1 is a radial displacement of the flange end of a body, mm

w2 is a radial displacement of the lower end of a nut, mm

θ1 is an angular displacement of the flange end of a body, rad

θ2 is an angular displacement of the lower end of a nut, rad

σmw is a tension stress in pins, Pa (kgf/mm2)

σbw is a bending stress in pins, Pa (kgf/mm2)

τsw is a torsion stress in pins, Pa (kgf/mm2)

h' is a height of the operating part of a thread (threaded connection), mm

Jf is a pressure flange cross-section inertia moment relative to the horizontal axis passing through the center of gravity, mm4

R is a radius of the center of mass of a pressure flange cross-section, mm

Fig. P5.15. Standard designs of flange connections:

a – with a flat gasket; b – with a wedge piece; c – with a flexible sealing component:

1 – body flange; 2 – pin; 3 – bush (washer); 4 – gasket; 5 – lid; 6 – body flange; 7 – flexible sealing component

3.2. GENERAL

3.2.1. The procedure applies to detachable connections of vessels and devices operating under inner pressure at temperatures below Tt.

Standard designs of connection are shown in Fig. P5.15.

3.3. CALCULATION OF DETACHABLE CONNECTION

Calculate the efforts of the initial tightening of pins, the efforts in pins and on gasket under operating conditions, as well as the stresses in pins.

3.4. CALCULATION OF LOAD COEFFICIENT

3.4.1. The load coefficient takes into account the effect of internal pressure on the forces in pins and on gasket of a pre-tightened connection.

Coefficient: of load shall be determined by the formula

3.4.2. The coefficient of compliance of gasket λpr for the case when the gasket is installed between the lid and supporting clamp of the body is calculated by the formula

where Apr = pDprb is a cross-sectional area of the gasket.

Fig. P5.16. Body flange with anti-corrosion jacket

рубашка корпуса

body jacket

 

For a wedge seal and gasketless connection with a flexible sealing component, it is assumed that λpr = 0.

3.4.3. Coefficient of compliance of body clamp λr with anti-corrosion jacket (Fig. P5.16) is calculated by the formula

where h1, h2 is a component jacket height; A1, A2 is a cross-sectional area of a jacket component. If the clamp is on the body having no jacket, then it is assumed that λr = 0.

3.4.4. Coefficient of compliance of pin λw, taking into account the compliance of the pin rod and threaded connection pin-body and pin-nut, is calculated by the formula

3.4.5. The coefficient of compliance of bush (washer) is calculated by the formula

3.4.6. The coefficient of compliance of pressure flange

where a is a size shown in Fig. P5.16.

3.5. CALCULATION OF FORCES IN PINS CAUSED BY TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCES

Forces in pins caused by temperature differences in the parts of connection or by difference in the linear expansion coefficients of the materials of the parts of connection are determined by the formula

An example of dividing a connection into sections for calculating temperature expansions is shown in Fig. P5.16.

For this example Δl1 = α1l1T1 + α2l2T2, Δl2 = α3l3T3 + α4l4T4 + α5l5T5 + α6l6T6 + α7l7T7, where α1, li, Ti – coefficient of linear expansion of the material, length of sections, and mean temperature in the section.

Coefficients of compliance λw, λb, λpr, λr and λf are calculated in accordance with items 3.4.2 - 3.4.6.

3.6. CALCULATION OF FORCES OF INITIAL TIGHTENING OF PINS

3.6.1. The initial tightness of connection is carried out to eliminate the leakiness of the gasket against the contacting surfaces and to create conditions ensuring resistance of the joint and tightness of the connection during hydrotests or action of the operating pressure and temperature differences.

3.6.2. The force required to compress the gasket,

F0b = pDprbq0.

3.6.3. Force on the gasket (except self-sealing wedge one), ensuring tightness at operating pressure and hydrotest,

Fpr.p = pDprbmp;

Fpr.h = pDprbmhh.

For self-sealing wedge piece

Fpr.p = Fpr.h = 0.

3.6.4. The values of b, m, q0 are selected from Table P5.6.

Table P5.6. Values of b, m and q0 for different types of gaskets

Type of gasket

Design of gasket

Material

Effective width b, mm

Liquid media

Air, steam, steam and water mixture

Highly penetrating gases (hydrogen, helium, etc.)

m

q0, MPa

m

q0, MPa

m

q0, MPa

Soft

Flat

Solid rubber

b0

1.2

5

2.2

9

3.0

13

Fluoropolymer

1.4

10

2.5

18

3.1

26

Paronite

b0 at b0 ≤ 10

 at b0 > 10

1.6

2.9

4

Combined

Spiral

Pearlite steel

 

1.5

27

2.5

50

4

70

Corrugated ribbon

Aluminum, its alloys

 

1.75

20

3.0

30

4.25

42

Copper, its alloys

b0

1.9

20

3.25

35

4.5

50

Pearlite steel

 

2.0

22

3.5

40

5

55

With an outer metal shell

Aluminum, its alloys

 

1.9

27

3.25

50

4.5

70

Copper, its alloys

 

2.0

32

3.5

60

5

80

Pearlite steel

 

2.25

38

3.75

70

5.5

100

Metal

Shaped (circle, oval, octangle)

Copper, its alloys; nickel, its alloys

0.6b0

2.5

2.4Rр0.2

4.5

3Rp0.2

6

4Rр0.2

Pearlite steel

3.0

5.0

7

Austenitic steel

3.5

6.0

8

Flat

Wedge

Aluminum, its alloys

b0 at b0 ≤ 10

2.0

3.5

5

Copper, its alloys; nickel, its alloys

 at b0 > 10

2.5

4.5

6

Pearlite steel

 

3.0

5.0

7

Austenitic steel

 

3.5

6.0

8

 

Toothed, with number of teeth of zn

Copper, its alloys; nickel, its alloys

 

1.8

2.4Rр0.2

3.3

3Rp0.2

4.6

4Rр0.2

Pearlite steel

2.25

3.75

5.5

Austenitic steel

2.5

4.25

6

Note. For wedge piece b0 = max{b2 sinα; h1 tgα} in the presence of grooves on the gasket or on contacting surfaces instead of values of h1, b1, b2, the following is used h1 h'1, b1 b'1, b2 b'2, when determining q0, it is assumed that δ = b0.

3.6.5. Hydrostatic forces from operating pressure and hydrotest pressure

Fp = 0.785D2prp;

Fph = 0.785D2prph.

3.6.6. Force of initial tightening of pins shall be selected from the conditions

F0wFob,

F0wFpr.h + (1 – χ)Fph.

3.6.7. To maintain tightness, the following condition shall be maintained

F0wFpr.p + (1 – χ)FpFT.

If this condition is not satisfied, then you shall make structural changes to the connection or change the temperature operation modes of the connection.

If necessary, it is allowed to increase initial tightening force in accordance with the above condition.


 

3.7. CALCULATION OF GASKET FORCES

3.7.1. Gasket force when tightening

Fpr = F0w.

3.7.2. Gasket force during hydrotest:

Fpr = F0w + χFph – for wedge piece;

Fpr = F0w - (1 - χ)Fph – for other types of gaskets.

3.7.3. Gasket force in service conditions:

Fpr = F0w + χFp +FT – for wedge piece;

Fpr = F0w - (1 - χ)Fp + FT – for other types of gaskets.

3.7.4. For the wedge piece, in addition to axial forces, radial forces are determined:

radial force during initial tightening

Qpr = F0w/tg α;;

radial force during hydrotest

Qpr = [F0w + χFph]/tg α;

radial force in service conditions

Qpr = (F0w + χFp + FT)/tg α.

3.7.5. Flat gaskets and wedge pieces are checked for the specific pressure on the contact surfaces during tightening, hydrotest and operating modes.

Specific pressure on flat gasket

Specific pressure on wedge piece

 – for a flat contact surface;

 – for a cone contact surface;

 – for a cylindrical contact surface.

The following two conditions shall be met:

1) qqminK, where qmin is a minimum permissible specific pressure on the gasket from the condition of tightness of the detachable connection; K is a coefficient depending on the penetrating ability of the sealed medium;

2) qqmax, where qmax is a maximum permissible specific pressure on the gasket from the condition of its working capacity (Table P5.7).

The following values of coefficient K are recommended:

K = 1 – for liquid medium;

K = 1.8 – for extremely penetrating air; (hydrogen, helium, etc.).

Table P5.7. Values of qmin and qmax

Gasket material

qmin, MPa

qmax, MPa

Solid rubber

3.5

20.0

Fluoropolymer

4.0

40.0

Paronite

10.0

110.0

Aluminum and its alloys

50.0

140.0

Copper and its alloys

70.0

200.0

Pearlite steel

80.0

350.0

Austenitic steel

100.0

600.0

For a wedge piece, the specific pressure for a flat contact surface is checked only by condition 2.

If the verification on the specific pressure on the contact surfaces gives negative results, you shall perform structural changes to the connection or change the temperature conditions of the connection. If necessary, it is allowed to increase the force of initial tightness F0w.

After performing at least one of these measures, the calculation shall  be repeated.

3.8. CALCULATION OF FORCES IN PINS

3.8.1. Pin force when tightening

Fw = F0w.

3.8.2. Pin force during hydrotest

Fw = F0w + χFph.

3.8.3. Pin force in service conditions

Fw = F0w + χFp + FT.

3.9. CALCULATION OF STRESSES IN PINS

3.9.1. Calculation of pin rod

3.9.1.1. Torque affecting the pin when tightening the nuts with a wrench,

Mk = zFowd0/z,

where z is selected according to Table P5.8.

Tong torque when tightening the nuts

Mtg = z1F0wd0/z,

where z1 is selected according to Table P5.8.

Table P5.8. Values of coefficients z and z1

Grease

z

z1

Yes

0.13

0.26

None

0.18

0.37

When tightening pins with pre-heating or pre-stretching Mk = 0.

3.9.1.2. Bending moments in pin are calculated by the formulas

where J = 0.049d4pin;

K1 = K2 = K3 = 1 for

   for 1 ≤ γ ≤ 6;

   for γ > 6.

W1, W2, ,  are determined from the condition of compatibility of the connection deformation.

Positive directions of displacements and angles of rotation adopted in the formulas are shown in Fig. P5.17.

3.9.1.3. Tension stress

where Aw = 0.785d12.

3.9.1.4. Torsion stress

where Wk = 0.196d13.

3.9.1.5. Bending stress

where W = 0.1d13.

Fig. P5.17. Positive directions of displacements and joints of rotation of pin

3.9.2. Calculation of pin thread

3.9.2.1. Thread cut tension

where K1 is a thread completeness coefficient; K1 = 0.87 – for metric thread (nut); K1 = 0.75 – for metric thread (bolts, pins); K1 = 0.4 – for rectangular thread; K1 = 0.65 – for trapezoidal thread; Km is a coefficient taking into account change in the deformation of coils along the height of the nut (Table P5.9).


 

Table P5.9. Value of coefficient Km

Rmb/Rmn

Thread pitch

Km

Over 1.3

Large and first small

Second and smaller

0.7 - 0.75

0.65 - 0.7

Less than 1.3

For all pitches

0.55 - 0.6

Note. Rmb, Rmn are the strength limits of bolt and nut.


 

APPENDIX 6

CHARACTERISTICS OF LONG-TERM STRENGTH, DUCTILITY AND CREEP OF STRUCTURAL MATERIALS

1. BASIC CONCEPTS AND SYMBOLS

σ is a stress, MPa (kgf/mm2)

RTmt is a specific limit of long-term durability over time t at temperature T, MPa (kgf/mm2)

 is a conditional creep limit at temperature T for time TAz of achievement of a given deformation Az, MPa (kgf/mm2)

T is a temperature, K (°C)

tT is a current test time, h

tc is time to fracture, h

tT, tT1 is a current test time at temperatures T, T1, h

t is time to reach the specified residual elongation Az, h

tTz is a given operation life at temperature Tj, h

e – deformation, %

 is a creep rate, %/h

A is a relative tension elongation, %

AtT is a conditional limit of residual elongation at rupture at temperature Tj, %

Az is a specified residual elongation, %

Z is a relative contraction of the sample cross-sectional area at rupture, %

ZtT is a conditional limit of long-term static contraction at temperature T over time t, %

are heat resistance characteristics at temperature T, for a given level of probability of destruction Р and operation life tz, MPa (kgf/mm2), %

γl-t.s is an extrapolation coefficient of long-term strength

γc is an extrapolation coefficient of creep

 

is a standard deviations of heat resistance characteristics

nT is a number of experiments at temperature T

P is a probability of destruction

M is a number of batches

2. GENERAL

2.1. This Appendix to the rules of equipment and pipelines strength calculation of nuclear power plants contains the methods for obtaining the heat resistance characteristics of structural materials. A temperature range of 573–923 K (300– 650 °C) is considered, at which creep and long-term strength appear in the metal.

2.2. To determine the heat resistance characteristics with probability of P = 0.5 and P = 0.01 (conditional strength limit, conditional creep limit, conditional limits of relative lengthening and contraction) it is allowed to use parametric methods in accordance with OST 108.901.102-78 (Section 5).

2.3. The number of samples when testing one batch is distributed evenly over the stresses corresponding to the durability from 102 to 104 h and more, so that for every order in time the number of stress levels was at least two.

Minimum number of tested samples shall be 12.

2.4. It each mode, at least two samples are tested. If the times to failure of samples tested in the same mode differ by more than 2 times, then additional tests are carried out on two samples.

When processing the test results, all the results obtained in the main and additional tests are considered.

2.5. Tests to obtain the conditional creep limit are carried out with the measurement of deformation according to GOST 3248-81.

2.6. Samples are tested at temperature T1 for which the heat resistance characteristics are determined, and at a higher temperature

T2 = T1 + 50 K.

2.7. The proposed method for determining the heat resistance characteristics of materials allows extrapolation by the parameter t within the same order, but up to stresses not lower than the minimum stresses obtained during long-term strength tests at temperature T2.

2.8. In order to obtain guaranteed heat resistance characteristics of steel or alloy, test results obtained for different batches representing a steel or alloy grade of a given strength category are considered legitimate. The number of tested batches of metal of various fusions shall be at least six.

The number of tested includes batches and metal of products after the final process operations with the content of carbon and alloying components and the values of short-term strength and ductility within the limits specified in the technical specifications (TU).

2.9. In the absence of direct tests to determine the heat resistance characteristics of steel or alloy of strength category given below in Table P1.4 hereof, their limits of long-term strength are determined by the values of the limits of long-term strength of grade of steel or alloy of strength category specified in Table P1.4 hereof, and their temporary resistance and yield limits. The desired value is assumed as the minimum of two (quantities) defined by the formulas

where index 1 is the strength category given in Table P1.4 hereof (strength category 1); index 2 is a strength category for which heat resistance characteristics are calculated (strength category 2); (RTmt)1, (RTmt)2, (RTp0.2)1, (RTp0.2)2, (RTm)1, (RTm)2 are, respectively, the limits of long-term strength, yield and temporary resistance of metal of strength categories 1 and 2. Values of the required characteristics are selected according to Tables P1.1 and P1.4 hereof.

In the same way, the value of long-term ductility (relative elongation AtT and contraction ZtT) of a metal of strength category 2 is allowed to be determined from known values of the limits of relative elongation (contraction) of a metal under strength category 1, temporary resistance and yield limit of metal of strength categories 1 and 2. The desired value is assumed as the minimum of two characteristics defined by the formulas:

for ZtT

 

for AtT

 

where (ZtT)1, (ZtT)2, (AtT)1, (AtT)2 are, respectively, the limits of long-term relative contraction and elongation of metal of strength categories 1 and 2.

Values of (AtT)1 and (ZtT)1 are taken according to Table P6.3. For metal of strength category given above in Table P1.4 hereof, the values of RTmt, ZtT and AtT are selected in accordance with those in Table P1.1 hereof and Table P6.3.

2.10. This Appendix provides:

tables of mean values of limits of long-term strength over a period of time from 10 to 2 · 105 h (Table P6.1, P6.2);

curves of long-term strength (at the minimum values of Fig. P6.1 - P6.17);

tables of mean values of limits of long-term ductility on the basis of 2 · 105 h (Table P6.3, P6.4);

isochronous deformation (creep) curves plotted at a given temperature by the time parameter in the coordinates σ - e by mean values (Fig. P6.18 - P6.29);

extrapolation methods for long times of characteristics of long-term strength, ductility and creep.

Heat resistance characteristics are used:


Table P6.1. Mean values of conditional limits of long-term strength RTmt, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Steel, alloy grade

R20p0.2, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Rm20, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Temperature, K (°C)

Time, h

10

30

102

3 · 102

103

3 · 103

104

3 · 104

105

2 · 105

15KhM

≥ 235

≥ 441

773

412

402

372

348

314

260

217

183

142

120

 

(24)

(45)

(500)

(42)

(41)

(38)

(35.5)

(32)

(26.5)

(22.1)

(18.7)

(14.5)

(12.2)

12MKh

≥ 225

≥ 411

773

368

368

353

328

299

274

207

174

135

114

 

(23)

(42)

(500)

(37)

(37)

(36)

(33.5)

(30.5)

(28)

(21.1)

(17.8)

(13.8)

(11.6)

10Kh2M

≥ 245

≥ 392

723

372

353

333

314

294

274

255

225

196

186

(48TN-1)

(25)

(40)

(450)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(30)

(28)

(26)

(23)

(20)

(19)

 

 

 

773

353

313

284

255

216

186

157

137

118

108

 

 

 

(500)

(36)

(32)

(29)

(26)

(22)

(19)

(16)

(14)

(12)

(11)

 

 

 

783

319

289

261

234

201

172

145

126

108

99

 

 

 

(510)

(32.5)

(29.5)

(26.6)

(23.9)

(20.5)

(17.5)

(14.8)

(12.9)

(11)

(10.1)

12Kh2M

≥ 343

≥ 539

773

451

431

412

353

294

265

216

177

147

132

 

(35)

(55)

(500)

(46)

(44)

(42)

(36)

(30)

(27)

(22)

(18)

(15)

(13.5)

 

≥ 255

≥ 451

773

392

372

343

294

255

216

177

147

118

105

 

(25)

(46)

(500)

(40)

(38)

(35)

(30)

(26)

(22)

(18)

(15)

(12)

(10.7)

10Kh2M1FB

≥ 196

≥ 343

673

333

319

304

297

284

268

235

212

186

167

(48TN-2)

(20)

(35)

(400)

(34)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(27)

(24)

(22)

(19)

(17)

 

 

 

723

333

314

299

294

269

250

225

201

176

167

 

 

 

(450)

(34)

(32)

(30.5)

(30)

(27.5)

(25.5)

(23)

(20.5)

(18)

(17)

 

 

 

773

250

230

201

181

162

147

132

122

108

98

 

 

 

(500)

(25.5)

(23.5)

(20.5)

(18.5)

(16.5)

(15)

(13.5)

(12.5)

(11)

(10)

 

 

 

823

216

196

167

147

127

113

98

83

78

70

 

 

 

(550)

(22)

(20)

(17)

(15)

(13)

(11.5)

(10)

(8.5)

(8)

(7.2)

12Kh1MF

≥ 274

≥ 441

723

353

343

323

303

289

268

245

227

196

186

 

(28)

(45)

(450)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(31)

(29.5)

(27.5)

(25)

(23.5)

(20)

(19)

 

 

 

773

353

343

323

304

279

260

216

186

147

137

 

 

 

(500)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(31)

(28.5)

(26.5)

(22)

(19)

(15)

(14)

12Kh18N10T

≥ 216

≥ 529

673

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

12Kh18N12T

(22)

(54)

(400)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

 

 

 

723

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

372

333

314

 

 

 

(450)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(34)

(32)

 

 

 

773

372

352

333

323

314

284

255

225

196

186

 

 

 

(500)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(29)

(26)

(23)

(20)

(19)

 

 

 

823

353

333

314

294

265

235

201

171

149

137

 

 

 

(550)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(30)

(27)

(24)

(20.5)

(17.5)

(15.2)

(14)

 

 

 

873

314

284

255

240

216

186

157

127

108

97

 

 

 

(600)

(32)

(29)

(26)

(24.5)

(22)

(19)

(16)

(13)

(11)

(9.9)

08Kh16N11M3

≥ 196

≥ 510

673

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

392

(20)

(52)

(400)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

(40)

 

 

 

723

372

372

372

372

372

353

343

314

294

284

 

 

 

(450)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(32)

(30)

(29)

 

 

 

773

372

372

372

343

323

304

284

245

220

196

 

 

 

(500)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(35)

(33)

(31)

(29)

(25)

(22.5)

(20)

 

 

 

823

332

304

274

260

245

230

216

191

167

157

 

 

 

(550)

(34)

(31)

(28)

(26.5)

(25)

(23.5)

(22)

(19.5)

(17)

(16)

 

 

 

873

265

240

216

196

167

157

137

110

108

96

 

 

 

(600)

(27)

(24.5)

(22)

(20)

(17)

(16)

(14)

(12)

(11)

(10)

15Kh1M1F

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

363

343

333

314

288

270

240

225

196

184

 

(32)

(50)

(500)

(37)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(29.4)

(27.5)

(24.5)

(23)

(20.1)

(18.8)

12Kh18N9

196

>490

673

373

373

373

373

373

373

373

373

373

373

 

(20)

(50)

(400)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

 

 

 

723

373

373

373

373

373

373

373

323

303

274

 

 

 

(450)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(38)

(33)

(31)

(28)

 

 

 

773

373

353

343

323

294

265

245

216

196

186

 

 

 

(500)

(38)

(36)

(35)

(33)

(30)

(27)

(25)

(22)

(20)

(19)

 

 

 

823

333

323

298

284

245

206

176

157

137

127

 

 

 

(550)

(34)

(33)

(30.5)

(29)

(25)

(21)

(18)

(16)

(14)

(13)

 

 

 

873

274

265

240

201

172

157

123

108

88

78

 

 

 

(600)

(28)

(27)

(24.5)

(20.5)

(17.5)

(16)

(12.5)

(11)

(9)

(8)

10Kh17N13M2T

≥ 196

≥ 510

773

304

284

265

250

235

216

201

176

157

147

(20)

(52)

(500)

(31)

(29)

(27)

(25.5)

(24)

(22)

(20.5)

(18)

(16)

(15)

 

 

 

823

255

235

216

196

176

162

147

129

118

108

 

 

 

(550)

(26)

(24)

(22)

(20)

(18)

(16.5)

(15)

(13.2)

(12)

(11)

 

 

 

873

221

203

186

167

152

132

113

98

83

77

 

 

 

(600)

(22.5)

(20.7)

(19)

(17)

(15.5)

(13.5)

(11.5)

(10)

(8.5)

(7.9)

KhN35VT

≥ 392

≥ 736

673

645

645

645

645

645

645

645

645

627

588

 

(40)

(75)

(400)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(66)

(64)

(60)

 

 

 

723

637

637

637

637

637

637

625

568

549

530

 

 

 

(450)

(65)

(65)

(65)

(65)

(65)

(65)

(62.5)

(58)

(56)

(54)

 

 

 

773

637

588

549

529

500

480

451

412

343

323

 

 

 

(500)

(65)

(60)

(56)

(54)

(51)

(49)

(46)

(42)

(35)

(33)

 

 

 

823

539

529

490

470

441

417

372

333

304

284

 

 

 

(550)

(55)

(54)

(50)

(48)

(45)

(42)

(38)

(34)

(31)

(29)

 

 

 

873

431

412

392

363

343

314

294

250

216

196

 

 

 

(600)

(44)

(42)

(40)

(37)

(35)

(32)

(30)

(25.5)

(22)

(20)

1Kh16N36MBTYUR

≥ 392

≥ 785

773

884

850

824

808

794

768

612

579

519

500

(40)

(80)

(500)

(90.2)

(86.8)

(84)

(82.4)

(81)

(78.3)

(62.5)

(59)

(53)

(51)

12Kh18N12M3TL

≥ 216

≥ 491

773

284

280

274

270

267

235

216

186

176

162

(22)

(50)

(500)

(29)

(28.5)

(28)

(27.5)

(27)

(24)

(22)

(19)

(18)

(16.5)

08Kh16N15M3B

≥ 245

≥ 540

823

472

449

431

412

372

-

-

-

-

-

(25)

(55)

(550)

(48.1)

(45.8)

(43.9)

(42.0)

(38)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

837

432

392

355

328

294

-

-

-

-

-

 

 

 

(600)

(44)

(40)

(36.2)

(33.2)

(30)

 

 

 

 

 

25Kh1MF

≥ 589

≥ 736

773

587

549

472

392

325

281

255

212

167

-

 

(60)

(75)

(500)

(59.8)

(56.1)

(48.1)

(40)

(33.2)

(28.7)

(26)

(21.6)

(17)

 

Zr - 2.5 % Nb

≥ 294

≥ 392

573

314

301

289

276

265

255

245

225

206

196

(30)

(40)

(300)

(32)

(30.7)

(29.5)

(28.2)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(23)

(21)

(20)

 

 

 

598

304

294

284

265

245

228

212

196

181

172

 

 

 

(325)

(31)

(30)

(29)

(27)

(25)

(23.3)

(21.6)

(20)

(18.5)

(17.5)

 

 

 

623

284

267

250

232

216

198

181

164

147

137

 

 

 

(350)

(29)

(27.2)

(25.5)

(23.7)

(22.0)

(20.2)

(18.5)

(16.7)

(15)

(14)

20KhML

≥ 245

≥ 441

773

412

402

372

348

314

289

217

183

142

120

 

(25)

(45)

(500)

(42)

(41)

(38)

(35.5)

(32)

(29.5)

(22.1)

(18.7)

(14.5)

(12.2)

20KhMFL

≥ 294

≥ 490

773

441

412

382

348

304

265

225

196

161

144

 

(30)

(50)

(500)

(45)

(42)

(39)

(35.5)

(31)

(27)

(23)

(20)

(16.4)

(14.7)

15Kh1M1FL

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

363

343

333

314

288

270

240

225

196

184

 

(32)

(50)

(500)

(37)

(35)

(34)

(32)

(29.4)

(27.5)

(24.5)

(23)

(20)

(18.8)

04Kh18N10

≥ 157

≥ 441

773

304

284

265

250

235

216

201

176

157

147

03Kh18N11

(16)

(45)

(500)

(31)

(29)

(27)

(25.5)

(24)

(22)

(20.5)

(18)

(16)

(15)

 

≥ 196

≥ 510

823

255

235

216

196

176

162

147

129

118

108

 

(20)

(50)

(550)

(26)

(24)

(22)

(20)

(18)

(16.5)

(15)

(13.2)

(12)

(11)

OKh20N46B

≥ 196

≥ 520

823

353

333

314

294

265

235

201

171

149

137

 

(20)

(53)

(550)

(36)

(34)

(32)

(30)

(27)

(24)

(20.5)

(17.5)

(15.2)

(14)

09Г2С

≥ 245

≥ 432

673

416

392

363

347

317

287

254

223

191

173

 

(25)

(44)

(400)

(42.4)

(40)

(37)

(35.4)

(32.3)

(29.3)

(26)

(22.8)

(19.5)

(17.7)

 

 

 

723

319

290

259

229

198

171

143

120

97

85

 

 

 

(450)

(32.6)

(29.6)

(26.4)

(23.4)

(20.2)

(17.4)

(14.6)

(12.2)

(9.9)

(8.7)

 

 

 

773

219

192

164

139

116

96

77

62

48

48

 

 

 

(500)

(22.3)

(19.6)

(16.7)

(14.2)

(11.8)

(9.8)

(7.8)

(6.3)

(4.9)

(4.9)

10Kh12V2MF

≥ 392

≥ 588

773

350

322

300

272

250

230

215

195

175

167

(40)

(60)

(500)

(35.7)

(32.9)

(30.6)

(27.8)

(25.5)

(23.5)

(21.9)

(19.9)

(17.9)

(17)

 

 

 

823

275

251

230

210

190

172

157

142

129

120

 

 

 

(550)

(28.1)

(25.6)

(23.5)

(21.4)

(19.4)

(17.6)

(16)

(14.5)

(13.2)

(12.2)

08Kh18N9

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

361

342

333

314

285

256

238

209

190

180

 

(20)

(50)

(500)

(36.8)

(34.9)

(34)

(32)

(29.1)

(26.1)

(24.3)

(21.3)

(19.4)

(18.4)

 

 

 

823

323

313

290

275

237

200

171

152

133

123

 

 

 

(550)

(33)

(31.9)

(29.6)

(28.1)

(24.2)

(20.4)

(17.4)

(15.5)

(13.6)

(12.6)

 

 

 

873

266

257

232

195

166

152

119

100

85

76

 

 

 

(600)

(27.1)

(26.2)

(23.7)

(19.9)

(16.9)

(15.5)

(12.1)

(10.2)

(8.67)

(7.76)

16GNMA

≥ 323

≥ 490

673

490

490

490

478

470

442

420

380

350

320

 

(33)

(50)

(400)

(50)

(50)

(50)

(48.7)

(48)

(45.1)

(42.9)

(38.8)

(35.7)

(32.7)

 

 

 

723

437

433

428

419

406

379

339

295

242

212

 

 

 

(450)

(44.6)

(44.2)

(43.7)

(42.7)

(41.1)

(38.7)

(34.6)

(30.1)

(24.7)

(21.6)

 

 

 

773

401

383

353

316

273

229

181

139

100

80

 

 

 

(500)

(40.9)

(39.1)

(36)

(32.2)

(27.9)

(23.4)

(18.5)

(14.2)

(10.2)

(8.16)

08Kh18N10T

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

374

353

333

323

309

284

255

243

201

186

 

(20)

(50)

(500)

(38)

(36)

(34)

(33)

(32)

(29)

(26)

(25)

(21)

(19)

 

 

 

823

324

304

294

266

245

208

178

144

120

108

 

 

 

(550)

(33)

(31)

(30)

(27)

(25)

(21)

(18)

(15)

(12)

(11)

 

 

 

873

276

255

226

201

167

142

117

98

93

83

 

 

 

(600)

(28)

(26)

(23)

(21)

(17)

(14)

(12)

(10)

(9)

(8)

 


 

Table P6.2. Mean values of conditional limits of long-term strength of weld materials RTmt, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Steel, alloy grade

Temperature, K (°C)

Time, h

10

30

102

3 · 102

103

3 · 103

104

3 · 104

105

2 · 105

Electrode for manual arc welding 48 A-1

673

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

(400)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

723

323

323

323

323

323

323

323

309

294

274

 

(450)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(31.5)

(30)

(28)

 

773

294

291

289

286

284

274

265

232

200

171

 

(500)

(30)

(29.7)

(29.5)

(29.2)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(23.7)

(20.5)

(17.5)

 

803

274

271

270

257

245

232

220

198

176

157

 

(530)

(28)

(27.7)

(27.5)

(26.2)

(25)

(23.7)

(22.5)

(20.2)

(18)

(16)

 

873

274

250

225

198

171

152

132

120

108

98

 

(600)

(28)

(25.5)

(23)

(20.2)

(17.5)

(15.5)

(13.5)

(12.2)

(11)

(10)

 

923

216

188

161

144

127

110

93

80

69

59

 

(650)

(22)

(19.2)

(16.5)

(14.7)

(13)

(11.2)

(9.5)

(8.2)

(7)

(6)

48A-2

673

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

343

 

(400)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

(35)

 

723

323

323

323

323

323

323

323

309

294

274

 

(450)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(33)

(31.5)

(30)

(28)

 

773

294

291

289

286

284

274

265

232

200

180

 

(500)

(30)

(29.7)

(29.5)

(29.2)

(29)

(28)

(27)

(23.7)

(20.5)

(18)

 

803

274

270

265

255

245

235

225

200

176

157

 

(530)

(28)

(27.5)

(27)

(26)

(25)

(24)

(23)

(20.5)

(18)

(16)

 

873

225

215

206

183

162

139

118

103

88

78

 

(600)

(23)

(22)

(21)

(18.7)

(16.5)

(14.2)

(12)

(10.5)

(9)

(8)

 


 

Table P6.3. Mean values of conditional limits of long-term ductility of materials

Steel, alloy grade

R20p0.2, MPa (kgf/mm2)

R20m, MPa (kgf/mm2)

Temperature, K (°C)

Ductility, %

Time, h

10

30

102

3 · 102

103

3 · 103

104

3 · 104

105

2 · 105

15KhM

≥ 235

≥ 441

723

AtT

30

30

30

30

30

30

29

26

22

20

 

(24)

(45)

(450)

ZtT

70

70

70

70

70

70

65

51

40

34

12MKh

≥ 235

≥ 411

773

AtT

34

34

34

31

24

18

16

18

26

36

 

(24)

(42)

(500)

ZtT

70

70

70

59

42

33

28

30

35

44

12Kh2M

≥ 255

≥ 451

723

AtT

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

 

(26)

(46)

(450)

ZtT

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

 

 

 

773

AtT

22

23

25

25

25

25

23

19

16

14

 

 

 

(500)

ZtT

70

70

70

70

70

69

62

58

50

45

12Kh1MF

≥ 274

≥ 441

773

AtT

30

30

30

30

30

29

25

20

14

11

 

(28)

(45)

(500)

ZtT

80

80

80

80

80

72

60

50

40

33

15Kh1M1F

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

AtT

20

21

23

25

26

25

20

15.5

11

8.5

(32)

(50)

(500)

ZtT

82

85

85

85

80

73

60

49

36,

29

12Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N12T, 08Kh18N10T

≥ 216

≥ 529

823

AtT

22

17

14

12

10.5

9

8

7.5

7

6.5

(22)

(54)

(550)

ZtT

34

29

24

21

18

16

14

14

14

14

 

 

873

AtT

16

13

11

9.5

8.5

7.5

6.5

6.5

7

6.5

 

 

(600)

ZtT

40

32

26

21

17

17

17

18

20

21

20KhML

≥ 245

≥ 441

773

AtT

30

27

20

11

7

6

6.5

9

18

24

 

(25)

(45)

(500)

ZtT

45

45

43

32

20

13

10

13

25

32

20KhMFL

≥ 294

≥ 490

773

AtT

25

25

25

25

25

23

17

12

8

6

 

(30)

(50)

(500)

ZtT

65

65

65

65

65

52

40

32

24

20

15Kh1M1FL

≥ 314

≥ 490

773

AtT

16

17

19

20

20

20

16

12

9

7

(32)

(50)

(500)

ZtT

60

60

60

60

60

55

40

30

22

18

05Kh12N2M-VI

≥ 372

≥ 539

723

AtT

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

(38)

(55)

(450)

ZtT

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

 

 

 

773

AtT

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

 

 

 

(500)

ZtT

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

 

 

 

823

AtT

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

55

12Kh18N9

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

AtT

28

25

21

16

15

14

12

11

9

8

 

(20)

(50)

(500)

ZtT

44

38

33

29

25

22

19

17

14

13

 

 

 

823

AtT

29

24

20

17

14

12

10

10

10

10

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

46

40

34

30

26

23

16

16

16

16

 

 

 

873

AtT

22

18

17

22

27

24

15

10

7

5

 

 

 

(600)

ZtT

40

33

31

34

42

32

23

16

11

9

KhN35VT

≥ 392

≥ 736

773

AtT

13

10

9

7

5

4.5

4

3.5

3

3

 

(40)

(75)

(500)

ZtT

18

15

13

10

7.5

7

6

5

4.5

4.5

 

 

 

823

AtT

13

10

8

6

5

4

3

3

3

3

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

18

15

12

9

7.5

6

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

 

 

 

873

AtT

15

11

9

6

5

4

4

4

4

4

 

 

 

(600)

ZtT

22

16

13

9

7

6

6

6

6

6

10Kh2M1FB

≥ 196

≥ 343

673

AtT

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

(20)

(35)

(400)

ZtT

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

 

 

 

723

AtT

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

 

 

 

(450)

ZtT

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

 

 

 

773

AtT

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

 

 

 

(500)

ZtT

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

 

 

 

823

AtT

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

68

12Kh16N11M3

≥ 196

≥ 510

823

AtT

32

32 .

32

32

32

27

27

27

27

27

(20)

(52)

(550)

ZtT

35

35

35

35

34

32

32

32

32

32

 

 

 

873

AtT

33

33

33

33

33

33

28

25

21

19

 

 

 

(600)

ZtT

36

36

36

36

36

36

35

30

24

22

Zirconium alloy

≥ 294

≥ 392

573

AtT

20

21

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

22

Zr - 2.5 % Nb

(30)

(40)

(300)

ZtT

75

72.5

70

68.5

67

66

65

64

63

62

 

 

598

AtT

23

22

21

20.5

22

22

22

22

22

22

 

 

 

(325)

ZtT

70

67.5

65

65

65

65

65

64

63

62

 

 

 

623

AtT

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

24

 

 

 

(350)

ZtT

77

75

73

70

67

65

62

61

60

60

03Kh16N9M2

≥ 200

(20)

≥ 520

(53)

723

(450)

AtT

-

-

-

38.5

33.5

30.5

27.5

25.5

24.0

23.0

 

 

773

(500)

AtT

41.0

37.0

33.0

30.5

27.5

26.0

24.5

23.0

22.0

21.5

 

 

 

823

(550)

AtT

34.0

29.5

28.5

26.5

25.0

24.0

22.5

22.0

22.0

21.5

 

 

 

873

(600)

AtT

29.5

28.0

26.0

25.0

24.0

23.5

23.0

23.5

24.5

25.0

 

 

 

923

(650)

AtT

27.0

26.0

25.0

24.5

24.5

25.0

26.0

28.0

30.5

33.5

10Kh2M*

≥ 245

≥ 392

723

AtT

17.0

16.5

16.5

15.0

13.0

15.0

16.0

17.0

20.0

20.0

 

(25)

(40)

(450)

ZtT

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

55.0

 

 

 

773

AtT

18.0

17.0

16.0

15.5

15.0

15.0

15.0

15.5

16.0

16.0

 

 

 

(500)

ZtT

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

 

 

 

783

AtT

18.0

17.0

16.0

15.5

15.0

15.0

15.0

15.5

16.0

16.0

 

 

 

(510)

ZtT

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

08Kh18N9

≥ 196

≥ 490

773

AtT

28

25

21

16

15

14

12

11

9

8

 

(20)

(50)

(500)

ZtT

44

38

33

29

25

22

19

17

14

13

 

 

 

823

AtT

29

24

20

17

14

12

10

10

10

10

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

46

40

34

30

26

23

16

16

16

16

 

 

 

873

AtT

22

18

17

22

27

24

15

10

7

5

 

 

 

(600)

ZtT

33

31

34

42

32

23

16

13

17

9

09Г2С

≥ 245

≥ 432

673

AtT

29

32

34

36

37

38

37

36

31

32

 

(25)

(44)

(400)

ZtT

44

46

48

52

52

52

51

49

46

44

 

 

 

723

AtT

54

51

48

46

43

40

37

34

30

28

 

 

 

(450)

ZtT

67

64

60

57

54

50

46

42

38

36

 

 

 

773

AtT

53

52

51

50

50

49

49

49

49

49

 

 

 

(500)

ZtT

62

62

59

56

53

50

47

43

39

37

16GNMA

≥ 323

≥ 490

723

AtT

26

23

21

18

15

12

10

7

5

4

 

(33)

(50)

(450)

ZtT

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

12KhM

≥ 235

≥ 441

773

AtT

34

34

34

34

24

18

16

18

26

26

 

(24)

(45)

(500)

ZtT

70

70

59

42

33

28

30

35

3.7

44

 

 

 

823

AtT

26

22

20

20

21

23

27

33

40

44

 

 

 

(550)

ZtT

59

46

34

30

29

31

36

40

46

50

* The minimum values of ductility characteristics are given.


 

Table P6.4. Mean values of conditional limits of long-term ductility of weld materials

Steel grade

Temperature, K (°C)

Ductility, %

Time, h

10

102

103

104

105

2 · 105

Electrode for manual arc welding

803

AtT

20

18

13

8

8

8

(530)

ZtT

45

35

30

14

14

14

48A-1

873

AtT

20

20

20

10

10

10

48A-2

(600)

ZtT

50

45

25

16

16

16

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Fig. P6.1. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 15KhM at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 235 MPa (24 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.2. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 12KhM at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 235 MPa (24 kgf/mm2); R20m = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.3. Curve of long-term strength of steels grade 10Kh2M at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 245 MPa (25 kgf/mm2); R20m = 392 MPa (40 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.4. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 12Kh2M1:

1 - T = 773 K (500 °C); R20p0.2 = 343 MPa (35 kgf/mm2); R20m = 539 MPa (55 kgf/mm2); 2 - T = 773 K (500 °C); R20p0.2 = 255 MPa (26 kgf/mm2); R20m = 451 MPa (46 kgf/mm2)

when determining the permissible stresses when selecting the main sizes of components of structures in accordance with Section 3.2 hereof;

in the calculations of components of structures for progressive form change, Section 5.10 hereof;

Fig. P6.5. Curves of long-term strength of steel grade 10Kh2M1FB at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); R20m = 343 MPa (35 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.6. Curves of long-term strength of steel grade 12Kh1MF at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 274 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); R20m = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.7. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 15Kh1M1F at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 314 MPa (32 kgf/mm2); R20m = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.8. Curves of long-term strength of steel of grade 12Kh18N9 at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); R20m = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]

in calculations for long-term static and long-term cyclic strength, Section 5.7, 5.9 hereof.

3. EXTRAPOLATION METHOD FOR LONG-TERM STRENGTH

3.1. The method is designed to obtain the limits of long-term strength for a given level of probability of destruction P of structural materials for operating lives of up to 105 ÷ 2 · 105 h according to the data of experiments on a long-term rupture of limited (about 104 h) duration. Implementation of the method is based on determining, at a temperature T1, of the rupture stress RTmt over time tT1k under nT1 experiments conducted at a temperature T1, and nT2 experiments conducted at a temperature T2.

Fig. P6.9. Curves of long-term strength of steels grade 10Kh18N10T, 12Kh18N12T at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 216 MPa (22 kgf/mm2); R20m = 529 MPa (54 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.10. Curves of long-term strength of steel grade 08Kh16N11M3 at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); R20m = 510 MPa (52 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.11. Curves of long-term strength of alloy grade KhN35VT at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 392 MPa (40 kgf/mm2); R20m = 736 MPa (75 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.12. Curve of long-term strength of alloy grade 1Kh16N36MBTYUR at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 392 MPa (40 kgf/mm2); R20m = 785 MPa (80 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.13. Curves of long-term strength of steels grades 08Kh18N10T, 10Kh17N13M2T at different temperatures [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); R20m = 510 MPa (52 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.14. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 12Kh18N12M3TL at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 216 MPa (22 kgf/mm2); R20m = 491 MPa (510 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.15. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 20KhML at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 245 MPa (25 kgf/mm2); R20m = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2)]

Fig. P6.16. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 20KhMFL at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 294 MPa (30 kgf/mm2); R20m = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]

When processing the experimental data (determining the curves of long-term strength at temperatures T1 and T2), experiments with a duration of more than 200 hours are used.

Fig. P6.17. Curve of long-term strength of steel grade 15Kh1M1FL at T = 773 K (500 °C) [R20p0.2 = 314 MPa (32 kgf/mm2); R20m = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]

3.2. Dependence of the rupture stress  on time  at temperature Tj (j = 1, 2) is described by the equation

 (P6.1)

where  are constant coefficients.

3.3. To clarify the essence of the method and adopted symbols, Fig. P6.30 gives the way of its graphic implementation.

Results of long-term strength tests at temperatures T1 and T2 in Fig. P6.30 are shown as points in the standard coordinate system lgσ - lgt.

3.4. According to the experimental points, mean lines of long-term strength at temperatures T1 and T2 are plotted which in accordance with (P6.1) are generally shown as curvilinear segments. Curve 1 (Fig. P6.30) corresponds to the test temperature T1, curve 2 – T2.

3.5. For the maximum test time  at a temperature T1, curve 1 determines the stress  and curve 2 determines time  corresponding to this stress.

3.6. Extrapolated long-term strength curve at a temperature T1 and stresses, lower that , is obtained by transferring the curve at T2 to the right over a distance . Provided that

 (P6.2)

3.7. In accordance with (P6.2), the limit of long-term strength at a temperature T1 and given time  is determined by curve 2 at an equivalent time teq. Provided that

3.8. All calculations according to this extrapolation method are carried out in the following sequence: determination of the coefficients of equation (P6.1) using standard procedures of the least squares method; calculation of the extrapolation coefficient γl-t.s by the formula (P6.2), of the time  from equation

 (P6.3)

determination of the extrapolated long-term strength limit at a temperature T1 and given operation life  by the formula

 (P6.4)

Fig. P6.18. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 09G2S at different temperature [R20p0.2 = 245 MPa (25 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 432 MPa (44 kgf/mm2): σ0.010.5 = 0.67]


 

3.9. Values of the extrapolated long-term strength limit  at a temperature T1 for a given probability of fracture P are calculated by the formula

 (P6.5)

where ZP is a quantile of PP level of standard normal distribution determined according to Table P6.5.

Table P6.5. Value of coefficient ZP at different values of the fracture probability P

P

0.010

0.025

0.050

0.100

0.5

ZP

-2.33

-1.96

-1.64

-1.28

0.00

Fig. P6.19. Isochronous creep curves for steels grades 15KhM and 12KhM [R20p0.2 = 245 MPa (25 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2); σ0.010.5 = 0.80]:

a – at T = 773 K (500 °C); b – at T = 823 K (550 °C)

Sample standard deviation Sσ is calculated by the formula

 (P6.6)

where

(P6.7)

It is recommended that the minimum (normative) value of the long-term strength limit be determined for the probability of fracture P = 0.01.


 

4. EXTRAPOLATION METHOD FOR CONDITIONAL LIMITS OF CREEP

4.1. Prediction of creep curves can be made on the basis of extrapolation of creep limits using the procedures used in the method of extrapolation of long-term strength according to Section 3.

4.2. Equation to approximate conditional creep limit curves at temperature Tj (j = 1, 2) has the form of

 (P6.8)

where  are coefficients.

Conditional creep limits are determined by replacing the long-term strength limit by the conditional creep limit in equations (P6.1) - (P6.7), the time to failure by the time to achieve a given deformation Az, γl-t.s - γs, and the coefficient γs is determined by the maximum time to reach a given deformation of Az using procedures similar to those described for the method of long-term strength in Section 3.

4.3. To predict creep limits, creep tests for each metal batch are carried out at temperatures T1 and T2 = T1 + 50 K (°C) (see Section 2.8).

According to the creep test results, deformation curves (primary creep curves) are plotted in e-t coordinates in accordance with GOST 3248-81. To obtain the centerline of the steady-state creep, it is recommended to process the creep curves using the least squares method, assuming y = e as a random value and x = tz as an independent value.

Using creep curve, tz corresponding to the specified residual elongation is found.

4.4. If it is necessary to obtain isochronous creep curves, it is recommended that the stress level for each order in time be set equal to 0.85; 0.7; 0.55 σTmin according to the results of tests for the long-term strength of this batch of metal.

Isochronous creep curves (σ - e) are plotted by the parameter t over duration of 10, 30, 102, 3 · 102, 103, 3 · 103, 104, 3 · 104, 105, 2 · 105 h.

4.5. For each batch of metal tested at temperatures T1 and T2, creep curves are plotted in coordinates lgtz - lgσ, which are used to determine the conditional creep limit by the method of extrapolation described in Section 3.

Fig. P6.20. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 12Kh2M [R20p0.2 = 245 MPa (25 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 392 MPa (40 kgf/mm2); σ0.010.5 = 0.8]:

aT = 723 K (450 °C); b – at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C); d – at T = 838 K (565 °C); e – at T = 873 K (600 °C)

Fig. P6.21. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 15Kh1M1F [R20p0.2 = 314 MPa
(32 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2):

a – at T = 773 K (500 °C); b – at T = 813 K (540 °C); c – at T = 843 K (570 °C)

Fig. P6.22. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 12Kh18N9 [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 723 K (450 °C); b – at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C); d – at T = 873 K (600 °C); e – at T = 923 K (650 °C)

Fig. P6.23. Isochronous creep curves for steels grades 08Kh16N11M3, 08Kh16N9M2, 12Kh18N12T, 12Kh18N10T [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 510 MPa (52 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 723 K (450 °C); b – at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C); d – at T = 873 K (600 °C); e – at T = 923 K (650 °C)

Fig. P6.24. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 12Kh1MF: [R20p0.2 = 274 MPa (28 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 441 MPa (45 kgf/mm2); σ0.010.5 = 0.73]:

a – at T = 773 K (500 °C); b – at T = 823 K (550 °C)


 

5. EXTRAPOLATION METHOD FOR CONDITIONAL LIMITS OF STRESS RUPTURE DUCTILITY

5.1. To obtain the stress rupture ductility characteristics, samples are tested for long-term strength at temperatures T1 (see Section 2.8) and T2 provided that T2T1 ≈ 50 K (°C).

Measurements of the relative residual elongation and contraction are carried out according to GOST 10145-81. The test results are processed in coordinates

5.2. The proposed extrapolation method is designed to determine, at a temperature T1, the stress rupture ductility characteristics  for a given operation life  based on  experiments at temperature T1 and  experiments at temperature T2.

5.3. Dependence of residual elongation on time is described by the equations

 (P6.9)

 (P6.10)

where , , b and c are constant coefficients; extrapolation coefficient γl-t.s is determined by the formula (P6.2). Similar equations are accepted for residual contraction.

5.4. To clarify the idea of the method, Fig. P6.31 gives the way of its graphic implementation. This Fig., in coordinates , shows test results at temperatures T1 and T2 as dots. When extrapolating stress rupture ductility curves, experimental points at temperature T2 are transferred to the right at a distance lgγl-t.s and equidistant parabolas 1 and 2 are drawn through the obtained and experimental points at temperature T1. Dotted part of line 1 is the result of extrapolation.

5.5. Coefficients of equations (P6.9) and (P6.10) are determined by the least square method.

5.6. For a given operation life tz and temperature T1, conditional limit of residual elongation  with probability of fracture P is determined by the formula

 (P6.11)

Values ZP for different levels of P are given in Table P6.5.

Fig. P6.25. Isochronous curves for steel grade 05Kh12N2M [R20p0.2 = 372 MPa (38 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 539 MPa (55 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 723 K (450 °C); b at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C)

Standard deviation SA is determined from the equation

SA = (x)1/2 = (α + βη)1/2, (P6.12)

where α and β are constant coefficients determined by the least square method on the strength of all the evidence:

cj = 1 at j = 1; cj = γl-t.s at j = 2.

Fig. P6.26. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 16GNMA [R20p0.2 = 323 MPa (33 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 493 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 673 K (400 °C); b – at T = 723 K (450 °C)


 

APPENDIX 7

(recommended)

CALCULATION FOR LONG-TERM CYCLIC STRENGTH

1. The method of calculation for long-term cyclic strength for isothermal and non-isothermal loading is applicable in the temperature range from Tt (see Section 3.2 hereof) to 773 K (500 °C) for parts made of alloy steels, from 873 K (600 °C) for parts made of corrosion-resistant austenitic steels and iron-nickel alloys, and to 623 K (350 °C) for parts made of zirconium alloys with 1 and 2.5% of niobium with the number of cycles of up to 107.

2. The provisions set forth in Section 5.3 and items 5.6.2, 5.6.3, 5.6.8, 5.6.16 - 5.6.21, 5.6.23 hereof shall be applied when calculating the long-term cyclic strength.

Fig. P6.27. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 08Kh18N9 [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 723 K (450 °C); b – at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C); d – at T = 873 K (600 °C)

3. The definition of permissible amplitude of conditional elastic stresses or permissible number of cycles shall be carried out according to the formulas in item 5.6.6 hereof. Provided that, it shall be assumed

RcT = RTmt(1 – ZTt)-1; ecT = eTmt; RT-1 = RT-1t; m = 0.5; me = 0.132lg{2.5[1 – ZtT]-1},

where RTmt is a limit of long-term strength at maximum load cycle temperature over time t, equal to the part of the working life of the considered part, worked at a temperature above Tt (see Section 3.2 hereof); RT-1 is an endurance limit at maximum temperature of cycle and 107 load cycles over time t, assumed equal to 0.4 RTmt;  is a stress rupture ductility characteristic determined by a uniform contraction of the cross-section ZTmt when long-term static tension; value of eTmt is assumed minimum in the range of operating temperatures and duration of load of up to t.

If it is experimentally justified that RT-1t > 0.4RTmt, then the exponent me is calculated by the formula me = 0.132lgRTmt/[RT-1t(1 – ZtT)]. The value of RTmt is assumed according to Table P6.1. The value of ZTmt is allowed to be determined by the formula ZTmt = ATt/(100 + ATt), where ATt is a relative elongation of the sample during long-term static fracture in the range of operating temperatures and duration of load of up to t; at ATt ≤ 30 %, it is allowed to apply the formula eTmt = 5 · 10-3ATt. The value of ATt and ZTt is assumed according to Table P6.3. It is allowed to determine me and Rc by the formulas

me = 0.132lgRTmt/[RT-1t(1 – ZmtT)]; Rc = RTmt/(1 – ZTmt).

Fig. P6.28. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 08Kh18N12T [R20p0.2 = 196 MPa (20 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 490 MPa (50 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 723 K (450 °C); b – at T = 773 K (500 °C); c – at T = 823 K (550 °C); d – at T = 873 K (600 °C)

4. In the temperature range of 623 - 673 K (350 - 400 °C) for alloyed steels, 723 - 773 K (450 - 500 °C) for corrosion-resistant austenitic steels and 523 - 573 K (250 - 300 ° C) for zirconium alloys, eTmt values for intermediate temperatures are determined by linear interpolation between the values of eTc and eTmt at the lowest and highest temperatures of the ranges, respectively. For the minimum temperatures of these ranges, the value of eTmt is equal to eTc, which is determined according to item 5.6.6 hereof.

5. The design fatigue curves for alloyed steels with a symmetric cycle are shown in Fig. P7.1. The modulus of elasticity is assumed as 184, 182, 180, 176, 172 GPa at 623, 648, 673, 723 and 773 K (350, 375, 400, 450, 500 °C), respectively. Mechanical properties when using curves shall be as follows:

up to 623 K (350 °C) R20p0.2/Rm20 ≤ 0.7; RTm ≥ 450 MPa; ZT ≥ 32 %;

for t ≤ 2 · 105 h:

up to 673 K (400 °C) RTmt ≥ 195 MPa, AtT ≥ 16 %;

up to 723 K (450 °C) RTmt ≥ 180 MPa, ATt ≥ 15 %;

up to 773 K (500 °C) RTmt ≥ 95 MPa, ATt ≥ 16 %;

The design fatigue curves for austenitic steels with a symmetric cycle are shown in Fig. P7.2. The modulus of elasticity is assumed to be 155, 152, 146, 147, 145 GPa at 723, 748, 773, 823, 873 K (450, 475, 500, 550, 600 °C), respectively.

Mechanical properties when using curves shall be as follows:

up to 723 K (450 °C) R20p0.2/Rm20 ≤ 0.7, RTm ≥ 350 MPa, ZT ≥ 45 %;

for t ≤ 2 · 105 h:

up to 773 K (500 °C) RTmt ≥ 166 MPa, ATt ≥ 10 %;

up to 823 K (550 °C) RTmt ≥ 117 MPa, ATt ≥ 16 %;

up to 873 K (600 °C) RTmt ≥ 107 MPa, ATt ≥ 10 %.

The design fatigue curves for iron-nickel age-hardening alloy KhN35VT with a symmetric cycle are shown in Fig. P7.3. The modulus of elasticity is assumed to be 163, 162, 161, 158, 156 GPa at 723, 748, 773, 823, 873 K (450, 475, 500, 550, 600 °C), respectively.

Fig. P6.29. Isochronous creep curves for steel grade 03Kh16N9M2 [R20p0.2 = 200 MPa (21 kgf/mm2); Rm20 = 520 MPa (53 kgf/mm2)]:

a – at T = 773 K (500 °C); b – at T = 823 K (550° C); c – at T = 873 K (600 °C); d – at
T = 923 K (650о C)

Fig. P6.30. Graph of long-term strength:

1 – tests at T1; 2 – tests at T2

Fig. P6.31. Graph of residual elongation limits:

1 – tests at T1 (□); 2 – tests at T2 , after recalculation

Mechanical properties when using curves shall be as follows:

up to 723 K (450 °C) R20p0.2/Rm20 ≤ 0.7; RTm ≥ 620 MPa; ZT ≥ 24 %;

at t ≤ 2 · 105 h;

up to 773 K (500 °C) RTmt ≥ 240 MPa, ATt ≥ 3 %;

up to 823 K (550 °C) RTmt ≥ 210 MPa, ATt ≥ 3 %;

up to 873 K (600 °C) RTmt ≥ 115 MPa, ATt ≥ 4 %.

Fig. P7.1. Design fatigue curves for alloyed steels when duration of load of 2 · 105 h

МПа

MPa

число циклов

Number of cycles

Fig. P7.2. Design fatigue curves for corrosion-resistant austenitic steels
when duration of load of 2 · 105 h

Design fatigue curves for zirconium alloy with 2.5% of niobium with a symmetric cycle are shown in Fig. P7.4. The modulus of elasticity is assumed to be 75, 72, 69 GPa at temperatures of 523, 573, 623 K (250, 300, 350 °C), respectively.

Mechanical properties when using curves shall be as follows:

up to 523 K (250 °C) RTm ≥ 335 MPa; ZT ≥ 57 %;

for t ≤ 2 · 105 h:

up to 573 K (300 °C) RTmt ≥ 205 MPa, ATt ≥ 22 %;

up to 623 K (350 °C) RTm ≥ 140 MPa, ATt ≥ 24 %.

When determining the design curves in Fig. P7.1 - P7.4 it is assumed that nσ = 2 and nN = 10.

Design curves for intermediate temperatures can be obtained by interpolation of stresses.

Fig. P7.3. The design fatigue curves for the iron-nickel age-hardening alloys (KhN35VT) with a duration of load of 2 · 105 h

Fig. P7.4. Design fatigue curves of a zirconium alloy with 2.5% Nb
with a duration of load of 2 · 105 h

6. When calculating components of structures made of homogeneous materials or their zones loaded only with temperature stresses from radial temperature differences (excluding zones of edge effect and changes in mean temperature); for example, heat, screens, separation shells, etc., the fracture of which does not result in the medium leaving the supporting components that hold it, as well as mixing sodium with an aqueous medium, safety factors when calculating these components or their zones for long-term cyclic strength in according to items 3 - 5 of this Appendix and formulas of item 5.6.6 hereof are assumed equal to nσ = 1.5 and nN = 5.

7. If when calculation according to items 2 - 5 of this Appendix the conditions of strength or applicability of curves are not satisfied, then the specification of the permissible number of cycles or permissible amplitudes of local stresses obtained from the calculated fatigue curves or formulas can be carried out according to the formulas of item 5.6.6 hereof and items 3, 4 of this Appendix on the basis of an analysis of the process of change of temperatures and stresses in the zone under consideration in accordance with the following items.

8. If the loading during operation is performed at different temperatures, then the RTmt and eTmt values can be determined with due regard to the non-stationarity of the thermal mode. The value of RTmt = (RTmt)pr is assumed according to the curve of long-term strength at maximum temperature (Tσ)0 of cycle for duration of load (tσ)prt0:

where (τσ)j is a total loading time at temperature (Tσ)j; (tσ)j is time to fracture along the curve of long-term static strength at temperature (Tσj) at stress (RTmt) causing fracture at temperature (Tσ)0 over time (tσ)0.

In a similar way, the value of eTmt is determined. To obtain (te)pr, a change curve is used eTmt at temperature (Te)0 leading to the greatest loss of ductility during long-term static load. The value of eTmt = (eTmt)pr is assumed according to the curve of its change depending on the time to long-term static fracture at a temperature (Te)0 for duration of load (te)prt0 (in general case (tσ)pr ≠ (te)pr:

where (τe)j is a general loading time at temperature (Te)j; (te)j is time to reach, according to the change curve eTmt at temperature (Te)j, values of (eTmt)0, corresponding to the temperature (Te)0 and time (te)0.

If the values of eTmt reach the minimum at some time before fracture t', then at t > t' the value of eTmt is assumed to be the minimum.

The values of (RTmt)pr and (eTmt)pr are used to calculate [N0] and [σaF] by the formulas in item 5.6.6 hereof and items 3, 4 of this Appendix.

Fig. P7.5 and P7.6 give examples of the definition (RTmt)pr and (eTmt)pr. Shows the case of two operating temperatures leading to temperature (Tσ)0 when determining (tσ)pr and temperature, leading to the greatest loss of ductility when determining (te)pr.

9. If when calculation according to items 2 - 8 of this Appendix, the strength condition is not satisfied, then in order to clarify the result obtained, the design time for the cycle in question is assumed to be the greatest of (tσ)pr and (te)pr.

Fig. P7.5. The scheme of accounting the non-stationarity of thermal mode in determining the reduced limit of long-term strength

Fig. P7.6. The scheme of accounting the non-stationarity of thermal mode in determining the reduced value of stress rupture ductility

The longest time specified, for example (te)pr, is divided into time intervals for which the expected operational number of cycles of this type is known, and for moments of time corresponding to the end of intervals, is selected according to the curve of long-term strength at temperature (Tσ)0 and curve of changes eTvt at temperature (Te)0 of values of RTmt and eTmt (Fig. P7.7).

According to the formula of item 5.6.6 hereof and items 3, 4 of this Appendix the calculation of the permissible number of cycles [N0] of this type is carried out characterized by stress amplitude (σaF) and asymmetry r using RTmt and eTmt values corresponding to the accepted division of duration of load into intervals.

The total fatigue damage, with due regard to damages from other types of cycles, shall satisfy the condition of item 5.6.19 hereof.

10. If when calculation according to items 8, 9 of this Appendix, the value of eTmt does not change over time and is determined only by temperature, then the loading time t shall be divided into separate intervals corresponding to different temperatures of the cycle under consideration; within these intervals, for which the expected operational number of cycles is known, the calculation of the permissible number of cycles [N0] of this type, characterized by stress amplitude (σaF) and asymmetry coefficient r, is carried out according to the formulas of item 5.6.6 hereof and items 3, 4 of this Appendix, using the values of RTmt and eTmt, corresponding to the duration of intervals and temperature values within these intervals.

The total fatigue damage, with due regard to damages from other types of cycles, shall satisfy the condition of item 5.6.19 hereof.

11. In the case when deformations and stresses are obtained from the calculation with due regard to creep, the values of RTmt and eTmt can be determined by the actual level of long-term static fractures. For this purpose, long-term static fractures Dt, accumulated during operational loading, are calculated. Operational loading includes all types of cycles with the number of repetitions equal to the expected for the service life of the part, and reflects the actual mean duration of loading for each type of cycle and the corresponding temperatures in the part zone in question.

Fig. P7.7. Scheme of accounting the dependence of the limit of long-term strength and long-term ductility over time

Long-term static fracture

where t is time to fracture under long-term static loading by the actual reduced local stress at the corresponding temperature in the zone of part being considered.

This equally takes into account the fractures from tension and compression stresses if for these values of temperatures and stresses the absence of fractures from compression stresses or their smaller value compared to tension was not experimentally shown.

The values of RTmt and eTmt when assessing long-term cyclic strength according to item 5.6.6 hereof and items 3, 4 of this Appendix are assumed according to the curve of long-term strength at the maximum temperature of the cycle and according to curve of change eTmt depending on the time at the temperature of the loading cycle, leading to the greatest reduction in ductility, for duration of load t* = Dtt. Long-term static fracture shall satisfy the condition Dt ≤ 1. At Dt = 1 time t* is t. Under non-stationary load (presence of several types of cycles), the strength condition shall be satisfied in accordance with item 5.6.19 hereof.

Clarification of the calculation under this item can be carried out in the same manner as indicated in item 1.9 of this Appendix.

12. When using steels with a content of non-metallic inclusions above the 3rd grade determined according to GOST 1778-70, the permissible number of cycles of this type shall be determined from the design fatigue curves of items 3 - 5 of this Appendix with stress amplitude.

aF) = (σaF) + KFv∆α∆TET,

where (σaF) is a design amplitude of the reduced elastic stresses from mechanical and thermal loads;

where Kv is a coefficient of influence of non-metallic inclusions assumed from Table P7.1; ∆α is an absolute value of the difference between the coefficients of thermal expansion of steel and non-metallic inclusions according to Table P7.1; ∆T is a cycle temperature range determined by the formula

T = TmaxTmin,

where Tmax and Tmin are maximum and minimum temperatures of cycle of stresses.

 


Table P7.1. Values of Kv and ∆α

Material

Level of pollution, points

Kv

∆α, 10-6 1/°C

Sheet

Rod, pipe blank

Forging

350 °С

400 °С

450 °С

500 °С

550 °С

600 °С

350 °С

400 °С

450 °С

500 °С

550 °С

600 °С

350 °С

400 °С

450 °С

500 °С

550 °С

600 °С

Alloy steels and welded joints

3.0

0

0

0

0

0

-

0

0

0

0

0

-

0

0

0

0

0

-

7

3.5

0

0.04

0.07

0.11

0.14

-

0

0.025

0.05

0.08

0.10

-

0

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

-

4.0

0

0.04

0.08

0.12

0.16

-

0

0.03

0.06

0.09

0.12

-

0

0.02

0.045

0.065

0.09

-

4.5

0

0.045

0.09

0.14

0.18

-

0

0.035

0.07

0.11

0.14

-

0

0.025

0.05

0.08

0.10

-

5.0

0

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

-

0

0.04

0.08

0.12

0.16

-

0

0.03

0.06

0.09

0.12

-

Austenitic steel and welded joints

3.0

-

-

0

0

0

0

-

-

0

0

0

0

-

-

0

0

0

0

10

3.5

-

-

0

0.07

0.14

0.20

-

-

0

0.05

0.11

0.16

-

-

0

0.04

0.08

0.12

4.0

-

-

0

0.08

0.16

0.24

-

-

0

0.06

0.12

0.18

-

-

0

0.045

0.09

0.14

4.5

-

-

0

0.09

0.18

0.28

-

-

0

0.07

0.14

0.22

-

-

0

0.05

0.11

0.16

5.0

-

-

0

0.10

0.20

0.30

-

-

0

0.08

0.16

0.24

-

-

0

0.06

0.12

0.18

Iron-nickel age-hardening alloys and welded joints

3.0

-

-

0

0

0

0

-

-

0

0

0

0

-

-

0

0

0

0

8

3.5

-

-

0

0.07

0.14

0.20

-

-

0

0.05

0.11

0.16

-

-

0

0.04

0.08

0.12

4.0

-

-

0

0.08

0.16

0.24

-

-

0

0.06

0.12

0.18

-

-

0

0.045

0.09

0.14

4.5

-

-

0

0.09

0.18

0.28

-

-

0

0.07

0.14

0.22

-

-

0

0.05

0.11

0.16

5.0

-

-

0

0.10

0.20

0.30

-

-

0

0.08

0.16

0.24

-

-

0

0.06

0.12

0.18

 


13. In the absence of data on the content of non-metallic inclusions, the calculation of the permissible number of cycles shall be carried out according to item 12 assuming the value of coefficient Kv for the 5th grade.

14. When calculating the long-term cyclic strength of welded joints, the rated stress amplitude is determined as

aF)s = (σaF)vs,

where φs is a coefficient of reducing the long-term cyclic strength of the welded joint, assumed from Table P7.2 depending on the maximum temperature of the cycle.

15. When calculating the cyclic strength of components of structures operating in contact with a reactor-grade corrosion-active medium, the permissible number of cycles is determined according to the design fatigue curve of items 3 - 5 of this Appendix and the formulas of items 5.6.6 and 5.6.7 hereof (at moderately elevated temperatures that do not cause creep) for the stress amplitude determined by the formula

or

where (σaF)v is an amplitude of the conditional elastic stress, determined according to items 12, 13 of this Appendix and Section 5.3 hereof;  and  are coefficients of corrosion reduction of the cyclic strength of the base metal and welded joint, determined in accordance with the requirements of item 9.6 of Appendix 2 hereof.


 

Table P7.2. Values of coefficients φs

Base metal

Welding technique

Welding material

Types of heat treatment after welding

Temperature, °С

350

400

450

500

550

600

Austenitic steels

Manual

48A-1

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.50

Austenitization

-

-

1.0

0.85

0.70

0.55

48A-2-VI

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.55

Austenitization

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.55

0.45

EA400/10u

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.50

Austenitization

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.55

Argonarc

Sv-04Kh17N10M2

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.9

0.80

0.70

0.60

Austenitization

-

-

1.0

0.90

0.75

0.65

Sv-02Kh17N10M2-VI

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.9

0.80

0.70

0.65

Austenitization

-

-

0.9

0.80

0.65

0.55

Sv-04Kh19N11M3

Without heat treatment

-

-

1.0

0.85

0.70

0.55

Austenitization

-

-

1.0

0.85

0.70

0.60

EP-198

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.5

0.45

0.40

0.40

Austenitization

-

-

0.5

0.50

0.45

0.45

Automatic

Sv-04Kh17N10M2

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.55

0.45

Austenitization

-

-

1.0

 

 

 

Sv-02Kh17N10M2-VI

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.50

Austenitization

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.55

0.45

Sv-04Kh19N11M3

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.50

Austenitization

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.55

Electroslag

Sv-04Kh17N10M2

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.7

0.70

0.55

0.45

Austenitization

-

-

1.0

0.85

0.70

0.55

Sv-04Kh19N11M3

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.55

0.45

Austenitization

-

-

0.9

0.80

0.65

0.55

Iron-nickel age-hardening alloys

Argonarc

Sv-Kh15N35

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.7

0.65

0.55

0.50

Austenitization

-

-

0.8

0.70

0.60

0.55

EP-198

Without heat treatment

-

-

0.5

0.45

0.40

0.40

Austenitization

-

-

0.5

0.50

0.45

0.45

Steel 12Kh2M

Manual

48N-10

High tempering

1.0

0.80

0.7

0.60

0.55

0.50

48A-1,

Without heat treatment

1.0

0.85

0.7

-

-

-

EA-395/9

High tempering

1.0

0.80

0.6

-

-

-

48A-1, KTI-7

Without heat treatment

-

-

-

0.60

0.55

0.50

High tempering

-

-

-

0.50

0.40

0.30

Automatic submerged

Sv-04Kh2MA

High tempering

0.7

0.65

0.6

0.60

0.55

0.55

16. The effect of contact with reactor-grade sodium or argon is not taken into account when calculating long-term cyclic strength. It is allowed to increase the permissible number of cycles for zones of parts operating in contact with sodium or argon, whose composition satisfies the requirements of operation guideline for the entire operating life. The permissible number of cycles is assumed as the minimum of two values:

number of cycles [N0] determined according to items 1 - 14 of this Appendix and item 5.6.6 hereof for stress amplitude (σaF)v multiplied by a factor χNa.

[N0]Na = χNa[N0],

number of cycles according to the design fatigue curve of items 3-5 of the this Appendix for the amplitude of the reduced conditional elastic stress (σaF)v divided by the coefficient φNa.

Values of coefficients χNa and φNa are given in Table P7.3.

17. When calculating the long-term cyclic strength of components of structures operating under neutron exposure, the permissible number of cycles of this type is assumed as the minimum of two values:

number of cycles [N0]F = [N0]/χF, where [N0] is a number of cycles for the stress amplitude according to items 3 - 16 of this Appendix or items 5.6.6, 5.6.7 hereof (during calculations for conditions of moderately elevated temperatures that do not cause creep);

the number of cycles according to the design fatigue curve or to the corresponding equations for the stress amplitude determined according to items 3 - 16 of this Appendix or items 5.6.6, 5.6.7 hereof and divided by the coefficient φF.

Values of coefficients χF and φF are given in Table P7.4.

18. When determining the permissible number of cycles based on the design fatigue curves or formulas of item 5.6.6 hereof for parts with surface diffusion chrome-nitride coating, the stress amplitude (σaF)p is calculated by the formula

where (σaF)v is an amplitude of conditional elastic stresses determined according to item 2.17 of this Appendix; φp is a coefficient assumed to be 0.75 for austenitic steels and iron-nickel age-hardening alloys.

Table P7.3. Values of coefficients χNa and φNa

Material

Temperature, °С

Coefficient

Load duration, h

10

102

103

104

105

2 · 105

Alloyed steels

20 - 360

χNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

φNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

400

χNa

1

1

1.4

1.7

2.0

2.1

φNa

1

1

-

-

-

-

450

χNa

1

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.2

φNa

1

-

1.05

1.05

1.05

1.05

500

χNa

1

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

5.4

φNa

1

-

1.05

1.10

1.10

1.10

550

χNa

1

2.5

4.0

5.5

7.0

7.5

φNa

1

-

1.10

1.15

1.15

1.15

Austenitic steels

20 - 450

χNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

φNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

500

χNa

1

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.2

φNa

1

-

1.05

1.05

1.05

1.05

550

χNa

1

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

5.4

φNa

1

-

1.05

1.10

1.10

1.10

600

χNa

1

2.5

4.0

5.5

7.0

7.5

φNa

1

-

1.10

1.15

1.15

1.15

20 - 450

χNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

φNa

1

1

1

1

1

1

500

χNa

1

1

1.1

1.3

1.5

1.6

φNa

1

1

-

-

-

-

Iron-nickel age-hardening alloys

550

χNa

1

1.1

1.4

1.7

2.0

2.1

φNa

1

1

-

-

-

-

600

χNa

1

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.2

φNa

1

-

1.05

1.05

1.05

1.05

Note. For intermediate temperatures, the values of coefficients χNa and φNa are obtained by linear interpolation.


 

APPENDIX 8

(recommended)

DESIGN AND EXPERIMENTAL METHODS FOR ASSESSMENT OF VIBRATION STRENGTH OF STANDARD COMPONENTS OF STRUCTURES

1. GENERAL

1.1. This Appendix to the Regulations contains recommended methods for the calculation and experimental assessment of parameters of vibration and vibration strength of equipment and pipelines of nuclear power plants.

1.2. This Appendix contains the methods for calculating assessment of natural oscillation frequencies of standard components and the experimental methods for determining the vibration stress of assemblies on models and full-size components of structures.

1.3. To assess the natural oscillation frequencies of equipment components, this Appendix presents a number of design diagrams relating to the most typical assemblies, such as pipelines (bar systems), plates and shallow shells.

1.4. To assess the level of vibrations and vibration stresses in the absence of calculation procedures and information about the parameters of the existing dynamic loads, experimental research methods are proposed that are carried out in all modes provided by the commissioning work program, including the initial stage of operation of the installations in steady-state modes.

Table P7.4. Values of coefficients χF and φF

Type of material

Temperature, K (°C)

Coefficient

FN, m-2 (E ≥ 0.1 MeV)

1022

1023

1024

1025

1026

2 · 1026

4 · 1026

6 · 1026

8 · 1026

1027

Alloyed steels

293 – 623

(20 - 350)

χF

1.0

2.2

5.0

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Zirconium alloys

293 – 623

(20 - 350)

φF

1.0

1.4

1.9

2.6

3.6

-

-

-

-

-

Austenitic steels

748 – 873

(475 - 600)

χF

1.0

0.90

0.85

0.80

0.75

0.7

0.67

0.65

0.63

0.6

293 – 873

(20 - 600)

φF

1.0

1.6

2.6

4.2

6.5

10

17

30

-

-

Iron-nickel age-hardening alloys

748 – 873

(475 - 600)

χF

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.97

0.95

0.9

0.8

0.60

0.4

293 – 873

(20 - 600)

φF

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.2

1.4

2.0

3.6

-

-

Note. For intermediate neutron transfer values, the coefficients χF and φF are obtained by linear interpolation.

1.5. As the main condition for the vibration strength of components of structures, the frequency detuning of the natural oscillation from frequencies of deterministic excitation is recommended.

Based on the experimental data on the vibration-stressed state of the components of structures, it is proposed to calculate their durability.

1.6. The following is assumed as a deterministic excitation frequencies:

the main frequency of the pump shaft speed

ω = 2pn/60,

where n is a shaft speed, min-1;

the frequency of electromagnetic forces caused by the presence of slots in the stator and rotor of drive motors of pumps,

where Zrot is a number of rotor slots;

the frequency of hydrodynamic forces determined by the number of blades Z of the pump impeller,

the frequency of hydrodynamic forces associated with the breakdown of vortices during the transverse flow of components of structures by the coolant,

where St is a dimensionless Strouhal number (for example, for a single rod, it is assumed to be 0.2, for Reynolds numbers 300 ÷ 5 · 105); v is a flow rate; d is a characteristic size of a streamlined component in the cross-section.

1.7. Excitation associated with the pulsations of pressures and flow rates of coolant, inter alia arising from the longitudinal and oblique flow around components of structures, is generally considered as a loading process with a broadband spectrum having a random character.

In this case, the vibration strength is assessed by calculating the durability of the components according to the values of amplitudes of alternating stresses obtained experimentally on models or full-size structures.

1.8. This Appendix does not address issues related to abrasion and wear of components caused by vibrations.

1.9. This Appendix describes the processes whose parameters remain constant during a given structure life.

1.10. For complex cases of calculation of the natural oscillation frequencies of spatial and branched bar systems, approximate procedures and work programs based on energy and other methods can be used.

1.11. When drawing up diagrams (models) for calculating the natural oscillation frequencies, structural assemblies of reactors and steam generators and pipelines are presented in the form of simple components, such as bar systems, plates and shallow shells.

1.12. Pipeline systems, tubes, solid cylinders, supporting beams of arbitrary cross-section are considered in the calculations as beams or bar systems with specified boundary conditions. Heat shields are considered as shallow shells. Plates, base plates are considered as plates.

1.13. Shut-off and control valves installed on pipelines and other structural components are considered in the calculations as lumped masses.

1.14. Calculation of natural oscillations of the components is carried with due regard to the added mass of the coolant, but without taking into account its movement, provided that the flow rate is v ≤ 0.3vkr, where  is a critical coolant flow rate at which a loss of stability of a rectilinear hinge-supported component of a pipeline with a span length l occurs; m is a coolant mass per unit length; EJ is a bending stiffness of the rod.

For example, when the external flow around a single component, the attached mass is assumed to be equal to the mass of the displaced fluid.

1.15. Calculation of the natural frequencies of bending oscillations is carried out without taking into account the damping of systems.

2. CALCULATION OF NATURAL OSCILLATION FREQUENCY OF BAR SYSTEMS

2.1. The presented calculation diagrams refer only to flat bar systems.

2.2. The natural frequency corresponding to the k-th form of bending oscillations of the bar systems, with due regard to the coolant mass, is determined by the formula

where Ωk = 2pfk; fk is a number of oscillations per 1 s; (αl)k is the k-th root of the frequency equation; l is a rod length between supports; EJ is a bending stiffness; mc, mt is a mass per unit length of the rod and the considered coolant, respectively.

2.3. For the construction of a frequency equation, the general expression of own forms of bending oscillations is used

X(x) = C1S(αx) + C2T(αx) + C3U(αx) + C4V(αx), (P8.2)

where X(x) is a function of coordinate x, having the value from 0 to t; C1, C2, C3, C4 are arbitrary constants defined by boundary conditions; Sx), T(αx), Ux), Vx) - tabulated Krylov functions defined by expressions

 (P8.3)

The following values are assumed as the boundary conditions in the support cross-sections of a rod:

deflection X(0, l);

angle of rotation X'(0, l);

moment EJX"(0, l);

shear force EJX"(0, l), where X'(0, l); X"(0, l); X"'(0, l) - 1-st, 2-nd and 3-rd derived equations (P8.2).

From the obtained system of four equations, with due regard to (P8.3), the determinant is composed of the coefficients at the constant C1, C2, C3 and C4 and equals zero.

Expansion of the determinant gives a frequency equation whose roots are a set of values (αl)k. For estimated calculations, we are limited to finding the first two or three roots (αl) corresponding to the main forms of oscillations. The number of roots of the frequency equation to be taken into account is determined by the width of the spectrum of loads that can cause any noticeable vibration.

2.4. For typical design schemes of bar systems and beams with different conditions of fixing, Tables P8.1 - P8.3 give the values of the roots of the frequency equations corresponding to the main forms of oscillations.

Table P8.1 gives the values of the roots of the frequency equations of single-span beams at different options of fixing. Tables P8.2 and P8.3 contain the values of the roots of the frequency equation for L-shaped sections of rods depending on the bend angle ψ to determine the fundamental natural oscillation frequency in a plane perpendicular to the bend plane.

2.5. In the calculation of bar systems with a step change in the cross-sections with intermediate supports and additional masses, when generation of the frequency equations, the conditions of conjugation of adjacent sections are considered.

Analytical conjugation conditions are written in the form of: displacement equality Х- = Х+;

Table P8.1. Values of αl for rods with different conditions of fixing

Scheme of rod

Oscillation mode number

1

2

3

4

Supported-supported

3.142

6.283

9.425

12.566

Clamped-clamped

4.730

7.853

10.996

14.137

Clamped-supported

3.927

7.069

10.210

13.352

Clamped-free

1.875

4.694

7.855

10.996

Free-free

0

4.730

7.853

10.996

Free-supported

0

3.927

7.069

10.210

The left one can not turn, otherwise it is free, the right one is support

1.571

4.712

7.854

10.996

Left and right can not turn, otherwise they are free

3.142

6.283

9.425

12.566

The left one is clamped, the right one can not turn, otherwise it is free

2.365

5.498

8.639

11.781

The left one is free, the right one can not turn, otherwise it is free

2.365

5.498

8.639

11.781

angles of rotation Х'- = Х'+

moments (EJX")- = (EJX")+;

shear forces with due regard to the reactions of the supports and concentrated mass loads (EJX")- = (EJX")+ ± R.

Table P8.4 shows the graphs of the first roots of frequency equations for standard rods with intermediate supports and concentrated masses.

3. CALCULATION OF NATURAL OSCILLATION FREQUENCY OF ISOTROPIC RECTANGULAR PLATES

3.1. For plates, supported along the contour, the natural oscillation frequency Ω is determined by the formula

Table P8.2. Values of αl of L-shaped rods with clamped ends

Scheme of rod

ψ, deg

l1/l = l1/(l1 + l2)

0

0.10

0.15

0.20

0.25

0.30

0.35

0.40

0.45

0.50

0

4.730

5.030

5.317

5.727

5.786

5.193

4.570

4.118

3.843

3.750

30

4.730

4.987

5.244

5.680

5.486

5.004

4.473

4.091

3.869

3.781

60

4.730

4.896

5.060

5.165

5.074

4.737

4.375

4.100

3.933

3.877

90

4.730

4.810

4.903

4.939

4.847

4.635

4.399

4.209

4.091

4.046

120

4.730

4.756

4.801

4.809

4.758

4.648

4.518

4.422

4.339

4.306

150

4.730

4.733

4.747

4.748

4732

4.702

4.662

4.626

4.600

4.591

180

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

4.730

Table P8.3. Values of αl of L-shaped rods with one-sided clamping (l = l1 + l2)

Scheme of rod

ψ, deg

l1/l2

0

2/8

4/6

5/5

6/4

8/2

0

1.875

2.053

2.623

p

2.623

2.053

1.875

p/3

1.875

1.946

2.226

2.362

2.316

2.005

1.875

p/2

1.875

1.890

2.038

2.102

2.104

1.959

1.875

2p/3

1.875

1.868

1.929

1.962

1.967

1.915

1.875

p

1.875

1.875

1.875

1.875

1.875

1.875

1.875

 

Table P8.4. Values αl of bar systems with intermediate supports and concentrated masses

Scheme of rod

Graph

where m1, m2 = 1, 2, 3, ... is a number of half-waves of the corresponding forms of natural oscillations; а1, а2 are sizes of the sides; D = Eh3/[12(1 - μ2)] is a flexural stiffness; h is a plate thickness; ρ is a material density; μ is a Poisson ratio.

Table P8.5. Values of α for various boundary conditions

Supported-clamped

a2/a1

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

α

6.85

5.92

5.51

5.41

5.50

5.74

Supported-free

a2/a1

0.5

0.8

1.2

2.0

3.0

5.0

α

4.40

2.15

1.14

0.70

0.56

0.51

Clamped-clamped

a2/a1

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

α

9.44

7.69

7.05

7.00

7.29

7.83

Clamped-free

a2/a1

0.8

1.0

1.3

1.6

1.9

2.2

α

2.70

1.70

1.41

1.33

1.36

1.45

3.2. For plates supported on two opposite sides x1 = 0; a1, under different conditions on the sides x2 = 0; a2 natural frequency is determined by the formula

where α is a dimensionless frequency parameter which values for various boundary conditions on the sides x2 = 0; a2 are given Table P8.5.

3.3. For plates, clamped along the contour, the natural oscillation frequency is determined by the formula

where α is a dimensionless frequency parameter which values for various ratios of sides a1/a2, at different half-wave numbers of the corresponding oscillation modes m1 and m2, are given Table P8.6.

4. CALCULATION OF NATURAL OSCILLATION FREQUENCY OF SHALLOW RECTANGULAR CLADDINGs

4.1. For simply supported shallow shells with a positive curvature and constant radii of curvature R1 and R2, the natural oscillation frequencies are determined by the formula

where αnm is a parameter defined by expression

where s is a shell thickness; m, n is a number of half-waves in directions a1, a2 for appropriate oscillation modes; a1, a2 are distances between the shell edges along lines with radii of curvature K1 and K2.

Table P8.6. Values of parameter α for a rectangular plate clamped along the contour

m2

a1/a2

m1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

1

35.999

73.405

131.902

210.526

309.038

428

1.5

27.012

65.5

126

206

303

422

2

24.58

64.1

124

204

302

421

2

1

73.405

108.237

165.023

242.66

340.59

458.27

1.5

41.715

79.81

138.64

218

316.11

436

2

31.833

71.08

130.35

210

308.12

427

3

1

131.902

165.023

220.06

296.35

393.36

509.9

1.5

66.533

103

161.234

241

339

457

2

44.779

83.2

142.38

221

320.12

439

4

1

210.526

242.66

296.35

371.38

467.29

593.8

1.5

100.81

136.096

193.24

271.17

369.34

488

2

63.34

100.80

159.49

238.35

337.08

456

5

1

309.038

340.59

393.36

467.29

562.18

676

1.5

144.21

178

234.65

312

409

529

2

87.26

124.2

181.79

261

358

478

6

1

428

458.27

509.9

583.83

676

792.5

1.5

195

230.04

285.4

361.90

456

576.6

2

117

151.91

209.6

287.54

382

504.3

For a cylindrical shell, it shall be set R1 = ∞; R2 = R; for spherical shell R1 = R2 = R.

5. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS FOR VIBRATION RESEARCH

5.1. PURPOSE OF EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCHES

5.1.1. Experimental researches of vibration parameters (vibration deformations and vibration stresses; displacements, velocities, accelerations and frequency spectra) of components of structures are carried out in cases when at the stage of preliminary calculations there is no information about the characteristics of the actual loads and their spectra.

5.1.2. Experimental researches of vibrations are carried out with the aim of:

determining the level of vibrations of equipment for which their maximum permissible values are specified by technical documentation;

determining the dynamic characteristics of the components of structures;

determining the vibration parameters of structures for the subsequent assessment of their vibration strength;

accumulation of data necessary to develop and improve methods for calculating and designing structures with due regard to the effects of vibration loads.

5.2. RESEARCH METHODS

5.2.1. To determine the parameters of vibration and vibration tension of structures, methods of vibrometry and dynamic strain measurement are used.

5.2.2. The research method shall be selected with due regard to the objectives and conditions of the research.

5.3. OBJECTS OF EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCHES

5.3.1. Experimental determination of peak, mean, or mean square values of vibration parameters can be carried out on full-size structures or on their models made in accordance with the requirements of similarity conditions in hydrodynamics and dynamic properties of structures.

5.3.2. Experimental researches on models and full-size structures in solving problems of items 5.1.1. and 5.1.2 of this Appendix can be carried out at all stages of the design and development of structures.

5.3.3. When selecting a research model, one shall be guided by the recommendations of Sections 5.3 and 5.4 of Appendix 3 hereof.

5.4. EXPERIMENT CONDITIONS

5.4.1. The data on the operating modes of the structures, equipment characteristics, and coolant parameters shall be used as the initial information when holding an experiment.

5.4.2. Based on the initial information on the test object (see item 5.4.1 of this Appendix), a preliminary analysis of the vibration strength of the structure is carried out in order to determine areas of increased tension and cross-sections with maximum vibration displacements.

5.4.3. As checkpoints of measurements in accordance with item 5.4.2 of this Appendix, the following is selected:

connection zones of various structural components;

zones of pipeline elbows;

(bedding) attaching points of components of structures;

cross-sections with possible maximum deflections in case of oscillations in lower forms.

5.5. DYNAMIC STRAIN MEASUREMENT

5.5.1. In researches of vibration stress of components of structures by the method of dynamic strain measurement, one shall be guided by the recommendations of items 5.5.1 and 5.5.2 of Appendix 3 hereof.

5.5.2. Universal recording multichannel light-beam oscillographes and multichannel technical magnetographs operating in a wide frequency range are used to record fast processes.

5.6. VIBROMETRY

5.6.1. As the primary transducers of mechanical vibrations, devices can be used based on such transformation principles as ohmic, capacitive, inductive, induction, optical, piezoelectric, etc.

For practical use transducers and secondary measuring equipment are used, having a lower cut-off frequency starting with fractions or units of hertz.

5.6.2. To record the vibration processes, devices specified in item 5.5.2 of this Appendix are used. Multichannel technical magnetographs can be used as recording devices necessary for the accumulation and storage of information, and which make it possible to repeatedly reproduce the required implementations during analysis of processes.

5.6.3. Spectrum analyzers are used for frequency analysis with recording the levels of vibration processes on the corresponding recorders.

5.6.4. Terminology and definitions of basic concepts in the field of vibration measuring devices shall comply with GOST 16819-71.

5.6.5. The selection of vibration measuring devices for experimental researches shall meet the requirements of GOST 25865-83.

5.6.6. Methods and means of calibration of vibration measuring devices with piezoelectric measuring vibration transducers operating in the frequency range of 1-12000 Hz shall meet the requirements of GOST 8.246-77.

5.6.7. Verification of vibration measuring devices shall be carried out at least once a year.

5.7. PROCESSING OF THE RESULTS

5.7.1. When interpreting the oscillographic records and spectrograms, the actual values of the parameters of vibrations and the main frequencies of the energy spectrum of vibrations, allowing to establish the nature of the oscillatory process, are determined.

5.7.2. Processing of records of vibration processes of a random nature is carried out using the methods of spectral and correlation analysis.

6. RECOMMENDED METHODS FOR ASSESSMENT OF VIBRATION STRENGTH OF COMPONENTS OF STRUCTURES

6.1. One of the criteria for ensuring vibration strength is the condition for detuning the natural oscillation frequencies of components of structures from discrete frequencies of deterministic excitation determined in item 1.6 of this Appendix.

The condition for the detuning of natural frequencies for the first three forms of oscillations of the components of structures in each plane is written as

Ωi/ω ≥ 1.3 or Ωi/ω ≤ 0.7,

where Ωi is a lower natural oscillation frequency (i = 1, 2, 3); ω is an excitation frequency.

For higher oscillation modes in the presence of high-frequency exciters of vibrations, the detuning condition is as follows:

Ωi/ω ≥ 1.1 or Ωi/ω ≤ 0.9 (i = 4, 5, ...).

If it is impossible to fulfill the requirements of these conditions, it is necessary to show that the vibration levels of the components of structures are within acceptable limits.

6.2. To eliminate possible collisions of the single-type components of structures combined into groups (packages), a condition that satisfies the inequality is accepted

A < (td)/2,

where A is a maximum amplitude of vibration displacements of a component; t is a pitch of a component with the largest size d the in cross-section.

For arbitrary components located with a clearance ∆, this condition is assumed as

|A1| + |A2| < ∆,

where A1 and A2 are amplitudes of vibration displacements of the corresponding components.

For oscillatory processes of a random nature, the values of amplitudes A, A1, and A2 are set with due regard to their dispersion with a given probability; for example, for a normal distribution law with a probability of 0.997, the values of amplitudes are assumed to be equal to , where σ is a standard deviation from the mean value

6.3. Design assessment of the durability of components of structures in the case of imposition of vibration stresses on the main loading cycle is carried out according to the procedure described in item 5.6 hereof.

When calculating a2 fracture in the case of a narrowband spectrum, the maximum mean square amplitude of the high-frequency local stresses and the corresponding frequency are used.

With a broadband spectrum, the value of a2 is determined as a sum of fractures for those amplitudes of local stresses and their corresponding frequencies that cause fractures of more than 10% of the maximum fracture at one of the combinations of amplitude-frequency from the entire spectrum. The cycle asymmetry is determined with due regard to the mean stress assumed to be equal to the constant local stress from mechanical and thermal loads with the inclusion of residual tension stresses.

Fracture a*3 is determined with due regard to three maximum amplitudes of high-frequency stresses without concentration <σa>1, <σa>2, <σa>3, and corresponding frequencies f1, f2, f3 for each type of alternating stress cycle in transients. For low-frequency cycle of the i-th type, by the formula (5.44) of item 5.6.20 hereof, the values of χ1i; χ2i, χ3i are determined, and when determining (a*3) calculated by the formula (5.43) hereof the coefficient χi is determined by the formula

Share of fracture a3** is determined by the formula (5.39) hereof with due regard to the maximum amplitude of the high-frequency stress during the passage of resonance. The number of cycles is determined with due regard to the time of operation in a resonance. Asymmetry of the high-frequency loading cycle is determined by the local stress from mechanical and thermal loads during operation with due regard to the residual tension stresses for the middle of the time range corresponding to the resonance.


 

APPENDIX 9

(recommended)

CALCULATION FOR SEISMIC IMPACTS

1. GENERALIZED RESPONSE SPECTRA

The generalized response spectra shown in Fig. P9.1 and P9.2 correspond to the site seismic intensity of magnitude 9, relative damping K = 0.02, and are recommended for equipment and pipelines as part of unified NPPs with VVER-1000. For seismic intensity below magnitude 9, the acceleration values obtained from Fig. P9.1 and P9.2 are multiplied by the recalculation coefficient from Table P9.1.

Table P9.1. Values of recalculation coefficient

Site seismic intensity

8

7

6

5

Recalculation coefficient

0.5

0.25

0.12

0.06

Acceleration values for intermediate marks of equipment or pipelines can be determined by interpolation.

Fig. P9.1. Generalized response spectra of horizontal oscillations at K = 0.02 and site seismic intensity of magnitude 9

Fig. P9.2. Generalized response spectra of vertical oscillations at K = 0.02 and site seismic intensity of magnitude 9

2. UNIFIED METHODS FOR CALCULATING EQUIPMENT AND PIPELINES FOR STRENGTH FROM SEISMIC IMPACTS

2.1. CONVENTIONAL SYMBOLS, INDICES AND DEFINITIONS

NLC is a nonlinear system

LC is a linear system

DAM is a dynamic analysis method

LCM is a response spectrum method

mii is an inertia coefficient of the i-th partial system (diagonal element of matrix [M])

[C] is a stiffness matrix

[M] is a mass (inertia) matrix

{x}, {}, {} are vectors of relative displacement, velocity, and acceleration, respectively

N is a number of degrees of freedom

[B] is a damping matrix

{R} is a vector of reactive forces from "nonlinear connections"

{cos α} is a vector of directional cosines

 is an acceleration of the grounds of computational model (accelerogram)

{F} is a resulting vector of external loads

f is a natural frequency, Hz

a is an acceleration, m/s2

H' are elevations of equipment or pipeline, m

ω is a circular natural oscillation frequency of equipment or pipeline in air, rad/s

 is a circular natural oscillation frequency of equipment or pipeline in liquid, rad/s

C is a stiffness coefficient, N/m

C0 is a shift coefficient

M is a weight of a part of equipment or pipeline

 is an added mass of fluid, kg

 is a reduced mass of a part of equipment or pipeline, with due regard to the added mass of fluid, kg

M1 is a mass per unit length of equipment or pipeline, kg/m

M0 is a mass of fluid displaced by a part of equipment or pipeline immersed in it, kg

g – 9.81 m/s2 – free fall acceleration

G is weight, N

q is force, N

m is a moment of force, N · m

E is a modulus of elasticity, N/m2

μ is a Poisson ratio

x is an added mass coefficient

M' is a function of coordinates of a part of equipment, representing the distribution of its mass, kg

A is a function of coordinates of a part of equipment that determines the shape of the oscillation considered and represents the ratio of the displacements of the points of the part of equipment to the displacements of the reference point, which is assumed to be equal to one

δ is displacements, m

As is a cross-sectional area, m2

l is a lenght of the component of structure, m

d is a diameter, m

t is a pitch of holes, m

s is a thickness, m

J is a moment of inertia of the cross-section, m4

J0 is a moment of inertia of mass rotation, kg · m2

i is an inertia radius, m

z is a number of the components of structures

 is a cylindrical stiffness, N · m

Indices

i – for parameters related to the i-th part of equipment

st – for parameters related to static load (for the own weight)

kr – for critical value when calculating stability

red – for parameters related to the reference point

l – for parameters related to legs

w – for parameters related to bolts

a – outer

DEFINITIONS

Supporting connection (support) is a structure that connects equipment or pipeline with an anchorage point (anchor bolt, mounting leg, supporting flange, shock absorber, etc.).

Non-supporting connection is a structure that connects equipment units together (branch pipe, bellows, pipelines, etc.).

A shock absorber is a mechanism or a hydraulic mechanism that connects equipment to its anchorage point in order to increase the strength of this equipment under seismic loads. The design of the shock absorber shall ensure its low stiffness during temperature displacements of equipment and greater stiffness under seismic loads.

The fluid in which the oscillating body is located is considered infinite if the size of the vessel in the direction of the body oscillation is more than 5 times greater than the maximum size of body in this direction.

 

2.2. CALCULATION METHOD SELECTION

The calculation method is selected in accordance with Table P9.2. Pipelines are allowed to be considered as linear systems.

Input data on seismic impact are accelerograms or response spectra.

Table P9.2. Recommendations for selection of the calculation method and input data of seismic impact

Type of calculation model

Calculation method

Impact input data

LC

DAM or LCM

Accelerograms or response spectra

NLC

DAM

Accelerograms

2.3. PRINCIPLES OF MAKING A MECHANICAL MODEL AND CALCULATION OF ITS PARAMETERS

2.3.1. Principles of making and requirements to the mechanical model of equipment.

To carry out calculations of equipment components for strength from seismic impacts, a mechanical model of equipment consisting of masses linked together and with anchorage points by connections is made. Equipment components with low weight (mount fitting, shock absorber, etc.) are introduced into the model only as a connection with a certain stiffness. If the equipment consists of separate units, rigidly fixed and having non-supporting connections, these links are not considered in further calculations.

The design mechanical model of equipment or pipelines shall reflect the basic dynamic properties of the considered structure, satisfy the volume of the required design verification and the capabilities of computer calculation programs and (or) selected calculation methods.

2.3.2. Calculation of the basic parameters of the mechanical model of equipment.

2.3.2.1. For a part of equipment that can be schematized as a concentrated mass with a connection, the mass and stiffness coefficient are determined on the basis of the drawings. To calculate the stiffness coefficient, the methods of resistance of materials are used.

The circular natural frequency is determined by the formula

2.3.2.2. To determine the mass, stiffness coefficient, and circular natural frequency of parts and assembly units with distributed parameters, the reduction method is used as follows:

1) a certain deflection curve is set, which can occur during oscillations (at first approximation it is a static deflection curve from weight loads);

2) a reference point is selected (the point can be selected arbitrarily, but the following condition shall be met: when oscillations of the structure, the reference point displacement is different from zero);

3) a reduced mass Mred is calculated for the given reference point;

4) a circular natural frequency is determined by the formula

In general, for part of the equipment with distributed parameters

where  is a potential energy of a part of equipment when displacement of a reference point is equal to one. Values of Mred and Cred can also be calculated by the formulas

Reduced stiffness coefficients can be determined by the methods of resistance of materials. And for parts of small length (s/l ≥ 0.3), the effect of shear shall be considered by multiplying the reduced stiffness coefficient by the shear coefficient CQ, determined depending on the shape of a part.

2.3.2.3. If, for a part of equipment with a constant cross-section (constant mass per unit length M1), the static deflection curve from concentrated force F applied in the reference point is selected as the deflection curve, then

where  is a relative static deflection curve from force F;  is a relative coordinate.

In this case, the reduced stiffness coefficient is equal to the force (or moment) causing the displacement of the reference point equal to one in the direction of the action.

2.3.2.4. The reduced mass of the part of equipment in a liquid medium is determined with due regard to the added mass of fluid by the formula

The added mass of fluid is calculated by the formula

2.3.2.5. For parts of equipment that are in infinite fluid, x shall be assumed in accordance with Table P9.3.

2.3.2.6. The coefficient x for cylindrical components that are in limited volumes of water can be determined by Fig. P9.5.

2.3.2.7. The mass per unit length of the rod, with due regard to the added mass, is calculated by the formula

where M2 is an added mass per unit length of fluid determined by the formula M2 = xM01, M01 is a mass of fluid displaced by a rod of unit length.

2.3.2.8. For a vessel or rod completely filled with fluid, as well as for vertical cylindrical vessels with a ratio of the fluid height to the vessel’s radius greater than four, the added mass of fluid is equal to the mass of fluid.

Table P9.3. Value of coefficient x

Form of equipment part

Direction of displacement when oscillations

x

Long cylinder (l ≥ 8d)

Perpendicular to the longitudinal axis

1.0

Short cylinder (l < 8d)

Same

According to Fig. P9.3

Pack of cylindrical rods

"

According to Fig. P9.4

Ball

Any

0.5

Fig. P9.3. Added mass coefficient for single cylindrical rods with oscillations in an infinite volume of fluid

Fig. P9.4. Added mass coefficient for packs of rods:

a is a location of the rods on a triangular grid; b is a location of the rods on a square grid; c is coefficient x

2.3.2.9. The circular natural frequency of the part of equipment immersed in fluid is determined by the formula

Fig. P9.5. Scheme (a) and dependence of the added mass coefficient on b/a for single rods with oscillations in a limited volume of fluid (b). At l/a < 2 in all cases, it shall be assumed x = 1.0

or

2.3.2.10. The free oscillation frequency of the part of equipment, which can be schematized in the form of a rectilinear single-span beam of constant cross-section, is determined by the formula

where x is a coefficient determined in accordance with Table P9.4.

For the same parts of equipment, Table P9.4 gives the values of the reduced stiffnesses and the reduced masses.

2.4. CALCULATION OF STANDARD STRUCTURES, ASSEMBLY UNITS AND ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT

2.4.1. Selection of design models.

2.4.1.1. The design models of the main standard parts of equipment are shown in Fig. P9.6 and P9.7.

2.4.1.2. When calculated in the horizontal direction, the pull-out part of the reactor consisting, for example, of the removable screen connected to the plate in its lower part is considered as a cantilever cylindrical beam, which is loaded with a uniformly distributed screen mass and a concentrated plate mass. The upper contour of the beam is rigidly clamped, and the lower contour is supported by a rigid slab.

Table P9.4. Values of reduced stiffnesses and masses

Design diagram

x

Cred

Mred

22.4

0.4M1l

15.4

0.43M1l

9.86

0.5M1l

3.52

0.25M1l

2.4.1.3. The process channel is considered as a rod of variable cross-section having a rigid restraint in the base plate and intermediate hinge supports in the places where channel passes through spacer perforated plates. The rod is loaded with distributed mass.

2.4.1.4. The drive of the Control and Protection System (CPS) is considered as a cantilever bar system consisting of tubular rods of a step-variable cross-section, which are loaded with distributed natural mass and concentrated mass of drive mechanisms. The bar system has a pliable restraint in the lid due to the flexibility of the CPS drive mounting unit to the lid.

2.4.1.5. Tubes of heat exchangers are considered beams of constant cross-section, clamped in supports (tube plates, diaphragms) and loaded with a uniformly distributed mass.

2.4.1.6. Plates, diaphragms, tube plates, lids, flat screens and other similar structures are considered as solid plates. Depending on the mounting design, the contour of the plate is considered to be clamped or simply supported. In case of the calculation of tube plates or other perforated structures, the above characteristics are introduced into the calculation, which reduce the perforated plate hardness to solid.

Fig. P9.6. Design models for standard units:

a is a pull-out part; b is a CPS drive; c is a process channel

Fig. P9.7. Design models for standard units:

a is a heat exchanger tube; b is a perforated plate

It is assumed that the plate is loaded with a uniformly distributed mass.

2.4.2. Calculation of the basic parameters of the mechanical model for standard parts.

2.4.2.1. When calculating the natural oscillation frequency of package units, the weight of mount fittings is not taken into account due to its smallness compared to the weight of equipment.

The reduced stiffness of the mount fitting is determined by the formula

For the bolt in the direction of its axis

Fig. P9.8. Structure sketch (a) and the design model (b) of the mount fitting with beam type legs

Fig. P9.9. Structure sketch (a) and the design model (b) of the mount fitting with supporting flanges

The reduced stiffness coefficients of the legs (supporting flanges, pressure flanges) are calculated:

for beam type leg (Fig. P9.8) – by the formula

for supporting flange (Fig. P9.9) – by the formula

where a, b are sizes of the supporting flange.

Table P9.5. Value of coefficient α

a/b

1.05

1.1

1.15

1.2

1.25

1.5

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

α

0.0001

0.0004

0.0014

0.003

0.005

0.025

0.088

0.209

0.293

0.35

Numerical values of the coefficients a are given in Table P9.5.

For sectoral legs (Fig. P9.10)

where m is a length of the arc of one leg, measured around a circle by radius a. The value of CQ is determined in the same way as for the supporting flange.

For legs and supporting flanges, supported by stiffeners (Fig. P9.11),

where z is a number of sections; h1, h2 are distances, respectively, from the upper and lower edges of the cross-section; s(x) is a static moment of inertia of the cross-sectional area; b(x) is a width of a section.

For fastening with boots (Fig. P9.12)

where C'red,l is a reduced stiffness coefficient of boots, calculated by the formulas for beam type legs; C"red,l is a reduced stiffness coefficient of supporting flange calculated by the formulas for supporting flanges; z is a number of boots;

C'red,w = Cred,w(aw/bw)2;

aw, bw are sizes of boots (see Fig. P9.12). For pressure flange (Fig. P9.13)

 

where a, b, h are sizes of pressure flange (see Fig. P9.13).

Fig. P9.10. Scheme of the mount fitting with sectoral legs

Fig. P9.11. Scheme of enforcement of legs and supporting flanges by stiffeners

нейтральная ось

neutral axis

2.4.2.2. The reduced stiffness coefficients and the mass of the cylindrical body of equipment with attachment to the foundation according to the schemes shown in Fig. P9.14, a and b are determined in the following order.

When calculating oscillations in the direction of the body axis in accordance with the scheme shown in Fig. P9.14, c,

Cred = (EAs)/l;

Mred = 0.33M1l.

For bodies with fastening in the middle part (Fig. P9.14,b)

l = l1 + l2.

When calculating oscillations in the transverse direction (Fig. P9.14,d)

Mred = 0.26M1l.

For double-seat body (Fig. P9.15) with oscillations in a direction perpendicular to the axis

Mred = 0.5M1l.

Fig. P9.12. Scheme of the mount fitting with boots

башмак

boot

2.4.2.3. The reduced stiffness coefficient and mass for a cantilevered screen are determined in the same way as for the bodies shown in Fig. P9.14. For screens with limit stops (Fig. P9.16) when calculating oscillations in the transverse direction

where

Mred = 0.43M1l.

Fig. P9.13. Structure sketch (a) and the design model (b) of the mount fitting with pressure flanges

Fig. P9.14. Scheme of fastening the body to the foundation in the lower (a) and middle (b) parts and the design model for the longitudinal (c) and transverse (d) oscillations

Design values of Cred and Mred in case of oscillations in the direction of the screen axis are determined in the same way as for bodies in case of oscillations in the longitudinal direction (see Fig. P9.14, c).

2.4.2.4. When calculating the reduced coefficients of stiffness and weight of a lid or perforated plate at h/a > 0.3 (Fig. P9.17), the lid or plate is considered as a concentrated mass. At h/a ≤ 0.3 in case of transverse oscillations, the values of Cred and Mred are found from the following dependencies:

for lids, plugs and other components such as solid round plates

Cred =32.4D/a2;

Mred = 0.3M;

for perforated plates

Cred =32.4Dφb/a2;

Mred = 0.3M,

where φb is an attenuation coefficient when bending.

2.5. LINEAR SPECTRAL CALCULATION METHOD

2.5.1. The linear spectral method is based on the reduction method, which makes it possible to reduce a linear system with N degrees of freedom to N equivalent systems with one degree of freedom, the imposition of oscillations of which gives the total oscillation of the original system.

Fig. P9.15. Structure sketch (a) and the design model (b) of fastening of the double-seat body to the foundation

Fig. P9.16. Scheme of screen with limit stop

2.5.2. To use the reduction method, the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of a system of homogeneous algebraic equations of the following form are determined

where {x}j = {x1j...xij...xNj} is the j-th eigenvector corresponding to eigenvalue λj.

Provided that, the natural frequency of the j-th oscillation mode

2.5.3. When determining seismic loads, the calculation considers S of lower oscillation modes (SN), the natural frequency of which does not exceed the highest frequency for which response spectra are given.

2.5.4. The seismic load acting in the direction of the i-th generalized coordinate and corresponding to the j-th form of natural oscillations of the system is determined by the formula

where  is an acceleration determined by the response spectrum for the frequency ωj;

Fig. P9.17. Structure sketch (a) and the design model (b) of lids and perforated plates

is a constant of the j-th form of oscillations; αi is an angle between the directions of the seismic impact and the i-th generalized coordinate.

2.5.5. The internal forces (stresses) in the connections of the calculation model are determined from the effect of the seismic loads Sij statically applied to the assemblies separately and summed for each mode of oscillations by the formula

where Nkp is a design force in the k-th considered cross-section; Nkj is a force of a certain type in the cross-section k for j-th mode of oscillations.

2.5.6. The relative displacements of the calculation model in the direction of the i-th generalized coordinate of the j-th mode of oscillations are determined by the formula

The design value of the displacement in the direction of the i-th generalized coordinate is found as follows:

This dependence can be used to determine velocities and accelerations if the following condition is met simultaneously

If this condition is not met, then the design value is determined by the formula

where p is a number of natural frequency groups for which the condition is met (ωk – ωk-1)/ωk < 0.1.

2.5.7. The resulting values of internal forces, stresses, as well as displacements, velocities and accelerations in the structure, which was represented by a set of flat rod design models and calculated separately for each of the mutually perpendicular directions, are determined by the formula

where Pkp is the resulting value of the parameter in the k-th cross-section (assembly) considered; Pkn is a value of a parameter of a certain type in the k-th cross-section (assembly) obtained for the n-th direction of displacements.

In this case, the conditions specified in item 2.5.6 shall be taken into account.

This method of summation can also be applied when using other methods of calculation.

2.6. METHOD OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF SEISMIC RESISTANCE

2.6.1. When performing calculations by the method of dynamic analysis, accelerograms of movement of the bases (supports) of the calculation model are set as external seismic impact.

2.6.2. Dynamic analysis of systems with a finite number of degrees of freedom, inter alia non-linear ones with the same regularity of the kinematic excitation of supports, is carried out by the methods of numerical integration of systems of differential equations of the form of

2.6.3. The vector of reactive forces {R} acting in the direction of the generalized coordinates of the system is the sum of the reactions of additional non-linear connections of the system: dampers, shock absorbers, elastic stops with clearances (including connections), components of dry friction, etc.

2.6.4. The resulting vector of external loads acting on the system at any moment of time is determined by the formula

{F} = [C]{x}.

2.6.5. Based on the calculated value of the vector {F}, internal forces and stresses are determined in the design cross-sections of the system.

3. PROCEDURES FOR CALCULATING PIPELINES FOR SEISMIC IMPACTS

3.1. INTRODUCTION

The procedures given in this Section can be used to calculate pipelines of the category II.

The procedures are based on the statistical theory of seismic resistance of structures.

3.2. PROCEDURE OF CALCULATION OF PIPELINES BY RESPONSE SPECTRUM

3.2.1. Additional conventional symbols

x, y, z are pipeline coordinate system indices

s)s2 is a group of reduced membrane and general bending stresses only from seismic impacts (response spectrum of OBE*)

* OBE is an operating basis earthquake.

s)s2,x; (σs)s2,y; (σs)s2,z are stress components (σs)s2

σmax,x(y,z) is a maximum reduced stress in the pipeline from the loads of proper weight applied along the axes x, y and z

f1,x(y,z) is the first natural oscillation frequency about the axis x (y or z)

Kh is a coefficient of change of maximum acceleration (seismic impact) according to the height of structure. For NPP with VVER, the values of this coefficient are given in Table P9.6

A0max,x(y,z) is a coefficient equal to the maximum acceleration value in fractions of g in the OBE response spectrum for the zero elevation in the direction of seismic impact x (y, z)

Ahmax,x(y,z) – the same for the maximum elevation of fixing of the fixed support of pipeline

Ahf1,x(y,z) is a coefficient equal to the value of acceleration in fractions g for the corresponding first natural frequency in the OBE response spectrum, with the direction of seismic impact x (y, z), with due regard to the maximum elevation of fixing of the fixed support of pipeline

Δsj,x(у,z) is a displacement the center of gravity of the i-th section of the pipeline from seismic effects along the axis x (y, zg)

δjx(y,z) – the same from the proper weight loads along the axis x (y, z)

Table P9.6. Coefficient Kh for NPP with VVER

Construction characteristic

Maximum elevation of fixing of pipeline

10 m

20 m

30 m

40 m

Horizontal components

Vertical component

Horizontal components

Vertical component

Horizontal components

Vertical component

Horizontal components

Vertical component

Box (massive reinforced concrete structure)

1.2

1.0

1.5

1.2

1.75

1.6

2.0

2.0

Containment

1.2

1.0

1.6

1.2

2.0

1.6

2.5

2.0

Space framework (frame arrangement of bearing components)

1.4

1.4

1.8

1.8

2.25

2.2

3.0

3.0

Note. The table is applicable for soils having a modulus of elasticity of E ≥ 104 MPa. At Е < 105 MPa, the values of coefficient Kh from this Table shall be multiplied by 1.5.

3.2.2. General

3.2.2.1. The pipelines are calculated for seismic impacts after performing calculations for static and cyclic loads and confirming their strength under these loads.

3.2.2.2. This method of calculation involves the static calculation of stresses (σs)s2 in the pipeline components.

The calculation is carried out using programs and results of strength static calculations of pipelines. At the same time, the calculation when designing mass loads on the coordinate axes x, y, z is added to the usual static calculations.

For programs where it is provided to set the load from the proper weight only in one (vertical) direction, it is necessary to change the directions of the axes of coordinates so that the load of the proper weight can be set in the horizontal direction.

3.2.2.3. The calculation of σmax,x(y,z) is carried out at a temperature of 20 °C, zero values of the "inherent" displacements of the terminal clamped cross-sections, and an internal pressure equal to zero.

3.2.2.4. Calculation: is carried out for the modulus of elasticity of the material corresponding to the design temperature of the pipeline wall.

3.2.2.5. Strength calculations, as well as selection of additional supports necessary to ensure strength under seismic impacts, are carried out separately for each direction of seismic impact;

To assess the strength of the joint action of a three-component seismic impact, stresses from seismic loads are determined as the square root of the sum of squares of stresses from seismic loads obtained for individual directions of seismic impact.

When automated calculations, the total reduced stresses from the considered static and seismic loads are determined by the forces obtained from the combined action of these loads.

3.2.2.6. Seismic impact is given by the OBE response spectra.

3.2.2.7. Recommendations for selection of design models for the pipeline system are as follows:

when considering separately the oscillations of pipelines with respect to any of the three coordinate axes (x, y, z), only those supports which limit the displacements of pipelines along this axis are considered;

the design model of the pipeline system is made up with due regard to all branches and connected equipment; the influence of branches not included in the design model shall be considered in the form of added masses and corresponding connections.

3.2.3. Criterion of seismic strength.

Criterion of seismic strength is determined with due regard to the requirements of Table 5.14 hereof. The values of this criterion are determined by the dependence

Pipeline strength conditions

Bx(y,z) ≥ 1. (P9.1)

3.2.4. The following input data are necessary for the calculations:

1) geometrical and operational parameters of the pipeline system;

2) stiffness properties of the supports;

3) values of stress (σ)2 according to the results of static strength calculations of pipelines for normal operation;

4) OBE response spectra at the zero elevation and at the elevations of fixing of the fixed pipeline supports.

3.2.5. The sequence of the calculation.

The calculation is carried out in the following sequence:

1) (σs)s2 is determined for the directions of OBE seismic impacts coinciding with the direction of action of proper weight loads projected on the coordinate axes of the pipeline system;

2) the strength of the pipeline by the seismic strength criterion is assessed (P9.1);

3) the strength of supporting structures is checked with due regard to the loads from seismic impacts;

4) a positive conclusion about the strength is given provided that the strength requirements of items 3.2.5.2 and 3.2.5.3 are met.

3.2.6. Calculation of (σs)s2.

Calculation of stresses from seismic loads is carried out according to the following dependencies:

1) in the absence of a response spectrum at the elevation if fixing of fixed supports

(σs)s2,x = 1.3A0max,xKhσmas,x (P9.2)

and also for other directions of seismic impact;

2) in the presence of a response spectrum for the elevation if fixing of fixed supports

(σs)s2,x = 1.3Ahmax,xKhσmas,x (P9.3)

and also for other directions of seismic impact. When the seismic strength condition (P9.1) is met, the strength is ensured and further calculations can be omitted;

3) if the strength condition (P9.1) is not met, the calculation is carried out with due regard to the first natural oscillation frequency

(σs)s2,x = 1.3Ahf1,xσmas,x (P9.4)

and also for other directions of seismic impact.

The first natural oscillation frequency for a particular direction of seismic impact is allowed to be determined using displacement values obtained as a result of calculations when a pipeline has a load of proper weight projected on coordinate axes x (y or z):

 (P9.5)

where Gj is a weight of the j-th segment of the pipeline from the span between the corresponding points of the scheme used for static calculations; δjxjy, δjz) are displacements of the center of gravity of the j-th segment when the pipeline has a load of proper weight projected on one of the directions of the axes of coordinates by the formula (for example, along axis x)

 (P9.6)

where δxj,x, δxj,y, δxj,z are projections of the displacements of the j-th cross-section on axis x from the proper weight loads applied along axis x.

For other directions of seismic impact, the frequency is calculated similarly.

For cases when all the branches included in the design model differ significantly in stiffness and inertial characteristics, the frequencies f1,x, f1,y, f1,z are calculated for each branch according to the displacements created by proper weight loads, taking into account the joint operation of all the branches.

For pipelines containing branches, which the type parameter  differs by no more than 2 times from the corresponding parameter of the main pipeline, the seismic strength assessment is carried out according to the first natural frequency (fx, fy, fz).

To calculate the indicated frequencies, other methods can be used, which are in good agreement with the capabilities of the static calculation program.

If the strength conditions are not met, then additional supports or shock absorbers are installed in the direction of those coordinate axes for which the strength conditions are not met. Then, according to the scheme with additional supports and shock absorbers, the static calculation of the pipeline for self-compensation is repeated and the calculations for seismic impacts are repeated according to item 3.2.5 of this Section.

3.2.7. Determination of seismic loads from the pipeline on the equipment and fixed supports.

The equivalence coefficients of seismic loads are determined statically by the formulas

   (P9.7)

For fixed supports and equipment, the seismic load is determined as the product of static loads from the normal operation modes and coefficients Kx, Ky, Kz:

 (P9.8)

where M, Q, and N are moment, transverse and longitudinal force.

It is assumed that seismic loads coincide in sign with static loads from normal operation modes.

3.2.8. Determination of seismic loads for intermediate supports.

The value of the seismic load on the intermediate sliding supports or simple suspensions is determined by the dependence

±Ns = NjKz, (P9.9)

where Nj is a load on this support according to the results of static calculations from the normal operation modes.

To determine additional loads on the spring supports, a coefficient K0s is introduced:

 (P9.10)

For this case, seismic loads are equal to the forces affecting supports from static loads of normal operation modes, multiplied by the coefficient K0s, that is

±Njs = K0sNj. (P9.11)

3.2.9. Appointment of seismic protection arrangements. Procedures for the appointment of seismic protection arrangements are carried out if the seismic strength is not provided and are as follows:

1) the type of additional supports is selected: fixed supports (then the scheme is divided into several independent ones), intermediate sliding supports, simple or spring suspensions, shock absorbers;

2) the installation location of supports or shock absorbers, their preliminary number are determined, and in accordance with item 3.2.3. seismic strength criterion Bx(y,z) are found.

Assuming the entire pipeline length as L, it is considered that, at Bx = 1, the length of the pipeline projection onto the x axis, equal to Lx, satisfies the seismic strength condition.

When Bx < 1, the seismic strength condition is not met, respectively, the length Lx may contain two or more sections, and the number of additional supports or shock absorbers on the length Lx is greater than or equal to one. The length of the section satisfying the seismic strength condition,

Lx = BxLx. (P9.12)

Then the required number of additional supports or shock absorbers n = Lx/lx (the number of supports is rounded upwards to the whole number). This is the minimum number of supports at which the seismic strength condition may be satisfied.

Installation locations of the supports are determined constructively, and the length of the inter-support sections shall not be less than lx;

3) the static calculation of σmas for the coordinate axis, relative to which additional supports or shock absorbers are installed, is carried out;

4) the seismic strength condition is checked in accordance with item 3.2.5.

The final number of shock absorbers is determined after the checking calculation.

It is advisable to unify the power of shock absorbers according to the value of maximum effort.

3.2.10. In cases when it is required to carry out seismic resistance assessment by displacements, for calculating displacements from seismic loads it is allowed to use the formula

δsj,x = 1.3Ahf1,x(y,z)δjx(y,z). (P9.13)

If there are no floor-by-floor response spectra, displacement calculations can be performed using the formulas

δsj,x = 1.3A0f1,x(y,z)Khδjx(y,z). (P9.14)

or

δsj,x = 1.3A0max,x(y,z)Khδjx(y,z). (P9.15)

The total displacements from seismic loads in each j-th cross-section of the pipeline can be calculated from the dependence

 (P9.16)

3.3. PROCEDURE OF CALCULATION OF PIPELINES BY GENERALIZED SEISMIC LOAD

3.3.1. Three separate calculations of the pipeline are carried out for the effect of the weight load (calculations 1, 2, 3). The load is applied in stages in a vertical direction (along the z axis) and in two horizontal directions (along the x and y axes). In each individual calculation, the reduced stresses (σ)x, (σ)y, (σ)z, forces in the supports and components of the displacement of the cross section of the pipeline in the direction of the main axes (x, y, z) are determined. The pressure in the pipeline and the tightening force of the elastic supports are assumed equal to zero. When calculating, the stiffness of all supports and shock absorbers is considered.

3.3.2. The approximate value of the first natural oscillation frequency of the pipeline is determined by the formula

where δmax is a maximum absolute value of the components of displacements of the pipeline along one of the axes under the action of weight load separately for each of the accepted directions.

3.3.3. The resulting value of the spectral acceleration is determined by the formula

where Ax(f1), Ay(f1), Az(f1) are accelerations (in fractions g) determined by the OBE response spectrum at a frequency f1, set for three directions of seismic impact at the highest elevation of pipeline fixing.

3.3.4. Values of the reduced stresses in the cross-sections of the pipeline from the action of seismic and operational loads are determined by the formula

where (σ)x, (σ)y, (σ)z are reduced stresses obtained by calculations 1, 2, 3.

For rectilinear pipeline segments, it is allowed to determine the stress (σs) as follows:

if  then

s)2 = σθ;

if  then

where σθ is a circular general membrane stress in the pipe from the design pressure.

3.3.5. Efforts of pipeline impact on equipment under the joint action of operational and seismic loads are determined by the formula

where Qs is a force vector component (any of the forces along the axes x, y, z, any moment regarding axes x, y, z) with joint action of loads; Q is a value of the same component, determined by the calculation of the pipeline to the effect of operational loads only; Qx, Qy, Qz are values of the same component determined in calculations 1, 2, 3.

3.3.6. The loads Psz (along the z axis) of elastic (spring) suspensions under the joint action of seismic and operational loads are found by the formula

where δzx, δzy, δzz are displacements along the z-axis of the pipeline at the place of installation of the suspension, determined in the calculations 1, 2, 3; P is a suspension load along the z axis under normal operations; K0 is a suspension stiffness coefficient.

3.3.7. Reactions of the sliding supports and the guide supports are calculated similarly to item 3.2.5. For example, the reaction along the z axis is determined by the formula

where Rzx, Rzy, Rzz is a support reactions along the z axis determined in the calculations 1, 2, 3; R is a support reaction along the z axis, determined by the calculation of pipelines for operating loads only.

3.3.8. Reaction of the shock absorber is determined by item 3.3.7, and its response under operating loads is assumed to be zero.

3.3.9. The seismic strength assessment according to the obtained reduced stresses (σs)2 is carried out in accordance with Section 5.11 hereof.


 

APPENDIX 10

(recommended)

SELECTION OF BASIC SIZES OF FLANGES, PRESSURE RINGS, AND FASTENERS

1. CONVENTIONAL SYMBOLS

D is an inner diameter of flange, mm

Dw is a diameter of circumference of pins, mm

Df is an outer diameter of flange and clamp of slip-on flange, mm

Dm is a design diameter of gasket, mm

Dm1, Dm2 are mean diameters of shaped gaskets, mm

Dd is an outer diameter of gasket, mm

D1 is an inner diameter of pressure ring, mm

D2 is an outer diameter of pressure ring, mm

d0 is a hole diameter for pins, mm

d1 is an inner diameter of pin thread, mm

ds is a minimum pin rod diameter, mm

dc is a diameter of the central hole in pin, mm

h1 is a height of the cylindrical part of the disc flange of thickness, s1, mm

h2 is a height of the tapered part of the disc flange, mm

hf is a height of flange and supporting clamp, mm

hf1 is a height of the pressure ring, mm

s1 is a nominal wall thickness of the cylindrical part of the flange, mm

s2 is a nominal wall thickness of the conical adapter at the base, mm

lw is a pin pitch, mm

b0 is a gasket width, mm

b is an effective width of gasket, mm

δ is a gasket thickness, mm

q0 is a specific pressure on the gasket when tightening pins, MPa

p is a design pressure, MPa

ph is a hydrotest pressure, MPa

Fd is a gasket clamping force, N

F2h is a force providing tightness at hydrotest, N

Fp is a tension force in the pins from the design pressure, N

Fph is a tension force in the pins from the hydrotest pressure, N

F0 is a pin tightening force, N

F1 is a force in the cylindrical section of a flange from the action of inner pressure, N

F2 is a force providing tightness at the operating pressure, N

F3 is a force from the pressure of the medium on the inner section of a flange face, N

[σ] is a permissible nominal stress in a flange, MPa

[σ]w is a permissible nominal stress in pins, MPa

M is a maximum bending moment, N · mm

ei are arms of force action, mm

z is a number of pins

2. SELECTION OF SEALING

2.1. To ensure the tightness of the equipment, it is recommended to select the sealing depending on the type and design of the flange connection according to Fig. P10.1 and Table P10.1.

To select the gasket material use the recommendations given in Table P10.2.

2.2. The outer diameter of the gasket is determined by the formula

Dd = D + 2b0 + 2u, (P10.1)

where u is a distance from the inner edge of the flange to the inner diameter of the gasket; depending on the type, material of the gasket and its thickness δ, it is recommended to assume u in accordance with Table P10.3.

2.3. The design diameter of the gasket is determined by the formula

Dm = Ddb0. (P10.2)

Table P10.1 Recommended gasket width values

Type of gasket

Flange diameter D, mm

Gasket width b0, mm

Scope of Application

Flat non-metal

D ≤ 1000

10 - 20

Flat sealing smooth surfaces

1000 < D ≤ 2000

15 - 30

D > 2000

≥ 25

Flat metal

D ≤ 1000

10 - 25

Flat sealing surfaces, smooth or with edges

D > 1000

≥ 15

Flat combined

D ≤ 2000

10 - 20

Flat sealing smooth surfaces

Toothed metal

D > 2000

≥ 15

Flat sealing smooth surfaces

Shaped,
p > 6.4 MPa

D ≤ 400

≥ 5

Shaped gaskets in slots

400 < D ≤ 700

≥ 6

700 < D ≤ 1000

≥ 8

D > 1000

≥ 10

Table P10.2. Recommended sealing calculation parameters

Gasket material

Design pressure, MPa

Design temperature, °C

Solid rubber

10

From -30 to 60

Fluoropolymer

20

From -70 to 250

Paronite

15

From 0 to 400

Aluminum and its alloys

50

From -196 to 250

Copper and its alloys

70

From -196 to 350

Pearlite steel

70

From -30 to 450

Austenitic steel

100

From -253 to 600

Table P10.3. Values of the u distance for different types of gaskets

Type of gasket and material

u of not less than, mm

Combined and toothed

δ

Shaped

Flat soft

Flat metal

δ

 


 

3. DETERMINATION OF FORCES IN PINS

3.1. The force required to compress the gasket is found by the formula

Fd = pDmbq0, (P10.3)

and the minimum force ensuring the tightness of the flange joint at the operating pressure and hydrotest is found by the formulas

F2 = pDmbmpχ; (P10.4)

F2h = pDmbmph, (P10.5)

where m is a gasket coefficient; χ is a coefficient considering the strength of gaskets in the service conditions.

For metal gaskets, χ is assumed equal to one, and for soft and combined gaskets, χ is selected depending on the temperature of the medium in accordance with Table P10.4.

3.2. The minimum specific sealing pressure q0, the gasket coefficient m and the effective width of the gaskets for the selected type of gasket and material are determined in accordance with Table P5.6.

3.3. The tension forces in the pins from the operating pressure and hydrotest pressure are obtained by the formulas

Fp = 0.785Dm2p; (P10.6)

Fph = 0.785D2mph. (P10.7)

3.4. The tension forces of pin tightening shall meet the following conditions:

F0 ≥ max{Fd, F2 + Fp, F2h + Fph}. (P10.8)

3.5. The minimum diameter of the pin rod is obtained by the formula

 (P10.9)

3.6. The outer diameter of pin is selected based on Table P10.5 depending on the minimum diameter of the pin rod [see formula (P10.9)]; this diameter is refined when selecting a thread pitch.

Table P10.4. Value of coefficient χ

Design temperature, °C

20

200

300

χ

1.0

1.5

2.0

Fig. P10.1. Types of dish flanges:

a is a flange with a conical adapter; b are flat flanges; c is a flange with a pressure ring; d is a flange with shaped gaskets

Table P10.5. Parameters for selecting pin threads and flange sizes

Pin thread

М16

М20

M22

М24

M27

М30

М36

M42

M44

M48

M52

M56

M60

M64

M68

d1

13.55

16.93

18.93

20.32

23.32

25.70

31.10

36.15

36.50

41.87

45.87

49.25

53.25

56.64

60.64

d0

18

23

25

27

30

33

40

46

48

52

58

62

66

70

75

e

28

35

39

42

47

53

64

75

75

87

93

98

104

110

116

a

9

10

10

11

12

12

14

15

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

2a1

6

6

8

10

10

10

14

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

4. DETERMINATION OF SIZES OF FLANGE CONNECTIONS

4.1. CYLINDRICAL SECTION OF A FLANGE

4.1.1. The wall thickness s1 of the flange cylindrical section with a conical adapter, as well as the wall thickness of the cylindrical part of the flat flange, shall be not less than the actual wall thickness of the product to be welded. Provided that, in all cases s1 shall be at least 5 mm.

4.1.2. Height h1 of the cylindrical section of the flange with a conical adapter shall be assumed to be equal to s1, but at least 10 mm.

Table P10.6. Value of coefficient α

p, MPa

0.1 - 0.25

0.6

1.0

1.6

2.5

4.0

6.4

10.0

20.0

α

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.8

2.0

2.2

2.4

2.8

4.2. CONICAL ADAPTER

4.2.1. Thickness of the conical adapter at the flange base is initially determined by the formula

s2 = αs1, (P10.10)

where α is a proportionality coefficient determined by the Table P10.6 using linear interpolation.

4.2.2. The slope of the conical adapter shall be within 2 ≤ i ≤ 4, where

 (P10.11)

4.3. FLANGE FACE DIMENSIONS

4.3.1. The diameter of the pin circumference and the outer diameter of the flange are determined by the following formulas:

1) for flanges with a conical adapter

Dw ≥ max{D + 2s2 + 2a + e; Dd + d0 + 10}; (P10.12)

Df = Dw + e + 2a1; (P10.13)

2) for flat flange

Dw ≥ max{D + 2s1 + 2a + e; Dd + d0 + 10}; (P10.14)

Df is determined by the formula (P10.13);

3) for flat welded flange

Dw ≥ max{D + 4s1 + 2a + e; Dd + d0 + 10}; (P10.15)

Df is obtained by the formula (P10.13);

4) for pressure ring, Dm is determined by the formula (P10.14):

D1 = D + 2s1 + 2a; (P10.16)

D2 = Dw + e + 2a1; (P10.17)

5) for supporting clamp

Df = Dwd0 – (2 ÷ 8), (P10.18)

where geometrical dimensions a, a1, e and d0 (see Fig. P10.1) are found according to Table P10.5 depending on the selected outer diameter of the pin.

Fig. P10.2. Design model for dish flange

4.3.2. The pitch of pins is determined by the formula

lw = pDw/z, (P10.19)

where number of pins z is selected from the ratio

z = pDw/[(4 ÷ 5)d0]. (P10.20)

The obtained value of z is recommended to assumed as evenly even.

5. MOMENTS OF DEFLECTION

5.1. Bending moments in the flanges from the forces of compression of the gasket Fd and the forces acting in working condition, F1, F2 and F3 (Fig. P10.2) are determined as follows:

1) from the forces of compression of the gasket Fd are determined by the formula

Md = Fde2, (P10.21)

where

e2 = (DwDm)/2; (P10.22)

2) from the forces acting in working condition are determined by the formula

Mp = F1e1 + F2e2 + F3e3, (P10.23)

where

F1 = 0.785D2p; (P10.24)

F3 = 0.785(Dm2D2)p; (P10.25)

e1 = 0.5(DwDs1); (P10.26)

e3 = 0.5[Dw – (Dm + D)/2]; (P10.27)

F2 and e2 are found by the formulas (P10.4) and (P10.22).

5.2. Bending moments in the pressure ring are determined as follows:

1) from the forces of compression of the gasket Fd are determined by the formula

Md = Fde4, (P10.28)

where

e4 = 0.5[Dw – (D1 + Df)/2]; (P10.29)

2) from the forces acting in working condition are determined by the formula

Mp = (F1 + F2 + F3)e4. (P10.30)

5.3. Bending moments in the supporting clamp are determined as follows:

1) from the forces of compression of the gasket Fd are determined by the formula

Md = Fde5, (P10.31)

where

e5 = 0.5(DfDm); (P10.32)

2) from the forces acting in working condition are determined by the formula

Mp = F1e6 + F2e5 + F3e7, (P10.33)

where

e6 = 0.5(DfDs1); (P10.34)

e7 = 0.5[Df – (D + Dm)/2]; (P10.35)

F1, F2, F3 and e5 are found by the formulas (P10.4), (P10.24), (P10.25) and (P10.32).

5.4. Bending moments Mh in the flanges and pressure ring and supporting clamp from the pressure of the hydraulic test ph are determined by the formulas in items 5.1 - 5.3 of this Appendix. Provided that, in the formulas (P10.24) and (P10.25), instead of design pressure p, pressure of the hydraulic test ph is substituted, and force from the design pressure F2 determined by the formula (P10.4) is replaced by force from the hydraulic test F2h determined by the formula (P10.5).

5.5. Maximum (design) bending moment from the forces acting on the flanges and pressure ring and supporting clamp is determined by the formula

M = max{Md; Mp; Mh}. (P10.36)

6. FLANGE FACE HEIGHT

6.1. The height of the flat flange face and pressure ring and supporting clamp is determined by the formula

 (P10.37)

where values of X and Y are calculated as follows:

1) for flat flange

X = (s12s02/4)(D + s1); (P10.38)

Y = DfD -2d0, (P10.39)

where

 (P10.40)

2) for supporting clamp

Y = DfD, (P10.41)

and X is determined by the formula (P10.38).

6.2. Height of the pressure ring hf1 is found by the formula (P10.37), where

X = 0; (P10.42)

Y = D2D1 – 2d0. (P10.43)

6.3. If hfs1 or a radical expression in the formula (P10.37) is less than zero, then to determine the height of the face of flat flange and supporting clamp by the formula (P10.37), the value of X is assumed equal to zero, and

Y = D + 2s1. (P10.44)

6.4. The height of the face of the flange with a conical adapter.

6.4.1. The height of the face of the flange with a conical adapter is initially determined by the formula

 (P10.45)

but not less than 0.8s2.

The accepted value of hf is specified in the process of calculating the stress state of the flange in the cross-sections A-A, B-B, C-C (see Fig. P10.2).

6.4.2. The moments of resistance of the flange in the design cross-sections are calculated as follows:

1) in the cross-section A-A

 (P10.46)

2) in the cross-section B-B

 (P10.47)

if yhf, and

 (P10.48)

if y > hf.

In the formulas (P10.47) and (P10.48), the ordinate of the center of gravity of the cross-section of the flange is calculated by the formula

 (P10.49)

3) in the cross-section C-C

 if hfs2. (P10.50)

If hf > s2, then the flange strength in the cross-section C-C is assured and WC is not determined.

6.4.3. Strength conditions in the design cross-sections A-A, B-B, C-C are checked by the formula

σ = max{M/WA; M/WB; M/WC} ≤ [σ]. (P10.51)

If rated stresses σ exceed permissible ones [σ], then the values of hf, s2 and h2 shall be increased. Provided that, it is necessary to increase the conicity i first.

The accepted values of hf and s2 are recommended to be increased in  times. With the accepted flange dimensions, the calculations shall be repeated using the formulas in items 4-6 of this Appendix until the values of the calculated stresses are equal (with an error of no more than 5%) or less than the permissible stresses.

6.5. When the control of tightening the pins with the use of zero-torque force is not provided, then on the basis of the maximum permissible force in the pins the height of the face of flanges is determined by the formula

 (P10.52)

If AB, then the height of the flange face is equal to the value of hf, obtained by the formulas in items 6.1, 6.2 and 6.4 of this Appendix. Provided that, the auxiliary values of A for flanges with a conical adapter and for flat flanges and B for flanges with a conical adapter are determined by the formulas

 (P10.53)

where

 (P10.54)

 (P10.55)

where

 (P10.56)

and

 (P10.57)

For flat flanges, the auxiliary value of B is found by the formula

 (P10.58)

To check the height of the supporting clamp, use the formulas (P10.52), (P10.53) and (P10.58), where it is necessary to replace e1 with e6 and e2 with e5.

6.6. The final flange height is selected by the highest value hf or hfw, obtained by the formulas in items 6.1, 6.2, 6.4 and 6.5 of this Appendix.

If hfw is assumed as the final flange height, then the calculation for the flange with a conical adapter shall be repeated using the formulas in items 4, 5 and 6 of this Appendix, proportionally increasing the values of s2 and h2.


 

APPENDIX 11

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DETERMINING THE PROCESS INCREASE TO THE ELBOW WALL THICKNESS

1. The recommendations of this Appendix can be used if there are no instructions in the technical specifications for the manufacture of elbows for determining the process increase.

2. In this Appendix, the designations for the sizes of the elbows, shown in Fig. 4.5 hereof, are used. Formulas for determining wall thickness s, sR1, sR2, sR3 are given in item 4.2.2.3 hereof.

3. For bends made on tube bending machinery by winding onto a sector, the process increase c12 is accepted only to the wall thickness sR1:

for pipes of heating surfaces

for other pipes

4. For stamped elbows manufactured in closed dies, or bends made on machines with high-frequency heating and axial preload, the process increase is assumed only to the wall thickness sR1:

0.05sc12 ≤ 0.1s.

5. For elbows, made on horn-shaped cores, it is assumed with 12 = 0.

6. For sectoral elbows, it is assumed c12 = 0.

7. For stamp-welded elbows with two longitudinal welds located on the inner and outer sides of the elbow, the process increase is assumed only to the wall thickness sR2:

0.05sc12 ≤ 0.1s.

8. For stamp-welded elbows with the location of the weld in the neutral zone of the elbow, the process increase is assumed only to the wall thickness sR3:

0.05sc12 ≤ 0.1s.

9. If the determination of the c12 increase is carried out before the final selection of the nominal wall thickness of the elbow, then it is recommended that the nominal wall thickness of the elbow to be assumed as, for example, the nominal wall thickness of the straight pipe, followed by refinement of the final selected nominal wall thickness of the elbow.


 

APPENDIX 12

(recommended)

SIMPLIFIED CALCULATION FOR CYCLIC STRENGTH

1. BASIC PROVISIONS

1.1. The calculation method is applicable to the equipment and pipelines of groups B and C.

1.2. The calculation method is applicable to the equipment and pipelines in accordance with item 1.1, satisfying the conditions of the following items.

1.3. The design temperature of the walls of the equipment and pipelines does not exceed the limits specified in Section 3.2 hereof for relevant materials.

1.4. Equipment and pipelines meet the conditions of static strength and stability in accordance with these Regulations.

1.5. The calculation method does not apply to the case of imposing the high-frequency loading from vibrations and pulsations of operating environment temperatures on the low-frequency operational loading and is limited to cyclic loading with the number of cycles of a given amplitude of not more than 106 during operation.

2. DETERMINATION OF CHANGE OF TEMPERATURES, STRESSES AND NUMBER OF OPERATING CYCLES

2.1. The calculation is carried out for equipment and pipeline zones, where due to stress concentrators (holes, changes in wall thickness, fillets, grooves, threads, etc.), application of concentrated loads, edge effect, compounds of steels with different elastic moduli E1T, E2T, and expansion temperature coefficients α1T, α2T and temperature difference, the increased cyclic local stresses occur.

Fig. P12.1. Graph of stress (σ) change

блок нагружения

loading unit

2.2. At the first stage, a graph of the stress (σ) change is obtained using the dependences (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik for the considered zone of the component of structure, obtained according to item 5.3.4 hereof (Fig. P12.1) for given loads and operating conditions.

2.3. Out of the three dependences (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik, there is found the generalized dependence of successive half cycles of reduced stresses, at the limiting points of which absolutely the highest (lowest) stress values of the three above dependences are reached.

Generalized dependency includes all the moments of time tl (1 ≤ lm), where at least one of the stresses (σ)ij, (σ)jk, (σ)ik reaches the extreme value and has an extremum at each of these moments (σ) = max{|(σ)ij|, |(σ)jk|, |(σ)ik|} with the appropriate sign. In initial (l = 1) and final (l = m) moments, the stress (σ) can take, inter alia, values equal to zero.

2.4. From the generalized dependence obtained according to item 2.3 of this Appendix, a stress cycle with the largest amplitude is distinguished:

(σa)1 = 0.5[(σ)*max - (σ)*min], (P12.1)

where (σ)*max, (σ)*min are algebraically largest and smallest given stresses.

2.5. Other types of cycles with smaller amplitudes of stresses (σa)i are distinguished from the rest of the generalized dependence, guided by the formula (P12.1), and 0.5 (m - 1) of types of cycles are obtained.

2.6. The amplitude of the reduced local conditional elastic stress in the i-th cycle is found by the formula

Fig. P12.2. Coefficients of stress concentration

Fig. P12.3. Example of drawing up blocks of loading and a graph of changes in the reduced stress in the concentration zone (σ)

блок нагружения

loading unit

гидравлическое испытание

Hydrotest

испытание на плотность

Leak-tightness test

разогрев

Heating up

стационарный режим

Steady-state mode

переходные режимы

Transients

остановка

Shutdown

(σaF) = KF,ia)is)-1, (P12.2)

where kF,I is a stress concentration coefficient in the i-th cycle; φs is a coefficient of reduction of the cyclic strength of a welded joint with full weld penetration or a deposit welding.

In the absence of data on values of φs, it can be assumed that φs = 0.6, and in the absence of a weld φs = 1.

2.7. Concentration coefficients KF,i are determined by the formula

 (P12.3)

or according to Fig. P12.2 depending on the relationship (σa)i/RTp0.2, where RTp0.2 is a material yield strength at a rated temperature; Kσ is a theoretical coefficient of stress concentration determined from reference books and assumed to be equal to the greatest value in the direction of circular and meridional stresses in case of axial tension.

For metric threads it is assumed that Kσ = 5. For incomplete-penetration welded austenitic welds KF,i = 6.

Coefficient KF,i to simplify the calculation, can be assumed the same for all types of cycles, regardless of the amplitude value, and equal to its value for the type of cycle with a maximum amplitude.

2.8. In the absence of data according to item 2.3 of this Appendix, the dependence of the reduced stresses can be obtained as follows.

2.8.1. The reduced stresses (σ) in the considered zone are determined for physically feasible loading blocks (Fig. P12.3) with the inclusion of operating modes of loading, for example, for a vessel with a lid on threaded pins:

1) initial condition, tightening of pins, hydraulic test, leak-tightness test, pressure reduction to atmospheric pressure, initial condition;

2) initial condition, tightening of pins, leak-tightness test, heating up, steady-state mode, transients (for normal operation and abnormal operation), steady-state  mode, shutdown, pressure reduction to atmospheric pressure, initial condition.

2.8.2. Amplitude of stress (σa)i of a half cycle in the i-th transient or combination of modes is determined by the formula

 (P12.4)

where p is a design pressure; ∆pi is a pressure change range in the interval between time moments t1 and t2; (∆σme)I is a change in the reduced stress caused by a change in mechanical (compensatory) loads ∆Fmei in the interval between time moments t1 and t2; ∆Ts,I = |∆Ts,t1 - ∆Ts,t2| is a difference of temperature differences across the wall thickness or mean temperatures in two adjacent cross-sections of the component of structure perpendicular to the mean surface in time moments t1 and t2; ∆Tα,i = |∆Tα,t1 - ∆Tα.t2| is a difference of temperatures mean in wall thickness at the junction of dissimilar steels with properties E1T, α1T and E2T, α2T in time moments t1 and t2.

Neighboring cross-sections are those the distance between which is less than , where Rs is a mean value of radii of curvature in the middle of the wall thickness; s is a mean wall thickness in adjacent points of the vessel, branch pipe, flange, or other components.

Temperature differences ∆Ts,i and ∆Tα,i, range (∆σme)i, change ∆p are determine at such moments of time of the i-th mode or combination of modes when the reduced stress (σ) reaches extreme values. This shall consider the signs of stress from pressure, mechanical loads and temperature differences at the specified moments in time, otherwise the absolute values of stresses are summed.

To obtain the largest stress amplitudes, such combination of modes shall be considered, in which changes in pressure, mechanical loads, temperatures cause minimum and maximum stresses in the zone in question, for example, the effect of external overpressure, and then internal heating, and then cooldown; alternating action of mechanical loads. If any load does not change in the considered half-cycle, then the corresponding values of ∆pi, ∆Fme,i, ∆Ts,i, ∆Tα,i in the formula (P12.4) are assumed to be equal to zero. The obtained dependence of the stress change in the block shall not have stress ruptures.

2.8.3. Temperature difference ∆Tmax (°C) in the wall thickness s (m) of material with the coefficients of thermal conductivity λ [W/(m2 · °C)] and thermal diffusivity a (m2/s) with one-sided heating (cooling) by the working medium in the temperature range from T0 to Tk during the time tk (s) can be determined by Fig. P12.4., where θ = s2/atk is a dimensionless rate of temperature change of the medium; ∆θmax = ∆Tmax/(Tk - T0) is a dimensionless temperature difference in the wall Bi = αs/λ is a Biot number; α is a heat transfer coefficient, W/(m2 · °C).

Temperature difference

Tmax = ∆θmax(TkT0). (P12.5)

The time tmax of reaching the maximum temperature difference ∆Tmax in the wall can be determined using Fig. P12.5 by the formula

tmax = ∆Fomaxs2/a + tk, (P12.6)

where ∆Fomax is a difference of the values of the Fourier criteria at moments of time tmax and tk.

Fig. P12.4. Dependencies for determining the maximum temperature difference in the wall

Fig. P12.5. Dependencies for determining the time to reach the maximum temperature difference in the wall

2.8.4. Amplitudes of the reduced local conditional elastic stress (σaF)i are found by the formula (P12.2) using instructions in items 2.4 - 2.7 of this Appendix.

2.8.5. In the absence of data on the coefficients Kσ, amplitudes of stresses (σaF)i in equipment and pipelines can be determined by the formula

Fig. P12.6. Design fatigue curves:

1 – for carbon, alloyed (up to 360 °C) and austenitic (up to 450 °C) steels (RTm ≥ 400 MPa; zT ≥ 45 %; ET ≥ 180 GPa; RTp0.2/RTm < 0.7); 1, 2 – for alloy steels at RTp0.2/RTm ≥ 0.7 (RTm ≥ 400 MPa; zT ≥ 45 %; ET ≥ 195 GPa); 3 – for threaded components of alloyed steel (up to 360 °C) (RTm ≥ 650 MPa; ET ≥ 195 GPa; zT ≥ 40 %)

 (P12.7)

All instructions in the formula (P12.4) are applied to the formula (P12.7). The formula (P12.7) is applicable for concentration zones and full-penetration welds.

2.9. Set the number of cycles Ni corresponding to each value of the amplitude is set during the operation based on data on the repetition of modes of operation and loading.

3. VERIFICATION OF CYCLIC STRENGTH

3.1. Cyclic strength is checked by fatigue curves (Fig. P12.6).

At temperature T, below the maximum value for the corresponding fatigue curve in Fig. P12.6, the stress amplitude [σaF] when determining the number of cycles shall be multiplied by the ratio Е360°C/ET for carbon and alloy steels and Е450°C/ET – for austenitic.

3.2. The strength condition is checked by the formula

 (P12.8)

where Ni is a number of cycles of the i-th type during the operation; [N0]i is a permissible number of cycles of the i-th type (is assumed according to item 3.1); k is a total number of cycle types; [aN] is an accumulated fatigue damage the limit value of which is equal to 0.4 for equipment and pipelines of group B and 1.0 for group C.

Different types of cycles are allowed to be combined and reduced to one design cycle. The number of design cycles is equal to the sum of the numbers of combined cycles. Permissible number of design cycles [N0] corresponds to the maximum amplitude (σaF) from the combined types of cycles.

Types of loading cycles with a stress amplitude lower than the stress amplitude along the fatigue curve in Fig. P12.6 at [N0] = 106 are not considered if their number does not exceed 105.


 

Надписи на рисунках:

 

МПа

MPa

кгс

kgf

м

m

мм

mm

ч

h

м/с2

m/s2

Гц

Hz

Н

N

или

or

где

where

кроме

except

при

at

если

if

при этом

here

а)

a)

б)

b)

в)

c)

г)

d)

д)

e)

е)

f)

ж)

g)

з)

h)

и)

i)

к)

j)

л)

k)